User - Manual Kasemake 9.5 PDF [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

User’s Guide

Kasemake User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1

KASEMAKE

This page is intentionally blank

Release 9.5 Page 2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE KASEMAKE Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDI Style Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tabbed Design Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-4

Micro Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Nudge Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside / Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flute Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Docking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 1-4 1-4 1-5 1-5

Pinning A Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Auto Hiding A Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Expanding / Collapsing Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Rolldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Rollup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 3D Screen Layout - Timeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Floating / Docking a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Customising Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Quick Customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Add or Remove Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Customize.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Predefined Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parametrics Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Build Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diemaking Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Parametrics Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construct Lines Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D View Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Lights Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Folding Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Curvature Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Alignment and Rotation Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

1-13 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-17

Release 9.5 Page C-1

KASEMAKE 3D Drawing Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Animation Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kaseweb Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Diemaking Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip Strip Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Boxes and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combo Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Contro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spin Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculator (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Colours (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-17 1-17 1-17 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-19 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-20 1-21

Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Features of Right Mouse Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Quick Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Moving The On Screen Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Zooming The On Screen Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Features of the Mouse Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 System Instability Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Preserving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Working with Files from External Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3D Driver... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Image Compression Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Display Driver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 New 2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 New 3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 File Open dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 File Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 File Save As dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Next Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Save Selected Elements Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Email Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-2

KASEMAKE Drawing Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Save As Cito... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Send To Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Project Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Project Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Project Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Design Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Revision Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Project Bar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Create New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Tiled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Project Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Project.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Project As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pack Project.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpack Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision Info... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Progress Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Preview Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13

2-14 2-14 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22

Plotter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Plot Circles Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock X and Y Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Top Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth In X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Depth In Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25

Release 9.5 Page C-3

KASEMAKE Crossover Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Optimise Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centred In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flip About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing Plotter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotter…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulate... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-28

Element within drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move to End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-29 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30

Plot Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CF2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CF2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CF2 Message Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-30 2-30 2-31 2-32 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-35

HGL Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36

Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-36

Release 9.5 Page C-4

KASEMAKE DXF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Layer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Linestyle Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elliptical Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPT Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDES Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comment Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAT, DSP, M and N Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDF Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDES3 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Formats List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export selected items only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-mail Single Recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Small Gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-40 2-40 2-41 2-41 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-43 2-43 2-43 2-43 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-45 2-45 2-45 2-45

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Angle Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Length Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Size of Plotted Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of items in window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-46 2-46 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-47

Visible Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Visible Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-5

KASEMAKE Convert to Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Die Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoSave 3D Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Images Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back up drawing files on saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup file prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Preview Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-47 2-47 2-48 2-48 2-48 2-48 2-48 2-49 2-49 2-49 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-51

Extents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Quickzoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Zoom To Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Use Auto Snap with Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Snap Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap Point Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exchangeable Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Autoscroll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lock Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rollup Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode highlight colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construct line colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix And Match Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bitmap Zoom Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Ground Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flute / Grain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Length Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spellcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filename. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import / Export Ground Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

2-53 2-53 2-53 2-53 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-54 2-54 2-54 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-55 2-56 2-56 2-56 2-57 2-57 2-57 2-57 2-58 2-58 2-59 2-60

Release 9.5 Page C-6

KASEMAKE File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import / Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kasemake Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kasemake Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-61 2-61 2-61 2-61 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-62 2-62 2-62

Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Enable Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More Tabs Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-63 2-63 2-63 2-63 2-64

Autohide Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Reload Default Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Recover Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Delete Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Delete Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Clear Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Delete Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Image Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Quick Edit Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Move Horizontal Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Move Vertical Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Copy Horizontal Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Copy Vertical Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Corner Copy... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Move / Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Defining the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Command Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-7

KASEMAKE Scale / Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate To Specific Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step And Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-10 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-12

Linear Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Radial Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Move Points Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Points with Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Points Poly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Nudge Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Properties From... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrueType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bezier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pick Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulation of the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding to the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freehand Move / Copy of the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22

Freehand Move - Horizontal / Vertical Movement Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Resizing the Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Elements Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Elements with a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Text Strings for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Command Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-27

Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Graphics Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Show Elements when Dragging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-8

KASEMAKE Select Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invert Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Entities Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Polygon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-28 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-32

Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Graphics Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Show Elements when Dragging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Select Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Individual Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Multiple Construct Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Delete Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Lines Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Angle Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Angle Super . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Relative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Specifying Direction by Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Specifying a Pre-Defined Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Specifying the Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Box Command Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Polyline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Sketch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Arrow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Arrow Head Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Arrow Head Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Chamfer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Chamfer Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Specified Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Specified Length Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Parallel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-9

KASEMAKE Number Of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Start Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 End Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Multi Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Multi-Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 No. of Additional Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Point Tangent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13

Height of panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Taper Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Angled Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Fixed Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Specify Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Polygon Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Polygon Centre Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Polygon Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Radius Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Polygon Edge Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygon Start / End Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-16 4-16 4-17 4-17

Polygon Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Circle Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Radius Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Radius Circle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Fixed Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marked Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-18 4-18 4-19 4-19

2 Point Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radius Arc Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-19 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-20

Centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fillet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-20 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-22

Fixed Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Trim Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-10

KASEMAKE Fit Fillet between 2 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Anticlockwise Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Interactive Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 2 Entity Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 2 Entity Fillet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 First Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Second Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

3 Entity Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 3 Entity Fillet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 First Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Second Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Third Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Envelope Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Fillet Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Ellipse Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Ellipse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Semi Major Axis . Semi Minor Axis. Angle . . . . . . . . . Drag . . . . . . . . . Start Point . . . . .

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

.... .... .... .... ....

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

.... .... .... .... ....

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

... ... ... ... ...

.... .... .... .... ....

. . . . .

4-26 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-27

Elliptical Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Elliptical Arc Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

3 Point Elliptical Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubic Spline Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-27 4-28 4-28 4-29

Bezier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bezier Curve Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-30 4-31 4-31 4-32 4-32

Starting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Final Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Curve Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32

Paragraph Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Block Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

TrueType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Text Input Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-11

KASEMAKE Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Report Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter Dimension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall Vertical Dimension for Selected Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crease To Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-39 4-39 4-39 4-40 4-40 4-41 4-41 4-42 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-44

Arrow Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Arrow Size % Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Vary Arrow Head to Text Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Gap % Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Use Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Leader Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Show Leader Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Leader Line Gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Auto Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45

Dimension Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-45 4-45 4-45 4-45 4-46

Dimension Text Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Fixed Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-12

KASEMAKE Horizontal Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Blank Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Trailing Zeroes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-46 4-47 4-47 4-47 4-47

Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nett Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wastage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wastage Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-47 4-48 4-48 4-48 4-49 4-49 4-49 4-50 4-50 4-51

Report Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Build Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bisect Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bisect Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bisect Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thicken Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-53 4-53 4-53 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-55 4-56 4-56 4-57 4-57 4-58 4-58 4-58 4-59 4-59 4-59 4-60 4-60

Wastage Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Corrugated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Solid Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Point On Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point On Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-61 4-61 4-61 4-62

Adjust by distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-13

KASEMAKE Adjust To Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Move attached elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-63 4-63 4-64 4-64 4-64 4-64

Angle Of Hatch Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Gap Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

Hatch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Hatch Holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Angle Of Hatch Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Gap Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65

Enlarge Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straighten Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Straighten Arc Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radius Bulge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lead In Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-65 4-66 4-66 4-66 4-67 4-67 4-67 4-68 4-68 4-69 4-69 4-69 4-69

Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Close Unbound Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Ground Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Inflate / Deflate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Inflate / Deflate Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Ground Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Generate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Fillet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Alternative Inflate / Deflate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Offset Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Offset Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Number of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Convert To Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert to Contour Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freehand Construct Lines Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Draw Freehand Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

4-72 4-72 4-73 4-73 4-74 4-75 4-75

Release 9.5 Page C-14

KASEMAKE Construct Line Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Offset Construct Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Offset Construct Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Perpendicular Construct Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Perpendicular Construct Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Bisect Angle Between Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Show / Hide Freehand Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Fold Box… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Folding Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Identification of Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Arc Splitting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Crease Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Number of Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Crease Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Default Artwork Colours... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Colours (blended with artwork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explode Cut&Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gaps in Lines / Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Dangling Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-82 4-83 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-84 4-85 4-86 4-87 4-87

Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Orthogonal Views (Front, Top, Side, Folding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting and Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Movement Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worked Example of Folding Fefco Style 0422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identify Base Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Folding... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude Multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

4-87 4-88 4-88 4-88 4-88 4-88 4-89 4-89 4-90 4-91 4-91 4-92 4-96

Release 9.5 Page C-15

KASEMAKE Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Fill Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 Remove Fill From Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 Freehand Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Lock To End Point Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Lock Drawing Mode in a Command File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Snap Along Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Snap To Grid Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Snap To Arc Centre Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Snap Quad Point Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Snap To Point Intersect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Snap To Projection Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Auto Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Coordinate Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Relative 1 Drawing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Relative 1 In A Command File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Relative 2 Drawing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Relative Endpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Between 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Snap To Construct Line Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Orthogonal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Joined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Auto Snap Properties... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ungroup All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Unclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Unclone All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Set Inside/Outside View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Align To Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Align To Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Running a Parametric Design Non-Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Running a Parametric Design Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Def Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Run Insert... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-16

KASEMAKE Record To Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Defining Variable Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Defining Mathematical Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Condition Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Commands Available With The Variable Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Delete Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Delete Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Insert Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Recalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Run Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Show Associated Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Show Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Show All Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Trigonometry Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Additional Commands for Working With Different Materials. . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 View Defined Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Add New Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Delete Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Edit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Link Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Show Active Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Example of Working with Different Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Set Point1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Resetting the Chosen Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Set Point2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Resetting the Chosen Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Set Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-17

KASEMAKE Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Suffixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Units... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mix And Match Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Carton... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrugated... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pallet... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Panels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the .DSC Style Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Parts to be called . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Mix Match Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MixMatch Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Parametrics - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regenerate Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Dim. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Guide Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Parametric Dims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Quick... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As Quick... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitment Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-21 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-23 7-23 7-23 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-25 7-25 7-27 7-30 7-31 7-32 7-32 7-33 7-33 7-33 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-35 7-35 7-35 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-37 7-38 7-38

X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Fitment Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape Overall X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape Overall Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gutter X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gutter Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aperture X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ApertureY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

7-39 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-40 7-40 7-40 7-40 7-40

Release 9.5 Page C-18

KASEMAKE Selecting a Fitment Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Fitment Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fitment Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-40 7-40 7-41 7-41

Parametric Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Outer Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Outer Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-41 7-42 7-42 7-42 7-42

Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 Outer Parametric Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Apply to Outer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 OK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Cancel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Layout… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Layout Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1

Interlocking Options (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Horizontal Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Vertical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Interlocking Options (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Minimum Knife Distance Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Time Limit Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Panel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Array… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Wizard... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 1 - Sheet Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-6 8-6 8-6 8-6 8-7 8-7

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Step 2 - Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Step 3 - Layout Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Automatic Regular Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regular Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi Interlock Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipart Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-10 8-10 8-11 8-11

Step 4 - Perform Layout (Not Multi Interlock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Step 5 - Choosing A Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-19

KASEMAKE Optimise Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation with the Shift Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation with the Ctrl Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing Manual Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot Optimise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimise and Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Lines… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Zero Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Split All at Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert To Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicate Bevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulate Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End Markers Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show End Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup Display End Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulate Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate -90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate -45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Passes Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit (Tool Passes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display (Tool Passes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mount Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VGroove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Bevel Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut & Crease Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-13 8-13 8-13 8-14 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-16 8-18 8-19 8-19 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-25 8-25 8-25 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-27 8-28 8-28 8-31 8-32 8-32 8-33 8-33 8-35

Cut by Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Cut by Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Even Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

Variable Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Example 1 - Cut by Length Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Example 2 - Cut by Number Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Tickmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

8-38 8-39 8-39 8-40

Release 9.5 Page C-20

KASEMAKE Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zipper Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specify Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zipper Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alterations to Zipper Rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counters Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crease Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer Guide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-40 8-40 8-40 8-41 8-41 8-42 8-42 8-42 8-45 8-45 8-45 8-45 8-46 8-46 8-46 8-46 8-46

Die board/counter locating holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Die board/counter locating holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Counter Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-47 8-47 8-47 8-48

Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Offset . . . . . . . . . . . Radius . . . . . . . . . . . Angle from creases . Angle from cuts. . . .

.... .... .... ....

... ... ... ...

.... .... .... ....

.... .... .... ....

... ... ... ...

.... .... .... ....

... ... ... ...

.... .... .... ....

.... .... .... ....

... ... ... ...

.... .... .... ....

... ... ... ...

.... .... .... ....

. . . .

8-48 8-49 8-49 8-49

Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crease Rule Pointage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Board Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Thickness mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grain Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50

Extended Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-51 8-52 8-52 8-52

Calculate Diameter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

Generate Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 Simulation Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Simulate Matrix Crease... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 Crease Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Counter Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-21

KASEMAKE Horizontal Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate Chamfer Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load CMP File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load VLS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Board Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liner Type for Double Backer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liner Type for Single Facer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flute Media Grammage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liner Type for Centre Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liner Type for Second Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Material Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Current Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proceed... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stora Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Frames... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Include Registration Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registration Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-53 8-53 8-54 8-54 8-54 8-55 8-55 8-55 8-55 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-56 8-57 8-57 8-57 8-57 8-57 8-58 8-58 8-58 8-58 8-59 8-59

Add to first frame only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset from frame divider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Border Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-60 8-60 8-61 8-61 8-61 8-61 8-62 8-64 8-65 8-66 8-66 8-67

Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Delete Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67

Create. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the border template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the Prompt and Mask Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

8-67 8-68 8-68 8-68

Release 9.5 Page C-22

KASEMAKE Saving the Border File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68 Enchanced Create... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Loading the border template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Identifying Prompts and Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying the 3D Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Border File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autofill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-70 8-71 8-71 8-72 8-72 8-72 8-72

Modify Existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Registration Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Existing Registration Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply to Selected Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks not Plotted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Registration Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Registration Mark... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Horizontal / Vertical Reg Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance from bottom left of design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance between registration marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Include Outer Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-72 8-73 8-73 8-74 8-74 8-74 8-75 8-75 8-75 8-75 8-76 8-76 8-77 8-77 8-77 8-78 8-78

Current Registration Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Min Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centre Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Extent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicate Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-78 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-80 8-80 8-80 8-80 8-81 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82

Bottom left corner of sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78 Dimensions of the sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-23

KASEMAKE Remove Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Centred DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Centred DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculator... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fractional Keypad... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Task Lists - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Current Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Task List... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheets Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding A Stock Sheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Stock Sheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Stock Sheet Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting a Stock Sheet once placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hide/Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Sheet... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-83 8-83 8-83 8-84 8-85 8-85 8-86 8-86 8-86 8-87 8-87 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-91 8-91 8-91 8-92 8-93 8-93 8-94 8-94 8-94 8-94 8-94

Folder Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94 Database Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94

Placing the Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95 Identifying Additional Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95 Rotation of Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95

Display Sheet Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95 Print Jobs.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96 Digitiser Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96 Setup... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96 Shortcuts... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Adjust Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Reset Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Menu Setup.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Menu Cell Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Menu Row Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Menu Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Assigning a Command to a Menu Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Stripping Knives Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Manual Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Stripping Knives Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Automatic Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Grip Edge Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-24

KASEMAKE Single Knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Shaped Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-Shaped Knives Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stripper Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-5 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-8

Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Male Raised Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Inside Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Inside Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Male Raised Section 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Male Raised Section 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Male Raised Section Pin Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Female Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-17 9-18 9-19 9-20

Front Edge Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Front Edge Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Front Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Magic Eyes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Air Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stripper Air Holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrot Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stripper Carrot Holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeat Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pins And Struts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Die Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

9-22 9-23 9-24 9-24 9-25 9-25 9-26 9-26 9-26 9-26 9-26 9-27 9-27 9-27 9-28 9-28 9-28 9-28 9-29 9-31 9-31 9-31 9-31 9-31 9-31 9-31 9-33

Release 9.5 Page C-25

KASEMAKE Mounting and Grip Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Dowel Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Balance Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 CITO Clip Stripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Support Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Nicks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Nicks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Bridging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Roll-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Flat Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Manual Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Rotary Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Bridge Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Items to Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Freehand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Bridge Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Align Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Remove All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Indicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Show End Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Tie Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Tie Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Tie Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Costings… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Costing Info in Borders / Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill Freehand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill Toggle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hide Drill Holes/Show Drill Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Template Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

9-49 9-51 9-51 9-51 9-51 9-51 9-52 9-52 9-52 9-53 9-53 9-54 9-54 9-55 9-55 9-55 9-56 9-56 9-56 9-56 9-58 9-59 9-60 9-61 9-61 9-61 9-61 9-61

Release 9.5 Page C-26

KASEMAKE Load Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Shell Width... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-62 9-62 9-62 9-63 9-63

Trim to top shell only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Split Shell... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge Shell with Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Edit Bolt Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-63 9-64 9-64 9-64 9-64 9-64

Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Distance from edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Show removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Auto Remove Bolt Holes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knife Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower Priority Hole Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Hidden Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Construction Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Bolt Hole Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Bolt Hole Settings.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Job Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Job Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The DieMaking Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Jobs View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Customers View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Machines View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Job Parameters View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The DieBoard View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Stripping Knives View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Male Stripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Female Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Edge Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Layout Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

9-65 9-65 9-66 9-66 9-66 9-66 9-66 9-67 9-67 9-67 9-67 9-68 9-69 9-69 9-69 9-69 9-71 9-72 9-72 9-74 9-75 9-76 9-77 9-81 9-81 9-82 9-82 9-83 9-83 9-83

Release 9.5 Page C-27

KASEMAKE Clip Strip Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Clip Strip Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Unwanted Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip Strip View Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As Clip Strip Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip Strip Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Grid... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hide Grid/Show Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inside/Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal / Vertical Flute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating around the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming the Current Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom All Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Rollup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading A Basic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading A Smart Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Smart Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-84 9-84 9-84 9-85 9-85 9-86 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-5 10-5 10-6 10-6

Symbol Variables... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Adjust Lock Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Creating a Parametric Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Clone Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Ground Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Ground Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Ground Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Colour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Ground Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Load... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 All On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 All Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Line Styles... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Linetype Properties…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 New(Insert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Move Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Move Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-28

KASEMAKE Custom Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Info... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Papers... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a New Plotter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amending Settings for an Existing Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show / Hide Project Dialogbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal Setup Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customise Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-12 10-13 10-13 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-16 10-16 10-16 10-17 10-18 10-18 10-18 10-19 10-20 10-21 10-21 10-21 10-22 10-22 10-22 10-22 10-23

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ShortCuts... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context Menu... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-25 10-26 10-27 10-27 10-27 10-27 10-27 10-28 10-28 10-28 10-29

Creating a Customised Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Customising the Style Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Add Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-29 10-29 10-29 10-29

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Zoom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-29

KASEMAKE Zoom Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Zoom Last. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Zoom In Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 10% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 20% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 30% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 40% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 50% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Zoom Out Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 10% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 20% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 30% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 40% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 50% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Zoom Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Quickzoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Quick Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Quick Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Zoom Digitiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 New Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Close All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Tile Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Tile Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Changing the Active Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 More Windows... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Right Button Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Adding and Deleting Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Copying a Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Query syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Border format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Transfer from database to border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Transfer from border to database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Create reports using Kasemake drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Using AG/DATA reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Parametrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Default associations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-30

KASEMAKE Parametric file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Updating the database from a parametric variable table. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 New Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Associate Project Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Associate Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Format of Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 AG Database configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Database Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Guide to changing database properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Edit Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Adding a new field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Deleting a field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Editing a field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Requery Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Compact Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Configuration for network database file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Configuration for network drawing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Administrator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Enquiry Capture Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Scheduler Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Local Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Non-Kasemake Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Using the Design Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 ADMINISTRATOR: Environment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Company Working Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Individual’s Working Week. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Diary Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16 Job Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 ADMINISTRATOR: Working with Unassigned Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 ADMINISTRATOR: Assigning jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 DESIGNER:Working with the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 DESIGNER: Suspending a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 DESIGNER: Completing a Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 SALES: General Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30 Job Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31 Managing the Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 The Job List Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 Filtering the Job List Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 Archiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 File Commands - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-31

KASEMAKE 3D File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VIZ File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Object... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Object... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Theme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Theme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paste Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Mode Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panels / Sub Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scene Mode Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Walk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fly Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane / Axis Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mesh Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrugate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centre of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeform Deformation Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4x4x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parametric Deformation Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Deformation Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve -90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve -180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve -270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curve -360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

15-1 15-1 15-1 15-4 15-4 15-4 16-1 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-2 16-3 16-3 16-3 16-4 16-4 16-4 16-4 16-4 16-5 16-5 16-5 16-5 16-6 16-6 17-1 17-1 17-2 17-3 17-3 17-4 17-5 17-5 17-5 17-5 17-6 17-6 17-6 17-6 17-6 17-7 17-7 17-7 17-7 17-8 17-8 17-8 17-8

Release 9.5 Page C-32

KASEMAKE Curve Angle (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 Curve Angle ( - ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 Remove Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 Show / Hide Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Take Snapshot.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Take Snapshot (vector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10 Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Fold To 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Fold To 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Fold To 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Fold To Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Increase Fold Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Decrease Fold Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Fold Increment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3 Centre At Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Stand on ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Reset Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Stand up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Lie on side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Lie Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Align Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Abut left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3 Centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3 Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3 Abut right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Abut top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Tops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Middles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Bottoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Abut bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Horizontal Spacing Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Make equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5 Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Vertical Spacing Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6 Make equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7 Make Same Size Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8 Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8 Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-33

KASEMAKE Rotate + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights 1 ... Lights 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Light Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toggle Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording An Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animation Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-8 19-9 19-9 20-1 20-1 20-1 20-1 20-2 21-1 21-1 21-1 21-1

PlayBack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2 Quick Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Example 1: Recording A Movement Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing An Animation Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 2: Recording a Folding Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 3: Recording a Camera Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 4: Recording a Light Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Hierarchy And Key Frames Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-2 21-3 21-4 21-4 21-4 21-4 21-5

Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paste Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Key Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destroy Key Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destroy All Key Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording A Camera Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-5 21-5 21-5 21-5 21-5 21-5 21-5 21-5 21-6 21-6 21-6 21-6

Playing an Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KASEPLAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cameras... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Cameras... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Cameras.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal split - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal split - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical split - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical split - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal split - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal split - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical split - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

21-6 21-6 22-1 22-1 22-1 22-1 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-2 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3 22-3

Release 9.5 Page C-34

KASEMAKE Vertical split - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4 Four panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4 VRML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 VRML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3 PDF... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 AVI Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 Codec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Prologue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Epilogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7 Image export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7 Image export multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Kasemake (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9 POVRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9 Rendering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10 Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Sky Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Launch POVRAY.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 KASEPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Fill Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Hidden line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Textured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 Shade Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Facet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Smooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Outline Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 None. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Colour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3 Background... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3 Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-35

KASEMAKE Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5 Cubic Panorama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5 Environment Map... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6 Advanced... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7 Avatar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8 Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10 Artwork... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11 Snapshots... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11 Nudge... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11 Movement Nudge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Rotation Nudge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Spacing Nudge Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14 Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15 Artwork Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-18 Attaching A Note To An Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-19 Modifying Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20 Adding Sub Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20 Deleting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-21 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-22 Pipette Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-22 Paint with Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-22 Apply Material to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-23 Edit Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-23

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page C-36

KASEMAKE

1 - Getting Started 1

KASEMAKE Screen Layout The KASEMAKE screen is the interface between the user and the KASEMAKE system. It provides access to commands through menus and tool bars. It displays prompts and help messages to assist you in the operation of commands. It also displays information about current settings, e.g. window size and drawing mode. In addition, it provides a drawing area for you to display, edit and create your designs. The KASEMAKE screen is divided into eight areas, each of which will be described individually. The exact appearance of the KASEMAKE screen is determined from one of nine available schemes accessible through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to File->Preferences for further details.

1.1

Title Bar The title bar, at the top of the screen, displays the KASEMAKE name and the title of the current design.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-1

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE In addition, the title bar provides access to some standard Microsoft Windows functions provided by the version of Windows you are currently running. These relate to the currently running KASEMAKE system.

1.2

Menu Bar The menu bar comprises the drop down menus provided by KASEMAKE. These menus give access to the suite of commands available with your KASEMAKE system. If standard MDI windows are used rather than tabbed design windows, the menu bar also includes buttons to access standard Microsoft Windows functions affecting the current drawing window. The available functions will depend on the version of Windows you are running. There are three sets of menus currently used by KASEMAKE. • a complete set of 2D menus is available when a 2D drawing is being worked on either as a new design or an existing design for alteration • a reduced set of these 2D menus is provided when no drawings are open • a set of 3D menus which include some of the 2D menus and commands but have additional commands and menus specific to 3D is available when working on a 3D design To select a command from a pull down menu:• Press the left mouse button once on the name of the menu you wish to view. Move the cursor to the name of the required command and press again to select this command Information about each command is displayed in the status bar, at the bottom of the screen, as you move over the command name. The contents of a menu can be viewed by pressing the left mouse button on the desired menu name. Once a menu has been displayed in this way, moving the cursor over any of the other menu names will cause their menu contents to be displayed. To remove a menu without selecting a command simply press the left mouse button anywhere outside the menu area. Menus can display only the most recently used / popular commands, or the full list of commands as before. Where only the most recently used commands are displayed, a double chevron is appended to the list of commands to show that it has been cropped. Simply click on the chevron symbol to reveal the full list of commands. Where cropped menus are used, it is also possible to have the full list reveal after a short delay rather than having to click on the double chevron to reveal it. The options governing the behaviour of menus are determined through the Options page of the Customise dialog. Please refer to “Options” on page 10-25 for further explanation of these settings. There are also settings which govern the appearance of the menus. These are accessed through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to “Kasemake Look” on page 262 for further details.

1.3

Command Bar The command bar is where open tool bars are displayed. There is a command bar below the menu bar where the standard tool bar and style tool bar are displayed by default. There is also a command bar above the status bar and one at either

Release 9.5 Page 1-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE Screen Layout KASEMAKE side of the drawing area. Tool bars and dockable dialogs can be placed in any of the command bars as desired. The main tool bar is displayed in the command bar to the left of the drawing area by default. Command bars are only visible when they contain one or more tool bars. The command bars to the right and bottom of the screen are not visible by default. Tool bars placed within a command bar are referred to as docked. A command bar can consist of several rows / columns of docked tool bars depending on how the tool bars are positioned within the command bar and how many are displayed. The command bar will grow in size automatically to accommodate any open tool bars. Moving the mouse over any button in a tool bar gives a brief description of the underlying command in the status bar. To select a command press the left mouse button on the tool bar button corresponding to the required command. For further information on using tool bars refer to “Toolbars” on page 1-10.

1.4

Drawing Area The drawing area is the central work area of the KASEMAKE screen. This is where a design is created and manipulated. Two types of design window can be used MDI style or tabbed. The type of design window is determined by the enable tabs option accessible through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to “Kasemake Look” on page 2-62 for further details of this option. In the 2D, the drawing area has a vertical and horizontal scroll bar to allow you to scroll the design within the visible drawing area. Simply press one of the arrows at either end of the scroll bar or click on the scroller and drag it to the required position. The view will be adjusted accordingly. For the 3D there are five tabs at the bottom of the drawing area corresponding to five different views of the current 3D scene. Simply click on a tab to display the corresponding view. Further tabs may also appear when accessing certain of the 3D commands.

1.4.1

MDI Style Windows Where the standard MDI style windows are used, each design is held within its own window which can be maximised or resized using the standard windows functions accessed through the menu bar. The window is automatically created whenever an existing design is accessed or a new design is started. Multiple designs can therefore be worked on at any one time. To move between the designs access the Window menu and select the required design from the list of currently open designs displayed in the bottom half of the Window pull down. Refer to Menu Bar on page 1-2 for more information on selecting a command from a menu.

1.4.2

Tabbed Design Windows Multiple designs can also be displayed overlaying each other with tabs to allow instant access to the underlying design. A new window is automatically created whenever a new design is started overlaying any existing designs. Once the maximum number of designs that can be accomodated in the drawing area is reached, older designs are removed from the display. To access the other designs, you can choose to scroll through them with arrow buttons or select from a menu by accessing a menu button. The tabs can be positioned either at the top or bottom of the design. Their appearance can also be customised.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-3

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE The customisation of tabs is through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to “Kasemake Look” on page 2-62 for further details.

1.5

Status Bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the drawing screen. It is used to display information to assist you in using the KASEMAKE system. This includes descriptions of commands, when you move through a tool bar or menu. It also includes prompts to guide you through using the currently selected command. The right hand end of the status bar is used to display system settings. • Information about the current element as it is drawn e.g. for a line - current angle and length. Also used to report a dimension - where report only is selected. • Window size • Cursor position • Nudge factor currently in use • Nudge angle currently in use • Inside/Outside indicating the view currently on display • Flute direction • Database - Indicating whether a database is currently open

1.5.1

Nudge factor The nudge factor can be altered directly through the indicator. Simply click in the indicator box and type the required value.

1.5.1.1

Micro Nudge

The nudge factor can be reduced to a tenth of its current setting, by simply holding down the CTRL key in conjunction with the arrow key to nudge selected elements.

1.5.2

Nudge Angle The nudge angle can be altered using the Nudge Angle dialog which can be accessed through the indicator. Simply double click in the indicator to display the Nudge Angle dialog and enter a new angle in one of three ways. The indicator will automatically be updated. Refer to “Change Nudge Angle...” on page 3-16.

1.5.3

Inside / Outside The Inside / Outside indicator can be accessed as a short cut to the View->Inside / Outside command. Double click in the indicator to be prompted for confirmation that you wish to toggle the current view. Click on Yes to confirm and flip the view. Click on No to leave the view unchanged.

1.5.4

Flute Direction The Flute Direction indicator, represented by a horizontal or vertical line with arrows at each end, provides a shortcut to the View->Horizontal / Vertical Flute command. Double click in the indicator to be prompted for confirmation that you wish to toggle the flute direction. Click on Yes to confirm and alter the direction. Click on No to leave the flute direction unchanged.

Release 9.5 Page 1-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE Screen Layout KASEMAKE

1.6

Special Dialogs The Symbols, Array / Layout, Move / Copy and Bridging roll ups as well as the Element Properties, 3D Properties, Notes, Project and Options dialogs and the Overview window have special behaviour. They can be docked or floating. When docked they can be overlaid, placed side by side or one above the other. They can also be pushpinned to display them permanently or can be made to auto hide, appearing only when accessed, otherwise they are displayed as tabs. When floating they have rollup functionality. They can be push pinned for permanent display or made to auto hide when not being accessed. They can also be made to roll up / down manually.

1.6.1

Docking Docking is achieved by dragging over special handles with arrows to indicate possible docking positions. A shaded area is displayed as each handle is accessed. This represents the position of the dialog if docked.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-5

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE A handle will appear near each edge of the screen with an arrow pointing towards the edge it represents. In addition a special locator similar to a compass will be displayed in the centre of the current window. This provides quick access to each of the four edge handles plus there is a central handle which if available can be used to overlay the dialog over any other items currently docked in this area. Please refer to the following figure for an example of handles and possible docking areas.

To dock a dialog simply hold down the left mouse button in the title area. Drag the dialog over the handle which represents the area where you wish to dock this dialog. Release the mouse button to dock the dialog at this new position.

1.6.1.1

Pinning A Dialog

If you wish the dialog to be permanently displayed you should ensure the pin in its title bar is upright by clicking on it if necessary. Once pinned a dialog will be permanently on display. Note:

Release 9.5 Page 1-6

If you wish to float a dialog you must ensure it is pinned first.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE Screen Layout KASEMAKE

1.6.1.2

Auto Hiding A Dialog

If you wish a dialog to auto hide when not being accessed you should ensure that the pin in its title bar is horizontal by clicking on it if necessary. In this mode, the dialog will be displayed as a tab only. To access the dialog move the cursor over the tab. The dialog will automatically be displayed allowing access to the dialog while the cursor remains within the dialog or tab. Once the cursor moves outside the dialog / tab it will be hidden.

1.6.1.3

Expanding / Collapsing Side Bars

Side bars containing one or more docked dialogs can be hidden and reopened manually using the arrow button on the side bar. Click on the arrow to collapse the entire side bar hiding all dialogs docked within it. Click on the double chevron to reopen a side bar displaying all docked dialogs.

1.6.2

Floating To float a dialog, first ensure it is pinned. Then simply hold down the left mouse button in the title area (or tab). Drag the dialog to a suitable position within the drawing area. Release the mouse button to place the dialog at this new position.

1.6.2.1

Rolldown

If you wish the dialog to be permanently displayed you should ensure the pin in its title bar is upright by clicking on it if necessary. Once pinned a dialog will be displayed rolled down and remain permanently on display.

1.6.2.2

Rollup

If you wish the dialog to roll up displaying only the title bar, you should ensure that the pin in its title bar is horizontal by clicking on it if necessary. To access the dialog you should do one of the following depending upon your preferences. Please refer to “Rollup Dialogs” on page 2-54. • If you have selected automatic rollup, move the cursor over the title bar. The dialog will rolldown allowing access to its controls while the cursor remains within the dialog or title bar. Once the cursor moves outside the dialog / title bar it will be rolled up again. • If you have selected manual rollup, you should click on the pin to ensure it is vertical. The dialog will rolldown allowing access to its controls and is now pinned and will remain permanently on display. To rollup the dialog again, simply click on the pin again to set it back to horizontal and the dialog will roll up displaying only its title bar again.

1.6.3

Context Menu There is also a context menu available for docking / floating the dialogs. Simply right click over a dialog to access the menu of commands. Where the dialog is currently pinned options are available to float it, set it to auto hide or to hide it completely. Simply click on the required command to activate it. Where the dialog is currently set to auto hide only this command is displayed. Choosing the command will toggle the auto hide option. This is particularly useful where dialogs are overlaid and you wish to float an individual dialog since once overlaid dialogs are treated as a whole unit rather than individually so cannot otherwise be docked / floated independently.

1.7

3D Screen Layout - Timeline The 3D screen layout varies from the 2D screen layout in that the drawing area is tabbed, each tab representing a different view of the 3D scene. This is illustrated.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-7

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE In addition a timeline window can be displayed using the View->Timeline command. The timeline window displays a hierarchy of object(s) and any components defined in the current scene, in a column format to the left of the display. Any corresponding animation is shown frame by frame to the right. Within a typical 3D scene you might have one or more boxes. Each of these is made up of one or more panels. This is reflected in the object hierarchy. Other objects affecting the view e.g. cameras and lighting are also displayed. Any animation is displayed in the form of keyframes. As in the making of films, KASEMAKE animation divides lengths of time into frames. A keyframe is a frame in which you define a change in an animation or include frame actions to modify a movie. Keyframes are used to produce animation without the need to draw each frame; they make creating movies easier. KASEMAKE can tween, or fill in the frames between keyframes to produce fluid animations. The timeline header at the top of the timeline indicates frame numbers. The timeline status display at the bottom of the timeline indicates the selected frame number, the current frame rate, and the elapsed time to the current frame. Note:

When an animation is played, the actual frame rate is displayed; this may differ from the movie frame rate if the computer can't display the animation quickly enough.

The order in which frames and keyframes appear in the Timeline determines the order in which they are displayed in a movie. You can change the length of a tweened animation by dragging a keyframe in the timeline. By rearranging keyframes in the timeline you can edit the sequence of events in a movie. You can also insert, delete, select, and move frames in the Timeline by right clicking to access a pop up menu of animation commands.

Release 9.5 Page 1-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE Screen Layout KASEMAKE

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-9

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE

2

Toolbars Tool bars provide an easy way of accessing commands. Each tool bar contains a set of buttons with a bitmap representation of the corresponding command. Moving the mouse over any button in a tool bar will display the name of the underlying command together with a brief description of it as a tool tip. To display tool tips refer to View->Customise->Toolbars on page 10-22. To select a command simply press the left mouse button on the tool bar button which represents the required command. Tool bars can be either floating where they have a title bar and close button and can be positioned anywhere within the physical limits of the screen, or docked where they are positioned within one of the command bars and have a gripper at the start of the toolbar to allow it to be moved. Toolbars also have a customize button at the end of the toolbar to allow access to further commands where the toolbar is docked and has been cropped to fit and to enable the toolbar to be customized whether docked or floating.

Some of the tool bars are opened automatically by default. However, you can open and close them, as required, to determine which tool bars are on view at any one time. Tool bars are opened in one of two ways:• Moving the cursor into the main tool bar and pressing the left mouse button on the button corresponding to the required tool bar. The tool bar button is displayed as pushed in to show that the tool bar is open • Selecting the View->Customise->Toolbars command and checking the box corresponding to the required tool bar, using the left mouse button Tool bars are closed in one of the following ways:• Moving the cursor into the main tool bar and pressing the left mouse button on the button corresponding to the tool bar to be closed. The tool bar button will be shown as popped out to show that the tool bar is not on display • Selecting the View->Customise->Toolbars command and unchecking the box corresponding to the required tool bar, by pressing the left mouse button For floating tool bars only click on the close button at the end of the title bar

2.1

Floating / Docking a Toolbar The gripper button is located at the beginning of each toolbar when it is docked. It allows the toolbar to be moved. The gripper is represented by a column of dots in the above illustration but its exact appearance is determined by the current KASEMAKE scheme being used. To float a tool bar:Move the cursor over the gripper. The move cursor will be displayed. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the tool bar to the required position. Release the mouse to place it. A floating tool bar may be resized as per any window.

Release 9.5 Page 1-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Toolbars KASEMAKE To dock a tool bar:Move the cursor over the title bar to display the move cursor. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the tool bar to the required command bar. The toolbar will automatically dock when you enter a command bar. Release the mouse button and the tool bar will be docked within the command bar. The command bar will automatically increase in size, if necessary, to accommodate the newly placed tool bar.

2.2

Customising Toolbars The more button is located at the end of each toolbar when it is docked and the toolbar has had to be cropped to fit within the command bar. It is used to access any commands not currently displayed. It is also used to customize the toolbar. If the toolbar has been cropped the more button represented by a chevron symbol is displayed, as shown. Clicking on the more button displays a drop down list of the missing commands:-

Simply select a command from the list as per a menu.

2.2.1

Quick Customize Toolbars can be customized using the Add or Remove Buttons command. Click on the more button at the end of the toolbar to display this command in one of the following ways :• If the toolbar has been cropped the more button is represented by chevrons and an arrow as illustrated above. Click on it to reveal a dropdown list of missing commands for this toolbar. The final command displayed is the Add or Remove Buttons command. • If the toolbar has not been cropped the more button is represented by an arrow. Click on it to reveal the Add or Remove Buttons command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-11

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE In either case, move the cursor over the Add or Remove Buttons command to display a context sensitive menu comprising a menu for each toolbar that is docked in the same row (or column) as the current toolbar. In addition, a Customize... command is also displayed.

2.2.1.1

Add or Remove Buttons

Move the cursor over the menu for the toolbar you wish to customize. A drop down list of all the possible commands for this toolbar will now be displayed. Each command is preceded by a box which is used to identify which commands are included in the toolbar. If the box contains a tick the command is currently included. If it is empty the command is not currently included. Click in the box corresponding to a command to add / remove the command within the toolbar.

If at any stage you wish to return to the default settings for this toolbar, simply click on Reset Toolbar. You will then be prompted for confirmation that you wish to reset the toolbar as any changes will be lost. Click on OK to confirm and the toolbar will be restored to its default settings. Click on Cancel to ignore the Reset Toolbar command and leave the toolbar unchanged.

Release 9.5 Page 1-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Toolbars KASEMAKE

2.2.1.2

Customize...

The tool bars are fully customisable which means that you can alter them to contain the commands most relevant to your individual requirements. This includes menus. You can also define your own tool bars, which similarly, can contain command buttons or menus. The Customize... command allows quick access to the Customize dialog also accessible through the View->Customize... command. This provides three pages of settings. Toolbars to control which toolbars are displayed and which are hidden. Commands which allows new commands to be placed into toolbars and new menus to be created. Options which controls the appearance of tooltips and menus. For a full explanation of customising tool bars refer to “View->Customise->Toolbars” on page 10-22.

2.3

Predefined Toolbars There are twenty three predefined tool bars provided by the KASEMAKE system. 1

Main tool bar

2

Standard tool bar

3

Style tool bar

4

Mode tool bar

5

Draw tool bar

6

Dimension tool bar

7

Parametrics tool bar

8

Tools tool bar

9

Build tool bar

10

Edit tool bar

11

Diemaking tool bar

12

Quick parametrics tool bar

13

Construct lines tool bar

14

3D View tool bar

15

3D Lights tool bar

16

3D Folding tool bar

17

3D Curvature tool bar

18

3D Alignment and Rotation tool bar

19

3D Drawing tool bar

20

3D Animation tool bar

21

Kaseweb tool bar

22

Rotary Diemaking tool bar

23

Clip Strip tool bar

The tool bars numbered six to nine can be made exchangeable, meaning that only one will ever be visible at any one time. This swapping of tool bars helps to reduce the amount of information

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-13

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE on display, leaving more room for the drawing area and making it easier to find your way around, particularly useful when you are new to the KASEMAKE system. To make the tool bars exchangeable use the Files->Preferences command and check the exchangeable tool bars option. Conversely, unchecking this command will make the tool bars appear simultaneously.

2.3.1

Main Tool Bar

The main tool bar provides access to other tool bars. The tool bars are opened or closed by selecting or deselecting the corresponding tool bar button. An open tool bar is illustrated by the corresponding tool bar button appearing pressed in. A closed tool bar is illustrated by the tool bar button being drawn popped out. In addition, the main tool bar provides instant access to the select and text drawing tools. It also provides access to the calculator and a numerical keypad. It also provides a way of toggling the display of the project toolbars on and off.

2.3.2

Standard Tool Bar

The standard tool bar provides quick access to frequently used commands from the files, edit, view and help menus as well as to the 3D Fold Box and the Overview command. In addition, it provides access to any drawing tool options applicable to the currently selected drawing tool. The options button appears greyed out where a tool does not have any options. Pressing the options button brings up a dialog box containing options specific to the current tool which can then be altered as desired. For further information on using dialog boxes see “Using Dialog Boxes and Controls in KASEMAKE” on page 1-18.

2.3.3

Style Tool Bar

The style tool bar displays information about the attributes which determine how drawing elements are displayed. These are the current line style, current line width and current ground settings, including the ground table currently in use. They can be changed directly by clicking on the arrow of the appropriate combo box. Scrolling through the list of available values and clicking on the required value to set it. For further information on using a combo box control refer to “Using Dialog Boxes and Controls in KASEMAKE” on page 1-18 In addition, the style tool bar provides access to the ground table dialog where attributes such as visibility, colour and pen within the current ground table can be altered for any or all grounds. See also “Ground Table...” in the Views commands on page 10-8.

Release 9.5 Page 1-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Toolbars KASEMAKE

2.3.4

Mode Tool Bar

The mode tool bar allows access to the different entry modes which control the entering of information into the design. Where coordinate mode is chosen a further tool bar is provided to enter the x and y values of the desired coordinate. Orthogonal mode which forces all lines to be adjusted orthogonally can be set or unset through the mode tool bar. The corresponding button is shown pressed in where this option is set. Joined mode, where lines are drawn as a continuous sequence each starting where the previous line ended, can also be set through this tool bar. Again, the tool bar button is shown pressed in when this option is set. The auto snap properties to use when auto snap is engaged, are also set through this tool bar. Finally the tool bar contains a command button to enable / disable digitiser mode where a digitiser is being used with KASEMAKE.

2.3.5

Draw Tool Bar

The draw tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used draw commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.6

Dimension Tool Bar

The dimension tool bar provides instant access to dimension commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command. In addition, the dimension tool bar contains settings which control the method used to construct a dimension. This includes report dimension, which when set causes the dimension value to appear in the status bar rather than constructing a dimension within the design. It is advisable to display the dimension tool bar when dimensioning as these settings are not available through the menu process.

2.3.7

Parametrics Tool Bar

The parametrics tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used parametric commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-15

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE

2.3.8

Tools Tool Bar

The tools tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used tools commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.9

Build Tool Bar The build tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used build commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.10

Edit Tool Bar

The edit tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used edit commands. In addition, it allows access to the group and ungroup commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select the required command.

2.3.11

Diemaking Tool Bar

The diemaking tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used diemaking commands. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.12

Quick Parametrics Tool Bar

The quick parametrics tool bar provides instant access to the quick parametric commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.13

Construct Lines Tool Bar

The Construct Lines tool bar provides instant access to the commands available for placing and manipulating construct lines. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.14

3D View Tool Bar

The 3D view tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the most frequently used 3D commands relating to the display of the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

Release 9.5 Page 1-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Toolbars KASEMAKE

2.3.15

3D Lights Tool Bar

The 3D lights tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the commands for displaying lights within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.16

3D Folding Tool Bar The 3D folding tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the folding commands available within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.17

3D Curvature Tool Bar

The 3D curvature tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the commands available for handling curved panels. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.18

3D Alignment and Rotation Tool Bar

The 3D alignment and rotation tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the most frequently used 3D commands for manipulating objects within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.19

3D Drawing Tool Bar

The 3D drawing tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the most frequently used 3D commands for amending objects within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.20

3D Animation Tool Bar

The 3D animation tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the animation commands available for animating a 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.21

Kaseweb Tool Bar

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-17

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE The Kaseweb tool bar provides instant access to the kaseweb commands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.22

Rotary Diemaking Tool Bar The rotary diemaking tool bar provides instant access to the commands applicable to rotary diemaking. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.23

Clip Strip Tool Bar. The clip strip tool bar contains the clip strip commands.

3

Dialog Boxes and Controls Dialog boxes are used extensively throughout KASEMAKE providing a means of getting information about how a command should work. They operate as small windows so can be moved, resized or closed in the normal way. Each contains a set of buttons, normally OK and Cancel to allow changes to be saved or abandoned. Tabbed dialog boxes are also used. They are used in the same way as standard dialog boxes but comprise several pages of settings placed one on top of the other. Simply click on the tab at the top of each page to activate it. Each tab has a title to help identify which settings it controls. Various dialog controls are used to set individual values. An explanation of how to use each of these controls now follows:-

3.1

Button

Buttons are used to set values and to activate commands as per tool bars. Buttons can have two states:On - where they are highlighted / drawn with a shaded rectangle to show they are selected Off - where they are drawn without highlight / shading to show they are deselected Simply click on a button with the mouse to toggle its state.

3.2

Check Box

Check boxes have a set / unset state. Again, you just click on them to toggle their value. Their state can be used to determine whether further options are enabled / disabled.

Release 9.5 Page 1-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dialog Boxes and Controls KASEMAKE

3.3

Radio Buttons

Radio buttons are used where only one value from a set of values can be set at one time. Again, clicking on the required value will set it.

3.4

Combo Box

Combo boxes are used to select a value from a list of values. Click on the arrow to display a part of the list. Scroll through the list either with the arrow keys or using the mouse and clicking on the scrolling arrows, or by using the mouse to drag the scroll button. Clicking on the required item will set it. Combo boxes are used within the style tool bar to set the current ground etc.

3.5

Edit Contro l

Edit controls are used to enter text directly. Contents of an edit control can be modified by selecting the contents then retyping them. This is done by clicking at the beginning of the string then dragging the cursor. Each character is highlighted as the cursor moves over it. Release the mouse to set the selection.

3.6

Spin Box

Spin boxes are used to set numerical values. The spin allows you to scan a range of values at a set interval from the starting value. Click and hold an arrow to increment / decrement the current value. Note: the rate at which the value within the spin box changes, accelerates the longer

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-19

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE you hold down the arrow key. The increment used to determine the next value in the sequence therefore increases / decreases accordingly. Alternatively, you can select the text within the edit part of the control and enter the new value directly.

3.7

Calculator (3D) A calculator symbol is displayed alongside numerical values where input via a calculator is supported:-

To define a value, click on the calculator symbol to reveal a calculator. Input the required number using the relevant numeric keys. Alternatively calculate the required number if appropriate. To enter the value into the current field, simply choose the = key. This will close the calculator and copy the given value.

3.8

Defining Colours (3D) Throughout the 3D, colours can be changed by clicking on the current value field which produces a drop down palette of predefined colours as shown:-

To choose a predefined colour, simply click on the required colour. This will close the palette and update the current value field with the new colour information.

Release 9.5 Page 1-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dialog Boxes and Controls KASEMAKE

3.8.1

Other... Further colours can be defined by clicking on the word Other... in the colour palette to produce the Colors dialog comprising two tabbed pages for either standard or customised colour selection :-

3.8.1.1

Standard

The Standard page allows you to select from the entire spectrum of predefined colours rather than just the small selection provided in the drop down palette. A preview area to the right displays the current colour and contrasts this with the newly selected colour. The individual hexagon representing the colour currently selected is also outlined in black. Select a different colour in one of the following ways:• Click on the small hexagon representing the colour you require, this will then be displayed as the new colour in the preview area • Click on Select.... A pipette will appear and as you move this over each colour hexagon it will be previewed in the new colour rectangle helping you to guage the correct colour. Click on the hexagon to select it.

3.8.1.2

Custom

Click on the Custom tab to display the Custom page of settings. The Custom page as the name suggests, allows you to define your own colours. A preview area to the right displays the current colour and contrasts this with the newly selected colour. A marker is also displayed within the colour spectrum to represent the current selected colour. The amount of red, green and blue and the hue, saturation and luminosity values are displayed for the current colour. A marker is also displayed next to a sliding scale corresponding to the degree of luminosity.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-21

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE .

Select a different colour in one of the following ways:• Click in the colour spectrum to select the colour you require, this will then be displayed as the new colour in the preview area. The RGB and HSL values and scale will also be updated. • Change the HSL and RGB values directly either by typing an alternative value or scrolling with the arrows. Vary the intensity by sliding the arrow. Again, the new colour will be previewed as the values are changed • Click on Select.... A pipette will appear and as you move this within the colour spectrum the colour will be previewed in the new colour rectangle helping you to guage the correct colour. Click within the colour spectrum to select the required colour.

In either case, click on OK to close the Colors dialog and update the current colour field.

4

Features of Right Mouse Button

4.1

Pop-up Menus Pop-up menus are used throughout the KASEMAKE system to assist with functionality of the current command. To access a pop-up menu simply click with the right mouse button within the drawing area. A context specific menu of commands will now appear. To choose a command simply move the cursor to the appropriate command and click to activate it. Several pop-up menus are available. Most of them are command specific and used to complete a command or to complete a specific step within a command. The use of the command specific pop-up menus is explained as part of the individual command‘s documentation.

Release 9.5 Page 1-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Features of Right Mouse Button KASEMAKE There is also a general pop-up menu available with most of the tools which gives quick access to command options, the Quick Zoom command and Reset as well as other useful commands.

4.1.1

Quick Zoom The Quick Zoom command is a temporary single use command available through the pop-up menu or the View menu. It allows you to zoom into an area of a design without breaking out of the current command. Activate the command from the pop-up menu. The current command is frozen and the Quick Zoom command initiated. You now need to identify two points on the diagonal of the zoom box this is done in one of two ways depending on the value selected for quickzoom in preferences. Please refer to “Quickzoom” on page 2-52

Original First identify the first corner of the area to zoom by clicking and releasing the left mouse button to define the point. Any of the available drawing modes can be used. Move the cursor. A dotted selection box will begin to rubber band from the marked corner, following the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. When the box encloses the required area, click and release the left mouse button to identify the top right corner. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used to identify this corner.

Click & Drag If this option is set click and hold the left mouse button to define the first corner of the box. Hold down the button whilst moving the mouse and the dotted selection box will rubber band from the marked corner, following the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. Release the mouse button to define the second corner and complete the zoom box.

In both cases, the enclosed part of the design will now zoom to show this area in detail. The original command will now be restored, at the point where you called Quickzoom, ready for you to complete any further steps.

4.1.2

Reset Reset is another useful command which is only available through the pop-up menu. It allows you to restart the current command at any stage, cancelling any steps already completed.

4.1.3

Options Options are available for a lot of the commands. They are used to tailor individual commands. Once set options remain in effect until they are changed explicitly through the options command. Options can be accessed quickly through the pop-up menu. Activating the options command in this way will bring up the options of the current command.

4.2

Moving The On Screen Design The entire design can be moved on screen by using the right mouse button in conjunction with the SHIFT key. Simply hold down the button and SHIFT key simultaneously. Move the mouse and the entire design will start to move. Release the mouse button and SHIFT key and the drawing will be repositioned at the current cursor position.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 1-23

1 - Getting Started KASEMAKE

4.3

Zooming The On Screen Design To zoom the entire design you can use the right mouse button in conjunction with the CTRL key. Hold down the right mouse button and the CTRL key. Move the cursor up the screen to zoom into or enlarge the design. Move the cursor down the screen to zoom out or reduce the size of the design. Release the mouse button and CTRL key when you are happy with the new view of the design.

5

Features of the Mouse Wheel Operation of the mouse wheel will cause the drawing to zoom or pan as per the setting on the view page of File->Preferences. Holding down the ALT key in conjunction with the mouse wheel toggles the effect i.e. if the preference setting is currently zoom the effect will be to pan and vice versa.

6

System Instability Protection In an attempt to make the KASEMAKE system more secure, we have built in measures to safeguard against loss of unsaved work. KASEMAKE now regularly checks for signs of the operating system becoming unstable and prompts with a warning if a problem is detected. If such a problem does arise, it is necessary for KASEMAKE to close down. For your protection, KASEMAKE will automatically save any design(s) being worked on to temporary files before it shuts down. The first time that the KASEMAKE system is loaded following an enforced shut down, the Drawing Recovery dialog will appear displaying a list of any files which were recovered and their corresponding preview. Simply click on the name of a file to display its preview. The recovered files are only temporary, but remain available for recovery until KASEMAKE is closed down. You can therefore choose to identify which file(s) to recover or alternatively you can defer recovery. • To recover file(s), click on a file name to highlight it. For multiple selections, hold down the SHIFT key with subsequent clicks. Finally, click on OK to recover any selected designs. • To defer recovery click on Cancel. Please refer to “Recover Drawings” on page 2-65 for details of how to recover subsequent files.

7

Preserving Settings In order to preserve settings between different sessions of KASEMAKE, all settings are written to the registry under appropriate keys.

8

Working with Files from External Sources KASENAKE fully supports dragging and dropping of files both in native KASEMAKE (.agd) format and other supported file formats. Simply click and hold on the filename whether it be in Windows Explorer or an email attachment then drag the file to KASEMAKE’S drawing area. It will now be opened in a new window.

Release 9.5 Page 1-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

2 - File Commands 1

New

Command

New

Menu

File > New

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + N

Use this command to create a new design. Each new design created, or existing design opened, is placed in its own window. The windows can be resized, moved etc. as per all standard Windows windows. When you activate this function the New empty document dialog appears giving you the option to start either a 2D drawing or a 3D scene. Click on the appropriate option and choose OK to close the dialog. In both cases a new window is opened ready for you to start work on your new design. The new window is given a default title of Drawing 1, Drawing 2 in sequence for 2D designs and Scene1, Scene 2 etc for 3D designs; depending on how many new designs have been started this session. If you choose to start a new 3D scene, a new window is opened as described for the 2D but in addition the display changes to the 3D view with 3D menus and toolbars. The new window is opened in addition to any other windows already opened. To swap between windows use the Window menu and select the required design from the given list. For further details refer to “Changing the Active Window” in the Windows Menu chapter on page 12-3. You can open an existing design with the Open command.

1.1

3D Driver... The 3D Driver... option is an advanced user command allowing you to configure your display and the display driver used by the 3D. It can also be accessed through Windows Control Panel command. Activating this option produces the Kasemake Options dialog:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-1

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

1.1.1

Image Compression Options Use Image Compression Set this option if you wish to apply compression to images stored in 3D files. This will result in smaller files being produced. Clear this option to disable image compression for 3D files.

Compress Images not in use Set this option to compress images not currently on display. Reduces the amount of memory being used up. Clear this option if you don’t wish to compress images not currently in use.

1.1.2

Display Driver Options The Display Driver options page gives details of Drivers which are available. It also gives a conformance report for your display adaptor to show if it is suitable for the selected driver. Simply click on the name of the driver and the conformance report is displayed beneath the drivers list as shown. In addition details about the currently selected display driver are shown in the bottom section of the dialog.

Release 9.5 Page 2-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

New KASEMAKE Finally, two command buttons are also displayed, Configure to specify settings for the currently selected driver and Display Properties to set the properties of your display. The Configure command is explained in the next section. The Display Properties command produces the Display Properties configuration dialog used by Windows and accessed through Control Panel - Display. Refer to your Windows manual for further explanation.

Configure Click on the Configure button to display the Configuration options for the selected driver (where available) as follows:

Per panel artwork Set this option if you wish to apply bitmaps to each individual panel. Clear this option if you require one bitmap to overlay the entire design

Maximum texture size Set the maximum size to use for each bitmap. Click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of available sizes.

Stipple transparency Set this option if you wish to create a transparent effect where different colours overlap can be seen. Clear this option if you wish overlapping colours to merge.

Use MIP maps Set this option to generate alternative resolutions for the bitmap which can be swapped in when zooming. Reduces processing required when zooming. Clear this option if you do not wish to create MIP maps.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-3

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

Texture format (RGB) This defines the texture applied to bitmaps. Generally Automatic is the best option. To change it click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of formats.

Texture format (RGBA) This defines the texture applied with transparency. Generally Automatic is the best option. To change it click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of available formats.

Depth buffer format This defines the depth buffer format applied to a bitmap. .Click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of available sizes or leave as Automatic for KASEMAKE to determine it.

Antialiasing Set the level of antialiasing if any to sharpen the image. Click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of settings.

Default back colour This defines the default background colour used within the 3D scene. Click on the arrow and a palette of predefined colours will be displayed. Click on the required colour to select it or choose automatic and the system will determine the background colour. Alternatively, choose More colours... to define your own colour.

Front view background This defines the background colour used for the front view display of the 3D scene. Set it as "Default back colour" above.

Top view background This defines the background colour used for the top view display of the 3D scene. Set it as "Default back colour" above.

Side view background This defines the background colour used for the side view display of the 3D scene. Set it as "Default back colour" above.

Fold view background This defines the background colour used for the folding view display of the 3D scene. Set it as "Default back colour" above.

Artwork view background This defines the background colour used for the artwork display of the 3D scene. Set it as "Default back colour" above.

Playback timer period Set the time scale for frame by frame animation. Drag the slider to increase or decrease the number of milliseconds to replay each frame.

2

New 2D

Command

New 2D

Menu

File > New 2D

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

This command provides a quick way to start a new 2D design.

Release 9.5 Page 2-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

New 3D KASEMAKE Select this command and a new window is opened. In addition, the 2D menus and toolbars are automatically loaded ready for you to start creating the new design. The new window is given a default title of Drawing 1, Drawing 2 in sequence depending on how many new designs have been started this session.

3

New 3D

Command

New 3D

Menu

File > New 3D

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys This command provides a quick way to start a new 3D design. Select this command and a new 3D scene is created. The display changes to the 3D view with 3D menus and toolbars ready for you to start creating the new design. The new window is given a default title of Scene 1, Scene 2 in sequence depending on how many new 3D designs have been started this session.

4

Open

Command

Open

Menu

File > Open

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + O

Use this command to open an existing design in a new window. Both designs created with KASEMAKE, .AGD files by default and designs created with previous versions .PIC files by default, can be opened. 3D files including 3D scenes, .KSN files, 3D objects, .KOB files, 3D themes, .KTH files and 3D panoramas, .KPN files, can also be opened. Opening a 3D file will automatically launch the 3D view with corresponding menus and toolbars. Database report files, .AGR can also be opened. Note:

3D replay files, .VIZ files created with earlier versions of KASEMAKE can also be opened. However, as they are now obsolete, they can no longer be played to refold your 3D design. Instead, they are loaded as an unfolded 2D design, allowing you to refold and save the design in the new 3D format, where you no longer have the original .AGD design file.

For quick access to the most recently used designs refer to ”History List” on page 2-43 Activating the command opens a File Open dialog box. Set the Files of type filter to the type of file required, .AGD files are given by default. Click on the name of the required design. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required design directly into the filename entry field. If a preview exists for this design it will now be displayed. For a more detailed preview, move the mouse cursor over the preview area. An enlarged preview will now be displayed in the same way as a tooltip. Refer to "File Open dialog box" in next section for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box. Click on the Options… button to display further settings. The scale and rotation parameters to be applied to this design will now be displayed and can be altered if required. Any description given for the design will also be displayed. Finally, click on the Open button to bring in the design. The design will be placed in a new win-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-5

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE dow with the window title set to the design name. The newly opened window will automatically become the active window. You can open multiple designs at once. Use the Window menu to switch among the currently open designs. See "Changing the Active Window" in the Windows Menu chapter on page 12-3. You can create new designs with the New command.

4.1

File Open dialog box The following options allow you to specify which file to open.

File Name Type or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List Files of Type box. List Files of Type Select the type of file you want to open .AGD files, .PIC files, .AGR files or 3D files (.KSN, .KOB, .KTH, .KPN) or .VIZ files.

Look In Select the drive and directory in which KASEMAKE stores the file that you want to open by selecting from the drop down list or using the button shown to go back a level.

5

Insert

Command

Insert

Menu

File > Insert

Shortcuts

Not available

Keys

Ctrl + I

The insert command allows you to insert another design into the design you are currently working on. As before, .AGD files, .PIC files, .AGR files or 3D files (.KSN, .KOB, .KTH, .KPN) can be used. Activating the command opens an Insert file dialog box. The Insert dialog box is very similar to the Open dialog but requires the following additional information which can be accessed by clicking on the Options… button.

5.1

File Suffix An optional suffix can be appended to the design name. This can be numerical or a variable where a parametric design is being worked on. The value is appended to the filename immediately before the extension. E.gFilename is cubic.agd file suffix is 3 file cubic3.agd will be inserted. The file suffix is particularly useful when working on a parametric design where you require a specific non-parameterised design to be loaded depending on which flute is being used.

Release 9.5 Page 2-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Close KASEMAKE

5.2

Origin You will also need to specify the origin where the incoming design should be inserted within the current design. There are three methods of specifying the origin:• Original origin - positions the incoming design at the origin specified when the incoming design was originally created • Absolute coordinates - selecting this option allows you to enter an x and y value to be used to position the incoming design • Specify - selecting this option allows you to pick an origin point within the current design, using any of the drawing modes. With this option, you are prompted for the origin point once the dialog is closed Click on Insert to select a file and close the dialog. If one of the first two origin methods were chosen the selected design will now be inserted. If the latter option was chosen you must pick a point using the desired drawing mode. The design will then be inserted at this point.

6

Close

Command

Close

Menu

File > Close

Shortcuts

Click the active window's Close button

Keys

ALT+F4

Use this command to close all windows containing the active design. If you have made any changes to the design, KASEMAKE prompts you to save the design before you close it. If you close a design without saving, you lose all changes made since the last time you saved it. If you are closing an untitled design and opt to save it, KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialog box to prompt you for the name of the document. A Close command can also be generated by clicking on the close icon at the top right hand corner of the drawing window.

7

Save

Command

Save

Menu

File > Save

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + S

Use this command to save the active design to its current name and folder. If you save a design for the first time, KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your design. If the design has already been saved, i.e. is titled, the previous file name and origin are used and no further action is required. If you want to change the name and folder of an existing design before you save it, choose the Save As command. For further information regarding the use of this dialog see the "Save As" section which follows.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-7

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

8

Save As

Command

Save As

Menu

File > Save As

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Use this command to save and name the active design. KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your document. To save a document with its existing name and directory, use the Save command. Files of type .AGD are created by default. A preview of the file is also generated automatically as the file is saved. • Enter the name to be used for the design directly into the filename entry field. Alternatively, click on a similar name from the list of existing designs. The name will be copied to the filename entry field and can then be edited to the required name. • Alternatively, the filename can be generated automatically using the next available option which copies the current value to the filename field and generates the next number in the sequence.

8.1

File Save As dialog box The following options allow you to specify the name and location of the file you're about to save: File Name Type a new filename to save a design with a different name. A filename can contain an extension of up to three characters. KASEMAKE adds the extension you specify in the Save as Type box. Save As Type Select the type of file you want to create .AGD files or database report files, .AGR files Save In Select the drive and directory in which KASEMAKE stores the file that you want to create by selecting from the drop down list or using the button shown to go back a level.

8.2

Origin You will also need to specify the origin to be stored with the current design. This will be used by other commands e.g. File->Insert to position the design. There are three methods of specifying the origin:• Min X,Y - stores the bottom left corner of the design as its origin • Absolute coordinates - selecting this option allows you to enter an x and y value to be stored as the origin • Specify - selecting this option allows you to pick any point within the design, using any of the drawing modes. With this option, you are prompted for the origin point once the Save As dialog is closed

Release 9.5 Page 2-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Save As Cito... KASEMAKE

8.2.1

Next Available Click on the Next Available button to choose its current setting as the required filename. You will be prompted to accept the current value. Choose Yes to copy the current value to the filename field and automatically generate the next number in the sequence. Choosing No will leave the current setting unchanged and not update the filename field.

8.2.2

Database

Set the Update database from drawing option to update the database with any information held for the border. Choose the Set fields... option to set up which fields in the datatbase are updated. Clicking on this option produces a dialog containing a list of database fields with a corresponding check box. Set or clear the check boxes to identify the required fields. Finally, choose OK to save the new field selection or Cancel to abandon any changes made. See also, Transfer from border to database on page 13-9 for further details.

8.2.3

Save Selected Elements Only You can perform a partial save by setting this option. Only the elements which are selected will then be saved. This option should be cleared if you wish to save the entire design. This option is only available where elements have been selected before File->Save As was activated.

8.2.4

Email Drawing You can save the drawing as an email attachment by setting this option. A new email will be started and the file automatically included as an attachment if this option is set. This option should be cleared if you do not wish to save the design as an email attachment.

8.2.5

Drawing Description If required, type a description of the design in the Drawing Description entry box. Click on Save to set the filename and close the dialog. If one of the first two origin methods were chosen the design will now be saved. If the latter option was chosen you must pick a point using the desired drawing mode. The design will then be saved with this point as its origin.

9

Save As Cito...

Command

Save As Cito

Menu

File > Save As Cito...

Shortcuts

Not available

The Save As Cito command allows clip strip symbols to be designed using KASEMAKE. First design the clip strip symbol. Once the clip strip design is completed, choose the Save As Cito... command to enable it to be saved in the appropriate format for the clip strip commands. Activating the Save As Cito... command results in the following dialog being displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-9

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

Set the individual grounds by clicking on the arrow and moving to the required ground. Click on a ground to select it. Once all the grounds are set correctly, click on OK to display the Save As... dialog. Specify the folder and filename in the normal way then click on Save to create the clip strip symbol.

10

Send To Sub-Menu Send To is based on the Windows Send To command and allows you to quickly send a file to a varitety of locations including, your desktop, another person using e-mail, or the My Documents folder. The list of available locations correspond to the folders located in the Windows Send To folder so will vary. Further locations can be identified using Windows commands. Click on Send To then move over the required location to highlight it. Click again to identify the location. The current design will now be sent to the corresponding location / application according to the option chosen. If the design has not previously been saved, you will first be asked if you wish to save it. Upon confirmation, you will be prompted for a filename in the usual way. Once the design is saved, the Send To command will be carried out.

11

Project Management KASEMAKE supports project management which allows you to effectively organise jobs made up of multiple designs. Designs often undergo a series of revisions before final approval by the customer. The facility to create and manage revisions of a design is provided to support this requirement. A project is made up of one or more designs which can be stored within a folder or as part of the main project. Multiple folders are allowed. Each design can be a one off or comprise of one or more revisions. Each design and revision has a set of properties associated with it which contains information about its creation as well as a preview of the individual design. Notes about a specific design can also be stored.

Release 9.5 Page 2-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Project Management KASEMAKE

11.1 Project Bar The project bar is opened when either a new project is started or an existing project is opened. The project bar is positioned at the left hand edge of the drawing area by default, although it can be repositioned or floated if required. The project bar consists of a command area where commands for maintaining a project are provided in the form of buttons and drop downs. It is also made up of a viewing area where the project components for the current project are displayed in a tree style layout.

11.1.1

Project Tree The project tree displays the hierarchy of designs and folders of designs which make up the current project. There are four basic nodes which make up the project as follows:• Project - At the top level is the project name itself. • Folder - Beneath the project you can have folders used for grouping designs or further folders. • Design - the .agd drawings for the current project stored as part of the main project or as part of a folder. • Revision - a design can have one or more revisions each linked to a .agd drawing file. The main project and individual folders can be expanded using the + icon or collapsed using the - icon as per Windows Explorer. Double clicking on a project / folder name has the same effect. Designs can be opened in the drawing area for examination or amendment by double clicking on the required design name. Right clicking on a tree node will pop up a context menu of commands depending upon the type of node.

11.1.1.1 Project Context Menu The project context menu comprises the following commands :-

Edit Label This command enables you to change the name of the project. Click on the current project name and an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use the enter key to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

Print All This command prints each design within the project in turn.

Properties This command displays the project properties. They are displayed in a property view beneath the project bar by default. They can be repositioned or floated as per the project bar. The properties for a project consist of a notes page containing a reference field and any notes to be stored for this project.

11.1.1.2 Design Context Menu The design context menu comprises four commands as follows:-

Open This command opens the current design in the drawing area readyfor amendments or examination.

Edit Label This command enables you to change the name of the design. Click on the current design name and an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use the enter key to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-11

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

Properties This command displays the design properties. They are displayed in a tabbed page layout. Each tab contains a description of the properties on that page. Click on a tab to display the properties for that tab type. Properties consist of :Dates - Information about when created and who by. Preview - A preview of the design Notes - Provision for a reference and notes to be entered for this design Drawing Info. - Statistics about the current design including overall dimensions and rule length.

Upgrade File Format This command upgrades any designs made with a previous version of KASEMAKE to the same format as those produced in the current version. This ensures that revisions of the design can be created. Simply activate the command and the current design will be converted.

Create Revision This command saves the current design as the latest revision of itself. Simpy activate this command a new revision will then appear beneath the design with a default revision number and title and the current date and time. The title can be changed. The drawing representing this revision is created with the same title as the current design but a # followed by the revision number is appended to differentiate it from the current design. e.g. Base.agd#1 is revision 1 of design Base. Note:

You can only create a revision once a design has been saved to disk as a result of saving the project.

11.1.1.3 Revision Context Menu The revision context menu comprises three commands as follows:-

Open This command opens the selected revision for the current design in the drawing area ready for examination. The revision is read only.

Edit Label This command enables you to change the name of the revision. Click on the current revision name and an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use the enter key to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

Properties This command displays the properties of the revision. They are displayed in a tabbed page layout. The properties are the same as those for a design but relate to the current revision of the design only. See “Design Context Menu” on page 11.

Set Active This command makes the current revision active which means that amendments can be made. The selected revision becomes the new current design overwriting the current version of it. When the command is activated you will be prompted “Create a new revision from the current drawing?” If you choose “Yes”, the current version of the design will be saved as the latest revision before the selected revision becomes the current version of the design. If you choose “No”, the current version of the design will be replaced bythe selected revision and any unsaved changes will be lost.

11.1.2

Project Bar Commands Before activating a project bar command you should ensure that you click on the design / folder name you wish to work with as all the commands work on the currently selected design / folder.

Release 9.5 Page 2-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Project Management KASEMAKE The project bar gives access to the following commands.:-

11.1.2.1 Create New Document This is a drop down list of commands available for adding a document to the current project or folder. First make sure that the project or folder you wish to add to is active by clicking on its name in the project view. Click on the arrow to display the available options then drag the cursor to the required command and click on it to select it. The icon corresponding to the chosen command will be displayed. Each command is now explained:-

Blank Drawing This command creates a blank document in the drawing area ready for a new design, adding it to the current folder or direct to the current project depending upon which is active. Simply drag the cursor over the blank drawing option and a new drawing is added with a default name.

Parametric Runs a parametric standard and adds it to the current project or folder. Activating this command displays the Run Dialog. Simply enter the name of the required standard in the usual way and set any options as appropriate. Click on Run to display the chosen standard. Full details of running a standard can be found in the Parametrics section of this manual. See “Run” on page 7-1.

Insert Files This command will insert 2D and 3D drawings into the current project or folder. Select this command and the File Insert dialog will be displayed. You should now select the type of file you wish to insert and the filename in the usual way. Finally select Open to display the design and insert it into the current project or folder. For full details of how to specify a file to insert refer to the File Open command in this section. See “File Open dialog box” on page 6.

11.1.2.2 New Folder This command allows you to create a folder into which you can add related designs to keep them together. Select the command. A new folder is automatically added to the project or current folder. A default name is given which you can accept by hitting the enter key. Alternatively type an appropriate name and hit enter to set it. The new folder now becomes the current folder to enable you to start adding designs.

11.1.2.3 Edit Label This command allows you to alter a folder or design name. First click on the folder or design name to select it. Now activate this command. The label will be removed and you can now type the required name. Press enter to store the new label.

11.1.2.4 Delete Files This command allows you to delete a folder or design from the current project. First click on the folder or design name to select it. Now activate this command. The design or folder and all designs within the folder will now be removed. No confirmation is required so this command should be used with caution.

11.1.2.5 Show Tiled View This command opens all the designs contained within the current project including those grouped into folders. They are displayed in a tiled format in the drawing area.

11.1.2.6 Save Project This is a drop down list containing a subset of the commands which are provided by the Files>Project Menu. They include commands for saving the current project as well as starting a new project.. Click on the arrow to display the available options then drag the cursor to the required command and click on it to select it. The icon corresponding to the chosen command will be displayed. Each command is now explained:-

New Project This command creates a new empty project, placing it above any currently opened projects in the project bar. Simply drag the cursor over this option and a dialog will appear asking for the

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-13

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE name and location for the new project. Whatever name you choose a folder with the given name will be automatically created to hold the designs for the new project. The folder will be created as a subfolder of the location you specify. Once you have entered the project name and chosen an appropriate location click on OK to create the new project view ready for you to add designs.

Save This command saves the entire contents of the current project tree to disk. The filenames used to store each design are appended to the design label in the project tree to reflect they have been saved. A .PRJ file is created for the project using the project name and location previously specified. A .AGD file is also created for each design in the project. Activate this command and KASEMAKE will save the files without need for further intervention.

Save As This command saves the entire contents of the project to a new location changing the project name as specified. After activating this command you will be prompted to enter a new project name and a location for the project. Type in appropriate values then click on OK. A new folder will now be created with the given project name as a subfolder of the given location. A .PRJ file will be created with the project name and a .AGD file will be created for each of the designs in the project. Options are also available to create a database record for the project and also to create records for each design within the project. The project tree will be updated to show the new project name.

Pack Project This command allows you to compress all the designs in a project into one file. This function is useful when you wish to send a project to another KASEMAKE user or you wish to archive a project. Activate this command. You will now be required to specify a filename for the compressed .CAB file. Enter a name in the usual way. A single cabinet file with this name will now be created containing a compressed version of all the files in the project. The Unpack Project command explained in the next section can be used to restore a .CAB file.

11.2 Project Sub-Menu The project menu gives access to the project management commands which allow you to create and manipulate any projects.

11.2.1

New Project...

Command

New Project...

Menu

File > Project > New Project...

Shortcuts

Project Bar

This command creates a new project. Activate this command. The following dialog will now be displayed:-

Release 9.5 Page 2-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Project Management KASEMAKE

Project Name Type in an appropriate value for the project name. Alternatively, if you wish the name to be automatically generated, click on the Next Available button. You will be prompted with the next available value for the project name. Click on Yes if you wish to accept this value, or No if you wish to type your own name. It is also possible to associate the project name with a database field. Please refer to “Associate Project Name” on page 13-13 for further details.

Project Location A default location for the project will automatically be displayed. This is determined from the Project Folder setting in Preferences->File Locations. See “File Locations” on page 49. If you wish to use an alternative location, you can enter the required project location directly. Alternatively, click on the ... button to display the Browse for Folder dialog to assist you with identifying the required location. Click on the appropriate folder names until the required location is displayed. Finally click on OK to enter the location automatically. It is also possible to associate the project location with a database field. Please refer to “Associate Project Location” on page 13-13 for further details.

Add Project to Database If you wish to create a database record for the project, set this option otherwise clear it.

Add Drawing(s) to Database If you wish to create a database record for each design in the project, set this option otherwise clear it.

Full Path A folder with the same name as that given for the project, is automatically created to store the new project and its related design files. This is placed beneath the folder specified by the project location. The Full Path field is used to give visual confirmation of the final location of the project.

Finally, click on OK to create the project view showing the new empty project tree ready for you to add your designs.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-15

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE As more than one project can be opened at once, the new project is placed above any currently opened projects in the project bar. A disk folder with the chosen project name is automatically created to hold the designs for this project. It is created as a subfolder of the folder specified for the project location.

11.2.2

Open Project...

Command

Open Project...

Menu

File > Project > Open Project...

Shortcuts

Not available

This command enables you to open an existing project. Activate the command and an Open dialog will appear asking for the name of the project. to open. Select the name in the usual way then click on OK to open the requested project in the project view displaying its contents in a tree structure ready for you to examine and add to your designs. As more than one project can be opened at once, the project is placed above any currently opened projects in the project bar.

11.2.3

Close Project

Command

Close Project

Menu

File > Project > Close Project

Shortcuts

Not available

This command closes the current project. Activate the command. If there are any unsaved changes to the project you will be asked whether to save the project first. Click on “Yes” to save the changes or “No” to close the project and abandon any changes. If no changes have been made the project and associated files will be closed and the project view removed from the project bar.

11.2.4

Save Project

Command

Save Project

Menu

File > Project > Save Project

Shortcuts

Project Bar

This command saves the entire contents of the current project tree to disk. The filenames used to store each design are appended to the design label in the project tree to reflect they have been saved. A .PRJ file is created for the project using the project name and location previously specified. A .AGD file is also created for each design in the project. Activate this command and KASEMAKE will save the files without need for further intervention.

11.2.5

Save Project As...

Command

Save Project As...

Menu

File > Project > Save Project As...

Shortcuts

Project Bar

This command saves the entire contents of the project to a new location changing the project name as specified.

Release 9.5 Page 2-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Revision Info... KASEMAKE Activate this command. A dialog will now be displayed requesting the name and location for the project file. Please refer to “New Project...” on page 14 for further details. Once the project details are confirmed, a new folder will be created with the given project name as a subfolder of the given location. A .PRJ file will be created with the project name and a .AGD file will be created for each of the designs in the project. If applicable, a database record corresponding to the project and one for each of the designs within it will also be created. Finally, the project tree will be updated to show the new project name.

11.2.6

Create Preview

Command

Create Preview

Menu

File > Project > Create Preview

Shortcuts

Project Bar

This command creates a preview for the project which will be displayed when the database record corresponding to that project is viewed. The contents of the preview will correspond to whichever project design is visible when the command is activated. Activate this command to automatically create a corresponding preview file.

11.2.7

Pack Project...

Command

Pack Project...

Menu

File > Project > Pack Project...

Shortcuts

Project Bar

This command allows you to compress all the designs in a project into one file. This function is useful when you wish to send a project to another KASEMAKE user or you wish to archive a project. Activate this command. You will now be required to specify a filename for the compressed .CAB file. Enter a name in the usual way. A single cabinet file with this name will now be created containing a compressed version of all the files in the project.

11.2.8

Unpack Project...

Command

Unpack Project...

Menu

File > Project > Unpack Project...

Shortcuts

Not available

The Unpack Project command is used to restore a project from a .CAB file. Activate the command. You will now be prompted for the name of the .CAB cabinet file to unpack. Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK. You will now be asked where you wish to place the restored files. Enter the location for the project. The project will now be decompressed and the .prj file and .agd files stored in a subfolder with the project name below the location you specified. The project can now be loaded using the Open Project command as detailed previously. See “Open Project...” on page 16.

12

Revision Info...

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Command

Revision Info...

Menu

File > Revision Info...

Shortcuts

Not available

Release 9.5 Page 2-17

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE This command allows you to view all the revision information for the current design. Activate the command . An Edit Revisions dialog is now displayed. A list of the revisions for the current design is displayed to the left of the dialog. Details of the current revision are displayed in a tabbed format at the right of the dialog. The details include dates revision was created and amended, a preview of the revision and any notes held for that revision. Click on the corresponding tab to view the page of details. A full description of the revision details available are described for Project Properties. See “Design Context Menu” on page 11.

13

Print

Command

Print

Menu

File > Print

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + P

Use this command to print the current design using one of your standard Windows printer drivers. This command presents a Print dialog box, where you may specify the number of copies, the destination printer, whether you are printing to file or directly to the printer and other printer setup options. Further print options are available through the Print->Options command on page 2-20.

13.1 Print dialog box The following options allow you to specify how the design should be printed: Printer This is the active printer and printer connection. Choose from the drop down list. Details about the selected printer are then displayed. Print Range If you choose a scale to print for your design rather than Auto scale, the design will normally overlap onto more than one page. The Print Range allows you to determine which pages of the design to print. •Choose All to print the entire design. •Choose Pages and set the start page and end page to be printed by typing directly into the corresponding edit boxes. •Choose Selection if you just want to print selected items. For details of scaling refer to the Print->Options command on page 2-20. Copies Specify the number of copies of the design you want to print. Properties All other printer settings are accessed through the Properties button. Click on this to access the properties of the selected printer. The resulting dialog is dependent upon the printer selected. Refer to your printer manual for a full explanation of these settings. File Set the print to file option if you wish to send the design to file rather than directly to the printer.

Release 9.5 Page 2-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Print Preview KASEMAKE If you have chosen to print to file the Print to File dialog will appear after the Print dialog is closed. This requests the file name for the saved printed design. The default extension is .PRN. Simply set the filename then click on Save to create the print file. See "File Save As dialog box" on page 2-8 for further details on setting a filename.

13.2 Print Progress Dialog The Printing dialog box is shown during the time that KASEMAKE is sending output to the printer. The page number indicates the progress of the printing. To abort printing, choose Cancel.

14

Print Preview

Command

Print Preview

Menu

File > Print Preview

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Use this command to display the active design, as it would appear when printed. It is useful for checking that scaling and positioning are correct. When you choose this command, the main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which the design will be displayed in its printed format. The print preview toolbar offers you options to zoom in and out of the design, to examine the different pages which make up the design, dependent upon scaling chosen. You can also use this command to initiate a print job.

14.1 Print Preview Toolbar The print preview toolbar offers you the following options: Print Bring up the print dialog box, to start a print job. Restores the normal view of the design. Next Page Take a look at the next page of the design. Only available where scaling is selected. Prev Page Take a look at the previous page of the design. Only available where scaling is selected. Two Page / One Page Toggles between a two page representation of the design or a single page representation of the design. Zoom In Take a closer look at the current page. Zoom Out Take a look at more of the current page. Close Return from print preview to the editing window.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-19

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

15

Print Options

Command

Print Options

Menu

File > Print Options

Shortcuts

Not available

The print options supplement the other printer specific settings set through the File->Print command. Activating this command produces the Print Options dialog, where you specify the scaling and alignment of the printed output. Scale Select the required scale. Autoscale means the design will be adjusted to fill the page. Units If a scaling ratio is selected, you will need to specify the type of units you are working with. Click on the appropriate value. Whole Drawing Check this option to print the whole design rather than just the section of design currently within the drawing area. This is only applicable where auto scaling has been selected. Centred Check this option to centre the design on the printed page. Alternatively, uncheck this option if you are using a large output device driven by a Windows printer driver. This will position the design in the bottom left corner of the page. Merge from Database This option is only available when printing .AGR files. If checked, any fields within the report file which link to the database, will have the corresponding information added for each record in the database. Click on Print... to invoke the File->Print command. Alternatively, click OK to save the settings for future use or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

16

Page Setup

Command

Page Setup

Menu

File > Page Setup

Toolbar Button Standard Toolbar The page setup command supplements the other printer specific settings set through the File->Print command and File->Print Options command. Use this command to define the page specific settings. Activating this command produces the Page Setup dialog box. After defining the page setup, use the Print command to bring up the Print dialog box, to start a print job.

16.1 Page Setup dialog box Paper Size Select the size of paper that the design is to be printed on.

Release 9.5 Page 2-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Plot KASEMAKE Paper Source Some printers offer multiple trays for different paper sources. Specify the tray here. Orientation Choose Portrait or Landscape. Margins Set individual margins if required, by clicking in the corresponding edit box and selecting the current value, then typing the new value. Printer… Choose this option to select the destination printer and its connection. A further Page Setup dialog box will be displayed with the following options: Printer Select the printer you want to use from the currently installed printers shown in the drop down list. You can install printers and configure ports using Windows Control Panel. Network... If you wish to select a printer from the network, choose this option. A dialog will then appear to help you to locate a printer from those available through your network. Properties Displays a dialog box where you can make additional choices about printing, specific to the type of printer you have selected.

17

Plot

Command

Plot

Menu

File > Plot

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

The Plot command allows you to produce a hard copy of your design on any available plotter. You may need to run the command View->Plotters to install your plotter if you have not done this previously. Refer to "Plotters" on page 10-15 in the Views Menu chapter for further details. Only the visible elements of the design will be plotted. The bottom left of the design is placed at the bottom left of the sheet of paper being used. The design will be plotted one ground at a time., in order of grounds, i.e. ground 0 then ground 1 etc.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-21

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE Activate this command. The Plotting Setup dialog now appears:-

This displays the current plotter settings together with a preview of the design as it will appear on the selected sheet of paper utilising the current settings. The white area represents the current sheet of paper selected. The overall size of the design is also displayed to assist in determining the correct scale to use.

17.1 Plotter Settings 17.1.1

Plotter Set the plotter to use from the drop down list of available plotters. If the plotter you wish to use does not appear in the drop down list, you will need to add the plotter first using the View>Plotters command. Refer to "Plotters" on page 10-15 in the Views Menu chapter for further details of installing additional plotters.

17.1.1.1 Plotter Setup For certain plotters the Setup button is available which when accessed allows further parameters to be defined specific to that plotter. For example if the 3020 Rotary Mill is selected as the plotter

Release 9.5 Page 2-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Plot KASEMAKE to be used, accessing the Setup command will produce the following dialog:-

Set the appropriate values by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll. Click on OK to accept the new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes.

17.1.2

Profile You can define a tool profile for certain plotting tables. The profile controls the speed and depth of the tool. Some plotters only support pen speed, others only support pen depth. This option only becomes available when you select a plotter which supports profiles. Select the required profile from the drop down list. If you wish to add a new profile, or alter an existing profile, click on Edit...

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-23

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

The pen settings dialog, comprising a table of settings for each tool on the currently selected plotter which make up the current profile, now appears. To display a different profile, select an alternative from the drop down list. The corresponding settings will appear. Three command buttons are also displayed.

Add New Choose this command to add a new profile. The Add New Profile dialog will appear. Type in a name for your profile. Click on OK to accept the new profile adopting the settings of the previous displayed profile. Click on Cancel to return to the tool details dialog and ignore any changes.

Delete Use this command to delete the current profile. Confirmation is required.

OK Use this command to save any changes and return to the Plotter Setup dialog. The tool details can be set up as follows:-

17.1.2.1 Plot Circles Below For certain materials, cutting small circles can produce a spiral effect where the start and end don’t meet. This option is provide to allow the circle to be cut from the start point in either direction ensuringa complete circle is produced. Enable this option to plot circles twice, in the manner described above, if their radius is below the given value. When this option is set, the radius control is enabled. You can now specify the value to use for the radius or leave it at the current setting.

17.1.2.2 Lock X and Y Depth If this option is set, and tool depths are supported by the current plotter, the Depth in X and

Release 9.5 Page 2-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Plot KASEMAKE Depth in Y will always be equal. Changing one automatically sets the other.

17.1.2.3 Pass Number A different profile can be determined for each tool pass. For example, when cutting very dense board, it is not always possible to cut through it in one pass without deflecting the blade or indeed breaking it. The problem is solved by allowing more than one pass with the tool. Different depths are specified for each pass to ensure the required depth of cut is achieved. Set the pass number to show and alter the settings for a specific pass as described next.

17.1.2.4 Material Top Reference This is the distance from the plotter bed to the top of the material and is only applicable to certain plotters. Set the material top reference to the required value by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll.

17.1.2.5 Speed A percentage of the maximum speed to use for this tool. To change the value, click in the speed column. If speed is supported by the selected plotter, a spin control now appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.2.6 Depth In X The depth in mm to penetrate the material for movement of the tool in the X direction. To change the value, click in the corresponding column. If pen depths are supported, a spin control now appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.2.7 Depth In Y The depth in mm to penetrate the material for movement of the tool in the Y direction. To change the value, click in the corresponding column. If pen depths are supported, a spin control now appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.2.8 Crossover Angle The angle in degrees to use to differentiate between movement in the X direction and movement in the Y direction, when deciding which depth to apply. Movement less than the crossover angle is considered to be movement in the X direction. Movement greater than the crossover angle is considered to be movement in the Y direction.

17.1.2.9 Width Where a laser is used, the width of cut to use can be specified. To change the value, click in the corresponding column. If width is supported, a spin control now appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the current value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.3

Optimise Choice Optimise Choice determines the optimization method to apply to the current plot. It is set through the Optimise And Order command. See “Optimise and Order” on page 8-16.

17.1.4

Common Line Common lines exist where one line overlays another and are a natural consequence of certain geometric techniques. Normally they exist within a design without having any undesired effect. Unfortunately, when it comes to sample making / die making they can cause problems. A Common Line function which allows these problem lines to be removed, has therefore been integrated into the Plot command to remove any such lines before the sample / die is made. If you wish to remove common lines , set the Common Line check box.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-25

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE When this setting is chosen, the Options button becomes available. Simply click on the Options button to display the Common Line Options dialog:-

Merge Touching Lines If you answer Yes all lines in the same direction with a common start or end point will be joined into one as part of the sorting process. If you answer No then this joining process will not take place. Explode Groups If you answer Yes any grouping information for your current design will be removed and only single elements will remain. If you answer No the grouping information will be retained. Remove Zero Length Items It is possible for a drawing to contain elements of zero length as a result of a particular sequence of commands. This option allows you to tidy up these unnecessary elements. If you answer Yes any zero length items will automatically be removed if found. If you answer No zero length items will be ignored.

Finally, click on OK to set the options to use. Note:

17.1.5

Common Line removal is carried out automatically upon confirmation of the Plot... Command.

Paper Size Set the size of paper you wish to work with either by selecting from a predefined range of sizes or by typing the values directly. To choose a predefined size, set the predefined paper size check box. Select the paper size to use from the available list of sizes. To define your own paper size, clear the predefined paper size check box. Enter the x and y dimensions for your sheet of paper in the corresponding boxes. The design will be redisplayed to show the new sheet size and the position and size of the design with respect to the new paper size.

17.1.6

Scale Set the scale to use from the available list. Auto scale will adjust the design to fill the sheet of paper being used. Again, the design will be redisplayed to show the effect of the change in scale.

Release 9.5 Page 2-26

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Plot KASEMAKE

17.1.7

Units You should set the units that you are using by clicking on the corresponding radio button. The overall size and margins will be redisplayed to reflect the chosen units.

17.1.8

Margins A left and bottom margin can be set if required. The margins only have an effect if the drawing is not centred. Click on the current value to select it then retype the required value.

17.1.9

Centred In The design can be centred in X, in Y or in both. Click on the X / Y buttons to set the option on or off. The margins are ignored if centring is applied. The design will be redisplayed to show the effect of the Centred In settings.

17.1.10

Flip About The design can be mirrored about the horizontal axis, vertical axis or both. Click on the horizontal / vertical buttons to set the options on or off. The design will be redisplayed to show the effect of the Flip About settings.

17.1.11

Rotation A design can be rotated by a factor of 90 degrees to follow flute or grain direction or to achieve a better fit when plotted. The design can be rotated form 0 degrees up to 270 degrees then resorts back to 0 degrees. Click on the +90 button to rotate the design an additional 90 degrees. The design will be redisplayed to show its positioning within the plotted sheet. Note:

17.1.12

The original design is not affected by this command.

Bounds You can select to change the bounding rectangle of your design which determines its position and scale on the current plotter page. Click on the option required from :• Absolute - all elements within the design will be taken into account regardless of whether they are on view or not. • Visible - only those elements which are currently visible will be taken into account The dotted rectangle representing the plotting area and the position of your design will update in the preview area to reflect the option you have chosen.

17.1.13

Linestyle You can select to plot everything in a single given linestyle, or to plot in the linestyle the elements are drawn in. Click on the single linestyle check box to set / unset the option. A tick will appear to show that it is set. Choose the linestyle to use by clicking on the arrow to reveal a list of linestyles. Click on the arrows to scroll to the required value. Click on the required value to select it. No visual changes will be shown.

17.2 Completing Plotter Setup Once adjustments to the settings are complete. You can select one of the following to proceed:-

17.2.1

OK Click on OK to store the new settings ready for future plot commands. The Plotter Setup dialog will close and the settings will be saved. No plotting will be performed.

17.2.2

Cancel Click on Cancel to abandon any changes to the settings. The Plotter Setup dialog will close and

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-27

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE the previous settings will be restored. No plotting will be performed.

17.2.3

Plotter… Choose this option to select the plotter and plotter specific properties.

17.2.4

Plot The Plot command allows you to send the design to the selected plotter, using the current settings. Click on Plot to activate the Plot dialog. This dialog confirms the status and type of plotter selected and the port to which the plotter is connected. You can change the plotter at this stage if required, by clicking on the arrow to open the Name drop down list. Scrolling through the available list of plotters and clicking on the name of the required plotter to select it. You can also view the selected plotters properties, by clicking on the Properties button to access the Properties dialog specific to that plotter. Refer to "Plotters" on page 10-15 in the Views Menu chapter for further details on changing plotter properties. The Plot dialog also has a Plot to File option. Click on the corresponding check box if you wish your plotter output to be directed to file, rather than directly to the selected plotter. If you wish to plot more than one copy, click on the Enable buffer repeating check box to set it. Finally, if you wish to proceed with the plot, click on OK. If you have selected to plot to file, you will now be prompted for the filename. Enter the filename in the usual way, see ""Save As"" on page 2-8 for a full explanation. Click on Save to proceed. The design will now be output to the selected plotter or be sent to the named file if this option has been set. Click on Cancel to abandon the plot command.

17.2.5

Simulate... The Simulate command provides a visual confirmation of the plotting sequence to ensure that there are no problems before the design is cut / plotted. Ensure that appropriate optimise and common line options are chosen before accessing the

Release 9.5 Page 2-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Plot KASEMAKE Simulate... command. The Plot Order Preview dialog is displayed as shown:-

The dialog contains a preview of the design with a white circle to indicate the start of the first element to be processed. The circle is moved around the design to simulate the plotting order. It is possible to zoom in on a part of the design by moving the mouse into the preview area. The zoom + cursor is now displayed. Drag a rubber band box around the area you wish to zoom, in the usual way. The design will now enlarge to show the chosen area in more detail. Beneath the preview are various controls:-

17.2.5.1 Element within drawing This is a slider which indicates which element in the plotting sequence is being processed. By default the elements are processed from start to end but you can drag the slider to begin processing from any element within the design sequence. The white circle will move accordingly to reflect the progress through the design.

17.2.5.2 Speed Speed is also a slider which can be dragged to adjust the speed with which the design elements are processed.

17.2.5.3 Zoom All The Zoom All command allows you to preview the whole design after zooming in on a particular area. Simply click on the button and the whole design will be displayed.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-29

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

17.2.5.4 Move to Start The Move to Start button is used to return the processing sequence to the beginning of the design.

17.2.5.5 Reverse The Reverse button is used to reverse the processing sequence working backwards from the last element towards the first element of the design. After Reverse is accessed it is replaced by a pause button. Clicking on Pause will allow processing to be stopped at any stage.

17.2.5.6 Forward The Forward button is used to begin processing the elements from the current position towards the last element of the design. After Forward is accessed it is replaced by a pause button. Clicking on Pause will allow processing to be stopped at any stage.

17.2.5.7 Move to End The Move to End button is used to advance the processing sequence to the end of the design.

17.2.5.8 Plot...

Accessing Plot... enables you to continue with the plot command.

17.2.5.9 Cancel Cancel returns you to the Plotting Setup dialog.

18

Plot Selected

Command

Plot Selected

Menu

File > Plot Selected

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

This command plots only selected elements within a design. Before you can activate this command you should identify the elements you wish to plot. Once the elements are identified. Activate the command. The command now works as per the File->Plot command described in the previous section but uses only the selected elements. See “Plot” on page 2-21.

19

Import

Command

Import

Menu

File > Import

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

The import command provides a way of loading designs stored in an alternative file format to the standard .AGD and .PIC design file format. These can be files produced by other systems. The following formats are currently supported:-

Release 9.5 Page 2-30

1

CF2 - Common file format files

2

PLT - HP Artwork files

3

HGL - HP Graphics Language files

4

EPS - Postscript files including those with tiff header files

5

PDF - Adobe portable document format files

6

DWG - AutoCad Drawing File

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Import KASEMAKE 7

DXF - Data Exchange format files

8

RP2 - Report Files 32 bit version only

9

RP1 - DXF conversion report files

10

RPT - Report Files compatible with 16 bit version

11

EMF – Windows enhanced metafiles

12

DDS – Ddes format files

13

DAT - IPDS format files

14

LAY – IPDS layout files

15

DSP – MasterCAD design files

16

DAT – MasterCAD layout files

17

M – BCSI PD2000 design files

18

N – Elcede layout files

19

S – Elcede design files

20

DD3 - Ddes version 3 format files

Activating the Files->Import command produces an Import dialog. This works in the same way as the Open dialog. Set the Files of type filter to the required file format. Set the preview option to display a preview of the currently selected file or clear this option if this facility is not required. If you are importing several files and wish to import them all into the current design set the Import to current drawing, check box. Alternatively, clear this check box to import each file to an individual design. Set the directory. Now specify one or more files to be imported holding down the SHIFT/CTRL keys to enable multiple selection. Finally, click on Open to import the requested files. Refer to "Open" on page 2-5 for further details on setting the directory and filename. If you have opted to import the file(s) to the current drawing, you will now be prompted for an origin for each of the selected files as it is imported. Simply select an appropriate origin when prompted using any of the available drawing modes. The imported file will then be inserted into the current design at the given position.

Some of the file formats have options namely formats 1 - 5, 7 and 12 - 20 as listed above. Where the Files of type filter is set to one of these options, the Options button will be enabled. The options available for the chosen file format can be displayed by clicking on the Options>> button which expands the dialog box. Conversely, clicking on the Explode command. Click on the Options>> button, if necessary, to display the following options:-

•Short lines when exploded - choose this setting if you wish any bezier curves to be replaced by short lines if they are subsequently exploded •Arcs when exploded - choose this setting if you wish any bezier curves to be replaced by a sequence of arcs if they are subequently exploded Arc Slider - only accessible where Arcs when exploded is chosen. This varies the number of arcs used to replace the bezier curve. Simply click on the slider and drag it to the required setting. Generally, the more arcs used the smoother the result on screen, but there may be a performance cost. •Explode Curves - determines whether the bezier curves are exploded as they are imported or not. Set or clear the corresponding check box as appropriate. Set the options as required. Finally click on Open to load the chosen file.

For most of the file formats, the KASEMAKE system requires no further information, the requested file will be loaded when the Open button is pressed. However, the following formats require extra user interaction before the requested file can be imported.

19.2 CF2 Format The system will display a window containing all the customer information relating to this order. In addition to visually examining the information, you have the option to save the prompts and responses as a .CFM message file that you can use with future CF2 export commands. Click on Close to close the order information window and view the imported design.

Release 9.5 Page 2-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Export KASEMAKE

19.3 DXF Format The system will display a dialog box requesting:• DXF Units - the units used when the file was created Click on the appropriate button. Finally, press OK to import the file.

20

Export

Command

Export

Menu

File > Export

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

The export command provides a way of creating designs in an alternative file format to the standard .AGD and .PIC design file format. These files can then be used by systems other than KASEMAKE. The following formats are currently supported:• CF2 - Common file format files • Pacer CFF2 - Common file format files compatible with the Pacer range of routers • HGL - Artwork files • EPS - Postscript files • AI – Adobe Illustrator files • DXF - Data Exchange format files • RP2 - Report Files 32 bit version only • RP1 - DXF conversion report files • RPT - Report Files compatible with 16 bit version • CMF - Parametric command files • BMP – Windows bitmap files • TIF – Tiff image files (Tagged image file format) • JPG – JPEG image files (Joint Photographic Experts Group) • PNG - Portable Network Graphics Files • GIF - Graphics Interchange Files • EMF – Windows enhanced metafiles • DDS – Ddes format files • DAT - IPDS format files • DSP – MasterCAD design files • M – BCSI PD2000 design files • N – Elcede layout files • PDF – Adobe Portable Document Format files • PDF – Adobe PDF (International) files. Provides better handling of non-western character sets • DD3 - DDes version 3 format files • SWF - Shock Wave format files

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-33

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE Activating the Files->Export command produces an Export dialog. This works in the same way as the Save dialog. Set the Save as type filter to the required file format. Set the directory and filename. It is possible to export only part of a design. Set the export selected items only option if you wish to do this. Otherwise clear it to export the entire design. Note:

You should select the elements to be exported using one of the available selection methods, before you activate the Export command.

Set the Email File option, if you wish to e-mail the exported design, otherwise clear it. Finally, click on Save to export the current design (part design) to the named file. Refer to ""Save As"" on page 2-8 for further details on setting the directory and filename. If you have set the Email File option a new e-mail will also be created with an attachment to the newly exported design, ready for you to add any text and complete the sender details. Some of the file formats have additional options which are revealed by clicking on the Options>> button. This button is only enabled where options exist for the current format displayed in the Save as type filter drop down. Full details of available options are described for each individual format as applicable. For most of the file formats, the KASEMAKE system requires no further information, the named file will be created when the Save button is pressed. More detailed information is now given for individual formats, where either options exist or where further user interaction is required before the design can be exported.

20.1 CF2 Format 20.1.1

Options

Elliptical Elements This format does not support elliptical elements. Choose either to convert them to individual lines segments or to a representation made up from a number of circular arcs. Where circular arcs is chosen, the sliding scale control for the number of arcs used to represent an elliptical element now becomes accessible. Increase the number of arcs for a smoother effect. Decrease it where less accuracy is needed. Simply click on the slider and drag it to change this value.

Text CFF2 file format does not support truetype text. This option is included to determine an alternative method for outputting truetype text. If this option is set, a linear outline representation of the text string is written to the export file.

Release 9.5 Page 2-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Export KASEMAKE If it is not set, the text will be output as small lines representing each of the characters in the text string

Mapping The CFF2 file format has a mapping option. This provides KASEMAKE with information on how to map its grounds to CFF2 line types in the exported file. Click on the arrow to display a list of available mappings. Click on the required mapping name in the list to select it. Note:

20.1.2

Mappings are defined with the File->Preferences command. See “Preferences” on page 2-44.

CF2 Message Dialog The system will display a window for you to enter the customer information relating to this order. A standard set of prompts will be loaded for you to enter an appropriate response. You can alter these prompts by selecting them and retyping as required. Once the prompts and responses are set as required, click on the CF2 button or the Windows Close button to close the message window and generate the named .CF2 file. A menu of command buttons providing functions to help you define the prompts and responses is available as follows:-

20.1.2.1 Append You can choose to load an alternative set of prompts which can include standard responses, from an existing .CFM message file. Specify the filename as described in "Open" on page 2-5. The prompts and corresponding responses if available, will be loaded at the end of the current list of prompts. If you want to replace the current responses completely, you should first use the Clear command to remove the current list. See "Clear" on page 2-35 for further details.

20.1.2.2 Save Save allows you to save the current list of prompts and responses to the currently open .CFM message file. This is AGCAD.CFM by default.

20.1.2.3 Save As Save As is similar to Save but allows you to specify the filename. This allows you to preserve the currently open .CFM file, making an alternative file with the new prompts.

20.1.2.4 Clear This command allows you to remove all the current prompts and responses from the CF2 message window. You must confirm that this is your intention by clicking the Yes button, before the prompts are removed. Click on No to leave the messages unchanged.

20.1.2.5 Delete Field Delete field will remove the contents of the field where the cursor is. This can be a prompt or a response. Click in the field to be removed before selecting this command as no confirmation is required.

20.1.2.6 Delete Delete removes an entire message entry, both prompt and response. Ensure that the cursor is positioned on the correct entry, either in the prompt or in the message field, before selecting this command as confirmation is not required.

20.1.2.7 Insert Insert will insert a blank message entry at the current cursor position. The message where the cursor is positioned and any succeeding messages will be shuffled down to make room for the new entry.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-35

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

20.1.2.8 CF2 Clicking on CF2 will generate the .CF2 file using the customer information that is currently displayed in the CF2 message window. The message window will also be closed.

20.2 HGL Format It is essential that the design is passed to any artworking system accurately. This can be at true size or scaled. The scale is dictated by the artworking system to be used. For example, at the time of going to print CORELDRAW could accept items up to 762 mm square. Therefore, to fit a corrugated case with an overall blank size of 1800 mm by 1000 mm you would require a scale of 1:3. Alternatively, you can specify the scale as a paper size. The design will then be scaled up or down to fit the limits of the paper size specified. In order to set the scale you need to activate the options for this format. Please refer to ”Scale” in the next section for a full explanation of the options.

20.3 EPS Format Produces Postscript format files used by artworking programs on MAC systems. The command operates in the same way as HGL Format but produces .EPS files. A tiff preview header can also be added, optionally.

20.3.1

Options The following options are provided :-

Scale • Click on Scale to give an exact scale. The pulldown list of available scales now becomes selectable. Choose the required scale from the pulldown list of available values. • Click on Fit to Paper to specify the scale as a paper size. The paper size options now become selectable. Click on the required paper size option.

Include Preview - (EPS only) Set this option to include a tiff header with the exported file. This is used as a preview of the file contents. Clear if a header is not required.

20.4

AI Format Produces Adobe Illustrator format files. The command operates in the same way as HGL Format but produces .AI files. Refer to the section "HGL Format" for further details.

Release 9.5 Page 2-36

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Export KASEMAKE

20.5 DXF Format A description of the options for DXF format now follows:-

20.5.1

DXF Units The units to be used to create the DXF file.

20.5.2

DXF Layer Information You are required to choose a method for determining which layer an element is placed in. This is because DXF supports multiple colours in a single layer, whereas KASEMAKE only allows one colour per layer. • One colour per layer - check this option to maintain the layering information ignoring the colour if necessary • Many colours on a single layer - check this option to keep colours the same, relayering as necessary.

20.5.3

DXF Linestyle Information You are required to choose a method for determining which linestyle an element is drawn in. This is because DXF supports linestyles which are not available in KASEMAKE. • Single linestyle (Solid) - check this option to define all elements with solid linestyle • Multiple linestyles - check this option to maintain the linestyle settings, attempting to emulate them where necessary

20.5.4

DXF Text Refer to options for CFF2. See “Text” on page 2-34.

20.5.5

Elliptical Elements Refer to options for CFF2. See “Options” on page 2-34.

20.5.6

Mapping Refer to options for CFF2. See “Options” on page 2-34.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-37

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

20.5.7

Layer Output This option is mainly for compatibility with Pacer routers as they expect layer information to be numerical. If set this option will prepend the “AG_LAYER_” prefix to the layer name before exporting it. If clear, only the numerical part of the layer name will be output.

20.5.8

Arcs Set this option to export clockwise arcs in a clockwise direction. Otherwise clear it to reverse the direction of the arc in the exported file. Note:If the clockwise option is requested, a polyline will be substituted for the arc in the DXF file as DXF format does not support clockwise arcs.

20.6 RP2 Format The system will display a dialog of options as follows:-

• Output to screen - if checked, the report will be displayed in a window rather than written to file • Explode elements - if checked, all elements will be described in their most basic form. e.g. dimensions will be shown as lines, arcs and text • Include lines - check to include information about all lines in the design • Include arcs - check to include information about all arcs in the design • Include text - check to include information about all text in the design • Include points - check to include information about all points in the design • Include dimensions - check to include information about all dimensions in the design • Include groups - check to include information about all grouped items in the design. E.g. polygons, borders. Set the options by clicking the corresponding check boxes as required. Click on OK to create the file. If you have requested output to screen, a window will now appear displaying the report contents.

20.7 RPT Format This format works the same as RP2 format except that all elements are automatically exploded to their most basic form. This ensures that they are compatible with the 16 bit version which does not have some of the new element types e.g. groups. Refer to "RP2 Format" on page 2-38 for further details on the options applicable to this format.

Release 9.5 Page 2-38

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Export KASEMAKE

20.8 CMF Format This requires no further information to produce the named .CMF file. However, the resulting file will be based entirely on specific coordinate values. The design will need to be redefined using set point and set element to make it fully parametric.

20.9 DDES Format This format prompts you for comments to be included at the beginning of the DDES file. Options are also available as elliptical elements are not supported.

20.9.1

Options Details of the options available for this format are as for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements” on page 2-34.

20.9.2

Comment Dialog Enter any comments as appropriate, then click on OK to generate the DDES format file.

20.10 DAT, DSP, M and N Formats Options are available for mapping of KASEMAKE grounds.

See “Mapping” on page 2-35.

20.11 PDF Format Portable Document Format (PDF) is used by Adobe Acrobat, Adobe’s electronic publishing software for Windows, Mac OS, UNIX® and MS DOS. You can view PDF files using the Acrobat Reader® software. PDF files can represent both vector and bitmap graphics and can contain electronic document search. The PDF export filter can handle 3D annotations. Any 2D design containing a border with a 3D placeholder can be exported. The information for the 3D annotation, represented by the 3D placeholder within KASEMAKE, will be included in the resulting PDF file. The 3D annotation can then be manipulated as a live 3D visual when this file is opened with Adobe Acrobat Reader .

20.11.1

Options When exporting the following options are provided :-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-39

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

Elliptical Elements Elliptical elements are not supported for PDF format. Options to determine how they are output are as described for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements” on page 2-34.

Colour / Monochrome This option determines whether the PDF information is output in colour or monochrome. Set or clear as approptiate.

Portrait / Landscape Determines whether the design is output using a portrait or landscape oritentation. Set this option to output as portrait. Clear this option to output as landscape.

Size This determines the size that the design is exported at. It can either be exported so as to fill a sheet of A4 or at the size it was originally drawn at. Choose Fit to A4 if you wish to export the design at the correct size to fill an A4 sheet. Choose Life Size if you wish to export the design at its original size. Margin If a margin is required around the edge of the design, it can be set by scrolling with the arrow buttons to the correct size.

20.12 DDES3 Format Details of the options available for this format are as for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements” on page 2-34.

21

Multi Export

Command

Multi Export

Menu

File > Multi Export

Toolbar Button Not available

The File->Multi Export... command allows multiple files of different file formats to be created

Release 9.5 Page 2-40

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Multi Export KASEMAKE from the current design at the same time. It is possible to specify different folders for each individual file formats and to export only selected elements. Each format has the same options and requires the same information as described for the File>Export command. Activate this command. The Multi Export dialog is now displayed as follows:-

21.1 Current Profile Individual profiles can be saved representing different combinations of export filters and options. Set the profile to use by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the list of available profiles. The saving of a profile is achieved by using the Save As... option described shortly.

21.2 File Formats List A scrolling list of available formats is provided. Simply click and drag the vertical slider to display other formats in the list. Set or clear the check box corresponding to each format to determine whether that format is generated or not.

Options Where a format is chosen to be exported and options are available, the Options>> button will now become accessible. Simply click on this button to display the options for the chosen format. See the appropriate section of the File->Export command on page 2-33 for details of the options provided.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-41

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

E-mail It is possible to e-mail an exported file as an attachment. Where a format is chosen to be exported, the corresponding check box in the e-mail column will become accessible. Set the check box to request that the corresponding format is included as an e-mail attachment. Clear it if this is not required.

Export Directory To set the directory for an individual file format, click in the check box in the export directory column which corresponds to the format you wish to use. A Browse for Folder dialog now appears with which you can search for and identify the folder to use. Click on OK once you have identified the folder and the export directory field will be set to reflect the chosen folder. The filename will be taken from the design name with the appropriate extension added for each export format. If any of the export directory fields are left blank, you will be prompted for a folder and filename as before.

21.3 Export selected items only If you wish to only export specific elements, first select them using any of the available selection methods. Click in the Export selected items only check box to set this option. Now when Export... is chosen only the selected items will be exported. To export the entire design, make sure this check box is cleared.

21.4 E-mail Single Recipient If you have selected the e-mail setting for several formats, you can choose to send all the exported formats as multiple attachments to a single recipient or send each exported format to individual recipients. Simply set this check box to produce a single e-mail with multiple attachments. Alternativley, if you wish to send the exported files to several recipients, you should clear this option. Each selected file format will then produce a separate e-mail with the exported file as a single attachment.

21.5 Dialog Commands OK Choose OK when you have finished with the multi export command and you wish to close the multi export dialog retaining any current dialog settings.

Save As... Choose Save As... to save the current settings to a named profile for future use. You will be prompted for the name for the profile. Type a suitable name then click on OK to close the Save As... dialog. The current profile field will be updated to reflect the given name.

Delete Choose Delete to delete the current profile. Confirmation is required before the profile is permanently removed.

Export Choose Export to export the information in the chosen formats. You will be prompted for a filename and location for the exported files. For each file generated, the given filename stem will be used, but the extension will be determined automatically to reflect the format used. e.g. design1.cf2, design1.dxf, design1.dat etc. Choose whether you wish only selected elements or the entire design to be exported.

Release 9.5 Page 2-42

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Load Image KASEMAKE Finally click on Save to generate the requested files. Each file will be generated in turn. You will be prompted for any additional information need to complete a chosen format as that format is generated. Enter the required information as you would for a single File->Export. See the appropriate section of the File->Export command on page 2-33.

Cancel Choose Cancel when you have finished with the multi export command and you wish to close the multi export dialog without saving any changes to the dialog settings.

22

Load Image

Command

Load Image

Menu

File > Load Image

Toolbar Button Not available

The load image command allows you to read in a .TIF image file (such as is created when an item is scanned) as a background. Activating this command produces a file Open dialog. Specify the name of the .TIF file to load. See "Open" on page 2-5 for further details on how to set the filename. Once the filename is set, click on Open. Some systems automatically store the scanner resolution as part of the .TIF file. If this is not the case you will now be prompted for this information. The default setting is 300 dots per inch. If this is not the resolution you used to create the .TIF file you have named, you will need to change it. Click and hold the arrows to adjust the value up or down. Alternatively, click and select the numerical value and type its new value. An Image Scale dialog will now appear. This requires you to define the scale and units to work to as follows:-

22.1 Scale • Image - Set this to the scale used when the image was scanned e.g. 1 for 1:1, 100 for 1:100 • Display - Normally, set to 1

22.2 Units Set the units to those used for the scanned image. Click on the button corresponding to either Metres or Millimetres. Finally, click on OK to close the dialog and display the requested image.

23

History List Located between File->Load Image and File->Drawing Info... is the file history list. This comprises a list of up to five of the most recently accessed filenames, so varies from day to day. The history list provides a quick way of accessing designs. Simply drag the cursor to the required filename and click on it. The chosen design will then be displayed in its own window ready for you to alter as required.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-43

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24

Preferences

Command

Preferences

Menu

File > Preferences

Toolbar Button Not available

Preferences are settings which affect the overall appearance and or operation of the KASEMAKE system. They stay in effect until you change them using the File->Preferences command. They are written away to the registry so will be preserved between instances of KASEMAKE. After making any changes click on OK to save them and bring them into effect. Click Cancel to abandon any changes. Activating this command opens the Preferences dialog containing several tabbed pages of settings. Click on the appropriate tab to display the corresponding settings. The available settings are described page by page as follows:-

24.1 Selection

24.1.1

Tolerance The selection tolerance can be set from the following:• Fine - the cursor must be over an element for it to be selected • Medium - the cursor must be on or fairly close to the element to select it

Release 9.5 Page 2-44

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE • Coarse - the cursor does not have to be too precise to select an item Click on the button corresponding to the required selection tolerance.

24.1.2

Colour The selection colour can be set as required. By default, items are selected in black. Choose a new colour from the Colour pulldown list. Click on the arrow to open the list. Scroll to the desired colour using the scrolling arrows. Then click on the required colour to select it. If you choose the same colour as the background, KASEMAKE will automatically use the inverse colour to ensure selected items are visible.

24.1.3

Nudge Factor The nudge feature can be used to move selected objects a fixed amount. The nudge facility also works during a “ Move Points” command to move by a fixed amount rather than defining an origin and new position. See “Move Points” on page 3-13. The “nudge factor” is the amount that the selection set will move with each press of an arrow key. Set the desired nudge factor using the arrows to increase or decrease the current value, or type the new value directly.

24.1.4

Small Gap Small gap is used as a tolerance in hatching when defining the outline of the boundary or island. Since only a continuous path is allowed for the outline, small gap determines the tolerance within which a path can be regarded as continuous. To set this tolerance use the arrows to increase or decrease the current value, or type a new value directly.

24.1.5

Selection Rectangle The selection rectangle options determine the visibility of the selection rectangle and the appearance of its handles i.e. the resize position indicators represented by boxes.

24.1.5.1 Visible Rectangle Set this option if you wish to display the selection rectangle usually shown as a dotted rectangle around any selected items. Clear this option if you wish to turn off the display of the selection rectangle.

24.1.5.2 Visible Handles Set this option if you wish to display the selection handles, usually shown as rectangles at the active points of the selection rectangle. Clear this option if you wish to turn off the display of the selection rectangle’s handles. Where you opt for visible handles, you can also determine the appearance and size of the handles as follows:-

Solid Handles Set this option for filled in handles. Clear this option if you wish just the outline of the handle to be drawn.

Handle Size Set the size of the handle. Choose from :•small •medium •large

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-45

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24.2 Settings

24.2.1

Drill Holes The size of the drill holes when they are displayed on the screen can be altered. Choose from the following:• Actual diameter - the actual size of the drill hole, useful for checking there is no overlap • Percentage of the window width – size is set as a percentage of the window width so that when zooming in the drill holes do not obliterate the rest of the drawing but stay in proportion to the current window size. Click and hold the arrow until the required percentage is displayed.

24.2.2

Line Angle Inc This setting is used by the line command and allows you to determine a fixed increment for the angle of any lines drawn. The increment is only applied if this option is set and you hold down the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor to define the end point of the line. • Set this option if you wish the angle of any subsequently drawn lines to be determined at a fixed increment. • Clear this option if you wish the angle of any drawn lines to be determined by the current cursor position with respect to the start of the line. If this option is set the increment field will be displayed. Type the required increment directly or use the arrows to set it.

24.2.3

Line Length Inc This setting is used by the line command and allows you to determine a fixed increment for the length of any lines drawn. The increment is only applied if this option is set and you hold down the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor to define the end point of the line.

Release 9.5 Page 2-46

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE • Set this option if you wish the length of any subsequently drawn lines to be determined at a fixed increment. • Clear this option if you wish the length of any drawn lines to be determined by the current cursor position with respect to the start of the line. If this option is set the increment field will be displayed. Type the required increment directly or use the arrows to set it.

24.2.4

Size of Plotted Points Set the size to use for points when plotting. Type the value directly or scroll using the arrows.

24.2.5

Number of items in window This setting relates to the number of entries which are to be displayed in the currently open windows list located in the Windows menu. All other open windows can be activated by first choosing the More Windows... option. Refer to "Changing the Active Window" on page 12-3 for further details.

24.2.6

Database The Use long date format setting is used by the database to deternine how the date should be displayed in borders. The default behaviour is to display the date using a long date format. • Set this option if you wish the date to be displayed using the long date format • Clear this option if you wish the date to be displayed using the short date format

24.2.7

Convert to Arcs This setting relates to the conversion of a sequence of short lines to an arc. The values are considered when importing files with the Convert Short Lines to Arcs option set. It is also used by the Tools->Convert to Arcs command.

Short Line Limit This is the maximum length a line can be to be considered as a short line which could potentially form part of an arc.

Angle Diff Limit This determines the maximum angle allowed between two lines for them to be considered as part of the sequence of lines which will be converted to an arc.

Angle Diff Tolerance This determines the maximum difference allowed between angles when considering sets of adjoining lines to determine if they will be converted to an arc.

Algorithm There are currently two algorithms which can be applied to determine how the lines are converted to an arc and therefore how the resulting arc will be drawn. In the majority of cases the result of using either algorithm will be identical. However, it is possible that in a small percentage of cases one algorithm might give a more suitable result than the other. It is possible therefore to control which algorithm is applied through this setting. Simply click on the radio button corresponding to the algorithm you wish to use.

24.2.8

Die Symbols This setting applies to any of the diemaking tools where a symbol can be used e.g. pins and struts.

Use Original Grounds When set, the symbol selected to be used for the command will be placed in the ground it was

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-47

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE drawn in. When cleared, the symbol will be placed in the ground defined by the options of the specific diemaking tool using it. Set or clear this setting by clicking in the check box as appropriate.

24.3 File

24.3.1

AutoSave The KASEMAKE system can if requested, automatically save the current design to the file BACKUP.AGD after a given time interval. Choose whether you wish your designs to be saved automatically by setting or clearing the corresponding check box. If you activate the auto save option, the interval between automatic saves can be set. The time interval is set to every five minutes by default. Click and hold the arrow until the required time interval is displayed.

24.3.2

AutoSave 3D Files The KASEMAKE system can also optionally save 3D designs after a given time interval. Choose whether you wish your 3D designs to be saved automatically by setting or clearing the corresponding check box. If you activate the auto save 3D option, the interval between automatic saves can be set. The time interval is set to every five minutes by default. Click and hold the arrow until the required time interval is displayed.

24.3.3

Save Images Compressed This setting is used when saving a design containing one or more bitmaps. • Set this option if you wish to save any bitmaps in the current design in compressed form. • Clear this option if you wish to save any bitmaps in the current design uncompressed.

24.3.4

Back up drawing files on saving This option allows you to decide whether KASEMAKE should make a backup of your current

Release 9.5 Page 2-48

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE design each time you overwrite it or not. Set this option if you wish to make a backup with each overwrite or clear it if you don’t want to create backup files.

24.3.5

Backup file prefix This setting enables you to specify a prefix to place in front of the current design name to distinguish each backup file. By specifying the prefix you can group backups together so for example they always appear at the end of a file list. If your design is called Design1, and you use the prefix shown i.e. Backup of the resulting file will be Backup of Design1.agd.

24.3.6

File Preview Delay This setting enables you to build a delay between selecting a filename in one of the file open dialogs and the preview for that file being displayed. This is to allow a list of filenames to be scrolled through without having to wait for each preview to appear. Set the value in milliseconds by typing a suitable value directly or using the arrows to scroll.

24.4 File Locations

This page displays the default locations for all the different types of files utilised or created by KASEMAKE. You can either change a location or remove it and leave it blank.

24.4.1

Clear To remove a file location :• Scroll through the list to the required file description • Click on the file description to select the setting to change • Choose Clear to blank out the current setting

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-49

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24.4.2

Modify... To change a file location :• • • • •

Release 9.5 Page 2-50

Scroll through the list to the required file description Click on the file description to select the setting to change Choose Modify... to produce the Select Directory dialog Identify the required path changing the Drive and Folder to retrieve the required file location Choose OK to reset the file location, which will now be displayed

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.5 View

24.5.1

Zoom 24.5.1.1 Extents Choose the bounds to zoom to from the following:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-51

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE • Visible bounds - only the limits of elements currently on display will be used to calculated the bounds of the design • Absolute bounds - all elements in the design will be considered when calculating the bounds of the design

24.5.1.2 Quickzoom This setting determines the way the zoom box is defined for the Quick Zoom and Zoom Box commands. The choices are:• Click & Drag - if this option is set the zoom box is determined using a click and drag method. The box will begin to rubber band as soon as the left mouse button is pressed to define the start point for the box. Holding down the button and moving the mouse will cause the zoom box to rubber band. Releasing the mouse button will complete the zoom box. • Original - two discrete points must be given for each diagonal point of the required zoom box by clicking and releasing the mouse button to define each point. Rubber banding only starts after the mouse button is released to define the start point of the box.

24.5.2

Zoom To Cursor KASEMAKE can temporarily zoom to a chosen area about the cursor. This is particularly useful where you need to see part of a design in more detail to accurately complete a command for example. The options which you can define for the Zoom to Cursor command are set as follows:-

Zoom Radius The zoom radius determines the distance around the cursor to zoom in to. Set the radius by typing a value directly or scroll with the arrows to the required value.

Centred on Snap Cursor This option if set chooses the position of the snap cursor as the centre of the zoomed area, rather than the absolute position of the mouse cursor. It means you can accurately centre your view on an end point, centre point, mid point etc. according to which snap modes are enabled by the Auto Snap Properties. Clear this setting if you want to centre the zoomed area about the absolute cursor position.

24.5.3

Use Auto Snap with Freehand Auto snap modes can be automatically engaged when the current drawing mode is set to freehand. The snap modes are selected using the Auto Snap Properties... command. Set this option if you wish to identify potential snap points based on the selected snap modes, as the cursor is moved. The snap cursor will automatically update to the nearest point which complies with the selected snap modes. Clear this option if you wish to use freehand positioning. Where this option is chosen, moving the cursor will cause the snap cursor to move to the nearest point which satisfies any selected snap modes. Identifying a point in the normal way will automatically adopt the snap cursor position. This setting can be overriden by holding down the SHIFT key whilst moving the cursor if a freehand position is required.

24.5.3.1 Tolerance The tolerance determines how close you need to be to a potential snap point before it is adopted. If you don’t move within this tolerance, freehand positioning will persist. Set a suitable value by scrolling with the arrows or typing it directly.

Release 9.5 Page 2-52

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.5.4

Snap Cursor A snap cursor can be optionally displayed to illustrate the nearest snap point available, this is dependent upon the current mode. Where “Auto Snap” is used the snap points displayed vary according to the Auto Snap properties selected. See “Auto Snap Properties...” on page 5-15 for further details. Choose to display the snap cursor in one of the following ways:• Always on - dependent upon current mode some form of snap point will always be illustrated • Always off - the snap cursor will be switched off for all modes • On only in autosnap mode - the snap cursor will only be displayed in conjunction with Auto Snap mode according to the Auto Snap properties

Using Zoom In Conjunction with the Snap Cursor To enable more accurate use of the snap cursor, a hot key can be defined which executes a zoom cursor command. This is usually the PGUP key by default. Once the Snap Cursor options are set, move the cursor to the required position and hold down the hot key (PGUP) key to effect the zoom. The enlarged view enables more accurate selection of snap points. Once the required points are identified, release the hot key and the view automatically returns to its previous state. See “ShortCuts...” on page 10-26.

24.5.5

Snap Point Indicator The snap cursor can be further enhanced using a graphical representation and or a label to indicate the type of snap point the cursor has identified. Set the image check box if you require a graphical representation of the snap mode being used to identify the current snap point Set the text check box if you wish the snap mode currently being applied to be displayed as a label

24.5.6

Exchangeable Toolbars Check this item if you require toolbars to be exchangeable, where opening up a new toolbar replaces an already open one. Alternatively, you can uncheck this item and all open toolbars will be displayed simultaneously. Only some of the toolbars are exchangeable. The fundamental system toolbars are not exchangeable. Refer to “Toolbars" on page 1-10.

24.5.7

Allow Autoscroll Auto scroll if set will automatically scroll the current design into view when the cursor is placed near one of the edges of the drawing area. Placing the cursor near to the top or bottom edge of the drawing area causes the design to scroll vertically. Similarly, placing the cursor near to the left or right hand edge of the drawing area will cause the design to scroll horizontally. Set this option to enable the auto scroll facility. Clear it to disable this feature.

24.5.8

Quick Change This option when enabled allows you to alter the linestyle or ground of any selected elements as in the Edit->Change command. However, the change is made using the appropriate combo box in the style toolbar so is quicker to achieve. Enable this option. Select the elements to change. Choose a new ground or linestyle directly from the ground / linestyle combo boxes in the style toolbar and the elements update immediately.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-53

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE Clear this option if you wish to disable the Quick Change facility.

24.5.9

Lock Toolbars Check this item if you wish to lock any toolbars so that they cannot be moved. Clear this item if you want the toolbars to be moveable.

24.5.10

Rollup Dialogs The Notes, Properties, Project, Array / Layout, Symbol, Move/Copy and Bridging dialogs and the Overview window have rollup capabilities when floated. This setting determines whether these rollup dialogs automatically hide when not being accessed or have to be manually rolled up or down when needed. Click on Auto Rollup if you wish to adopt the auto hide / push pin capabilites of the dialog. Click on Manual Rollup if you wish to override the autohide capability and manually click on the pin to roll up / roll down the dialog.

24.5.11

Delay The symbols dialog when set to automatic rollup will instantly rollup when the cursor is moved outside the dialog and will instantly rolldown when the cursor is moved over the dialog caption bar. A delay can be optionally built in before the rollup / rolldown occurs.

Rollup This is the delay in milliseconds to wait before rolling up the symbols dialog. Type a suitable value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

Rolldown This is the delay in milliseconds to wait before rolling down the symbols dialog. Type a suitable value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

24.5.12

Mouse Wheel The mouse wheel can be used to automatically zoom or scroll the current design about the current cursor position. Roll the wheel downwards to move the design down or zoom out. Roll the wheel upwards to move the design upwards or zoom in. Set this option to determine whether the mouse wheel will cause the current design to zoom or pan. This setting can be overriden by holding down the ALT key whilst moving the wheel. Please refer to “Features of the Mouse Wheel” on page 1-24 for further details.

24.5.13

Mode highlight colour This option allows you to determine whether you wish to highlight the current mode to make it easier to identify, or not. If you do wish to highlight the current mode, the background of the toolbar button will be displayed in the mode highlight colour. Set or clear the corresponding check box as required. If you opt to highlight the current mode, the mode highlight colour will now be accessible confirming the current colour and allowing you to change it if required. Click on the arrow to display a palette of available colours. Simply click on the appropriate one to select it. Alternatively, click on other colours if you wish to customise the colours available. Note:

Release 9.5 Page 2-54

The change of colour does not come into effect until you click on OK to close the Preferences dialog and accept any new settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.5.14

Construct line colour This setting enables you to define the colour to be used to display construct lines. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available colours. Simply move the cursor over the colours or click on an arrow to scroll to the required one. Click on it to select it.

24.5.15

Default View The default view for a design can be set. This information is stored with each design. Altering this setting will not affect the current design only subsequently created or loaded designs. The view setting for the current design is displayed at the right hand edge of the status bar. Set this value to one of the following:• Inside - assume subsequently created or loaded designs are drawn from the inside • Outside - assume subsequently created or loaded designs are drawn from the outside

24.5.16

Axes Set the View origin axes option to display the drawing area axes. Clear this option if you wish to hide them.

24.5.17

Mix And Match Ground Mix and match ground to ignore in previews allows you to select a ground which will not be displayed when a mix and match design is previewed. For example, if you switch off the ground displaying dimensions you can create a less cluttered and effectively larger preview of the current design. Click on the ground combo and select the ground to ignore from the drop down list.

24.5.18

Bitmap Zoom Factors The bitmap zoom factors are used within the Draw->Image Proportional command when loading a .EPS image. They determine how far you can zoom before the medium and high resolution images respectively are loaded. Set each zoom factor by typing directly or scroll using the arrows to the required value.

24.5.19

Default Ground Table This setting allows the user to determine which ground table is loaded as the default when KASEMAKE is started up. Simply type the name of the required ground table in the edit box. Alternatively, click on the ... button to display a file open dialog allowing you to search for and select the required ground table. On clicking Open to select the ground table name and close the Open dialog, the selected ground table name will automatically be copied to the Default Ground Table field on the View page of Preferences.

24.5.20

Flute / Grain This field is used to determine the default flute when a new drawing is started. It will not override the flute setting for any current design Click on the horizontal or vertical radio button to select the corresponding flute.

24.5.21

Language This field allows you to specify which language you wish KASEMAKE to use to display its various prompts and user information in. Select the required language by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the drop down list.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-55

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE Note: It is necessary to restart your computer before a change of language can take effect.

24.5.22

Cursor This option allows you to select a full screen cursor rather than the default small cross hair cursor used by KASEMAKE. Set this option if you want to switch to a full screen cursor. Clear it to select the small cross hair cursor. If you select a full screen cursor a further three options are displayed so that you can specify the type of full screen cursor required. Simply click on the required option to select it. Choose from :•Solid - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a solid linestyle. •Dotted - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a dotted linestyle. •Dashed - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a dashed linestyle.

24.5.23

Options This setting determines the way the command options are presented. Select from:• Use Toolbar - if this option is set the options will be displayed in a dialog only after accessing the options button in the toolbar or selecting the Options command from the Draw menu. • Permanent Display - if this option is set, the options for the current tool where appropriate, are permanently displayed. This allows quick visual reference and easy editing. The dialog they are displayed in can be floating or docked in a side bar and can be made to auto hide as required. The options are displayed in a side bar to the left of the drawing area by default. Once displayed, simply selecting a new tool with options will update the options dialog automatically.

24.5.24

Database This setting determines whether the database remains on display after a drawing is loaded. Set this option if you wish the database to remain visible, or clear it if you wish it to be removed when a drawing is loaded.

Release 9.5 Page 2-56

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.6 Data Units

24.6.1

Default Units Set the default units for all subsequently created designs. It does not affect any previously drawn designs. Default Units can be set to millimetres, centimetres, metres or inches.

24.6.2

Area Units Specify the units to measure area calculations in and the number of decimal places to display when generating drawing information. See “Drawing Info...” on page 10-13. Set the required units by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Set the number of decimal places by scrolling the current value using the arrow keys or by typing the new value.

24.6.3

Rule Length Units Specify the units to measure rule length calculations in and the number of decimal places to display when generating drawing information. See “Drawing Info...” on page 10-13. Set the units and decimal place as described for Area Units above.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-57

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24.7 Spellcheck

The spell check page allows you to define the file to be used by the spell checker for automatic corrections. There is also an options button which allows you to define additional corrections and to determine which rules to apply when making automatic corrections.

24.7.1

Filename Click on the ellipsis ... button to display an Open folder dialog to assist you with defining the path and filename for the automatic corrections file. Alternatively, type the path and filename directly.

Release 9.5 Page 2-58

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.7.2

Options Access the Options button to display the following dialog:-

The top part of the dialog displays a list of options to control the way corrections are made. Set or clear the corresponding check box as required. Exceptions to these rules can also be defined by first accessing the Exceptions button. The bottom half of the dialog is used to display the common mistakes and corresponding corrections already defined.

Add To add a new correction simply type the error in the replace field and the correction in the with field. Click on Add to add the new correction to the list.

Delete Identify a correction by first scrolling to it in the list, then clicking on it to select it. The chosen correction will be copied to the replace / with fields. Click on Delete to remove it from the list permanently.

Replace Identify a correction by first scrolling to it in the list, then clicking on it to select it. The chosen correction will be copied to the replace / with fields. Retype the correction as appropriate then click on replace to update it in the list.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-59

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24.8 Import / Export Ground Mappings Mappings can be defined for some of the import / export filters. These are used to determine how the different layer or linetype combinations used by other systems are mapped to specific ground and linestyle combinations within KASEMAKE. Acivate the Import / Export Ground Mappings tab to display the following table and settings:-

Release 9.5 Page 2-60

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.8.1

File Type Only some of the filters support mapping in this way. Choose the type of filter you wish to define a mapping for by clicking on the arrow and choosing the required type from the given list. The values currently defined for that file type will now be displayed.

24.8.2

Import / Export Decide whether you wish to determine the mapping for importing from or exporting to the chosen file type. Click on the corresponding option. The table will update to show import or export settings according to your choice.

24.8.3

Mapping Several mappings can exist for one import /export filter where alternative ground / linestyle combinations are required. Choose the mapping to use for the given import / export filter by clicking on the arrow to display the names of mappings that are currently defined and selecting the appropriate name Again the table of values will change to reflect the newly selected mapping.

24.8.4

Table of values The table both displays values which cannot be altered as well as values which can be determined by the user. The actual values displayed depend upon the previous three settings. In the case of import filters, the first one or more columns are used to display information about linetypes, layers which are used by the chosen file filter, the final columns ground and linestyle are editable to allow you to set a corresponding value to use when importing said linetype, layer combination into KASEMAKE. In the case of export filters, the first column displays each KASEMAKE ground and the final one or more columns are used to determine the linetype, layer combination to use for each ground when exporting to the chosen file filter.

24.8.5

Add New... The Add New... command allows you to create a new mapping for the given import / export file type. This allows you to create alternative settings which can be saved and used according to requirements. Choose the Add New... option. The Add New dialog now appears allowing you to specify a name for the new settings. Type a suitable name then click OK. The current settings will now be copied and your given name will be displayed.

24.8.6

Delete... This command deletes the current mapping. Ensure that you have selected the correct name from the mapping list before activating this command, as once deleted a mapping cannot be retrieved. Confirmation is requested before the mapping is permanently removed.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-61

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

24.9 Kasemake Look Kasemake Look is a page of options which affect the appearance of the KASEMAKE screen and complement the user interface:-

24.9.1

Kasemake Look This setting determines the appearance of the toolbars. Click on a radio button to select its corresponding look. The toolbars will instantly change to reflect the look that has been selected.

24.9.2

Toolbars The option to determine whether you use normal size or larger toolbar buttons. Click on the corresponding radio button as appropriate. The toolbar buttons will automatically resize.

24.9.3

Release 9.5 Page 2-62

Menu

This group of options determines the way in which KASEMAKE’S menus are displayed.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Preferences KASEMAKE

24.9.3.1 Animations This determines the way the menus are displayed. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available styles. Drag the cursor over the required style. Release the mouse button to select it.

24.9.3.2 Shadows Determines whether a shadow is displayed at the edge of the menu or not. Set or clear this option as required.

24.9.4

Tabs Designs can be overlayed with a tab which enables instant access to the underlying design or alternatively using the MDI format where they are accessed through the Windows menu. This group of options determines whether tabbed or MDI format windows are required. Where tabbed windows are used the options determine the appearance and behaviour of tabs on individual designs.

24.9.4.1 Enable Tabs This setting determines whether tabs are displayed on each design or not. Set it to display tabs or clear it if they are not required. The documents will be redisplayed to reflect any changes.

24.9.4.2 Appearance This group of settings governs the appearance of each tab.

Document Icons On Tabs The tabs can display an icon to illustrate the type of design assigned to that document. Set this option if you wish to display icons, otherwise clear it.

Autocolour Tabs Each tab can be displayed in colour. The colour used is automatically assigned for each individual tab. Set this option if you wish the tabs to be displayed in colour, otherwise clear it.

Close Button on Tab Setting this option provides a close button on the tab of the active design to ease closing of the design. Clearing this option means the close button is located at the far right of the drawing area within the section containing the tabs.

Max Number Of Characters On Tab Each tab displays the filename of the associated design. This option controls the number of characters displayed and therefore the size of the tab needed to display them. Specifying 0 means that their is no limit and the whole filename is always displayed. Set the number of characters to display by typing an appropriate value, or use the arrow keys to scroll to it.

24.9.4.3 Position This option determines whether the tabs are displayed at the top or bottom of each document. Click on the radio button adjacent to the required position to select that position. The document tabs will be redisplayed in the new position.

24.9.4.4 More Tabs Option There is a limit to the number of documents which can be displayed overlayed at any one time. Once there are more tabbed documents open than can be displayed it is possible to access the additional documents either through a menu or by scrolling the documents currently on view. Set this option to Scroll Buttons if you wish to scroll the currently displayed designs into view. Scrolling arrows will be displayed at either end of the row of tabs. Click on an arrow to scroll designs in to view. Click on a tab to activate the underlying design. Set this option to Menu if you wish to choose a specific design from a drop down list. Choosing

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-63

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE a design in this way automatically scrolls it into view and activates it as the current design.

24.9.4.5 Configure Tabs The appearance of the tabs is configurable. First click on the Configure Tabs button. A Tab Configure dialog is now displayed:-

Use Default Appearance Set this option if you wish tabs to adopt the default appearance.

Active Tab Appearance The appearance of the active tab can be specifed as follows:-

Text Colour Check this option if you wish to specify the colour to use for the tab’s label. The colour control to define the text colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of predefined colours. Click on a suitable colour to select it. Custom colours can defined by selecting the Others... option.

Tab Colour Check this option if you wish to specify the colour to use for the tab’s background. The colour control to define the tab colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of predefined colours. Click on a suitable colour to select it. Custom colours can defined by selecting the Others... option.

Border Colour Check this option if you wish to display a coloured border around the active tab. The colour control to define the border colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of predefined colours. Click on a suitable colour to select it.

Release 9.5 Page 2-64

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Exit KASEMAKE

Border Width Also, specify the required width for the border. Click on the arrows to scroll between 0 and 4 where 0 means no border and 4 is the thickest border.

24.9.5

Autohide Bar This option relates to dialogs which are docked and have the autohide option set. It is possible where a low specification graphics card is used for there to be a slight delay in removing and displaying an autohide dialog. This option ensures that the dialogs are removed / displayed without delay. For most cases, where the sliding in / sliding out of these dialogs is virtually instant, set this option to Normal. If however, you experience reduced performance displaying these dialogs, set this option to Instant.

24.9.6

Reload Default Layout This option allows you to revert back to the default KASEMAKE screen layout for both toolbars and docking bars. An option to save the current layout is given. Click on the Reload Layout button. You will now be prompted to save your current settings. •Click on Yes if you wish to save the current layout. You will then be prompted for a name for the current layout. Simply type an appropriate name then click on OK to save the layout under the given name and restore the default layou. Click on Cancel to abort the Reload Layout command •Alternatively, Click on No if you do not want to save the current layout first. The default layout will now be restored. •Click on Cancel to abort the Reload Layout command Note:

25

Saved layouts can be reloaded with the Load Setup command contained in the Personal Setup menu which is located in the View menu. See “Load Setup” on page 10-21.

Exit

Command

Exit

Menu

File > Exit

Toolbar Button Not available

Use this command to end your KASEMAKE session. You can also use the Close button at the right hand end of the title bar. KASEMAKE prompts you to save designs with unsaved changes.

26

Recover Drawings

Command

Recover Drawings

Menu

File > Recover Drawings

Toolbar Button Not available

The File->Recover Drawings command is only available the first time that KASEMAKE is loaded after it has been forced to shut down by an unstable operating system. This command allows you to recover any files which KASEMAKE has temporarily stored because they were unsaved at the time it was forced to shut down. Activate this command. The Drawing Recovery dialog will appear displaying a list of any files which were recovered and their corresponding preview. Simply click on the name of a file to display its preview:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 2-65

2 - File Commands KASEMAKE

To recover a file, click on its file name to highlight it. If you wish to select more than one file, hold down the SHIFT key whilst making subsequent clicks. Finally, click on OK to recover any selected designs. To defer recovery click on Cancel. The recovered files are only temporary, but remain available for recovery until KASEMAKE is closed down. Simply activate this command again to access any remaining unrecovered files.

Release 9.5 Page 2-66

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

3 - Edit Commands 1

Undo

Command

Undo

Menu

Edit > Undo

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + Z or Alt+Backspace

Use this command to remove the effect of the last editing action(s) where possible. The Undo command only becomes available when a reversible command has been performed. Until this is the case undo appears greyed out both in the menu and in the tool bar. Also, if you have traversed the entire undo list, the undo command will be greyed out indicating that no further undo commands are available. Accessing this command through the menu will allow one action at a time to be reversed. The Undo command displayed in the menu has the name of the last action appended to it for clarity. This name changes each time an Undo command is executed. The command name is displayed as Can't Undo if the last action cannot be reversed. The Undo command can also be executed one action at a time by accessing the Undo toolbar button in the Standard Toolbar. It is also possible to undo several commands at once. This extended functionality is only available through the Undo toolbar button. First click on the arrow which is located next to the Undo toolbar button. A list of completed commands starting with the most recently executed will now be displayed.

Move the cursor over the most recently executed command and it will be highlighted. A prompt will be displayed at the bottom of the list to confirm how many actions are to be undone. Move the cursor down the list and further commands will be highlighted and the prompt will update to include the additional commands. Once you have highlighted all the commands you wish to undo, click on the last command in the highlighted list and all the highlighted commands will be undone starting with the most recently executed first.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-1

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

2

Redo

Command

Redo

Menu

Edit > Redo

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + Y

The Redo command reverses the effect of the undo command. Each time an undo command is issued, a redo command is added to the redo list. This gives the option of reversing the undo command if it is performed in error. Redo commands are only stored until a command other than Undo is activated. The redo command appears greyed out indicating that the redo list is empty under the following circumstances:• no undo commands have been performed • the entire redo list has been traversed • a command other than undo is activated Accessing the redo command through the menu will reverse the last undo command, restoring the original command. Continually, selecting this command will cause the KASEMAKE system to step back reversing each undo command most recent first. As is the case for the undo command, the redo command displayed in the menu has the name of the last action appended to it for clarity. This name changes each time a Redo command is executed. The Redo command can similarly be executed one action at a time by accessing the Redo toolbar button in the Standard Toolbar. It is also possible to redo several commands at once through the Redo toolbar button. First click on the arrow which is located next to the Redo toolbar button. A list of commands which have been undone, starting with the most recent will now be displayed.

Move the cursor over the most recently executed undo command and it will be highlighted. A prompt will be displayed at the bottom of the list to confirm how many actions are to be reversed. Move the cursor down the list and further commands will be highlighted and the prompt will update to include the additional commands. Once you have highlighted all the commands you wish to redo, click on the last command in the highlighted list and all the highlighted undo commands will be reversed starting with the most recently executed first.

Release 9.5 Page 3-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Reset KASEMAKE

3

Reset Command

Reset

Menu

Edit > Reset

Shortcuts

Context Menu

The Reset command which allows commands to be restarted part way through has now been put into the Edit menu. This means that a shortcut can be defined to make access to it even quicker. Reset was formerly only available through the context menu accessed with the right hand mouse button.

4

Cut

Command

Cut

Menu

Edit > Cut

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + X

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button

Use this command to remove the currently selected data from the current design and place it into the Windows clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can then be pasted into another design or another software package using the Paste command. Each time you issue an Edit->Cut command the current contents of the clipboard are replaced with the newly cut items. Before you can cut items from your design you will need to identify which items to choose. This is done by selecting them using any of the selection methods provided by KASEMAKE. For further information on selecting elements please refer to “Select” on page 3-26. Once you have selected the items to cut, the Cut command will become accessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command and the selected items will be removed from your design and stored on the clipboard for future use.

5

Copy

Command

Copy

Menu

Edit > Copy

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + C

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button

Use this command to copy any selected data onto the Windows clipboard leaving the design unchanged. This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected. Once you have selected the items to copy, the Copy command will become accessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command and all selected items will be stored on the clipboard for future use.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-3

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Note:

6

Paste

each time you issue an Edit->Copy command the current contents of the clipboard are replaced with the newly copied items. Command

Paste

Menu

Edit > Paste

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Ctrl + V

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button

The paste command copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into your current design. The contents of the clipboard are placed at the centre of your current view and are automatically selected to allow you to move them to the desired position. The paste command can only paste items placed in the clipboard by the KASEMAKE system. If there are items available to KASEMAKE in the clipboard, the Paste command will become accessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command to insert the clipboard items into your design.

7

Delete Selection

Command

Delete

Menu

Edit->Delete Selection

Shortcuts

Standard Toolbar

Keys

Delete key

The delete selection command works in the same way as the cut command except that the deleted items are not placed in the Windows clipboard. Once you have selected the items to remove, the Delete Selection command will become accessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command and all selected items will be removed from your design. Pressing the delete key is a shortcut to this command.

8

Delete Visible

Command

Delete Visible

Menu

Edit > Delete Visible

Shortcuts

Not available

The delete visible command removes all visible items from the current design. There is no need to select anything before using this command. Activate this command and all visible items will be removed. No confirmation is required so care should be taken when using this command. Any items not currently visible will remain unchanged. For further details on visibility of drawing elements refer to “Ground Table...” on page 10-8 in the Views Menu chapter.

Release 9.5 Page 3-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Clear Area KASEMAKE

9

Clear Area

Command

Clear Area

Menu

Edit > Clear Area

Shortcuts

Not available

The clear area command removes the area of drawing defined by a given box, trimming elements where necessary. You can either remove the area within the box or everything outside the box. Activate the command. Check or set the options. Mark the first corner of the area to remove / leave intact. A rubber band box will now appear as you move the cursor. Once the area is enclosed mark the end of the box. The enclosed items will now be removed / trimmed as per the options.

10

Delete Image

Command

Delete Image

Menu

Edit > Delete Image

Shortcuts

Not available

The delete image command removes the scanned image from your current design. There is no need to select anything before using this command. Activate this command and the image will be removed. No confirmation is required so care should be taken when using this command.

11

Image Ground

Command

Image Ground

Menu

Edit > Image Ground

Shortcuts

Not available

The image ground command alters the ground that the image is placed in within your current design. There is no need to select anything before using this command. Activate this command and you will be prompted for the new ground that the image is to be placed in. Click on the arrow to display the pulldown list of available settings. Set the ground to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on the new value to set it. Finally, click on OK. The image will now be redisplayed in the newly selected ground.

12

Quick Edit Sub-Menu Quick Edit provides a menu of Quick Move and Copy functions These features are designed to speed up the copy and move functions without having to go into the normal MOVE / COPY rollup dialog.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-5

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

12.1

Move

Command

Move

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Move

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

The move command allows you to move all or part of the design. First select the items to move. Activate this command. Firstly, you are prompted for an origin point to use to offset the selected items. This must be identified using the appropriate mode (e.g.Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to pick the new position for the selected items, again using the appropriate mode. As you start to move the cursor to identify the required position, the selected items will move as well to help you to reposition them correctly. On identifying the new position, the selected items will be redrawn at their new position.

12.2

Move Horizontal Mirror Command

Move Horizontal Mirror

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Move Horizontal Mirror

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

With one or more items selected, choose this command to Mirror the selected items horizontally. First of all you are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the selected items. Again, pick a point using the appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with the cursor, to help you to relocate them correctly. Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be redrawn mirrored at the new position.

12.3

Move Vertical Mirror Command

Move Vertical Mirror

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Move Vertical Mirror

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

Choose this command to Mirror part or all of your design vertically. First select the item(s) to be mirrored. Acivate this command. You are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the selected items. Again, pick a point using the appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with the cursor, to help you to relocate them correctly.

Release 9.5 Page 3-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Quick Edit Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be redrawn mirrored at the new position.

12.4

Copy

Command

Copy

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Copy

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

The copy command allows you to copy all or part of the design. First select the items to copy. Activate this command. You are prompted for an origin point to use to offset the selected items. This must be identified using the appropriate mode (e.g.Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to pick the position for the copied items, again using the appropriate mode. As you start to move the cursor to identify the required position, the copied items will be displayed and will move with the cursor to help you to position them correctly. On identifying the new position, the selected items are copied to the given position.

12.5

Copy Horizontal Mirror Command

Copy Horizontal Mirror

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Copy Horizontal Mirror

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

With one or more items selected, choose this command to make a horizontally mirrored copy of the selected items. First of all you are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the copied items. Again, pick a point using the appropriate mode. The copied items will be displayed mirrored and will move with the cursor, to help you to locate them correctly. Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be mirrored and copied to the given position.

12.6

Copy Vertical Mirror Command

Copy Vertical Mirror

Menu

Edit > Quick Edit->Copy Vertical Mirror

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

Choose this command to make a vertically.mirrored copy of part or all of your design First select the item(s) to be mirrored.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-7

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Acivate this command. You are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint). Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the copied items. Again, pick a point using the appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with the cursor, to help you to position them correctly. Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be mirrored and copied to the given position.

13

Corner Copy...

Command

Corner Copy...

Menu

Edit > Corner Copy...

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

This command allows you to take a corner of a design and generate the entire symmetrical design. It effectively performs a double mirror. Activate this command. The Copy Corner dialog is displayed:-

Existing Corner Set the corner which best describes the corner of the design you have already completed by clicking on the corresponding radio button. If you wish to leave a gap between copies make sure the Use Extents check box is cleared to make the X Offset and Y Offset fields accessible. Set them by typing a value directly or using the arrows as follows:• X Offset - the horizontal distance to leave between copies. • Y Offset - the vertical distance to leave between copies If you wish to copy the design exactly with no gaps, set the Use Extents check box.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings. The current design will now be mirror copied with any given gaps to produce the complete design.

Release 9.5 Page 3-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Move / Copy KASEMAKE

14

Move / Copy

Command

Move / Copy

Menu

Edit > Move / Copy

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

Mouse Button

Right hand mouse button

The move / copy command is a multi-function command allowing you to mirror, scale and rotate, reduce by a percentage or resize part or all of your design. Elements can either be altered directly or a copy can be made which is then altered. In addition, a cloned copy can be made. This command can also be used to step and repeat part or all of your design i.e. to produce multiple copies at a fixed offset. Activating the move / copy command produces a move / copy rollup which is a special type of tabbed dialog box. It is non-modal, meaning that you can continue to work whilst it is on display. It also has rollup functionality to allow you to close it up, leaving only a title bar, when you need to access the drawing area beneath. It can then be opened out fully when you wish to access the move / copy functions. It can also be docked and made to auto hide as detailed in the first chapter. See “Special Dialogs” on page 1-5. Each command is allocated a page of options within the move / copy rollup. Simply click on the corresponding tab to access the options available for the required command. With the exception of the step and repeat and reduction command, all the commands have Move, Copy and Clone buttons . Move operates on the original selection set. Copy generates a copy of the selection set which is then operated on, leaving the original elements unchanged. Clone produces a copy of the selection set which is then operated on and converts the original elements to a master clone. For step and repeat, where the nature of the command is to produce multiple copies, the Apply button produces the “Copy” effect of the command.

14.1

Reference Points Again, excepting reduction and step and repeat, the commands make use of reference points to position the new / altered elements. Decide whether you wish to specify a reference point or use a predefined reference point. Click on the Use Reference Points check box to set or clear it accordingly. If you set the Use Reference Points check box, the Drag check box will appear. Set it if you wish the selection set to be displayed with the cursor as you move to the new position. If you are not using reference points, select a reference point from the grid of predefined reference points. Each point in the grid can be thought of as corresponding to one of the resize handles of the selection box, surrounding the elements you have selected. You are therefore deciding which of these resize handles corresponds to the position you wish to mirror about.

14.2

Defining the Selection Set With the exception of reduction which works on the entire design, you need to select part or all of your design for the move / copy functions to operate on. The selected items are enclosed within a selection box with resize handles and are referred to as the selection set. There are several methods available for selecting elements. Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-9

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

14.3

Command Pages Click on the appropriate tab of the move / copy rollup to access the required command page and its settings. Each command should be set up as follows:-

14.3.1

Mirror Mirror allows you to mirror horizontally, vertically or in both directions. Alternatively, you can mirror about a given line. Mirroring can also be switched off if you wish to make a single copy of the selection set. Set the type of mirroring required by clicking on the Mirror button(s) to set / unset them. Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “Reference Points” on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes. Finally, click on Move, Copy or Clone as appropriate. If you have chosen to mirror about a given line, the system will now prompt you to identify the line. Click near to the line you wish to identify. If you are not using reference points the mirror settings will now be applied to the selection set. The resulting elements will appear selected ready for further commands if required. If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points” on page 3-12.

14.3.2

Scale / Rotate This command allows you to apply scaling and or rotation either to the original selection set or to a copy of the selection set. Set the scale factor to apply to all the X coordinates using the up and down arrows, or typing directly. Set the scale factor to apply to all the Y coordinates using the up and down arrows, or typing directly. Set the rotation to apply using the up and down arrows, or by typing directly. Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “Reference Points” on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes. Finally, click on Move, Copy or Clone as appropriate. If you are not using reference points the scale and rotation settings will now be applied to the selection set. The resulting elements will appear selected ready for further commands if required. If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points” on page 3-12.

14.3.3

Reduction This command allows you to reduce your design by a given percentage either in the horizontal or vertical direction. Unlike the other move / copy commands, reduction does not require a selection set. The entire visible design is affected by the reduction command. Choose which axis to apply the reduction by clicking on the corresponding Direction radio button.

Release 9.5 Page 3-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Move / Copy KASEMAKE Set the Shrinkage Factor percentage using the up and down arrows or by typing it directly. Finally, click on Apply and the selected items will reduce accordingly.

14.3.4

Resize The resize command allows you to specify an exact size to scale the selection set to. Set the X size value to use as the new overall horizontal measurement for the selection set. Click on the arrows, or type the value directly. Set the Y size value to use as the new overall vertical measurement for the selection set. Click on the arrows, or type the value directly. Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “Reference Points” on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes. Finally, click on Move, Copy or Clone as appropriate. If you are not using reference points the selected elements will now be resized. The resulting elements will appear selected ready for further commands if required. If you have chosen to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points” which follows.

14.3.5

Rotate To Specific Angle This command allows you to rotate either the original selection set or a copy of the selection set to a given angle. Set the Current Angle, this is the orientation of the selected elements. You can opt to specify the current angle by choosing an existing element by setting the Specify by Element check box. Alternatively, you can clear this check box and specify the current orientation by choosing one of the predefined angles, or you can set a specific angle using the up and down arrows, or by typing the required value directly. Set the Final Angle, this is the angle to rotate the selected elements by with respect to the current angle. You can opt to specify the final angle by choosing an existing element. To do this, set the Specify by Element check box. Alternatively, you can clear this check box and specify the final angle by choosing one of the predefined angles, or you can set a specific angle using the up and down arrows, or by typing the required value directly. Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “Reference Points” on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes. Finally, click on Move, Copy or Clone as appropriate. if you have chosen to specify either the current angle or final angle or both by identifying an element, you will now be prompted to identify these element(s) in turn as appropriate. Identify the element(s) in the usual way using any of the drawing modes. If you are not using reference points the selection set will now be rotated. The resulting elements will appear selected and you will be asked to confirm this is the required solution. Choose Yes to accept this solution. The newly placed elements will now become the selection set for subsequent commands Choose No to display an alternative solution. Again you will be required to confirm whether this is the required solution. Choose Cancel to reset the command, restoring the original selection set.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-11

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points” on page 3-12. Having completed the identification of the reference points, the selected elements will be rotated and you will be prompted for confirmation, proceed as described in the previous paragraph.

14.3.6

Step And Repeat The Step and Repeat… command is used to produce a given number of copies of the selected elements. Copies can be generated linearly, by specifying a horizontal offset and a vertical offset to apply to the selection set producing a stepped effect. Alternatively, copies can be generated radially, where the selected elements are rotated around a given point at a given angle. Set the Copies field to the number of copies required. Decide whether you require a linear or a radial layout by setting the corresponding radio button.

14.3.6.1 Linear Copies If you have opted for linear copies, the X Offset and Y Offset fields will be displayed. Set the horizontal offset to use for each copy by setting the X Offset field. To generate a column effect, set this value to zero. Set the vertical offset to use for each copy by setting the Y Offset field. To generate a row effect, set this value to zero. Click on Apply. The system will now generate the requested number of copies of the selected elements using the given offsets.

14.3.6.2 Radial Copies If you have opted for radial copies, the Angle field will be displayed. Set the angle of rotation to apply to each copy by setting the Angle field. This value is cumulative i.e. each copy will take the rotation of the previous value plus this given angle of rotation. Click on Apply. The system will now request a rotation point around which to rotate and position the copies. Specify the point using any of the available drawing modes. The copies will now be generated according to the given settings.

14.4

Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points If you have chosen to use reference points you will now be prompted to identify an origin to be used to position the selection set. Click with the left mouse button on a suitable point using any of the available drawing modes. Next you must identify the new position for this origin point. If you have set the Drag option, the selected items will be transformed according to the command settings you have specified and will move with the cursor to help you to determine the correct new position. Click with the left mouse button on the required point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used. Finally, the selected items will be transformed and repositioned at the given origin. The resulting elements whether they are a copy of the original selection set, or the original selection set modified, will now be selected automatically ready for further commands if required.

Release 9.5 Page 3-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Move Points KASEMAKE If you wish to unselect them simply click anywhere outside the selection box. Alternatively, you can select a different set of elements using any of the selection methods available.

15

Move Points

Command

Move Points

Menu

Edit > Move Points

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

This command allows you to stretch or shrink elements by moving one or more end points. Ensure that the options are set appropriately. Activate the command and you will be prompted Mark Start. There are two ways to proceed to identify the points to be moved:• Define a box which encloses the end points to be moved. To do this click and hold the left mouse button to define the start point of the box. Drag the cursor and a rubber band box will appear. When the box surrounds the required end points, release the mouse button to define the end point. Note: Any of the drawing modes can be used to define the move points box. If coordinate mode is chosen, no rubber banding will occur. • Alternatively, identify individual points using a single click close to the required point. All of the points which have been chosen are illustrated with markers drawn in the selection colour. If an entire element is enclosed, the element is drawn in the selection colour instead. You can repeatedly identify single points or groups of points using a combination of the above two methods whilst simultaneously holding down the CTRL key. Coincident Points If you have coincident points but only wish one element to be moved, hold down the CTRL key and use a single click near to the element you wish to identify. A marker will be drawn at the coincident point but only the element nearest to the cursor will be altered.

15.1

Completing the Move Points Command Once all points are identified, you must identify a new position for the chosen end points. There are two ways to do this. Either by defining an origin and new position or using the nudge feature to move the selected items by a fixed amount.

15.1.1

Use Reference Points Mark the point using any of the available drawing modes. If you have not set the option to drag elements, the bounding rectangle for the selected elements will now appear to assist you in relocating the origin point. Now identify the new position for the origin point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used. If you have set the option to drag elements, the elements will move with the cursor to assist you in relocating them.

15.1.2

Nudge Facility Alternatively, use the Nudge facility to move the identified elements using the arrow keys as direction indicators. Each time an arrow key is pressed the selected elements are moved in the

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-13

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE corresponding direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor. Click anywhere within the drawing area when the design is at the correct position to complete the move. The Nudge factor can be altered using the File->Preferences command described on page 2-44, or by editing the current setting which is displayed to the right hand side of the status bar. See “Status Bar” on page 1-4. The nudge angle can also be altered so the the arrow keys cause a move at a given angle to the corresponding direction. Refer to for further details. Note:

Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10

Once the new position is identified, the elements are altered according to how the move points box was placed:• If all the elements end points where enclosed by the move points box, the element will simply be shifted to the new position. • If one endpoint of a line was enclosed by the move points box, this point will be moved but the other endpoint will remain unchanged, thus the line will be stretched, or shrunk as appropriate. • If one endpoint of an arc, or one endpoint and the centre of the arc are enclosed by the move points box, these points will move and a new arc which maintains the original radius will be generated. The other end point may be adjusted to maintain this radius.

15.1.3

Move Points with Dimensions If you identify any of the lines used for a parallel dimension by enclosing both of its end points, the dimension will automatically be identified as well and subsequently adjusted to redimension the new position of the lines. Similarly, if you identify one or more end points for either of the lines between which an angle dimension has been placed, the angle dimension will be automatically selected and adjust to reflect the new angle between the moving lines.

15.2

Options You can choose whether you wish to drag the selected elements or not, when relocating the origin point. Set the drag option, if you wish the selected elements to follow the cursor and help you to identify the new position for them. Clear the drag option, if you wish to relocate the selected elements using the bounding rectangle for these elements.

16

Move Points Poly

Command

Move Points Poly

Menu

Edit > Move Points Poly

Shortcuts

Not available

This command is similar to Move Points as it allows you to stretch or shrink elements by moving one or more end points. However with this command the points to move are enclosed by a polygon to enable awkward areas to be accessed.

Release 9.5 Page 3-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Move Points Poly KASEMAKE Ensure that the options are set appropriately. Activate the command and you will be prompted Mark Start. Identify a start point for the polygon. You will now be prompted Mark End. Drag the cursor and a rubber band line will appear. This line forms the base of the polygon. Identify a suitable end point. You will now be prompted Mark Origin. Drag the cursor and a three sided rubber band polygon will be drawn. Identify the next vertex. Drag the cursor and a four sided polygon will rubber band. Continue to identify vertices for the polygon until all the points you wish to move are enclosed. Double click to identify the final vertex and complete the polygon definition process. Note: Any of the drawing modes can be used to define the move points polygon. If coordinate mode is chosen, no rubber banding will occur. All of the points which have been surrounded by the polygon are illustrated with markers drawn in the selection colour. If an entire element is enclosed, the element is drawn in the selection colour instead. Once all points are identified, you must identify a new position for the chosen end points. There are two ways to do this. Either by defining an origin and new position or using the nudge feature to move the selected items by a fixed amount.

16.1

Use Reference Points Mark an origin point using any of the available drawing modes. If you have not set the option to drag elements, the poygon will now appear to assist you in relocating the origin point. If you have set the option to drag elements, the elements will move with the cursor to assist you in relocating them. Now identify the new position for the origin point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used.

16.2

Nudge Facility Alternatively, use the Nudge facility to move the identified elements using the arrow keys as direction indicators. Each time an arrow key is pressed the selected elements are moved in the corresponding direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor. Click anywhere within the drawing area when the design is at the correct position to complete the move. The Nudge factor can be altered using the File->Preferences command described on page 2-44, or by editing the current setting which is displayed to the right hand side of the status bar. See “Status Bar” on page 1-4. The nudge angle can also be altered so the the arrow keys cause a move at a given angle to the corresponding direction. Refer to for further details. Note:

Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10

Once the new position is identified, the elements are altered according to how the move points polygon was placed:• If all the elements end points where enclosed by the move points polygon, the element will simply be shifted to the new position. • If one endpoint of a line was enclosed by the move points polygon, this point will be moved but the other endpoint will remain unchanged, thus the line will be stretched, or shrunk as appropriate.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-15

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE • If one endpoint of an arc, or one endpoint and the centre of the arc are enclosed by the move points polygon, these points will move and a new arc which maintains the original radius will be generated. The other end point may be adjusted to maintain this radius.

16.3

Options You can choose whether you wish to drag the selected elements or not, when relocating the origin point. Set the drag option, if you wish the selected elements to follow the cursor and help you to identify the new position for them. Clear the drag option, if you wish to relocate the selected elements using the rubber band polygon.

17

Change Nudge Angle... Command

Change Nudge Angle...

Menu

Edit > Change Nudge Angle...

Shortcuts

None

The Change Nudge Angle... command is used to redefine the nudge angle used by the nudge feature of Move Points or Select . A nudge angle can be useful if you want to nudge items along an angled line. (e.g. nudging a tab along the side of a sloping tray). Activate the command. The Nudge Angle dialog is displayed.

The angle can be entered as a fixed value, or defined by selecting an element in the drawing area. • To specify a fixed value either choose from the predefined angles by clicking on the corresponding button. The angle is automatically displayed. Alternatively, type an angle directly into the angle edit box or use the arrow keys to scroll the current setting. •

If you wish to identify the angle by selecting an existing element, click on the Get Angle From Element button.

Once the nudge angle is defined, press OK. If Get Angle From Element was chosen, you will be prompted to select an element within the drawing area that is drawn at the angle you want to use as the nudge angle. Simply click on the appropriate element to identify it.

Release 9.5 Page 3-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Change KASEMAKE Once an angle is determined, this becomes the current nudge angle. All nudge functions will use this angle until it is reset. To return the nudge angle to the default angle, use the Change Nudge Angle... command to reset the nudge angle to 0.

18

Note:

The change nudge angle command can be set to a keyboard shortcut of your choice. Try CTRL + N

Note:

Changing the nudge angle can be useful for moving points along a defined angle

Change

Command

Change

Menu

Edit > Change...

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

Mouse Button

Right hand mouse button

The change command allows you to alter the attributes of a selection of elements, i.e. linestyle, ground etc. You must first select the items you wish to change using one of the standard selection methods. Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details on selecting elements. Activating this command produces the change dialog. Set the options as required then click OK to make these changes to the selection set. Click on Cancel to leave the selected elements unchanged. The options available for this command are associated with a check box. All attributes whose associated check box is ticked, will be applied to the selection set. The attribute check boxes should therefore be cleared if no change is required. The attributes which are available are:-

18.1

Element Style Ground Check the ground check box to change the ground that the selected items are associated with. The ground combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down list of grounds. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value to select it. Line Style Check the linestyle check box to change the linestyle that the selected items are drawn in. The linestyle combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down list of line styles. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value to select it. Line Width Check the line width check box to change the line width that the selected items are drawn at. The line width combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down list of widths. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value to select it.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-17

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Profile Check the profile check box to change the profile that the selected items are associated with. The profile combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down list of available profiles. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value to select it.

18.2

Text Settings The following attributes can also be altered for selected text:Text Size Check the text size check box to change the size of selected text. The text size edit box now becomes accessible. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows, or click on the value to retype it. Dimension Text Size Check the dimension text size check box to change the size of text for selected dimensions. The text size edit box now becomes accessible. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows, or click on the value to retype it. Font Check the font check box to change the font that the selected text elements are drawn in. The font combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down list of fonts. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value to select it.

19

Copy Properties From... Command

Copy Properties From...

Menu

Edit > Copy Properties From...

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

This command allows you to copy specific properties from a given element to the currently selected elements. You should select the elements you wish to update before you activate this command, using any of the available select commands. Activate the Copy Properties From... command. The Copy Properties dialog will be displayed as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 3-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Text KASEMAKE Simply set or clear the check box corresponding to the ground, line style or line width properties. Text properties, namely font and size, can also be applied to any selected text elements if required. Set or clear the text settings check box as appropriate. Click on OK to confirm any new settings, otherwise click on Cancel to leave the settings as they were. You will now be prompted to mark an element. This is the element from which the chosen properties will be copied. The cursor will change to a hand to help you to identify the element. Move the hand close to the element you wish to identify and click with the left hand mouse button to pick it. The selected elements will now be updated as per the chosen settings using the properties of the element just identified.

20

Text

Command

Text

Menu

Edit > Text

Shortcuts

Not available

Keys

Alt+F8

This command allows you to amend the contents of a selected text string. The text string must therefore be selected before you can activate this command. Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details on selecting the text string. Note:

Alternatively as a shortcut to this command simply double click on a text string to select it and activate the edit command.

Once this command has been activated the text cursor will appear. You can now move the cursor about the text string using the left and right arrow keys. Simply insert new characters or use delete or backspace to remove characters as required. Once the text string has been amended press Enter to leave Edit->Text changing the string permanently.

21

TrueType

Command

TrueType

Menu

Edit > TrueType

Shortcuts

Not available

This command allows you to amend the contents of a selected truetype text string. The text string must therefore be selected before you can activate this command. Refer to“Select” on page 3-26 for further details on selecting the text string. Note:

Alternatively as a shortcut to this command simply double click on a truetype text string to select it and activate the edit command.

Once this command has been activated the text input dialog will be displayed. You can now alter any of the attributes of the truetype text string by adjusting the attributes. The result of any changes will be reflected in the Sample section of the dialog. Refer to the section Draw>TrueType on page 4-33 for a full explanation of the attributes.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-19

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE To alter the contents of the text string, use the arrow keys to move along the string. Simply insert new characters or use delete or backspace to remove characters as required. Once the text string has been amended press OK to close the text input dialog, any new attributes will now be applied to the truetype string. Any changes to the text string will also be made. Cancel will ignore any changes made and leave the string unchanged.

22

Bezier Curve

Command

Bezier Curve

Menu

Edit > Bezier Curve

Shortcuts

Not available

This command allows you to alter a previously drawn bezier curve. First select the bezier curve you wish to amend using one of the available Select commands. Refer to “Select” on page 26 for further details on how to select the required bezier curve. Activate this command. Markers will now be drawn to illustrate all the nodes for the chosen bezier curve. You will also be prompted to identify a node to edit. Click near the centre of the required node to identify it. Two lines will now appear through the centre of the nodes tangential to the sections of curve to either side of the chosen node. Each line displays an additional control point at its end. You can now click on to and while holding down the left hand mouse button drag either of these control points or the original node to edit the curve. The curve is updated as you move the mouse to show the effect. Release the mouse button when you are happy with the adjustment. You can continue to make further adjustments using one of the other control points. To complete the adjustment or to access other commands which can be used to alter the chosen bezier curve, click with the right hand mouse button in the drawing area to display a context menu of commands as follows :Cusp Choose the cusp command to restrict the adjustments to one section of the curve only. After selecting this command. Click on a control point and drag it. Any movement is only applied to the line with the control point you move and only the section of bezier curve associated with it is updated. Smooth Choose the smooth command to apply a smoothing factor to both sections of the curve. Symmetric Choose the symmetric command to apply the same adjustments to both sections of curve.After selecting this command. Click on a control point and drag it. Movement is applied to both lines. The fixed line is automatically adjusted to mirror the one you move and both sections of bezier curve are updated to reflect the movement. Delete Choose this command to remove the current node. No confirmation is required.

Release 9.5 Page 3-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Clone KASEMAKE Add Node Choose this command to add an additional node. You should identify the position for the new node by clicking with the left mouse button. A new node will appear. The new section of curve will be added and the tangential lines and control points for the new sections will also appear. Accept Choose this command to accept any adjustments you have made to the selected bezier curve and make them permanent. Any control points will be removed and the bezier curve drawn in its original colour with any adjustments made. To Line This command changes the section of curve from the chosen control point from a curve to a line. To Curve This command changes the section of curve from the chosen control point from a line to a curve, adding the tangential lines and control points to allow the curve to be adjusted.

23

Clone

Command

Edit Clone

Menu

Edit > Clone

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

This command allows you to clone the selected elements i.e. to take a copy of them. The original elements are grouped after this command has been executed. The resulting clone is therefore also grouped. Activate this command. The selected elements are cloned producing a copy of the original which is drawn slightly offset from the original elements. The resulting clone is drawn highlighted as it automatically replaces the original selection set.

24

Pick Ground

Command

Pick Ground

Menu

Edit > Pick Ground

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar Right hand mouse button

Pick Ground allows you to select all elements in the same ground as a chosen element. Activate the command from the Edit menu or by clicking with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. You will now be prompted to mark an element. Click on or near to the required element. The element and all grounds drawn in the same ground as the marked element, will now be displayed in the selection colour. The selection box with resize handles will also be displayed. If you wish to pick more than one ground, choose Pick Ground again and hold down the Shift key before identifying an element in the additional ground. This process can be repeated for further grounds if required.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-21

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

25

Select Sub-Menu Many of the commands require elements to be selected, before they can be used. Several select commands are available providing different methods for selecting elements. Elements that have been selected are displayed in the current selection color, black by default, to distinguish them. See “Preferences” on page 2-44 for details of how to change the selection colour. The selected items are referred to as the selection set. The extents of the selection set are enclosed by a dotted rectangle known as the selection box or tracker. Small black markers appear around the edge of the selection box. These are resize handles.

25.1

Manipulation of the Selection Set There are additional functions available with the selection set which are not available as menu commands. These are described in the following:-

25.1.1

Adding to the Selection Set You can add to an existing selection set by holding the Shift key whilst clicking and releasing the mouse button on or near the element to be added. If successful, the newly identified element will be displayed in the selection colour and the selection box adjusted where necessary to enclose the new element. Any number of elements can be added in this way. Note:

25.1.2

Elements can only be added to the selection set individually and in conjunction with the Shift key. Picking an element that is already selected, results in it being removed from the selection set. Refer to “Selecting Elements Individually” on page 3-27 for details of selecting individual items.

Clearing the Selection Set Choosing an element or elements not already selected will add these elements to the selection set replacing the current selection set. If you wish to clear the selection set without identifying further elements, simply click and release the mouse button away from any elements. Elements removed from a selection set are redisplayed in their original colour. If no new selection set is defined, the selection box and resize handles are also removed.

25.1.3

Auto Scroll Manipulation of the selection set may cause the design to automatically scroll if the cursor is moved to one of the edges of the drawing area, depending upon current settings. The option to automatically scroll is determined from the Allow Autoscroll setting located on the View page of File->Preferences. See “View” on page 2-51.

25.1.4

Freehand Move / Copy of the Selection Set The selection set can also be moved by clicking and holding anywhere inside the selection box. The cursor changes to a cross to show that the items can be moved. Drag the cursor to the new position. Release the mouse button and the selection set will be redisplayed relative to the new cursor position.

Release 9.5 Page 3-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE To make a copy of the selected items, click the right hand mouse button once whilst dragging the cursor. When the mouse button is released, the selected items will be copied relative to the new cursor position, leaving the original selection set unchanged.

25.1.4.1 Freehand Move - Horizontal / Vertical Movement Only The selection set can be moved in a horizontal / vertical direction only by holding down the CTRL key in conjunction with the left mouse button. Again, the cursor must stay within the selection set. Click and hold the left mouse button whilst holding down the CTRL key. Vertical Only Keep the cursor within the horizontal extents of the selection box and move up or down to restrict movement to vertical movement only. Horizontal Only Move the cursor outside of the horizontal extents of the selection box, or from side to side whilst within the extents of the selection box to restrict movement to horizontal movement only. In both cases, release the left mouse button to reposition the selection set.

25.1.5

Resizing the Selection Set The selection set can be resized by clicking and holding the left mouse button on one of the resize handles and dragging it to a new position. The cursor changes as you move over the handle to show the direction in which you can drag. Releasing the mouse button resizes the selection box and causes the selection set to be stretched or shrunk to fit the newly sized box. Resizing Proportionally The selection set can be scaled proportionally using the corner resize handles. Click and drag a corner in any direction, the selected items will resize in both x and y dimensions to retain their original proportion.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-23

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Resizing by a Factor of 100%

The selected items can be resized by a factor of 100% by holding down the CTRL key whilst dragging one of the resize handles. The selected items will not be resized until you move approximately the width or height of the original items. They will then resize to the nearest factor of 100% according to where the final cursor position is with respect to the original cursor position. Note:

25.1.6

A copy of the selected items can be made during any of the above resize methods, by clicking the right mouse button once whilst dragging the cursor. The resizing will then be applied to a copy of the selection set, leaving the original elements unchanged.

Mirroring the Selection Set The selection set can be mirrored horizontally or vertically using any of the side resize handles. The two resize handles on the vertical sides of the selection box can be used to perform a horizontal mirror and the two resize handles on the horizontal sides of the selection box can be used to perform a vertical mirror. Always choose the resize handle furthest away from the side you wish to perform the mirror. In effect, you have to drag the selected items across themselves to achieve a mirror. Identify the handle you wish to use, by moving the cursor over the available handles. The cursor will change as you move over each handle to show the direction in which you can drag. Click and hold the left mouse button on the appropriate resize handle and drag it across the original selection set to a new position. Releasing the mouse button gives a mirrored version of the selection box and causes the selection set to be mirrored within the newly sized box.

Release 9.5 Page 3-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Mirroring Proportionately The selection set can be mirrored proportionately using the corner resize handles. Click and drag a corner in any direction, again you must cross over the original selection set to achieve the mirror. The selected items will be mirrored once you cross the original selection set and will resize in both x and y dimensions to retain their original proportion. Mirroring by a Factor of 100%

The selected items can be mirrored and resized by a factor of 100% by holding down the CTRL key whilst dragging one of the resize handles. As before the mirror effect is not produced until you cross the original selection set. The selected items will then appear mirrored and resized only when you move approximately the width or height of the original items again. They will then be mirrored and resized to the nearest factor of 100% according to where the final cursor position is with respect to the original cursor position. Note:

25.1.7

A mirrored copy of the selected items can be made during any of the above methods, by clicking the right mouse button once whilst dragging the cursor. The mirroring and any resizing will then be applied to a copy of the selection set, leaving the original elements unchanged.

Rotating the Selection Set The selection set can be rotated about its centre using any of the resize handles in conjunction with the SHIFT key. Identify the handle you wish to use by holding down the SHIFT key and moving the cursor over the available handles. The cursor will change to a rotation arrow as you move over each handle. Click and hold the left mouse button on the appropriate handle whilst continuing to hold down the SHIFT key. Drag the rotation cursor to begin to rotate the selection set about its centre. Releasing the mouse button causes the selection set to be rotated to the new position.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-25

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Rotating by a Fixed Increment The selection set can also be rotated as above but by a fixed increment. The increment is determined by the Line Angle Inc. setting available through File->Preferences on the Settings page. Ensure that this is set to the increment you wish to use. See “Settings” on page 2-46. Hold down the SHIFT key for rotation and in addition the CTRL key to confirm that a fixed increment is required. Now move the cursor over the available handles. The cursor will change to a rotation arrow as you move over each handle. Click and hold the left mouse button on the appropriate handle whilst continuing to hold down the SHIFT and CTRL keys simultaneously. Drag the rotation cursor to begin to rotate the selection set about its centre a given increment at a time. Releasing the mouse button causes the selection set to be rotated to the new position.

25.1.8

Nudge The nudge feature can be used to move the selected elements by a fixed amount. The arrow keys are used as direction indicators for nudging. Each time an arrow is pressed, the objects will move in that direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor. The nudge factor is displayed in the lower right hand side of the status bar. To change the nudge factor simply click on the current value in the status bar and either retype it or use the arrows to scroll to the required value. The Nudge factor can also be changed using Preferences. See “Nudge Factor” on page 2-45 for further details. Note:

Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10.

The nudge angle can be redefined using the “Change nudge angle” command on page 16. This can be useful if you want to nudge items along an angled line. (e.g. nudging a tab along the side of a sloping tray).

25.1.9

Pop-Up Menu A pop up menu providing a short cut to some of the edit commands is available when using the select command. Click the right hand mouse button within the drawing area to activate the pop up menu. A command can then be activated by clicking with the mouse on the required command name. Note:

25.2

Select

Some of the items in the pop up menu may appear greyed out if no elements are currently selected. Command

Select

Menu

Edit > Select > Select

Toolbar Button Main Tool Bar “Select“ is a powerful command that allows you to identify one or more elements which are to be added to the selection set. Activating this command prompts for the start of the selection box. Items can either be selected using a box or individually as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 3-26

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

25.2.1

Selecting Elements Individually Items can be selected individually by clicking and releasing the left mouse button on or near to the required item. The element if picked correctly, will now be drawn in the selection colour and the selection box with resize handles will appear. If you fail to select an element, try picking a point closer to the required element. If you still have difficulty, you may need to relax the selection tolerance. See “Preferences” on page 2-44 for details of how to change the selection tolerance.

25.2.2

Selecting Elements with a Box Elements can be selected and placed in the selection set using a box to identify them. The elements will be selected depending upon the position of the box and the select command options currently set. Before defining the box, you should check the selection options are correct and reset them if necessary. Once the options are set they will retain their value, so it may not always be necessary to change them. Please refer to the next section “Select Command Options” for a full explanation of setting the select options. Mark the start of the box by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Drag the cursor and the box will rubber band. Release the button to define the other diagonal point of the box. The selection box with resize handles will now appear. All the elements which are chosen by applying the box and the select command options, will now be displayed in the selection colour to show that they belong to the selection set. If you wish to temporarily override the select options, you can hold down the ALT key whilst identifying the box. The options will automatically toggle as follows:-

25.2.3

Current setting

Effect of ALT key

Inside

Part Inside

Part Inside

Inside

Outside

Inside

Selecting Text Strings for Editing The Select command can be used to edit text strings. Simply double click to identify the text entity you wish to edit. If you select a text entity it will now be drawn in the selection colour and the text cursor will appear ready for you to make alterations to the text string as per the Edit->Text command. Please see “Text” on page 19 of this chapter. Similarly, the Select command can be used to edit truetype text. If you double click to identify a truetype string, the Text Input dialog used to enter / amend truetype text will be displayed ready for you to make any amendments as per the Edit->Truetype command. Please see “TrueType” on page 19 of this chapter.

25.2.4

Select Command Options Options are available for the select command to help to determine which Activate the Options command, Draw->Options from the menu, or click on the Options button in the Standard Tool Bar. The select tool options should now be set as follows:-

25.2.4.1 Selection Method Choose the selection method to be used to identify which elements to include in the selection set by clicking on one of the following:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-27

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE • Inside - Only elements entirely contained within the selection box will be included • Part Inside - Any elements either partly or wholly contained within the selection box will be included • Outside - Only elements completely outside the selection box will be included

25.2.4.2 Graphics Type If a .TIF image has been loaded in to your design, the graphics type option will appear. This is used to determine whether the image, or the design or both should be selected. Click on the required setting as follows:• Image - Only the image part will be selected • Vectors - Only the design elements will be selected • Both - The image and design elements will be selected

25.2.4.3 Show Elements when Dragging Set this option if you wish to rubber band any selected items when moving the selection set. Clear this option if you just want to move the selection box. Moving the elements only when it is given a final positon.

Finally, click OK to save the new settings, or Cancel to abandon any changes.

25.3

Select Next

Command

Select Next

Menu

Edit > Select > Select->Next

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button

Select Next works in conjunction with the Select command to help you to identify the correct element, where several elements overlap or are very close together. After using Select, choose Select Next from the Edit menu or by clicking the right hand mouse button within the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. The KASEMAKE system will now search again for another drawing element which is within the selection tolerance of the given cursor point. Select Next can be activated as many times as is necessary to cycle through all the elements which are within the selection tolerance of the original cursor point. See “Preferences” on page 2-44 for details of how to change the selection tolerance.

25.4

Select Last

Command

Select Last

Menu

Edit >Select >Select Last

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button The Select Last command will automatically replace the current selection set with the previous selection set. Where nothing is currently selected, Select Last will simply select the last drawing element(s) to be selected.

Release 9.5 Page 3-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Choose Select Last from the Edit menu or by clicking the right hand mouse button within the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. The previous selection set will automatically be restored.

25.5

Select All

Command

Select All

Menu

Edit > Select > Select All

Shortcuts

Ctrl + A

Mouse Button

Right hand mouse button

This command as its name suggests, will select all the visible elements in your current design. Activate the command from the Edit menu or by clicking with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. All the drawing elements will now be displayed in the selection colour and the selection box with resize handles will appear.

25.6

Select None

Command

Select None

Menu

Edit >Select >Select None

Shortcuts

Ctrl + E

Mouse Button

Not available

This command as its name suggests, will deselect all the previously selected elements in your current design. Activate the command. All the drawing elements will now be displayed in their original colour and the selection box with resize handles removed.

25.7

Invert Selection

Command

Invert Selection

Menu

Edit > Select > Invert Selection

Toolbar Button Not available This command will select the inverse of any selected elements in your current design. Activate the command from the Edit menu. All the drawing elements which were selected will be deselected and redrawn in their original colour. Also, all the elements which were not selected will now be displayed in the selection colour surrounded by the selection box including resize handles.

25.8

Select Entities Sub-Menu There are two methods for selecting entities so a command exists for each method:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-29

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

25.8.1

By Type Command

By Type

Menu

Edit > Select > Select Entities > By Type

Shortcuts

None available

This command allows you to select a specific type of element or elements in your current design. Entities are selected based on their type from a check list of available element types. Activate the command. A Select Entities dialog will now be displayed:-

There are two lists of element types. The first list labelled Available, displays the element types which can be identified by the By Type command. The second list, labelled Selected, shows which element types are currently chosen to be identified by the Select Entities command. To move elements from one list to the other, simply click on the element and use the appropriate arrow button. The element type will move to the other list. Once all the required element types have been moved to the Selected list, click on OK. All elements within the current design which correspond to the element types chosen will now be highlighted in the selection colour and the selection box which contains them will be drawn. These elements become the new selection set ready for interaction with other commands.

25.8.2

By Length Command

By Length

Menu

Edit > Select > Select Entities > By Length

Shortcuts

None available

The By Length command provides an alternative method for identifying entities to be selected. Entities are selected based on their length / radius which must meet a specified criterion.

Release 9.5 Page 3-30

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate this command. The following dialog is displayed:-.

Determine whether you wish to include lines and text by setting or clearing the Length check box. Now specify the criterion to apply to determine which lines and text are selected. Set the appropriate condition by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the drop down list. Choose from:• • • •

= - Equal to < - Less than > - Greater than - Not equal to

Now set the length to combine with this condition. Type the length directly or use the arrows to scroll. Determine whether you wish to include arcs, circles and ellipses by setting or clearing the Radius check box. Now specify the criterion to use to determine which circular elements are selected. Set the appropriate condition as before. Now determine the radius to combine with this condition. Type a suitable value or use the arrows to scroll. Finally click on OK. KASEMAKE will now determine which entities to add to the selection set by applying the given criteria. The elements which meet the criteria are displayed in the current selection colour. A bounding box is drawn around the selected items, confirming that they comprise the current selection set.

25.9

Select Ground

Command

Select Ground

Menu

Edit > Select Ground

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button Select Ground allows you to choose all the elements which are associated with a given ground. Activate Select Ground. A Select Ground dialog will now appear. Set the ground to the required value by clicking on the arrow of the ground combo box. Scroll with the arrows to the required ground. Click on the value to set it. Finally, choose OK to continue or Cancel to abandon the command. If you choose OK, all the elements drawn in the requested ground will now become the current selection set.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-31

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE

25.10

Select Polygon Command

Select Polygon

Menu

Edit > Select Polygon

Shortcuts

Right Hand Mouse Button

The Select Polygon commmand is a variation of the Select command used to identify elements to add to the selection set. It allows greater flexibility when picking elements as you can define the rubber band shape used to identify the elements, rather than being restricted to a rectangular box. Activate this command. Check the Options. You are prompted Mark Start. KASEMAKE requires you to pick a starting point from which to generate the rubber band selection shape. Identify a suitable point using a single mouse click. As you begin to move the cursor, KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the point you picked following the path of the cursor. You will now be prompted, Mark next point (Double Click to end). Identify a second point again using a single mouse click. You have now determined the first side of the Selection Polygon. Again you will be prompted Mark next point (Double Click to end). In addition, KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the last point you picked following the path of the cursor. This is the to help you to identify the next side of the polygon. Pick a point to fix this side. Repeat this process identifying further sides as required. For the final side, you should use a double mouse click to enter the end point. This will not only finalise the position of the side you are identifying but will also complete the Selection Polygon. KASEMAKE will now determine which elements to add to the selection set taking into account the current options. The elements which are identified are displayed in the current selection colour as confirmation. Also, a bounding box is drawn around the selected items, confirming that they comprise the current selection set. This command is self-repeating.

25.10.1

Select Polygon Options Options are available for the Select Polygon command to help to determine which elements are selected. Activate the Options command, Draw->Options from the menu, or click on the Options button in the Standard Tool Bar. The Select Polygon tool options should now be displayed. They are in fact the same as those used for the Select command. They can be set as follows:-

25.10.1.1 Selection Method Choose the selection method to be used to identify which elements to include in the selection set by clicking on one of the following:• Inside - Only elements entirely contained within the selection box will be included • Part Inside - Any elements either partly or wholly contained within the selection box will be included • Outside - Only elements completely outside the selection box will be included

Release 9.5 Page 3-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Select Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

25.10.1.2 Graphics Type If a .TIF image has been loaded in to your design, the graphics type option will appear. This is used to determine whether the image, or the design or both should be selected. Click on the required setting as follows:• Image - Only the image part will be selected • Vectors - Only the design elements will be selected • Both - The image and design elements will be selected

25.10.1.3 Show Elements when Dragging Set this option if you wish to rubber band any selected items when moving the selection set. Clear this option if you just want to move the selection box. Moving the elements only when it is given a final positon.

Finally, click OK to save the new settings, or Cancel to abandon any changes.

25.11

Select Construct Lines Command

Select Construct Lines

Menu

Edit > Select Construct Lines

Shortcuts

Guidelines Toolbar

The Select Construct Lines commmand is a variation of the Select command, but allows you to identify construct lines rather than design elements. Activate this command. Check the current options. You can either select individual construct lines using a single mouse click or alternatively, you can select multiple construct lines by defining a rubber band box. In either case, KASEMAKE now prompts Mark Start. You should proceed in one of the following ways:-

25.11.1

Individual Construct Lines To identify individual construct lines move the mouse near to the required construct line and click with the mouse. KASEMAKE will identify the nearest construct line to the point you identified and will highlight it in the current selection colour as confirmation. To identify additional constuct lines, hold down the SHIFT key whilst picking a point near to the next required construct line. Note:

25.11.2

Picking a construct line twice will cause it to be deselected.

Multiple Construct Lines You can select multiple construct lines by defining a rubber band box. The position of the rubber band box in conjunction with the current options determines which construct lines you wish to identify. KASEMAKE defines a box from the start and end point of its diagonal so you will need to identify two points.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 3-33

3 - Edit Commands KASEMAKE Identify a start point for the diagonal by holding down the left mouse button. Without releasing the button, move the cursor. The prompt changes to Mark End. At the same time, KASEMAKE will begin to rubber band a box from the given start point following the path of the cursor. Once the construct lines you wish to select are adequately identified by the box (depending upon the options), release the mouse button. This sets the final position of the diagonal end point and thus finalises the position of the rubber band box. KASEMAKE will now determine which construct lines have been selected. The chosen construct lines will be drawn in the current selection colour as confirmation.

25.11.3

Delete Construct Lines The Delete command (or delete key shortcut) will remove one or more selected construct lines. Before activating the command, select the construct line(s) you wish to remove using the Edit>Select Construct Line command. See “Select Construct Lines” on page 33. Activate the Delete command. All selected construct lines will instantly be removed without further confirmation.

Release 9.5 Page 3-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

4 - Draw Commands 1

Lines Sub-Menu Select the Lines option from the Draw Menu to access the Lines Sub-menu with the following commands:-

1.1

Line

Command

Line

Menu

Draw > Lines->Line

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The line command allows you to draw a line between two given points. Activate the command. You will be prompted for the start point. Any of the available drawing modes can be used. Set the drawing mode to use. Identify the start point according to the mode being used. A rubber band line starting at the given point will now be drawn following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the end point. Identify the end point using an appropriate drawing mode. It is possible to set the increments in which the angle and or the length of the line increase. This is achieved through the File->Preferences... command. Once they are set, they can be applied by holding down the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor. This command is self repeating. You can continue to draw lines in this way until another command is activated. To draw orthogonal lines, choose the Orthogonal mode. You will only be able to draw horizontal and vertical lines whilst this mode is selected. To draw a continuous sequence of individual lines select the Joined mode. You will now be prompted for the initial start point and end point as before. However, once the first line is identified each subsequent line will assume the previous lines end point as its start point. You will now only need to identify the end point of each additional line. To complete a line sequence, click with the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose Reset from the pop-up menu that now appears. The line command will now be reset ready to accept a new start point for a further line sequence or for a discrete line if the Joined mode is switched off.

1.2

Angle

Command

Angle Line

Menu

Draw > Lines->Angle

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Angle Line command allows you to draw lines by specifying a start point and an angle and length. Activate this command. Identify the start point using any of the available drawing modes. The Angle Line dialog will now appear. Enter the required angle in one of the following ways:•Click on one of the buttons corresponding to the predefined angles

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-1

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE •Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the angle directly into the angle field The length can be specified in one of three ways. Click on the corresponding radio button to choose the method to use as follows :Radial - to specify the actual length of the line X Distance - to specify the horizontal distance of the line Y Distance - to specify the vertical distance of the line Enter the required length in one of the following ways:•Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the value directly into the length field Click on OK to close the Angle Line dialog and draw the specified line. Click on Cancel to close the dialog without drawing a line. This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle lines in this way until another command is selected. The Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines at given angles and lengths. A start point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, after identifying the initial start point, you will only need to identify the angle and length using the Angle Line dialog. Each click on OK will draw the given line and adopt its end point for the start of the next line. After drawing the last line in the sequence, click on Cancel to finish the current line sequence and restart the command.

1.3

Angle Relative

Command

Angle Relative

Menu

Draw > Lines->Angle Relative

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Angle Relative Line command allows you to draw lines at a given angle from another line. In addition to identifying the existing line from which to measure the angle, you need to specify a start point and an angle and length. Activate this command. Identify the line from which you wish to measure the new line in the usual way. The Angle Relative dialog will now appear. Enter the required angle in one of the following ways:•Click on one of the buttons corresponding to the predefined angles •Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the angle directly into the angle field Set the fixed length option if you wish to type in the final length, otherwise clear this option if you wish to determine the length from the cursor position. If you have chosen fixed length, enter the required length in one of the following ways:•Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the value directly into the length field

Release 9.5 Page 4-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Click on OK to close the Angle Relative dialog. Next identify the start point for the new line using any of the available drawing modes. If you have set the fixed length option KASEMAKE will now draw a rubber band line of given length. The orientation of the line changes as you move the cursor. Click to identify which solution you require. The line will now be drawn in the current ground. If you have not set the fixed length option, you will now be required to mark the end of the line. A rubber band line will be drawn from the start point at the given angle from the chosen line. Identify the end point using any of the drawing modes. The line will now be drawn in the current ground. Click on Cancel to close the dialog without drawing a line. This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle relative lines in this way until another command is picked. The Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines. An existing line to measure the angle from and a start point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start point and will measure the angle from the previous line in the sequence. Therefore, after identifying the initial line and initial start point, you will only need to identify the angle and length or angle and end point. After drawing the last line in the sequence, click on Cancel to finish the current line sequence and restart the command.

1.4

Angle Super

Command

Angle Super

Menu

Draw > Lines->Angle Super

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Angle Super Line command allows you to draw lines at an angle of a multiple of 45 degrees from the given start. You need to specify the start point, a point to determine the angle and the required length. Activate this command. Identify the start point of the line using any of the available drawing modes. Next you need to identify a point which will be used to measure the required angle. Move the cursor. KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the given start point at 45 degree intervals following the path of the cursor. Mark a point which approximately defines the angle you require. A line will now be drawn in the current ground from the start point at the given angle and a default length. The Line Length dialog will now appear allowing you to determine the actual length required. Enter the length in one of the following ways:•Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the value directly into the length field Click on OK to close the Line Length dialog. Click on Cancel to close the dialog without drawing a line. This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle super lines in this way until another command is picked.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-3

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines. A start point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, you will only need to identify a point to determine the correct angle and the length of the line. After drawing the last line in the sequence, choose Reset from the right hand pop up menu to finish the current line sequence and restart the command.

1.5

Relative

Command

Relative

Menu

Draw > Lines->Relative

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Relative Line command allows you to draw lines relative to a given start point. You need to specify the start point, the direction and the offset from the start. There are two ways to specify the direction, either by marking an approximate end point or by selecting a predefined direction. The method used is determined by the current options. Activate this command. Check the options. Identify the start point of the line using any of the available drawing modes. KASEMAKE now requires you to determine the direction from the start in one of the following ways:-

1.5.1

Specifying Direction by Cursor Position KASEMAKE will prompt you to Mark End. You need to identify a point which will be used to determine the direction. Move the cursor. KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the given start point at 45 degree intervals following the path of the cursor. Mark a point which approximately defines the direction you require. The Relative Line dialog will now be displayed. The direction button is automatically set according to where you marked in the design relative to the given start. The offset field(s) enabled depend upon the chosen direction. You can change the direction if required. Simply click on the corresponding button. The offset field(s) will update accordingly.

1.5.2

Specifying a Pre-Defined Direction KASEMAKE will display the Relative Line dialog. You need to determine the actual direction and the horizontal and / or vertical offset required. The direction button is set to its previous value. The offset field(s) are displayed according to the direction selected. To change the direction simply click on the corresponding button. The offset field(s) will update accordingly.

1.5.3

Specifying the Offset For both methods, the final requirement is to specify the offset from the given start. Enter the offset(s) in one of the following ways:•Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value •Type the value directly into the length field Click on OK to close the Relative Line dialog. Click on Cancel to close the dialog without drawing a line.

Release 9.5 Page 4-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw relative lines in this way until another command is picked. Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines. A start point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, you will only need to determine the correct direction and any offsets for the line. Again, the method of setting the direction will depend upon the current options. Either by specifying further points or through the predefined buttons of the Relative Line dialog. For both methods, after drawing the last line in the sequence, choose Reset from the right hand pop up menu to finish the current line sequence and restart the command.

1.5.4

Options Activate the options by clicking in the Standard tool bar or through the Draw->Options command. The following dialog will be displayed:-

Set this option if you wish to indicate the direction to draw in by specifying a point. Clear this option if you want to set the direction using the predefined settings in the Relative Line dialog. Finally click on OK to save the new setting or Cancel to abandon any changes.

1.6

Box

Command

Box

Menu

Draw > Lines->Box

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Box command allows you to draw a rectangle by specifying two diagonally opposite corner points. You can also define the rectangle by giving a corner point and a fixed size. Activate the command. The options icon now appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that options are available for this command. It is advisable to check the options are correct before carrying out the command. An explanation of the options is given at the end of this section. Once the options are known to be correct. Identify the first corner of the rectangle. Any of the available drawing modes can be used. Note:

The given point might not be the corner of the box, depending upon the options set and whether additional keys are used. See below for further details.

If the fixed size option was chosen, the specified rectangle will now be drawn in the colour of the current ground and the command will restart. If the fixed option has not been chosen, a rubber band rectangle will now follow the cursor, helping you to identify the other corner of the rectangle. Pick the point using any of the available drawing modes. The resulting rectangle will now be drawn and the command will restart. If you wish to restart the command without drawing the rectangle, click with the right hand mouse button and choose Reset from the pop-up menu.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-5

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Key Overrides The box can be drawn in conjunction with special keys to change the resulting rectangle. Several key overrides are possible as follows :• CTRL - holding the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor causes the box to be square • SHIFT - holding the SHIFT key whilst moving the cursor offsets the rectangle treating the first given point as the centre of the required rectangle rather than the start of the diagonal. • CTRL + SHIFT - both keys can be used together to provide a combination of effects as described above.

1.6.1

Box Command Options Activate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking the Draw->Options command from the menu. The Rectangle Options dialog now appears:Fixed Size If you wish to draw rectangles by specifying the width and height, set the Fixed Size option, otherwise make sure it is cleared. If you have chosen the Fixed Size option, enter the required width and height in one of the following ways:• Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value • Type the value directly into the corresponding field Group Lines If you wish the resulting four lines of the rectangle to be grouped, set the Group Lines option. To treat the resulting four lines as discrete lines, clear this option. Fixed Start If you wish to draw a rectangle by specifying a midpoint or alternative corner point rather than the default bottom left corner point, choose the Fixed Start option, otherwise make sure it is cleared. If you have chosen the Fixed Start option, a grid of possible settings to use for the first corner point are now displayed. The points correspond to the four corners, the four midpoints of each side of the rectangle and the centre point of the rectangle. Click on the position corresponding to the point you wish to use to define your rectangle. Note:

This may restrict the display of the rubber band rectangle. For example, if you choose one of the top row settings, the rubber band box will be constrained to below the given first corner.

Drag The Drag option is available when a fixed size rectangle is chosen and allows the rectangle to be rubber banded . First ensure the Fixed Size option is set to make the Drag check box accessible. Set the drag option if you wish the fixed size rectangle to be displayed with the cursor whilst you position it. Clear it if you wish to locate the rectangle with the cursor only.

Release 9.5 Page 4-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

1.7

Polyline

Command

Polyline

Menu

Draw > Lines->Polyline

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The polyline command allows you to draw a sequence of connected lines. The lines are grouped and therefore treated as a single entity by other commands. Activate the command. You will now be prompted for a start point. Identify the start point using any of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for an end point. A rubber band line will appear as you move the cursor to assist you in picking the end point. Identify the end point, again using any of the available drawing modes. The line segment will now be drawn. Again, orthogonal mode can be used to force the line segments to be orthogonal rather than point to point. You will now be repeatedly prompted for end points, since each line segment will assume the end point of the previous line segment as its start point. To complete a polyline sequence, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible from the right mouse button. This will complete the current polyline, drawing it in its final colour and restart the command.

1.8

Point

Command

Point

Menu

Draw > Lines->Point

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The point command provides a means of entering reference points into your design. Activate the command. Mark a point for the reference point using any of the available drawing modes.

1.9

Sketch

Command

Sketch

Menu

Draw > Lines->Sketch

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The sketch command provides a means of drawing a freehand line sequence e.g. which approximately follows an outline. Activate the command. Mark a point for the start of the line sequence, keeping the mouse button pressed in. A marker will appear at the given start. Move the cursor and a sequence of lines will now appear tracking the cursor movement. Release the mouse button and the line sequence will appear in the final colour. Note:

Freehand mode will be assumed when using this command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-7

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

1.10

Arrow

Command

Arrow

Menu

Draw > Lines->Arrow

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The arrow command allows you to draw an arrow by specifying two points at either end of the arrow. Activate the command. Check and reset the options if necessary. Mark the start of the arrow. A rubber band line will now follow the cursor. Mark an end point. The line complete with arrow head will now be drawn in the final colour.

1.10.1

Arrow Options 1.10.1.1 Arrow Head Size The size of the arrow head can be set using the spin control or typing directly. The size should be set relative to the current window size.

1.10.1.2 Arrow Head Type The arrow head can be set by clicking on the button which represents the required arrow head.

1.11

Chamfer

Command

Chamfer

Menu

Draw > Lines->Chamfer

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The chamfer command provides a means of placing a chamfer at the intersection of two lines within your design. Activate the command. The options button becomes accessible indicating that there are options for this command. Check and set the options as appropriate. A description of the options is included at the end of this command description. Identify the first line by picking a point close to the required line, approximately where the chamfer should start. The element which is nearest to this point will now be drawn in the selection colour. If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements have been drawn close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if the search is successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the line is correctly identified, you will be prompted to mark the second line, where the chamfer will end. Mark the second line in the same way approximately where the chamfer will end. Once the second line is selected, the chamfer will be drawn in accordance with the options. The lines will also be trimmed back to the chamfer end points.

Release 9.5 Page 4-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

1.11.1

Chamfer Options 1.11.1.1 Chamfer Definition Specify the method for defining the chamfer by clicking on the appropriate radio button. •By Offset - the chamfer is offset from the end points of the two chosen lines which are nearest to the points used to identify them. •Relative to Line 1 - the chamfer is defined at an angle from and the start at a set distance along the first line identified. •Relative to Line 2 - the chamfer is defined at an angle from and the start at a set distance along the second line identified. According to the definition method selected two of the following options will be displayed and should be completed as follows:•Angle - angle that the chamfer is away from the selected line •Offset 1 - the distance along line 1 that the start of the chamfer lies. •Offset 2 - the distance along line 2 that the start of the chamfer lies.

1.12

Specified Length Command

Specified Lengthl

Menu

Draw > Lines->Specified Length

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The specified length command draws a line of given length between a point and an existing element. The position of the point and the given element, together with the required length, determine the angle of the new line. Activate the command. Check or set the current options if appropriate. Identify the start point for the new line using any of the available drawing modes. Identify the element on which the end point of the required line is to lie by clicking near to it. KASEMAKE automatically changes to a snap to object mode and displays a snap cursor to help you to identify the correct element. Once the element is identified, KASEMAKE attempts to determine a line of given length which will fit to the chosen element. If there is a solution, the line will now be drawn in the colour of the current ground. Where there is no solution, a message box will be displayed informing you that no line can be determined for the given settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-9

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

1.12.1

Specified Length Options 1.12.1.1 Line Length Specify the length for the line. Use the spin control to adjust the current setting, or type a new value directly.

1.13

Parallel

Command

Parallel

Menu

Draw > Lines->Parallel

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The parallel command will add one or more lines parallel to the line between any two points at a given offset. The two points do not need to lie on an existing line. Activate the command. Check or set the current options if appropriate. Identify the first point using any of the available drawing modes. Identify the other point, again using any of the available drawing modes. One or more parallel lines will now appear as you move the cursor, to help you to identify which side of the line between the given two points to place the parallel lines. Mark the point. The parallel lines will now be drawn in the colour of the current ground.

1.13.1

Parallel Options 1.13.1.1 Perpendicular Gap The gap between the parallel lines can be set. Use the spin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.13.1.2 Number Of Lines The number of lines required can be set. Use the spin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.13.1.3 Start Offset The offset from the first point can be set. This can be negative to extend the line or positive to shorten the line. The offset is applied to each resulting line giving a stepped effect. Use the spin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.13.1.4 End Offset The offset from the second point can be set. This can be negative to shorten the line or positive to extend the line. The offset is applied to each resulting line giving a stepped effect. Use the spin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.14

Multi Line

Command

Multi Line

Menu

Draw > Lines-> Multi Line

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The multi-line command allows you to draw two or more parallel lines at specifiable offsets from each other. Activate the command. Check and set the options as appropriate. The system will prompt for the start of the first line. Pick the start point using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band line will now appear to assist you with marking the end point of this line. Pick the end point of the first line. The line will be drawn in the current ground colour and the additional parallel lines

Release 9.5 Page 4-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE will be drawn in black as you move the cursor. The positioning of the lines will change as you move the cursor either side of the original line. Mark a point to determine which side of the line to place the parallel lines. The additional lines will now be drawn in their final colour. If you are using joined mode, you will now only need to mark the end point of the next line segment as the start point will be set from the previous end point. Each additional line segment is trimmed back to the previous segment to stop any overlapping. Orthogonal mode can also be used with the multiline command to force the line segments to be orthogonal.

1.14.1

Multi-Line Options 1.14.1.1 No. of Additional Lines Set the number of parallel lines required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

1.14.1.2 Offset Set the offset between each line. Different offsets can be applied to each individual line, or they can all use the same offset. Click on the All Equal check box to set it to use the same offset for all the lines or to clear it to use different offsets for each line. You should now set the offset, or offsets if you have requested different ones. To do this use the spin control of the corresponding Offset field to change the current setting or type the new value directly.

1.15

Point Tangent

Command

Point Tangent

Menu

Draw > Lines->Point Tangent

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Point Tangent command draws a tangent from an arc to a given point. Activate the command. If you wish the resulting tangent to be orthogonal set the Ortho option in the Mode toolbar. Identify the arc by moving near to it and clicking the left mouse button. Be sure to pick a point within the sector of the arc where you wish the tangent to start. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the arc is correctly identified, you will be prompted to specify the end point of the tangent. Mark the end point using any of the available drawing modes. For orthogonal tangents, the angle between the point used to define the arc and the point given as the end point will be used to determine whether a horizontal or vertical tangent is produced. The end point will be adjusted accordingly.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-11

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

In both cases, a tangent will now be drawn from the selected arc to the end point. The arc will be deselected and the command will start again.

1.16

Arc Tangent

Command

Arc Tangent

Menu

Draw > Lines->Arc Tangent

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The arc tangent command allows you to generate a tangent between two given arcs. The resulting tangent depends on the point used to identify the arc. Activate the command. Identify the first arc by choosing a point close to where you wish the tangent to start. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the arc is correctly identified, identify the second arc in the same way. The point chosen to identify the arc should be close to the end point of the required tangent. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected arc is incorrect. Finally, you need to confirm that both arcs are correct and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as confirmation. The resulting tangent will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

1.17

Create Panel

Command

Create Panel

Menu

Draw > Lines->Create Panel

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Create Panel command allows you to construct a panel from a previously drawn line through a given point. Activate this command. Check the current options. You will first be prompted Mark Line. Identify the line from which you want to construct the panel by moving close to the required line and marking a point. KASEMAKE will now display the chosen line in the current selection colour as confirmation of which line was chosen. Next you will be prompted Mark Parallel Side. Move the cursor. KASMAKE will begin to rubber band a new panel in the same direction as the cursor as per the current options. Mark a suitable point to confirm the final position of the panel. KASEMAKE will now drawn the new panel in the current ground colour.

Release 9.5 Page 4-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lines Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

1.17.1

Options

1.17.1.1 Height of panel You can determine the height of the panel by typing in the required value directly or by using the arrow keys to scroll to it. Alternatively, you can set the panel height to zero. The height will then be determined by the distance from the given line to the point specified for the direction of the panel.

1.17.1.2 Taper Sides Set this value if you require the sides of the panel to be tapered. Clear it if you want perpendicular sides. If you choose tapered sides, the following options will also become available:Angle You can choose to specify the angle of the taper measured from the given line. If you choose angle, the corresponding angle field becomes available allowing you to type the required angle directly or to scroll to it using the arrows. Chamfer You can choose to specify the taper as a chamfer. If you choose chamfer, the corresponding length field becomes available allowing you to type the required offset directly or to scroll to it using the arrows. Click on OK to update the current values or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

1.18

Angled Box

Command

Angled Box

Menu

Draw > Lines->Angled Box

Toolbar Button: The Angled Box command allows you to draw a box at any orientation. Activate the command and set the options as required. You will first be prompted Mark First Point. This is the start point for the box. Identify the point using any of the available drawing modes.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-13

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE You will now be prompted Mark Second Point. This point will be used to define the angle of the box as well as the length. Move the cursor and a rubber band line will be drawn to help you to define the correct orienation and length. If the specify angle option has been selected, you will only be able to define the length the rubber band line will be restricted to the chosen angle. Identify the required point using any of the available drawing modes. Finally you will be prompted Mark Extent. This final point determines the correct location of the box and its width if a fixed offset is not requested through the options.Moving the cursor will produce a rubber band box to assist with final positioning. Mark a suitable point using any of the available drawing modes. The resulting box will now be drawn in the current ground.

1.18.1

Options 1.18.1.1 Fixed Offset It is possible to specify a fixed offset to determine the extent of the box. This is measured as a fixed distance from the line used to orientate the box. Set the Fixed Offset check box if you wish to specify a fixed distance otherwise clear it to determine the extent of the box from the cursor position. Offset If the Fixed Offset option is set, the offset control will be displayed. Specify the offset to use either by typing it directly or using the arrows to scroll to the correct value.

1.18.1.2 Specify Angle It is possible to predetermine the angle of the box. Set the Specify Angle check box if you wish to specify a known angle for the box. Angle If the Specify Angle option is set, the angle control will be displayed. Specify the angle to use either by typing it directly or using the arrows to scroll to the correct value.

2

Polygon Sub-Menu Select the Polygon option from the Draw Menu to access the Polygon Sub-menu with the following commands:

2.1

Polygon Centre Pt Command

Polygon Centre Pt

Menu

Draw > Polygon->Polygon Centre Pt

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Polygon Centre Pt command allows you to draw a polygon with a specifiable number of sides centred on a given point. Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that this command has options. Check or set the options before drawing the polygon. First you will need to identify the centre point for the polygon using any of the available drawing modes.

Release 9.5 Page 4-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Polygon Sub-Menu KASEMAKE For the single point only option, the polygon will now be drawn unrotated with respect to the given point. For all other options, a rubber band polygon will appear as you move the cursor to assist you with positioning the edge of the polygon. If, a fixed radius or side length have been defined, the second point provides the correct orientation of the polygon. To complete the polygon, pick a point using any of the drawing modes. The polygon will now be drawn in its final colour and the command will restart. Note:

2.1.1

Orthogonal mode can be used to force the edges to be orthogonal if the edge definition method is chosen, or the line between the centre and the given vertex is forced orthogonal if definition by vertex is the chosen method.

Polygon Options

2.1.1.1

Polygon Sides

Set the number of sides required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

2.1.1.2

Point Definition

The n-sided polygon can be defined in a combination of ways. Set the method to use for defining the polygon edge as follows:• Vertex - the point specified for the edge should define one of the polygon’s corners • Edge - the point specified for the edge should lie at the mid point of one of the polygon’s sides

2.1.1.3

Radius Definition

The radius of the polygon can be defined in one of the following ways:• Free - the size of the polygon will be the distance between the centre point and the position specified for the second point

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-15

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE • Fixed Radius - the radius of the polygon can be specified if it is known. Choosing this setting enables the Fixed Radius edit box. Set the required radius using the arrow keys to scroll the current value, or type in the required value • Side Length - the length of a side can be specified. Choosing this option enables the Side Length edit box. Set the required length using the arrow keys to scroll the current value, or type in the required value Single Point Only Where either the fixed radius or side length option is chosen for defining the polygon radius, the single point only option is enabled. If this option is set, the polygon can be specified by placing the centre point only. The specified radius or side length will then be used to generate an unrotated polygon around the given centre. Clear this option if you require a rotated polygon. A second confirmation point will be prompted for to determine the correct orientation of the polygon.

2.2

Polygon Edge Pt

Command

Polygon Edge Pt

Menu

Draw > Polygon->Polygon Edge Pt

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Polygon Edge Pt command allows you to define a polygon by specifying a point on one of the polygon’s edges. The point specified will lie at the mid point of one of the polygon’s sides or be a vertex depending upon the current options. Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that this command has options. Check or set the options as per the Polygon Centre Pt command. First you will need to identify the point on the edge of the polygon using any of the available drawing modes. For the single point only option, the polygon will now be drawn unrotated with respect to the given point. For all other options, a rubber band polygon will appear as you move the cursor to assist you with sizing and positioning of the polygon. If, a fixed radius or side length have been defined, the second point provides the correct orientation of the polygon. To complete the polygon, pick a point using any of the drawing modes. The polygon will now be drawn in its final colour and the command will restart. Note:

2.2.1

Orthogonal mode can be used to force the edges to be orthogonal if the edge definition method is chosen, or the line between the centre and the given vertex is forced orthogonal if definition by vertex is the chosen method.

Polygon Options The options are identical to those used by the Polygon Centre Pt command apart from the effect of the Single Point Only option. If the Single Point Only option is set the polygon can be specified by placing the edge point only. The specified radius or side length will then be used to generate an unrotated polygon whose edge passes through the given point See “Polygon Options” on page 15.

Release 9.5 Page 4-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Circle Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

2.3

Polygon Start / End Pt Command

Polygon Start / End Pt

Menu

Draw > Polygon->Polygon Start / End Pt

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Polygon Start / End Pt command allows you to draw a polygon, with a specifiable number of sides, defining the start and end point of one of the polygon’s sides. Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that this command has options. Check or set the options before drawing the polygon. First you will need to identify the start point of one of the sides of the polygon using any of the available drawing modes. You will then be required to identify the end point of the polygon’s side. A rubber band polygon will appear as you move the cursor to assist you with positioning the end point. This end point also determines the size and orientation of the polygon. To complete the polygon, pick a point using any of the drawing modes. The polygon will now be drawn in its final colour and the command will restart. Note:

2.3.1

Orthogonal mode can be used to force the edges to be orthogonal if the edge definition method is chosen, or the line between the centre and the given vertex is forced orthogonal if definition by vertex is the chosen method.

Polygon Options

2.3.1.1

Polygon Sides

Set the number of sides required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

3

Circle Sub-Menu Select the Circle option from the Draw Menu to access the Circle Sub-menu with the following commands:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-17

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

3.1

Radius Circle

Command

Radius Circle

Menu

Draw > Circle->Radius Circle

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Radius Circle command produces a circle given a point together with a radius value or given a centre point and a point on the circumference. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the centre of the circle. Pick a point for the centre using any of the available drawing modes. If you have set the Fixed Radius option, the circle will now be drawn. If not, you will be prompted for a point to define the extent of the circle. A rubber banded circle centered on the given point will follow the cursor. Identify a point on the circumference using any of the available drawing modes. The completed circle will now be drawn in the current ground colour. Orthogonal mode can be used with this command where the fixed radius option is not used. In this case, the radius between the centre and the given point is adjusted to be orthogonal.

3.1.1

Radius Circle Options Activate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking the Draw->Options command from the menu. The Options dialog now appears.

3.1.1.1

Fixed Radius

Set this option to fix the radius of the circle. Clear it if you want to mark a point on the circle’s circumference to define the radius.

3.1.1.2

Radius

Specify the radius using the spin control or by typing the value directly.

Release 9.5 Page 4-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Arc Sub-Menu KASEMAKE The remaining options complement the fixed radius method. Ensure the Fixed radius option is set for these options to be accessible.

3.1.1.3

Drag

Set the drag option if you wish the fixed radius circle to be displayed with the cursor whilst you position it. Clear it if you wish to locate the circle with the cursor only

3.1.1.4

Marked Point

Determine which point is used to locate the fixed radius circle by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Choose from the centre as before or one of the four quadrant points.

3.2

2 Point Circle

Command

2 Point Circle

Menu

Draw > Circle->2 Point Circle

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 2 Point Circle command allows you to define a circle by specifying two points that the circle must pass through. Activate the command. Identify the first point that the circle must pass through using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band circle will now be drawn following the cursor. Pick the second point that the circle must pass through, again any of the drawing modes can be used. The completed circle will now be drawn in the current ground colour. Orthogonal mode can be used with this command the second point is adjusted so that the line between the two given points is orthogonal.

3.3

3 Point Circle

Command

3 Point Circle

Menu

Draw > Circle->3 Point Circle

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 3 Point Circle command allows you to define a circle by specifying three points that the circle must pass through. Activate the command. Identify the first point that the circle must pass through using any of the available drawing modes. Identify the second point that the circle must pass through. A rubber band circle will now be drawn following the cursor. Pick the third point that the circle must pass through, again any of the drawing modes can be used. The completed circle will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

4

Arc Sub-Menu Select the Arc option from the Draw Menu to access the Arc Sub-menu containing the following commands:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-19

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

4.1

Radius

Command

Radius Arc

Menu

Draw > Arc->Radius

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Radius Arc command defines an arc given a start point, end point and an approximate centre point. The distance from the start point to the approximate centre and the end point to the approximate centre is averaged to determine the radius. The centre point is then adjusted accordingly. A fixed radius option is also available where the start and end point are given and a numerical value is specified for the radius. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the start of the arc. Pick a point for the start using any of the available drawing modes. Next, pick a point for the end of the arc. If you have set the Fixed Radius option, the arc will now be drawn. If you have not set the Fixed Radius option, you will be prompted for an approximate centre for the arc. A rubber banded arc will be drawn between the given start and end points, following the path of the cursor. Identify the approximate centre using any of the available drawing modes. The given point will now be used to determine the radius for the arc and the centre will be adjusted where necessary. The completed arc will now be drawn in the current ground colour. The command will now restart.

4.1.1

Radius Arc Options 4.1.1.1

Fixed Radius

Set this option to fix the radius of the arc. Clear it if you want to mark an approximate centre point to define the radius.

4.1.1.2

Radius

Specify the radius using the spin control or by typing the value directly.

4.2

Centre

Command

Centre Arc

Menu

Draw > Centre>Arc

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Centre Arc command defines an arc given a start point, end point and centre point. The command will use the given start and centre points to determine the radius of the arc then adjust the end point to lie on the arc with this radius. Activate the command. You will be prompted for the start point. Identify the start point using any of the available drawing modes. Identify an approximate end point for the arc. A rubber band arc will now be drawn from the start point towards the end point, following the cursor. Identify the centre point. The end point will be adjusted where appropriate and the arc will be drawn in the current ground colour.

Release 9.5 Page 4-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Arc Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

4.3

3 Point

Command

3 Point Arc

Menu

Draw > Arc->3 Point

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 3 Point Arc command allows you to draw an arc by specifying its start point, end point and a third point on the circumference of the arc. Since arcs are drawn anti-clockwise from the start point to the end point, the resulting arc may not pass through the third point. Activate this command. You must first identify the start and end points of the arc using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band arc will then be drawn between the given start and end point, following the cursor to help you to determine the third point. Identify the third point. The completed arc will be drawn in the current ground colour. The command will now start again.

4.4

Angle

Command

Angle Arc

Menu

Draw > Arc->Angle

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Angle Arc command allows you to define an arc by specifying its start, centre and the sweep angle. Activate the command. The system prompts for a start point. Identify the start point using any of the available drawing modes. Next, pick a point for the centre of the arc. The Arc Angle dialog will now appear. Set the angle using the spin control to change the current value or type the new angle directly. Only positive values are accepted as arcs are always drawn anti-clockwise. Click OK to set the angle and the arc will be drawn in the current ground colour. Click Cancel to close the dialog and cancel the arc command. The command will now restart. Orthogonal mode can be used with this command. The centre point is adjusted so that the line between the given start and the centre is orthogonal.

4.5

Fillet

Command

Fillet

Menu

Draw > Arc->Fillet

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The fillet command allows you to fit a blending radius between any two lines, two arcs or a line and an arc. The resulting fillet will be drawn anti-clockwise, starting on the first element and ending on the second element. Therefore, the order in which the elements are identified is important. Also, where more than one fillet is possible, the fillet nearest to the points used to identify the elements, will be produced. Activate the command. The options button becomes accessible indicating that there are options for this command. Check and set the options as appropriate. A description of the options is included at the end of this command description. Identify the first element by picking a point close to the required element, approximately where the fillet should start. The element which is nearest to this point will now be drawn in the selection colour.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-21

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements have been drawn close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if the search is successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted to mark the second element, where the fillet will end. Mark the second element in the same way. Once the second element is selected, a final confirmation point is required before the fillet is drawn. Mark any point. The fillet will now be drawn as per the options. If both of the elements chosen to be filleted are lines, the lines will also be trimmed back to the fillet end points.

4.5.1

Fillet Options 4.5.1.1

Radius

Specify the radius for the fillet using the spin control to change the current value, or type the new value directly.

4.5.1.2

Trim Elements

Where two lines are to be filleted, you can determine whether to trim the lines back to the fillet. Check this option if you wish to trim the lines back Clear this option if you wish to leave the lines unchanged.

4.5.1.3

Fit Fillet between 2 Lines

Where two lines are to be filleted, you can set this option rather than specify a radius. The shorter of the two lines will be used to calculate the radius for a fillet which will completely replace the shortest line. Check this option if you wish to ignore the given radius and calculate it from the shortest line. Clear this option to use the radius value.

4.5.1.4

Anticlockwise Only

Check this option if you wish to force all fillets to be drawn anticlockwise from the first element to the second element Clear this option to always draw the smallest section of the fillet.

4.6

Interactive Fillet Command

Interactive Fillet

Menu

Draw > Arc->Interactive Fillet

Toolbar Button: The Interactive Fillet command allows you to fit a blending radius between any two lines using the cursor to define the required radius. Activate the command. Identify the first line by picking a point close to the required element. The element which is nearest to this point will now be drawn in the selection colour.

Release 9.5 Page 4-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Arc Sub-Menu KASEMAKE If the selected line is not the correct one because two or more elements have been drawn close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if the search is successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the line is correctly identified, you will be prompted to mark the second line. Identify it in the same way. Once the second line is selected, a fillet will be drawn in the selection colour between the two lines and passing through the current cursor position which is used to define the radius. Move the cursor and the fillet will rubber band to reflect the new cursor position. Once the correct fillet is displayed, mark the point. The fillet will now be drawn in the current ground and the lines will be trimmed back to the fillet end points as applicable.

4.7

2 Entity Fillet

Command

2 Entity Fillet

Menu

Draw > Arc-> 2 Entity Fillet

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 2 Entity Fillet command will put a blending radius around or between two entities. The entities can be two lines, two arcs or a line and an arc. Activate the command. You will be prompted to identify the first element. Identify the element by choosing a point close to where you wish the fillet to start. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the first element is correctly identified, identify the second element in the same way. The point chosen to identify the element should be close to where the fillet will end. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect. Finally, you need to confirm that both elements are correct and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point near to the centre of the required fillet as the confirmation point. This point will be used to determine which fillet is required where more than one fillet is possible. A fillet will now be drawn in black. A dialog will also appear for you to confirm that this is the correct sector of the fillet. If you require the other sector or the entire circle, choose No. The system will continue to cycle through the possible fillets until such time as you choose Yes to accept a solution, whereby the fillet will be drawn in the current ground colour. Alternatively, you can choose Cancel to cancel the current fillet command. In either case the command will now restart.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-23

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

4.7.1

2 Entity Fillet Options 4.7.1.1

Radius

The radius to use for the fillet can be specified using the spin control to alter the current value, or by typing the value directly.

4.7.1.2

First Arc

This option applies to arcs only. In the case of two arcs being chosen for the fillet, this option will be applied to the first arc identified. Set the option as follows:Inside - where you wish the fillet to lie between the arc and the second entity Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

4.7.1.3

Second Arc

This option applies to arcs only, where two arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option will be applied to the second arc identified. Set the option as follows:Inside - where you wish the fillet to touch the arc Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

4.8

3 Entity Fillet

Command

3 Entity Fillet

Menu

Draw > Arc->3 Entity Fillet

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 3 Entity Fillet command will put a blending radius around or between three entities. The entities can be any combination of lines and arcs. The radius of the fillet will be determined from the three entities. • Activate the command. You will be prompted to identify the first element. Identify the element by choosing a point close to where you wish the fillet to start. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. • Once the first element is correctly identified, identify the second element in the same way. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect. • Next identify the third element. The point chosen to identify the element should be close to where the fillet will end. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Use the right hand pop-up menu if the selected element is incorrect. • Finally, you need to confirm that the three elements are correct and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point near to the centre of the required fillet as the confirmation point. This point will be used to determine which fillet is required where more than one fillet is possible. A fillet will now be drawn in black. A dialog will also appear for you to confirm that this is the correct sector of the fillet. If you require the other sector or the entire circle, choose No. The

Release 9.5 Page 4-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Arc Sub-Menu KASEMAKE system will continue to cycle through the possible fillets until such time as you choose Yes to accept a solution, whereby the fillet will be drawn in the current ground colour. Alternatively, you can choose Cancel to cancel the current fillet command. In either case the command will now restart.

4.8.1

3 Entity Fillet Options 4.8.1.1

First Arc

This option applies to arcs only. In the case of two arcs being chosen for the fillet, this option will be applied to the first arc identified. Set the option as follows:Inside - where you wish the fillet to touch the arc Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

4.8.1.2

Second Arc

This option applies to arcs only, where two arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option will be applied to the second arc identified. Set the option as follows:Inside - where you wish the fillet to touch the arc Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

4.8.1.3

Third Arc

This option applies to arcs only, where three arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option will be applied to the third arc identified. Set the option as follows:Inside - where you wish the fillet to touch the arc Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

4.9

Envelope

Command

Envelope

Menu

Draw > Arc->Envelope

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The envelope command constructs two lines with a fillet of given radius between them, given three points. The result resembles the flap of an envelope, hence the name. Activate the command. You will now be prompted for the first point. Identify the point at the base of the first line using any of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for the second point. Identify the point at the base of the second line using any of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for another point. Thinking of the shape you are defining as a triangle, you are being asked to mark the apex point. The calculated fillet will pass through this point. Mark the point using any of the drawing modes. The envelope shape will now be drawn.

4.9.1

Envelope Options 4.9.1.1

Fillet Radius

The radius to use for the fillet can be set using the spin control to change the current value, or by typing the value directly.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-25

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

5

Ellipse Sub-Menu Select the Ellipse option from the Draw Menu to access the Ellipse Sub-menu containing the following commands:-

5.1

Ellipse

Command

Ellipse

Menu

Draw > Ellipse->Ellipse

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The Ellipse command defines a whole ellipse given a point, the length of the semi-major and semi-minor axes and the angle of rotation. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the centre of the ellipse. Pick a point for the centre using any of the available drawing modes. The ellipse will now be drawn.

5.1.1

Ellipse Options Activate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking the Draw->Options command from the menu. The Ellipse Options dialog now appears.

5.1.1.1

Semi Major Axis

The length of the semi-major axis, or x axis can be set. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

5.1.1.2

Semi Minor Axis

The length of the semi-minor axis, or y axis can be set. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

Release 9.5 Page 4-26

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Ellipse Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

5.1.1.3

Angle

The angle of rotation of the ellipse, angle of the semi-major axis, can be set. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

5.1.1.4

Drag

Set the drag option if you wish the ellipse to be displayed with the cursor whilst you position it. Clear it if you wish to locate the ellipse with the cursor only.

5.1.1.5

Start Point

Determine which point is used to locate the ellipse by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Choose from the centre or one of the four quadrant points.

5.2

Elliptical Arc

Command

Elliptical Arc

Menu

Draw > Ellipse->Elliptical Arc

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The elliptical arc command allows you to define an elliptical arc by giving the start, centre and end of the arc and specifying a reduction factor. The start and centre points will define the length of the semi-major axis and the angle of rotation of the elliptical arc. The reduction factor will be applied to this semi-major axis to determine the semi-minor axis. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the start of the elliptical arc. Pick a point for the start using any of the available drawing modes. Next, pick a point for the centre of the elliptical arc. Finally, you will be prompted for an approximate end point for the elliptical arc. A rubber banded elliptical arc will be drawn using the given points, following the path of the cursor. Identify the approximate end point using any of the available drawing modes. The given point will now be adjusted where necessary to lie on the elliptical arc. The completed elliptical arc will now be drawn in the current ground colour. The command will now restart.

5.2.1

Elliptical Arc Options 5.2.1.1

Reduction

The reduction factor is the percentage to reduce the length of the semi-major axis by to give the length of the semi-minor axis. Set the value using the spin control, or type the new value directly.

5.3

3 Point Elliptical Arc Command

3 Point Elliptical Arc

Menu

Draw > Ellipse->3 Point Elliptical Arc

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

The 3 Point Elliptical Arc command allows you to draw a semi elliptical arc by specifying its start point, end point and a third point which determines the extent of the elliptical arc. Only a semielliptical arc is possible as the start and end points are assumed to lie at each end of one of the axes. The third point determines the length of the other axis so as a result the semi elliptical arc may not pass through this point.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-27

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Activate this command. You must first identify the start and end points of the elliptical arc using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band semi elliptical arc will then be drawn between the given start and end point, following the cursor to help you to determine the third point. Identify the third point. The completed semi elliptical arc will be drawn in the current ground colour. This command is self-repeating.

6

Curve Sub-Menu Select the Curve option from the Draw Menu to access the Curve Sub-menu containing the following commands:-

6.1

Cubic Spline

Command

Cubic Spline

Menu

Draw > Curve->Cubic Spline

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

This command generates a cubic spline or best fit curve through a given set of points. It is a smooth curve through the points with constantly shifting radii. An approximation of the curve using short line segments is generated. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the points or nodes through which the generated curve will pass. Mark the points in the usual way. To complete the marking points sequence use the right hand mouse button to access the pop-up menu. Choose from:• Draw - to generate the curve. • Draw & Close - to generate a closed curve. • Reset - to abandon the current set of points. The command will automatically restart.

Release 9.5 Page 4-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Curve Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

6.1.1

Cubic Spline Options

6.1.1.1

Starting Conditions

The slope or gradient at the start of the first polynomial in the cubic spline curve can be set. Set the starting condition as follows:Fixed - to specify the slope Relaxed - to leave the slope to be determined when the curve is generated If you choose Fixed the following options appear:• Start Slope X The distance in X to use to define the slope at the start of the first polynomial can be set using this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value. • Start Slope Y The distance in Y to use to define the slope at the start of the first polynomial can be set using this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-29

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

6.1.1.2

Final Conditions

The slope or gradient at the end of the final polynomial in the cubic spline curve can also be set. Set the condition as follows:Fixed - to specify the slope Relaxed - to leave the slope to be determined when the curve is generated If you choose Fixed the following options appear:• End Slope X The distance in X to use to define the slope at the end of the final polynomial can be set using this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value. • End Slope Y The distance in Y to use to define the slope at the end of the last polynomial can be set using this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

6.1.1.3

Curve Generation

This section applies to the handling of the cubic spline when it is exploded You can choose for the cubic spline to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radio button to select it. • Arcs Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother the approximation, the more processing involved so there is a performance cost. Drag the slider to vary the smoothing factor as required.

Finally click on OK to accept any new changes or Cancel to abandon them.

6.2

Bezier Curve

Command

Bezier Curve

Menu

Draw > Curve->Bezier Curve

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

This command generates a bezier curve through a given set of points. There are at least three points used to define the curve. The two end points of the curve are referred to as anchor points. The other points which define the curve are referred to as nodes. An approximation of the curve using short line and arc segments is generated. Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are now prompted to mark the points or nodes through which the generated curve will pass. Mark the points in the usual way. To complete the marking points sequence use the right hand mouse button to access the pop-up menu. Choose from:• Accept - to generate the curve. • Close - to generate a closed curve. • Reset - to abandon the current set of points. The command will restart.

Release 9.5 Page 4-30

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Text KASEMAKE

6.2.1

Bezier Curve Options The options are also accessible from the right hand pop up menu as shown:-

These options apply to the handling of a bezier curve when it is exploded. You can choose for the bezier curve to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radio button to select it. Arcs Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother the approximation to the original curve, the more processing involved so there is a performance cost. Drag the slider to vary the smoothing factor as required.

Finally click on OK to accept any new changes or Cancel to abandon them.

7

Text

Command

Text

Menu

Draw > Text

Toolbar Button:

Main Toolbar

The text command allows you to annotate your design. Activate the command. Check or set the text options. The system now prompts for the text origin. Identify the origin using any of the drawing modes. The text cursor will now appear at the given origin. Enter the text directly. The text will be displayed in black while you are typing it. To complete the text string use the carriage return or enter key. The text will now appear in the current ground colour. When entering paragraphs of text the carriage return completes the current text string and signals the start of a new line of text. When entering Variable style paragraphs the tab key can also be used to complete the current text string and signal the start of the next column of text. Refer to “Text Options” for further details. To cancel the text string choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The command automatically restarts.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-31

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

7.1

Text Options Options are divided into Text Style and Paragraph Style as follows:-

7.1.1

Text Style 7.1.1.1

Font

The font to display the text in can be set using the font combo box. Click on the arrow to view the available fonts. Scroll through the list and click on the required font name to select it.

7.1.1.2

Justification

The justification of the text string can be set by clicking on the required setting from the following:Left - the text origin will be to the left of the text string Right - the text origin will be to the right of the text string Centre - the text origin will be at the centre of the text string

7.1.1.3

Size

The text size can be set. This is the height of the text in drawing units. Set the size using the spin control to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new value directly.

7.1.1.4

Rotation

The text can be drawn at an angle. Set the angle of rotation using the spin control to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new value directly.

7.1.2

Paragraph Style 7.1.2.1

Block Text

Blocks of text or paragraphs can also be entered. To enter a paragraph check this option. Further options will then be displayed as follows:Standard - check this option to build a single column of text with standard spacing between lines of text Variable - check this version to build multiple columns of text with variable spacing between lines and columns If you select Variable text the following options appear:• Column Width The distance in drawing units between columns can be defined. Columns of text can then be built up by using the tab key to move to the start of the next column of text. Set the column width using the spin control to change the current value, or click on the current value to select it and type the new value. • Line Spacing The spacing in drawing units between lines of text can be defined. The carriage return moves to the start of the next line of text. Set the line spacing using the spin control to change the current value, or click on the current value to select it and type the new value.

Release 9.5 Page 4-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

TrueType KASEMAKE

8

TrueType

Command

TrueType

Menu

Draw > TrueType

Toolbar Button:

Main Toolbar

The truetype text command allows you to annotate your design with truetype text. Activate the command. The system now prompts for the text origin. Identify the origin using any of the drawing modes. The text input dialog will now appear for you to enter the text string and set any attributes to apply to the text string. A full explanation of the contents of this dialog can be found in the next section, Text Input Dialog. To complete the truetype text string, click on OK. The text will now appear in the current ground colour with the attributes you have set in the text input dialog. Cancel will ignore any changes and cancel the truetype command. The command automatically restarts.

8.1

Text Input Dialog The text input dialog contains a section headed Sample, where the contents of the text field are displayed (or a sample of text, where this is currently empty) with the currently selected attributes applied. Various attributes can be set for the text string as follows:-

8.1.1

Font The font to display the text in can be set. The currently selected font is displayed. Below this is a scrolling list of available fonts. Scroll through the list to the required font, then click on the required font name to select it. The sample field will be redisplayed to reflect any change of font.

8.1.2

Font Style Additional characteristics to apply to the font, e.g. bold, italic, can be set through the font style. Again, scroll to the required setting, then click on it to select it. The sample field will be redisplayed to reflect the new setting.

8.1.3

Size The text size can be set. This is the height of the text in drawing units. Set the size using the spin control to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new value directly. The sample text will be redisplayed to reflect the new size.

8.1.4

Angle The text can be drawn at an angle. Set the angle of rotation using the spin control to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new value directly. The angle is not reflected in the sample field, but will be applied when the text input dialog is closed.

8.1.5

Effects Choose from strikeout where a line is drawn through the middle of the text and underline, by clicking on the corresponding checkbox, to set or clear them as required. The sample field will be updated to reflect any changes.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-33

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

8.1.6

Spacing Standard - check this option to use standard spacing between lines of text Variable - check this option to specify the spacing in drawing units between lines of text If you select Variable spacing, a spin control will be displayed for you to determine the spacing to use. Set the line spacing using the spin control to change the current value, or click on the current value to select it and type the new value.

8.1.7

Text Entry The contents of the text string are entered in this field. Type the required string in the normal way. Paragraphs of text can be built up by using the carriage return key to complete the current line of text and start a new line of text. As you type in words the spell checker automatically checks for any which are misspelt or not recognised and underlines them in red. To correct them click on the spell checker button Note:

8.1.8

If you mistype a word but the result is not a misspelling (for example, "from" instead of "form" or "there" instead of "their"), the spelling checker will not flag the word.

Spell Checker Activating the Spell Checker displays the following dialog:-

The first incorrect word is displayed together with a list of possible corrections. The most intuitive alternative is displayed as the first correction and highlighted. Choose AutoCorrect to use the first alternative. If the first alternative is not the required one, click in the list to identify the intended word. Choose Change to correct the spelling or Change All if there are several occurences to change. If you wish to leave the word unchanged choose Ignore or Ignore All for more than one occurence.

Release 9.5 Page 4-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

TrueType KASEMAKE

8.1.9

Options Click on Options to define the Spell checker options. The Spellcheck dialog is displayed:-

Disable Spellcheck Set this option if you with to disable the spell checker. All other settings will be inaccessible. Clear this option if you wish to utilise the spell checker. Spellcheck on exit from dialog You can request that the spell checker is run automatically when you have completed typing the text string and are closing the truetype dialog. Set or clear this option as required. Spellcheck Options Accessing the Spellcheck Options button brings up further options for the spell checker as shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-35

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

Here you can define varius settings for the way the spell checker works. In addition you can load additional dictionaries if you wish to work in a different language for example. There is also an option to define a custom dictionary to which you can add your own spellings.

9

Dimensions Sub-Menu Select the Dimensions option from the Draw Menu to access the Dimensions Sub-Menu giving access to the dimension commands. It is advisable to open the Dimension Toolbar before beginning to dimension your design, since dimension modes which determine the way individual dimension commands operate, exist only in the Dimension Toolbar.

9.1

Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation After selecting the appropriate dimension command you should set the mode of operation, this will depend upon which dimension command is being used. The modes are only accessible through the Dimension Toolbar and are as follows:-

9.1.1

Report Dimension This mode is available with all the dimension commands and allows you simply to measure a distance rather than place a dimension entity within your design. If this mode is activated, the

Release 9.5 Page 4-36

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE dimension command will only require you to identify the elements or points to dimension. The dimension will then be calculated and displayed in a window towards the centre of the status bar.

9.1.2

Linear Dimension Modes Linear dimension modes can be used in conjunction with the linear dimensions, perpendicular, horizontal and vertical. The available options are:• Single - each dimension is a discrete item • Chained - a sequence of dimensions can be built up, each subsequent dimension adopting the end of the previous dimension as its start and also maintaining the same text position so that the dimensions line up • Datum - a sequence of stepped dimensions all starting from the same datum point can be built up with this mode

9.1.3

Diameter Dimension Modes Diameter dimension modes can be used in conjunction with the diameter dimension. They affect the appearance of the dimension as follows:• Radius - the dimension will be displayed as an arrow pointing to the arc in the same way as radial dimension works • Linear - the dimension will be displayed as leader lines from the extents of the circle with a dimension line between them

9.2

Dimensions General There are several dimension commands available for creating, line, angle and arc dimensions. The dimension commands are all self repeating allowing you to enter multiple dimensions. To cancel a dimension command simply select Reset from the right hand pop-up menu to restart the command, or choose a different command. Several modes of operation are available for use with individual dimension commands as discussed above. See “Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation” on page 4-36 for further details. Various settings also exist which affect the appearance of the dimension. They control appearance of leader lines, dimension text, positioning of text etc. Refer to “Dimension Options” on page 444 for full details. Once created a dimension is treated as a single entity. The dimension commands available through the Dimensions Sub-Menu are as follows:-

9.3

Perpendicular

Command

Perpendicular

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Perpendicular

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The perpendicular command allows you to dimension between any two points in your design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the first point. Identify the point where you wish the dimension to start from. You will now be prompted for the second point.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-37

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, a rubber band dimension starting at the given point will now be drawn following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the second point. Identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. The command will now automatically restart. If you have chosen Chain Mode or Datum Mode, you will be prompted for the second point as the previous dimension’s end point or start point respectively, will be used as the new dimensions start point.

9.4

Horizontal

Command

Horizontal

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Horizontal

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The horizontal command allows you to dimension the horizontal distance between any two points in your design. The points may lie on different elements within the design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the first point. Identify the point where you wish the dimension to start from. You will now be prompted for the second point. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, a rubber band dimension starting at the given point will now be drawn following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the second point. Identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. The command will now automatically restart. If you have chosen Chain Mode or Datum Mode, you will be prompted for the second point as the previous dimension’s end point or start point respectively, will be used as the new dimensions start point.

9.4.1

Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected Elements It is now possible to dimension selected elements. This can be useful if you have an awkward shape and you want to show its overall dimensions. First select the elements for which you require an overall dimension using the Select tool. Refer to “Select Sub-Menu” on page 3-22 and “Select” on page 3-26 for further details. Activate the Draw->Dimensions->Horizontal command. A dimension will now be drawn representing the overall horizontal dimension for the selected items. You can now drag the dimension to identify the text position. Identify the required point using an appropriate drawing mode. The horizontal dimension will now be added to the drawing in the current ground.

Release 9.5 Page 4-38

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

9.5

Vertical

Command

Vertical

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Vertical

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The vertical command allows you to dimension the vertical distance between any two points in your design. The points do not have to lie on the same two elements within the design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the first point. Identify the point where you wish the dimension to start from. You will now be prompted for the second point. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, a rubber band dimension starting at the given point will now be drawn following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the second point. Identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. The command will now automatically restart. If you have chosen Chain Mode or Datum Mode, you will be prompted for the second point as the previous dimension’s end point or start point respectively, will be used as the new dimensions start point.

9.5.1

Overall Vertical Dimension for Selected Elements As with horizontal dimension, an overall vertical dimension can be made for a group of selected elements. Refer to “Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected Elements” on page 38 for a full explanation.

9.6

Angle

Command

Angle

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Angle

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The angle command allows you to dimension the angle between any two lines in your design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the first line. The order in which you identify the lines determines which angle is dimensioned, as the angle is measured anti-clockwise from the first line identified to the second line. Identify the first line that you wish the dimension to be measured from, by choosing a point close to the line. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-39

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Once the line is correctly identified, identify the second line in the same way. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected line is incorrect. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the angle dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two lines will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

9.7

Radial

Command

Radial

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Radial

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The radial command allows you to dimension the radius of any arc or circle in your design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the arc. Identify the arc or circle, by choosing a point close to where you wish the dimension to start from. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the radial dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

9.8

Diameter

Command

Diameter

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Diameter

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The diameter command allows you to dimension the diameter of any arc or circle in your design. There are two modes of operation for this command. Select the one you require from the Dimension Toolbar. See “Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation” on page 4-36 for further details. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the arc. Identify the arc or circle, by choosing a point close to where you wish the dimension to start from. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

Release 9.5 Page 4-40

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the diameter dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. The way the dimension is displayed will also depend upon the diameter dimension mode set.

9.9

Ellipse

Command

Ellipse

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Ellipse

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The ellipse command is similar to the radius command. It allows you to dimension both radii and the inclined angle of any ellipse or elliptical arc in your design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the elliptical arc. Identify the elliptical arc or ellipse, by choosing a point close to where you wish the dimension to start from. The chosen elliptical arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected elliptical arc is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another elliptical arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected elliptical arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the ellipse dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the elliptical arc will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

9.10

Arc Length

Command

Arc Length

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Arc Length

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The arc length command allows you to dimension the length of any arc or circle in your design.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-41

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the arc. Identify the arc or circle, by choosing a point close to where you wish the dimension to start from. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the arc length dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

9.11

Linear

Command

Linear

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Linear

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The linear command allows you to dimension any line in your design. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the line. Identify the line, by choosing a point close to the line. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the linear dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension from either end point of the given line will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

9.12

Parallel

Command

Parallel

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Parallel

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The parallel command allows you to dimension the perpendicular distance between any two parallel lines in your design.

Release 9.5 Page 4-42

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark the first line. Identify the first parallel line by choosing a point close to the line. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful. Once the first line is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second line. Identify the second line, which must be parallel to the currently selected line, by choosing a point close to the line. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. Again, if the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful. If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two given parallel lines will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings. The command will automatically restart. Note:

9.13

If at any stage you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the popup menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

Crease To Crease Command

Crease To Crease

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Crease To Crease

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The crease to crease command allows you to automatically insert key dimensions in to your design. The dimensions are drawn between crease lines as identified by a given line. Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted to mark a line which will be used to determine which dimensions you require. Identify the start point of the line, by choosing a point using any of the available modes. A rubber band line will now appear to assist you in defining the required line. Enter the end point of the line, again using any of the available drawing modes. All lines which intersect with the given line will now be highlighted to show that they will be dimensioned between. If the line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the popup menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin to use to position the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimensions will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-43

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

9.14

Dimension Options The Dimension Options are used to tailor the appearance of the dimension and are available with any of the previously described dimension commands. Activate the Options and a tabbed dialog appears. The options are divided into four categories, each category corresponding to a tabbed page. Simply click on the corresponding tab to activate the options for that category.

9.14.1

Dimension Line The options relating to the dimension line are as follows:-

9.14.1.1 Arrow Head The type of arrow to use. Choose from the drop down list of available arrow types. Click on the combo box’s arrow to open up the list. Scroll to the required type. Click to select it.

9.14.1.2 Arrow Size % Text Set the size of the arrows as a percentage of the text height. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

9.14.1.3 Vary Arrow Head to Text Gap You can opt to set a minimum gap between the arrow and the beginning / end of the text string. Click on this option to set or clear it as required. If this option is set the following setting will appear:-

9.14.1.4 Gap % Text This is the minimum size for the gap defined as a percentage of the text height. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

9.14.1.5 Use Ground The ground for the dimension is normally set to the current ground. This option can be used to specify a specific ground for the dimension. Set or clear the Use Ground check box as appropriate. If you set the Use Ground option, the ground combo box will appear. Select the ground to be used in the normal way.

9.14.2

Leader Line The options relating to the appearance of the leader lines are as follows:-

9.14.2.1 Show Leader Lines You can choose whether to display any leader lines or not. Click on this option to set or clear it as required. If this option is set corresponding to display leader lines the following further settings will appear:-

9.14.2.2 Leader Line Gap This is the gap to be left between the dimensioned point and the start of the leader line. Choose from one of the following:• Gap as % of Text Height - the given gap is defined as a percentage of the text height • Gap as Absolute Value - the given gap is the actual size of the gap

Release 9.5 Page 4-44

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE • Gap by Leader Length - the given value is used to define the length of the leader line. The gap is therefore the difference between the length of leader line and the distance of the given text point from the dimension point. In either case, you need to set the size of the gap according to the method you have chosen to define it. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

9.14.2.3 Auto Adjust This option if set, will automatically trim back the leader lines so that they do not overlap any existing design elements. Clear this option for the leader lines to run from the dimension point.

9.14.3

Dimension Text Style The options relating to the text style are as follows:-

9.14.3.1 Font Select the font to draw the dimension string in. Truetype fonts are now available. Choose from the list of fonts, by clicking on the combo box’s arrow to display the available fonts. Moving the cursor to the required font and clicking to select it Note:

When displaying drawings on other machines, Truetype fonts will not be visible on dimensions if the font is not installed.

9.14.3.2 Font Style Where a true type font is selected you can vary the font style. Choose from the list of available styles, by clicking on the combo box’s arrow to display them. Move the cursor to the required style and click on it to select it.

9.14.3.3 Size Decide whether you want the system to set the size automatically, or whether you wish to define your own size i.e. the height of the dimension string. Set or clear the auto size check box accordingly. If you clear this option, the size spin control will be displayed for you to enter the value to use. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

9.14.3.4 Format Select the format to use to display any fractional part of the dimension value. Choose one from:Decimal Choose this option to display any fractional part as a decimal. Set the number of decimal places to display the value to by clicking on the current value to select it and typing the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control. Rounded Decimal Choose this option to display any fractional part as a decimal rounded to the nearest multiple of a given fraction. Set the fraction to use as the basis of the rounding from the available list. Fractional Choose this option to display the fractional part as a fraction rounded to the nearest multiple of a given fraction. Set the fraction from the available list.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-45

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

9.14.3.5 Initial Snap Mode This option determines the default snap mode to be used to identify the points to dimension between. By default a snap to endpoint mode will be used but click on the arrow to display all the available modes. Simply drag the cursor to scroll to the required mode then click to select it.

9.14.4

Dimension Text Positioning The options relating to the text positioning are as follows:-

9.14.4.1 Fixed Text Choose to fix the position of the text rather than defining the text position with the cursor as the dimension is entered. Set this option to choose fixed text. Clear it to specify the text position with the cursor.

9.14.4.2 Offset If you choose Fixed Text, you need to set the offset. This is the distance from the dimension line to place the text. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control. If you do not choose Fixed Text, this option will be greyed out as it is inapplicable.

9.14.4.3 Placement Set the position of the text string with regard to the dimension line. This can be to the left of the dimension line, to the right of the dimension line or centred along the dimension line. The position can also be set to automatic, where the text string will be centred along the dimension line if there is enough room for it taking into account any current settings, or placed outside the dimension line if this is not the case. Choose the corresponding option from the drop down list by moving to the option and clicking to select it.

9.14.4.4 Horizontal Orientation Set this option to force the text to always be drawn horizontally, breaking the dimension line where necessary. Clear this option to choose for the text to be oriented with the dimension line. If you choose to draw the text at the same angle as the dimension line, you will also be required to choose how to display the text with respect to the dimension line. Choose from:• Above Line - the text is drawn above the dimension line • In Line - the text is drawn centred within the dimension line, the dimension line is broken accordingly • Below Line - the text is drawn beneath the dimension line

9.14.5

Text String The options affecting the contents of the text string are as follows:-

9.14.5.1 Blank Dimension Set this option if you wish to type a value for the dimension string, clear it if you wish to display the calculated value.

Release 9.5 Page 4-46

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE If you do not set the Blank Dimension option you will also have access to the remaining options.

9.14.5.2 Additional Text Additional can be any text string that you wish to append to the calculated dimension value. Simply type the required text.

9.14.5.3 Display Units Set this option to include units in the dimension string, clear it if you do not require units. If you have chosen to display units, select the units from the units combo box. Click on the arrow to display the available units. Move the cursor to the required value and click to select it.

9.14.5.4 Show Trailing Zeroes Set this option to display trailing zeroes up to the requested number of decimal places. Clear this option so that zeroes are not used to fill up the requested number of decimal places.

9.14.5.5 Display Tolerance Set this option to display a tolerance with the calculated string. Clear this option if you do not wish to display a tolerance. If you have selected to display a tolerance, set the tolerance values. For each tolerance, click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control. Finally, click on OK to save the dimension options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

9.15

Selected

Command

Selected

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Selected

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The Dimension->Selected command allows you to add an overall horizontal and vertical dimension for a given part of your design. The section of design to be dimensioned should be selected before this command is activated. Activate the command. You are now required to identify the position for the dimensions with respect to the selected design elements. Move the cursor to the corner corresponding to the correct position i.e.:• Left/Bottom • Right/Bottom • Left/Top • Right/Top If you have not set the option for Fixed Offsets, the cursor position also determines how far from the selected elements the dimensions should be placed. Click to identify the correct position. The dimensions will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the given settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-47

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

9.15.1

Options The Dimension Selected Options determine whether the dimensions are a given distance from the selected elements or not. Set or clear the Fixed Offset option as appropriate. If you have set the Fixed Offset option, you now need to determine the positioning of both the horizontal and vertical dimension as a distance from the horizontal / vertical extents of the selected elements respectively. Set the values by typing directly in the box, or use the arrows to scroll to the required value. Finally click on OK to accept the settings.

9.16

Overall

Command

Overall

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Overall

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The overall command allows you to calculate the overall size of the current design. Only visible elements will be used to calculate the size, so ensure that you have switched on the required grounds before activating this command. Similarly, ensure that you have switched off any dimensions as they will be included in the calculation giving a misleading result. Refer to “Ground Table...” on page 10-8 in the Views Menu chapter for further details of making elements visible. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will carry out the size calculation and the result will be displayed in a dialog. Choose OK to close the dialog.

9.17

Automatic Overall Command

Automatic Overall

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Automatic Overall

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The Automatic Overall command displays the overall horizontal and vertical dimensions of the current design. Only visible elements drawn in the currently defined Cut Ground will be used to calculate the dimensions. Activate the command. You are now required to identify the position for the dimensions with respect to the overall design. Move the cursor to the corner corresponding to the correct position i.e.:• Left/Bottom • Right/Bottom • Left/Top • Right/Top If you have not set the option for Fixed Offsets, the cursor position also determines how far from the outermost elements the dimensions should be placed. Click to identify the correct position. The dimensions will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the given settings.

Release 9.5 Page 4-48

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

9.17.1

Options Please refer to “Options” on page 48 for an explanation of the options available for this command.

9.18

Perimeter

Command

Perimeter

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Perimeter

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The perimeter command allows you to calculate the perimeter of a path made up of a continuous sequence of drawing elements. The path that the elements make can be either closed where the first element in the path joins with the last element in the path or open where the first and last elements do not meet. The command is ground specific. This means that all the elements in a path must be drawn in the same ground. They must also be continuous without gaps. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will prompt for the start of the boundary. Mark an element at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is the correct one and that you wish the calculation to proceed, by marking a point within the visible extents of the selected element. Upon confirmation the calculation will be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog. Choose OK to close the dialog.

9.19

Area

Command

Area

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Area

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The area command allows you to calculate the area of an enclosed boundary, made up of a continuous sequence of drawing elements. The path that the elements must be closed i.e. the first element in the path joins with the last element in the path. The command is ground specific. This means that all the elements in a path must be drawn in the same ground. They must also be continuous without gaps. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will prompt for the start of the boundary. Mark an element at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-49

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is the correct one and that you wish the area calculation to proceed, by marking a point within the visible extents of the selected element. Upon confirmation the area calculation will be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog. Choose OK to close the dialog.

9.20

Nett Area

Command

Nett Area

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Nett Area

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The nett area command allows you to calculate a cumulative area of one or more enclosed boundaries, taking into account any islands. The command identifies individual panels automatically by considering where creases lie. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will display a Nett Area Options dialog for you to provide information about which crease grounds have been used in the design. You will need to set the following :No of Creases Set the total number of grounds used for creases up to a maximum of 5. Type the value directly or scroll with the arrows to the required value. Grounds for Creases Now you need to identify each ground used. The number of ground combo boxes displayed here is determined by the number of creases specified by the previous setting. Set each ground by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the drop down list. Click on OK to close the Nett Area Options dialog and accept the given settings. The nett area calculation will now be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog. Choose OK to close this dialog.

9.21

Wastage

Command

Wastage

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Wastage

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The wastage command calculates the amount of wastage involved in cutting out the current design from a given material. The command is ground specific. This means that all the elements in a path must be drawn in the same ground. They must also be continuous without gaps.

Release 9.5 Page 4-50

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Dimensions Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate the command. The Wastage Options dialog appears. This is a tabbed dialog of settings to be applied in the wastage calculation. Refer to “Wastage Options” later in this section for a full explanation of the settings. Once the Wastage Options are correct choose OK to set the new options and close the dialog, choose Cancel to abandon any changes to the options and close the dialog. The Wastage command now continues. You are prompted to mark the first boundary. Mark an element at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is the correct one, by marking a point within the visible extents of the selected element. Upon confirmation, the KASEMAKE system will attempt to trace the boundary, selecting elements as they are identified. If the boundary is incorrect, choose Reset from the right hand pop-up menu to restart the command. Once the boundary has been traced, the system will open a dialog asking if you wish to identify Internal Cutouts. If you have cutouts in the design that you wish to consider in the calculation click on Yes. You will then be required to identify the cutout in the same way as you did the boundary. If you do not have any cutouts click on No. Next you will be prompted for the number of copies of the identified design. Set the appropriate value using the spin control or by typing directly. You will now be asked if you wish to identify other External Shapes. If you have other shapes in the design that you wish to consider in the calculation click on Yes. You will then be required to identify the next shape in the same way as you did the first boundary. If you do not have any other shapes to consider click on No. The KASEMAKE system will now calculate the wastage. The details will be displayed in a Wastage Report dialog. The Wastage Report dialog provides options to Save the Wastage Report and to Print the Wastage Report. These options work as per File->Save As and File->Print. See on page 2-8 and on page 2-18 respectively, for further details. Finally, click on OK to close the Wastage Report.

9.21.1

Wastage Options The Wastage Options are displayed in a tabbed dialog containing three tabbed pages of options. Click on the corresponding tab to access the underlying options. Each page of options is now described in turn.

9.21.1.1 Wastage Information Select the Board Type to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Select the Units that the design is drawn with by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-51

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE The Blank Length and Blank Width fields are filled in automatically with the blank size for the current visible design. These fields can be adjusted to build in an allowance, by scrolling the current value, or by typing a new value directly. An allowance for trim can also be set for each edge of the board. Scroll the current value or type a new value directly. Select the material from the drop down list of available materials. For details of defining your own material refer to the “Corrugated Case” section that follows. In addition, there are two commands accessible from this page of options:•Load WST File The calculated wastage report can be saved in a WST file. This command allows you to call up a previously save wastage report. Specify the filename in the normal way. The wastage report dialog will then appear with the details of the requested report. •Load VLS File A VLS file contains all the predefined grammages for the different materials. These can be set up for different suppliers and the values saved for future use. A VLS file can only be created currently using a word processor. This command allows you to load a different set of presaved grammages. Specify the filename of the VLS file in the usual way. The grammage values will now be loaded ready for you to tailor your material.

9.21.1.2 Corrugated Case The grammages and sheet types for the various layers making up the corrugated board can be set up through this page of options. Select the board type to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Several sets of options for the different layers now appear, depending upon which board type is selected. For each layer set the sheet type by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Also, set the grammage for this sheet from the predefined list of values. The Take-Up factors for the flute are currently hard coded and cannot be changed. •Save Material Details... Once you have set up the board details, you can save them as a named material for future use. Click on the Save Material Details... button. You will now be asked to supply a name for the material definition. Type a suitable name. Click on OK to save this material definition. Click on Cancel to abandon the command. The saved material type will now be accessible through the Wastage Information page’s Select Material option for use with future jobs using this particular specification of board. •Delete Current Material This command removes the material definition for the material currently set as the Select Material option of the Wastage Information page. Make sure this option is set to the material you wish to delete before using this command as no confirmation is required. Click on the Delete Current Material button and the definition for the current material will be removed. Note: the DefaultTestMaterial definition cannot be removed.

9.21.1.3 Solid Board The grammage to apply when using solid board can be set through this page. Select the required value from the list of predefined grammages.

Release 9.5 Page 4-52

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

9.22

Report Only

Command

Report Dimension

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Report

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The Report Only command is used in conjunction with another dimension command, so is only accessible when a dimension command is picked. It sets the current dimension command into report mode so that the dimension is only reported on the status bar; the dimension entities are not drawn.

9.23

Info

Command

Info

Menu

Draw > Dimensions->Info

Toolbar Button:

Dimension Toolbar

The Dimension->Info command allows you to view temporary information about any element within the current design including information about the pen or tool assigned to the element. Activate the command. You are now required to identify the design element for which information is to be displayed. Move the cursor close to the required element. An information window will popup detailing information about the chosen element. The information displayed will depend upon the type of element chosen. This command is self-repeating. Simply move near to another element and the information popup will be updated accordingly. Note:

10

The popup window is only temporary and will be removed when an alternative command is activated.

Build Sub-Menu Select the Build option from the Draw Menu to access the Build Sub-menu with the following commands:-

10.1

Intersect

Command

Intersect

Menu

Draw > Build->Intersect

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The intersect command allows you to project, or cut back elements to their point of intersection. The command works with two lines, a line and an arc or two arcs. The first element identified is the one that will be changed. Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first element. Mark the element by picking a point close to the required element. Where more than one solution is possible the part of the element that is marked in the identification process will be the part of the element that is retained. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-53

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second element. Identify the second element in the same way. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect. Finally, you need to confirm that both elements are correct and you wish to complete the command. In the case of a line and an arc or two arcs, where more than one solution is possible, the different solutions will now be shown as you move the cursor. Mark a confirmation point close to the desired intersection. The chosen intersection will now be carried out and the initial element adjusted appropriately. This command is self repeating.

10.2

Point Intersect

Command

Point Intersect

Menu

Draw > Build->Point Intersect

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Point Intersect command works by placing a point at the intersection of two elements. This can be two lines, a line and an arc or two arcs. Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first element. Mark the element by picking a point close to the required element If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second element. Identify the second element in the same way. If you have chosen two lines, a point will now be drawn at their intersection point and the command is complete. However, if there is more than one solution, the chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect. Finally, where there is more than one solution, you will need to confirm that both elements are correct and you wish to complete the command. The confirmation point will be used to determine which point of intersection is intended. Mark a confirmation point close to the required intersection. A point will now be drawn at the intersection of the two chosen elements. This command is self repeating.

Release 9.5 Page 4-54

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

10.3

Multi Intersect

Command

Multi Intersect

Menu

Draw > Build->Multi Intersect

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The multi intersect command allows you to project, or cut back one or more elements to their point of intersection with a given element. The element being intersected to remains unchanged. Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark the start of the first element. Mark the element by picking a point close to the start of the required element. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Where more than one solution is possible the start point will identify the part of the element that is retained. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you can identify further elements by holding down the Shift key. You will again be prompted to mark the start of the element. Identify the next element by picking a point close to its start. Repeat for each element required. Once all the elements are identified, release the Shift key if appropriate and you will be prompted for the element to intersect to. Identify this element in the same way. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect. The chosen intersection(s) will now be carried out and the initial element(s) adjusted appropriately. This command is self repeating.

10.4

Quick Trim

Command

Quick Trim

Menu

Draw > Build->Quick Trim

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Quick Trim command allows you to project, or cut back two lines to their point of intersection. Unlike the Intersect command, both lines will be adjusted. Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first line. Mark the line by picking a point close to the required line. Where more than one solution is possible the part of the line that is marked in the identification process will be the part of the line that is retained. If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-55

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Once the line is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second line. Identify the second line in the same way. The intersection will now be carried out and the two lines adjusted appropriately. This command is self repeating.

10.5

Auto Cut

Command

Auto Cut

Menu

Draw > Build->Auto Cut

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

Auto Cut is a very useful tool for removing sections from lines or arcs. KASEMAKE will automatically cut a section from a given element up to its two nearest intersections with other drawing elements. If there are no intersections the entire element will be removed. If there is only one intersection with another element, the section nearest to the identification point, will be removed. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element. Choose the element to be cut, positioning your cursor within the section you want to be removed and marking it. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and compare it with the other drawing elements to identify the nearest intersection point, if any. The section nearest the cursor will be removed depending upon the number of intersections. This command is self repeating. Example:

Figure 1Figure 2 In Figure 1 the small crosses indicate where the cursor was positioned to identify each element. Figure 2 displays the end result.

10.6

Auto Trim

Command

Auto Trim

Menu

Draw > Build->Auto Trim

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

Auto Trim is a very useful tool for trimming lines or arcs. KASEMAKE will automatically trim or extend a given element to its two nearest intersection points with other drawing elements keeping the section marked. If there are no intersections the element will be unchanged. If there is only one intersection with another element, the section nearest to the identification point, will be extended / trimmed.

Release 9.5 Page 4-56

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element. Choose the element to be trimmed, positioning your cursor within the section you want to keep and marking it. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and compare it with the other drawing elements to identify the nearest intersection point, if any. The section nearest the cursor will be altered depending upon the number of intersections. This command is self repeating.

10.7

Bisect Element

Command

Bisect Element

Menu

Draw > Build->Bisect Element

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Bisect Element command allows you to divide an element into a specified number of equal sized sections. A point is drawn to show the end of one section and the beginning of another. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element. First check or set the command’s options. Next, choose an element by picking a point close to the required element. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and select it. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one and you wish to complete the command. Mark a confirmation point. The element will now be marked off with points depending upon the number of sections requested. This command is self repeating.

10.7.1

Bisect Element Options The options allow you to specify the number of sections to divide the element into. A point will be placed evenly spaced between sections. Points are not placed at the start or end of lines or arcs, so for these elements the number of points displayed is always one less than the number of sections. Set the number of sections required by using the spin control to alter the current value, or selecting the current value and typing the new value.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-57

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

10.8

Divide

Command

Divide

Menu

Draw > Build->Divide

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Divide command allows you to split an element into a specified number of equal sized sections. It works in the same way as the Bisect Element command, but physically breaks the element into small sections, rather than just marking off the element with points. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element. First check or set the command’s options. Next, choose an element by picking a point close to the required element. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and select it. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one and you wish to complete the command. Mark a confirmation point. The element will now be split up into the requested number of sections. This command is self repeating.

10.8.1

Divide Options The options allow you to specify the number of sections to split the element into. The element will be divided into equal sized elements. Set the number of sections required by using the spin control to alter the current value, or selecting the current value and typing the new value.

10.9

Break

Command

Break

Menu

Draw > Build->Break

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Break command allows you to split an item at a given point. You can also opt to remove part of the chosen item. Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element. First check or set the command’s options. Next, choose an element by picking a point close to the required element. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and select it. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful.

Release 9.5 Page 4-58

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one and you wish to complete the command. Mark the point where you wish the element to be split. If you have requested to remove a section, you will now be prompted to mark the other end of the section to be removed. Mark the required point. The element will now be split at the first point and the section between this point and the second point removed if this option has been chosen. This command will now start again.

10.9.1

Break Options You can opt to remove part of the chosen element between two given points, or simply to split it at the given point. Click on the Remove Section check box to set it and opt to remove the section. Clear the check box to opt to simply split the chosen element.

10.10

Project

Command

Project

Menu

Draw > Build->Project

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The project command allows you to drop a point perpendicularly on to a given element. Activate the command. The system prompts for the element. Identify the element by picking a point close to the required element. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and select it. If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements are close together and you wish to search again, choose Reset from the right hand pop-up menu. The system will search again and select an alternative element if the search is successful. If the selected element is incorrect and you wish to start the command again, simply choose Reset from the right hand pop up menu. Once the correct element is selected, you will be prompted to mark a point. This point is the point you wish to project perpendicularly onto the selected element. Choose the point using any of the available drawing modes. A point will now be drawn on the chosen element. If the point is projected beyond the visible part of the element, the point will be adjusted to the end point of the element.

10.11

Bisect Angle

Command

Bisect Angle

Menu

Draw > Build->Bisect Angle

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Bisect Angle command draws a line which bisects the angle between two given lines. Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark the first line. Identify the line by choosing a point close to it. The nearest line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation that it has been found.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-59

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE If the selected line is not the intended line, because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the line is correctly identified, identify the second line in the same way. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected line is incorrect. Finally, you need to confirm that both lines are correct and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point within the sector you wish to bisect as confirmation. The resulting bisecting line will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

10.12

Thicken

Command

Thicken

Menu

Draw > Build->Thicken

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Thicken command allows you to enhance the thickness of an element, by drawing parallel elements either side of the chosen element. Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will be prompted to identify the element. Identify the element by picking a point close it. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that it is the correct one and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as confirmation. The parallel elements will now be drawn in the current ground colour dependent upon the commands options. The command will now start again.

10.12.1

Thicken Options The options available for the thicken command are as follows:-

10.12.1.1 Perpendicular Gap The distance between the parallel elements can be set. Click on the current value and scroll it using the spin control. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

10.12.1.2 Number of Copies The number of copies can be set. This corresponds to the total number of parallel elements. Half are placed one side and half are placed the other side.

Release 9.5 Page 4-60

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Click on the current value and scroll it using the spin control. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

10.13

Point On Line

Command

Point On Line

Menu

Draw > Build->Point On Line

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Point On Line command as its name suggests places a point on a given line at a specified distance from the chosen end of the line. Activate the command. Check or set the command options. You will now be prompted to identify the required line. Identify the line by choosing a point close to it. The nearest line to the given point will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the line is correctly identified, you need to determine which end of the line to offset the point from. The KASEMAKE system will automatically adopt the snap to endpoint mode and display a snap cursor to help you to identify the correct point. Mark a point close to the required end. A point will now be drawn on the line, the specified distance from the chosen end point.

10.13.1

Point On Line Options Set the distance from the given end point to place the point. Alter the current value by clicking on it to select it, then typing the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.14

Adjust

Command

Adjust

Menu

Draw > Build->Adjust

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Adjust command enables you to adjust the length of a selected element. Elements that you can extend or shorten include lines, arcs and elliptical arcs. Activate the command. Check and adjust the options as appropriate. You will now be prompted to identify the element to adjust. Click near to the required element to identify it. If you have opted to adjust by a given distance and apply to both ends, or you have opted to adjust to size, with the towards centre option, the KASEMAKE system requires no further information. The identified element will now be adjusted to the given size as per the options. If you have opted to adjust the element by a given distance from one end or to adjust the element by size but not centred, you must now identify the end to use to make the adjustment. The KASEMAKE system automatically adopts the snap to endpoint mode and displays a snap cursor to help you to identify the end point. Click near to the required point to pick it. The identified element will now be adjusted as per the options.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-61

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE This command is self repeating.

10.14.1

Adjust Options

10.14.1.1 Adjust by distance Choose this option to adjust the chosen element by a specified distance at either or both end(s). The next three settings are used by this method, so will now become enabled. Distance From End Set the distance to adjust the chosen element by from either or both end(s). Scroll the current value or type a new value directly. Shorten Set this option if you want to shorten the chosen element by the given distance. Clear this option if you want to lengthen the chosen element. Apply to Both Ends Set this optionto apply the adjustment to both ends of the chosen element. Clear this option if you wish to specify which end to adjust.

10.14.1.2 Adjust To Size Choose this option to adjust the chosen element to a specific size, extending or shortening it as appropriate. The next two settings are used by this method, so will now become enabled. Size Set the size to make the chosen element. Scroll the current value or type a new value directly. Towards Centre Set this optionto apply the adjustment about the centre of the chosen element.

Release 9.5 Page 4-62

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Clear this option if you wish to specify which end to resize.

10.14.1.3 Move attached elements For both methods you can opt to move attached elements. This means that when an element is adjusted and its end moved to its new position any other adjoining end points will also move if this option is set. To leave adjoining elements unchanged, clear this option.

10.15

Hatch

Command

Hatch

Menu

Draw > Build->Hatch

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Hatch command allows you to shade part of your design. The boundary of the area to be shaded is identified. This should be a sequence of connected elements. Further areas which overlap or are contained within the boundary and are to be left unhatched, can also be identified. These are referred to as islands and should also be a sequence of connected elements. Activate the command. Check or set the Hatch Options. The command will now prompt you for the first element in the boundary. Identify any element in the required boundary by choosing a point close to the element. The nearest element to the given point will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and you wish to trace the boundary. Mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. The point will be used to determine which direction the path should take if the Automatic option has been set. Choose a point outside the boundary to force the path to take an external route. The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around any connected elements according to the Hatch Options. Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced, the Hatch Tool dialog appears offering the following options:-

10.15.1

Island Choose the Island option if you are happy with the boundary and wish to identify an area which overlaps or is contained within the selected boundary and should not be hatched. Many Island’s may be identified by repeatedly choosing this option from the Hatch Tool dialog. Choose the Island option. You are now prompted to mark an element which is part of the island. Identify any element forming part of the required island in the same way as you identified the external boundary. Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and you wish to trace the path making up the island. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-63

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE confirmation. The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around any connected elements according to the hatch options. Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the island has been traced, the Hatch Tool dialog will appear again. You can opt to choose further islands by choosing the Island option again, or choose one of the other options.

10.15.2

Amend The Amend option is provided to allow you to correct an incorrect boundary or island boundary. If the Automatic option is set in Hatch Options, choosing Amend will simply restart the Hatch command. If you have chosen the Manual option, you will now be given the chance to amend the incorrect path. • Identify the first element where the path has gone the wrong way. The element and all following elements will now be deselected and removed from the path. • Identify the correct element. This will now be selected and the KASEMAKE system will attempt to trace a new path, selecting each new element as it is added to the path.

10.15.3

Hatch Once the external boundary and any islands have been correctly identified, choose this option to hatch the selected area using the current Hatch Options.

10.15.4

Cancel Choose Cancel to restart the Hatch command.

10.15.5

Hatch Options Select the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Hatch Options.

10.15.5.1 Angle Of Hatch Lines Set the angle at which the hatch lines will be drawn. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.15.5.2 Gap Between Lines Set the perpendicular distance between the hatch lines. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.15.5.3 Selection Method Choose the method for selecting the boundary, or island boundary by clicking on one of the following:• Manual - a path will be traced from the start element. If the path is incorrect you will get the chance to amend it by manually selecting where the path has followed the wrong route and identify an element on the correct route. The system will then attempt to retrace the boundary from the identified element. • Automatic - the system will automatically trace the boundary from the start element. No manual intervention is possible to amend an incorrect boundary. The position of the confirmation point is used to determine which path to follow If the Automatic selection method is chosen, the following options are also available.

Release 9.5 Page 4-64

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Close Unbound Area • Yes - choose this option to automatically close the boundary by placing an additional line between the start point of the first element in the boundary and the end point of the final element in the boundary • No - choose this option to leave the boundary open Ground Selection • Specific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same ground as the identified first element • Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground Finally, choose OK to save the new Hatch Options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

10.16

Hatch Holes

Command

Hatch Holes

Menu

Draw > Build->Hatch Holes

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Hatch Holes command allows you to select part of your design and shade any closed areas within the selected area. Activate the command. Check or set the Hatch Holes Options. The command will now prompt you to select the items to hatch. You now need to select the area by dragging a rubber band selection box. Click and hold the left mouse button at a suitable start point for the box. Now as you move the mouse the selection box will open out and follow the path of the cursor. Once you have surrounded the area you wish to identify, click with the left hand mouse button to complete the selection box. The KASEMAKE system will now search for any enclosed areas within the selection box and shade them according to the Hatch Options.

10.16.1

Hatch Holes Options Select the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Hatch Options.

10.16.1.1 Angle Of Hatch Lines Set the angle at which the hatch lines will be drawn. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.16.1.2 Gap Between Lines Set the perpendicular distance between the hatch lines. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value. Finally, choose OK to save the new Hatch Holes Options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

10.17

Enlarge Detail

Command

Enlarge Detail

Menu

Draw > Build->Enlarge Detail

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

Enlarge Detail allows you to take an area of your design and show it enlarged at a given position within the design.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-65

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Activate the command. You will now be asked to identify the centre of the area to enlarge. Mark the centre point using any of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted to mark the extent of the area to enlarge. As you move the cursor a circle will rubber band to help you to identify the extent correctly.Mark a point using any of the available drawing modes to identify the area for enlargement. A circle will now be drawn to illustrate where the detailed area is positioned within the entire design. The elements contained within the circle, together with the circle will now be copied and drawn in the selection colour. You can now position them by identifying a new position for the centre. The elements and circle rubber band to help you to position them. In addition, a line is drawn from the extent of the newly identified circle to the extent of the circle being positioned to show how the detail relates to the original design. Position the new centre using any of the available modes. The copied elements are now placed at their new position in the selection colour. Finally you are prompted to Mark Extent. Move the edge of the circle and the elements within it will enlarge as the circle does. Identify the position of the circle extent using any of the drawing modes. The enlarged view of the chosen elements will now be drawn surrounded by a circle in the relevant ground. The circle identifying the area that was enlarged and the line linking them is also added.

10.18

Straighten Arc

Command

Straighten Arc

Menu

Draw > Build->Straighten Arc

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The Straighten Arc command allows you to take an arc and flatten it so that it becomes a line. Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the arc to straighten. Select the arc using any of the available drawing modes. A line will now be drawn in place of or in addition to the chosen arc according to the current options.

10.18.1

Straighten Arc Options Identify the options for the straighten arc command as follows:Keep Original Element Set this option if you wish to retain the arc as well as adding its straight line representation. Clear this option if you wish the original arc to be removed and just its straight line representation to be drawn.

10.19

Bulge

Command

Bulge

Menu

Draw > Build->Bulge

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Bulge command allows you to take a line and create an arc by adding a bulge a set distance from the line. Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the line to create the bulge from. Select the line using any of the available drawing modes.

Release 9.5 Page 4-66

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE The line will now be drawn in the selection colour. A rubber band arc with the same start and end points as the line and the given distance away from it will now appear. Move the cursor to identify which side of the line the bulge is to be drawn on. Identify the position using any of the available drawing modes. The arc will now be drawn in place of or in addition to the chosen line according to the current options.

10.19.1

Bulge Options Identify the options for the bulge command as follows:Distance Define the distance away from the line to position the highest point of the arc, i.e. the size of bulge. Set the value by typing directly or using the scroll buttons. Keep Original Element Set this option if you wish to retain the line as well as adding the arc representation. Clear this option if you wish the original line to be removed and just the new arc representation to be drawn.

10.20

Radius Bulge

Command

Radius Bulge

Menu

Draw > Build->Radius Bulge

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Radius Bulge command allows you to take a line and create an arc by adding a bulge with a given radius. You can also take an arc and change its bulge to the given radius. Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the line / arc to create the bulge from. Select the line / arc using any of the available drawing modes. The line / arc will now be drawn in the selection colour. A rubber band arc with the same start and end points as the given line / arc will now appear. Move the cursor to identify the radius for the bulge. Identify the position using any of the available drawing modes. The arc will now be drawn in place of or in addition to the chosen line / arc according to the current options.

10.20.1

Bulge Options Identify the options for the bulge command as follows:Fixed Radius Set this option if you wish to specify a value for the radius of the bulge. Clear this option if you wish to identify the radius from your design. If you opt for a fixed radius you will also need to set the radius option :Radius Define the radius of the bulge. Set the value by typing directly or using the scroll buttons. Keep Original Element Set this option if you wish to retain the line / arc as well as adding the new arc representation. Clear this option if you wish the original line / arc to be removed and just the new arc representation to be drawn.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-67

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

10.21

Lead In Arc

Command

Lead In Arc

Menu

Draw > Build->Lead In Arc

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Lead In Arc allows you to define an arc which blends with an existing circle / ellipse. Activate this command. You will now be prompted to identify the circle / ellipse you wish to blend with. Mark the circle / ellipse by choosing a point close to it. The chosen circle / ellipse will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the circle / ellipse is correctly identified, you need to determine the direction and size of the blending arc by specifying its start point. Move the cursor. The KASEMAKE system will now begin to draw a blending arc following the path of the cursor. When the direction and size of the arc are correct, mark the point. The blending arc will now be drawn in the current ground. This command is self-repeating allowing you to identify further blending arcs. Simply choose an alternative command when no further blending arcs are required.

10.22

Element Path

Command

Element Path

Menu

Draw > Build->Element Path

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Element Path allows you to trace a continuous boundary splitting items where appropriate and stores a copy of the boundary elements in a specified ground for future use. Activate the command. The command will now prompt you for the first element in the boundary. Identify any element in the required boundary by choosing a point close to the element. The nearest element to the given point will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and you wish to trace the boundary. Mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. The point will be used to determine which direction the path should take. Choose a point outside the boundary to force the path to take an external route. Choose a point within the boundary to direct the path inside the boundary.

Release 9.5 Page 4-68

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around any connected elements. Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced, the Save Path dialog appears offering the following options:-

10.22.1

External A path can be saved as an external path. First set the ground to save the external path in using the corresponding ground combo box. Click on the arrow to display the list of grounds. Scroll to the required ground. Click to select it. Now click on the External button. A copy of the selected path elements will now be placed in the chosen ground.

10.22.2

Internal A path can be saved as an internal path. First set the ground to save the internal path in using the corresponding ground combo box. Click on the arrow to display the list of grounds. Scroll to the required ground. Click to select it. Now click on the Internal button. A copy of the selected path elements will now be placed in the chosen ground.

10.22.3

Cancel Choose Cancel to close the Save Path dialog and restart the Element Path command.

10.22.4

Element Path Options Select the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Element Path Options.

10.22.4.1 Selection Method Choose the method for selecting the boundary by clicking on one of the following:• Manual - a path will be traced from the start element. If the path is incorrect you will get the chance to amend it by manually selecting where the path has followed the wrong route and identify an element on the correct route. The system will then attempt to retrace the boundary from the identified element. • Automatic - the system will automatically trace the boundary from the start element. No manual intervention is possible to amend an incorrect boundary. The position of the confirmation point is used to determine which path to follow

10.22.4.2 Close Unbound Area Yes - choose this option to automatically close the boundary by placing an additional line between the start point of the first element in the boundary and the end point of the final element in the boundary No - choose this option to leave the boundary open

10.22.4.3 Ground Selection Specific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same ground as the identified first element Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-69

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

10.22.4.4 Diagnostics Debug - choose this option to display details of any dead ends found when tracing the boundary. The coordinate of the dead end is displayed in a dialog. Show Steps - choose this option to trace the path an element at a time, displaying details of each node as it is traced. The coordinate of each node is displayed in a dialog. This helps to identify any potential problem areas for tracing the path. Finally, choose OK to save the new Element Path Options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

10.23

Inflate / Deflate Path Command

Inflate / Deflate Path

Menu

Draw > Build->Inflate / Deflate Path

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

This command will trace a path and produce a parallel path offset from the original. The resulting path can be optionally internal or external to the original path. Activate this command. Set the options as appropriate. KASEMAKE now prompts you to mark a boundary element. Pick a point near to one of the elements in the path you wish to trace. KASEMAKE draws the chosen element in the selection colour and requests confirmation that it is the intended element. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around any connected elements to identify the chosen path. Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced, KASEMAKE will calculate the new path, offseting it from the original path as defined by the options. The new path is then drawn in the current ground. 10.23.1

Inflate / Deflate Path Options

10.23.1.1 Ground Selection Specific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same ground as the identified first element Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground

10.23.1.2 Generate Path Internal - Choose this option if you wish to deflate the path External - Choose this option to inflate the given path

Release 9.5 Page 4-70

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Build Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Offset Distance Set the distance to offset the new path from the original. Scroll the existing setting or type a new value directly. Store in Ground Choose the ground to store the resulting path in. Click on the combo and select from the drop down list.

10.23.1.3 Fillet Fillet Corners Set this option if you wish to fillet the corners of the new path Radius The fillet radius to use where fillet corners are required. Scroll the current value using the arrow keys or type a new value directly

10.24

Alternative Inflate / Deflate Path Command

Alternative Inflate / Deflate Path

Menu

Draw > Build->Alternative Inflate / Deflate Path

Toolbar Button: Build Toolbar This command will trace a path and produce a parallel path offset from the original. The resulting path can be optionally internal or external to the original path. It is an alternative command to the previous command as it uses a different method so may produce an alternative result for certain shapes.

10.25

Offset Element Command

Offset Element

Menu

Draw > Build->Offset Element

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Offset Element command allows you to produce parallel element(s) offset from a chosen element. Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will be prompted to identify the element. Identify the element by picking a point close it. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful. If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. Once the element is correctly identified, the parallel element(s) will be drawn, according to the options and will move with the cursor. You will now be prompted to confirm which side of the chosen element to place the offset elements. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-71

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE confirmation. The offset elements will now be drawn in the current ground colour dependent upon the commands options. The command will now start again.

10.25.1

Offset Element Options The options available for the offset element command are as follows:-

10.25.1.1 Perpendicular Gap The distance between each element can be set. Click on the current value and scroll it using the spin control. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

10.25.1.2 Number of Elements The number of parallel elements required. Click on the current value and scroll it using the spin control. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

10.26

Convert To Contour Command

Convert To Contour

Menu

Draw > Build->Convert To Contour

Toolbar Button:

Build Toolbar

The convert to contour command takes a sequence of lines and produces a smooth curve representation for them. Activate the command. Set the options if appropriate. You will now be prompted to mark an element. Pick a point close to one of the line segments in the sequence you wish to produce a contour for. KASEMAKE now traces from the given line to identify the complete sequence, then produces the contour using the endpoints and the smoothing factor specified in the options. The contour is drawn in the current ground colour and is treated as a single element.

10.26.1

Convert to Contour Options The Convert to Contour options are displayed as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 4-72

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Image KASEMAKE These options apply to the handling of the contour when it is exploded. You can choose for the contour to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radio button to select it. Arcs Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother the approximation to the original contour, the more processing involved so there is a performance cost. Drag the slider to vary the smoothing factor as required.

Finally click on OK to accept any new changes or Cancel to abandon them.

11

Image

Command

Image

Menu

Draw > Image

Toolbar Button:

Draw Toolbar

This command allows you to load an image e.g. bitmap or tif file etc. as part of your design rather than just as a background image. You will need to define a box to hold the bitmap and specify the name of the file containing the image. Activate the command. You are prompted for the first corner of the box. Mark a point within the drawing area using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band box will now be drawn as you move the cursor. Mark the second corner using any of the available drawing modes. The load image file dialog will now appear prompting for the name of the file containing the image to be loaded. Enter the filename in the usual way. Refer to “Open” on page 2-5. The image will now be loaded and scaled accordingly to fit the given box.

12

Image Proportional

Command

Image Proportional

Menu

Draw > Image Proportional

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command allows you to load one or more images e.g. bitmap or tif file etc. as part of your design at a 1 : 1 scale. You will need to specify the name of the file(s) containing the image. In addition, you can load EPS artwork file(s) with a Tiff preview again at a 1 : 1 scale using this command. Activate the command. The Load Image file dialog will now appear prompting for the name of the file containing the image to be loaded and its location. Set the Files of Type field to correspond to the type of image you wish to load. Now identify the first image to be loaded by clicking on its filename to select it. For multiple selections you hold down the CTRL key to pick out individual image files, or the SHIFT key if the files are listed in succession, whilst you click on the image filename. Click on Open to close the dialog. You will now be prompted for an origin for each image file in turn. A rubber band box, representing an approximate border for the image will also be displayed

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-73

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE to help you to locate the image more easily. Pick a suitable origin using any of the available drawing modes. For most of the formats, the image will now be loaded at 1:1 scale, at the given position. Some of the formats do not contain DPI information. For these formats the following dialog is displayed before the image can be loaded:-

This gives a default value for the DPI (dots per inch) and displays the dimensions of the loaded image if this value where used. Set the correct image DPI by scrolling with the arrows or typing the value directly. The corresponding dimensions will automatically update. Click on OK to set the DPI and continue to load the image. You will be repeatedly prompted for an origin and where necessary the DPI value for each of the selected image files in turn. EPS Image Resolution Where an EPS image is loaded, this will be automatically regenerated at increased resolutions to maintain visibility as the image is zoomed. Up to three resolutions of the image are used. The original 1:1 resolution that it is loaded with. A medium and a high resolution. The point at which the alternative resolutions are used depends upon the bitmap zoom factors set with File>Preferences. See “Bitmap Zoom Factors” on page 2-55 The medium zoom factor determines how far to zoom before the medium resolution image is loaded. The high zoom factor determines how far to zoom before the high resolution image is loaded.

13

Options

Command

Options...

Menu

Draw > Options...

Toolbar Button:

Standard Toolbar

This command allows you to access the options for the currently active command. If the current command does not have options this option will be greyed out. If the current command does have options, the appropriate Options Dialog will be displayed for you to view and change the option settings as required. For details on using any of the Options Dialogs, refer to the Options section for the current command.

Release 9.5 Page 4-74

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Freehand Construct Lines SubMenu KASEMAKE

14

Freehand Construct Lines Sub-Menu This is a new menu providing access to commands for creating and manipulating freehand construct lines. Freehand construct lines are lines which assist in the creation of a design.

14.1

Draw Freehand Construct Lines Command

Draw Freehand Construct Lines

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Draw Freehand Construct Lines

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar This command allows you to place construct lines or guide lines anywhere within the drawing area. They are of infinite length so are available at any window size. Activate this command. Check the current options. You will be prompted Mark First Point. KASEMAKE requires you to enter a point through which you wish the construct line to pass. Mark a point using any of the available drawing modes. Move the cursor. A construct line will now appear through the given point and the current cursor position. You are now prompted Mark Second Point. Mark a point to confirm the other point that the construct line should pass through and finalise its position. Multiple Construct Lines If you have set the options to create additional construct lines, you will now be prompted Mark Parallel Side. KASEMAKE requires you to identify which side of the new construct line you wish to place the additional construct lines. The construct lines will be drawn as you move the cursor to help you position them correctly. Mark a point to identify the final position. Construct Lines At A Specific Angle If you hold down the CTRL key whilst identifying the two points through which the construct line passes, you can constrain the angle they are drawn at. Moving the cursor after the initial point is given will produce a horizontal construct line. Releasing the CTRL key and reapplying it will cause the construct line to switch from horizontal to vertical. Moving the cursor will result in the construct line rotating through multiples of the current increment (determined by the options) measured from the horizontal (or vertical). Mark a point to identify the final position. In all cases, KASEMAKE will draw the construct line(s) in the current construct line colour. Refer to File->Preferences for defining this colour.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-75

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

14.1.1

Construct Line Options

No. Of Additional Lines This is the number of additional construct lines that you require. Set the value by typing directly or use the arrow keys to scroll. Offset The offset to leave between each construct line is specified here. Set the All Equal check box if you wish to set an equal offset to apply to all the construct lines. Clear the All Equal check box if you wish to set individual offsets for each construct line. One or more offset fields will be displayed depending upon the No. of Additional Lines and All Equal settings. Set each offset by typing the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to it. Angle Increment This is the increment to use when rotating the construct line(s). Set the angle by typing the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to it. Note:

This setting is only applied when the CTRL key is used. Please see “Construct Lines At A Specific Angle” on page 75 for further details.

Finally click on OK to update the settings or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

14.2

Offset Construct Line Command

Offset Construct Line

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Offset Construct Line

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar This command allows you to add one or more construct lines at a specified offset from a given construct line.

Release 9.5 Page 4-76

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Freehand Construct Lines SubMenu KASEMAKE Activate the Offset Construct Line command. Check the options. You will be prompted Mark Construct Line. KASEMAKE requires you to identify the construct line which you want to offset the new construct line(s) from. Mark a point near to the required construct line. The nearest construct line to the given point will now be redrawn in the current selection colour as confirmation. Move the cursor and the additional construct line(s) will now appear offset as per the options. KASEMAKE now prompts you to Mark Parallel Side. Mark a point to identify which side of the chosen construct line you wish to place the additional construct lines. The new construct lines will now be drawn in the current construct line colour as per the current options.

14.2.1

Offset Construct Line Options

No. Of Additional Lines This is the number of additional construct lines that you require. Set the value by typing directly or use the arrow keys to scroll. Offset The offset to leave between each construct line is specified here. Set the All Equal check box if you wish to set an equal offset to apply to all the construct lines. Clear the All Equal check box if you wish to set individual offsets for each construct line. One or more offset fields will be displayed depending upon the No. of Additional Lines and All Equal settings. Set each offset by typing the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to it.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings or Cancel to ignore them.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-77

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

14.3

Perpendicular Construct Line Command

Perpendicular Construct Line

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Perpendicular Construct Line

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar This command allows you to add one or more construct lines at a specified offset perpendicular to a given construct line. Activate the Perpendicular Construct Line command. Check the options. You will be prompted Mark Construct Line. KASEMAKE requires you to identify the construct line which you want to offset the new construct line(s) from. Mark a point near to the required construct line. The nearest construct line to the given point will now be redrawn in the current selection colour as confirmation. Move the cursor. A new construct line perpendicular to the chosen construct line will be drawn in the selection colour which follows the path of the cursor. You will now be prompted Mark Construct Line Position. Mark a point to confirm the final position for the new perpendicular construct line. KASEMAKE now prompts you to Mark Parallel Side. Move the cursor. The additional construct line(s) will now appear offset as per the options. Mark a point to identify which side of the new perpendicular construct line you wish to place the additional construct lines. The new construct lines will now be drawn in the current construct line colour as per the current options.

14.3.1

Perpendicular Construct Line Options Please refer to “Offset Construct Line Options” on page 77 for details.

14.4

Bisect Angle Between Elements Command

Bisect Angle Between Elements

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Bisect Angle Between Elements

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar The Bisect Angle Between Elements command enables you to add construct lines at an angle determined as the bisecting angle of two given design elements. Activate this command. KASEMAKE will prompt Mark Line. Identify the first line by moving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The chosen line will now be drawn in the current selection colour as confirmation. You will now be prompted Mark Second Line. Again, identify the required line by moving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The new construct line will now be drawn in the current ground colour, passing through the intersection point of the two lines at the angle which bisects the angle between them.

Release 9.5 Page 4-78

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE

14.5

Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines Command

Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar The Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines command enables you to add construct lines at an angle determined as the bisecting angle of two given construct lines. Activate this command. KASEMAKE will prompt Mark Line. Identify the first construct line by moving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The chosen construct line will now be drawn in the current selection colour as confirmation. You will now be prompted Mark Second Line. Again, identify the required construct line by moving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The new construct line will now be drawn in the current ground colour, passing through the intersection point of the two chosen construct lines at the angle which bisects the angle between them.

14.6

Show / Hide Freehand Construct Lines Command

Show/Hide Freehand Construct Lines

Menu

Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Show/Hide Freehand Construct Lines

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar This command toggles the display of the freehand construct lines. To remove construct lines on display, simply activate the command and the construct lines will be removed. The menu item will also be updated to Show Freehand Construct Lines. To display construct lines, simply activate the command again and the construct lines will be displayed. The menu item will also be updated to Hide Freehand Construct Lines.

15

Folding KASEMAKE can fold and display any suitable drawing in a three dimensional view, including any images applied to the drawing. The 3D view can be saved as a ‘scene’ (*.ksn) file, which can include objects, panoramas, environment maps, cameras, etc. The 3D facility is intended for use in illustrating the construction of cases, trays, point of sale items etc, and to aid in sales presentations. The 3D view is entered using one of the two following ways :• choose the Draw->Fold Box menu item. • open an existing scene file (.ksn) using the File->Open command

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-79

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

15.1

Fold Box…

Command

Fold Box…

Menu

Draw > Fold Box…

Toolbar Button:

Standard Toolbar

The Fold Box… command allows you to create a 3D view of a drawing. To achieve this, the individual panels of the design must be identified. Once a 3D view is created, the object can then be folded as required. Load the required drawing, and select the Draw->Fold Box… command. The Folding Options dialog is now displayed. An explanation of the settings available for the Folding Options dialog is explained in the next section. Once the settings are correct, click on OK to close the dialog. If you have already identified the base panel using the Identify Base Panel command, KASEMAKE will now launch the 3D view without any further interaction being required so you can advance to the next section entitled “Folding Options”. If you have not done so previously, you will now be required to identify the panels making up each component of your design. You only need to identify the base panel as KASEMAKE will automatically identify any further connected panels. You will be prompted to identify a base panel for each component of the design. Move the cursor within the required panel and click the left mouse button to select it. KASEMAKE will now automatically identify any further connected panels within the component, highlighting each panel as it is identified. Repeat for any other components of your design. KASEMAKE provides context menus to assist with the creation of the 3D view. Click with the right hand mouse button to display the menu. Two commands are available as follows :-

Reset Choose this command if you make a mistake whilst identifying a panel. It will allow you to reidentify each component.

Create 3D View Choose this option when all panels are correctly identified to create the 3D view. The 2D copy of your design will now be replaced and a 3D view displayed with a different set of menus and tool bars to the 2D version.

Release 9.5 Page 4-80

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE

15.2

Folding Options The Folding Options dialog provides the following settings:-

15.2.1

Selection 15.2.1.1

Tolerance

When tracing panel outlines this is the tolerance used to determine whether two elements are the same or not. Set using the arrows or type directly. 15.2.1.2

Identification of Panels

There are two methods available for identifying panels:•Method 1 - the original method •Method 2 - this method provides better use of the tolerance in the handling of minor errors in panels, resulting in more panels which can be folded. Dangling nodes are also handled. However, the improved handling of small errors does not guarantee that a design is problem free. Use of the Check Integrity command is still recommended for identifying any potential problems in a design. Please refer to “Check Integrity” on page 8-81

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-81

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE 15.2.2

15.2.3

Arc Splitting Requirements The 3D view converts arcs into short line segments, and this setting determines the accuracy of the conversion. Normally this can be set to 'fine' in order to get the best result. Click on the required option to set it. Crease Grounds 15.2.3.1 Number of Grounds This should be set to the number of grounds to be considered when defining creases to fold your design. Some designs have standard crease, cut/crease, perforation etc. The maximum allowed is 5.

15.2.3.2 Crease Grounds One or more drop down boxes will be displayed depending upon the number of grounds that you specified in the previous option. Define the ground for each crease in the design by clicking on the arrow and moving the cursor to the appropriate ground. Click on the ground to select it. Repeat for each crease ground used by your design.

15.2.4

Artwork 15.2.4.1 Quality This setting specifies the size of the textures used to apply artwork to your object in the 3D window. This setting is provided solely to enable KASEMAKE to make best use of a variety of graphics cards having varying amounts of memory. If you have a lower specification computer with, for example, a 4MB graphics card, you will only be able to use the lower settings. If however, you have a 32MB graphics card or better you will be able to use any setting without experiencing performance problems. Note: This setting is independent of the artwork you have actually drawn in

your 2D drawing. Larger images are scaled down to the setting you specify, smaller ones are scaled up. This setting is always in pixels. If you have a multipart design e.g. point of sale, this setting applies across the whole drawing, not just to individual parts. To work out how much video memory you will need, take the following as a rough guide:

•128 x 128

- requires 64K video memory

•256 x 256 - requires 256K video memory •512 x 512 - requires 1MB video memory •1024 x 1024 - requires 4MB video memory •2048 x 2048 - requires 8MB video memory In fact, two bitmaps are used: one on the inside of your drawing, the other on the outside. So you can see that you will need 16MB straight away in order to use the highest setting, without an image in the background, or textured floor, or more advanced requirements for textures. If you are working on a lower specification computer, you might want to choose a lower artwork quality initially and only change this when you are ready to print or export your finished 3D scene.

15.2.5

Default Artwork Colours... These settings specify the colours to apply to your 3D model in the absense of artwork. If only parts of your drawing contain artwork, the other areas are filled with these colours. You can add artwork both inside and outside your drawing. The settings can be changed after the 3D view is

Release 9.5 Page 4-82

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE created. Additionally, you can still add artwork while working in 3D.

Outside Colour To define the colour to use for the outside of your design, click on the arrow next to the current colour. A colour dialog is now displayed as follows:-

You can now define the colour in one of three ways:•Automatic - choose this option for KASEMAKE to determine the most approprtiate colour to use. •Colour - click on one of the predefined colours displayed to select it. •More colours - click on this to define your own colour. A choose colour dialog will now be displayed as follows:-

You can now define your own colour by specifying the amount of red, green and blue to use between. Set themto a value between 0 and 255. You can also define the hue, and a percentage for the saturation and luminosity values. Once you have the required colour click on OK to select it.

Inside Colour The inside colour can also be determined. Set it as for the Outside Colour.

15.2.6

Material Colours (blended with artwork) These are more advanced settings, you may never need to change. They allow you to specify additional colours which are blended with your artwork. You ordinarly leave the inside and outside white, and the edge brown, for example. These colours are combined with your artwork

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-83

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE while your 3D model is rendered: To give your whole carton or point of sale a red tint you can change the outside material colour to red. Set all three value as you did the default artwork settings. See “Outside Colour” on page 83.

15.2.7

Thickness You can specify the thickness of material. Folding is applied according to thickess: i.e. about the notional centre of the material which is determined according to the inner and outer thicknesses. This can be changed later.

Wall Type Click on the drop down arrow to display the available options. Move the cursor over the required setting and click on it to select it. Choose from the following options:•No Thickness - thickness will not be considered •Single Wall - one thickness value will be required •Double Wall - two thickness values will be required

Thickness For Single Wall and Double Wall you must specify the thicknesses. Use the arrows to scroll to a suitable value, or type the value directly.

15.2.8

Explode Cut&Crease This option will explode cut & crease elements in the current design which improves the panel identification process. In most cases this option should be set.

15.2.9

3D Driver This option is an advanced user command allowing you to configure your display and the display driver used by 3D. It can also be accessed through Windows Control Panel command. Activating this option produces the Kasemake Options dialog. This is split into two sections labelled Image Compression Options and Display Driver Options. Each set of options are fully explained for the New command in the Files chapter. See “Image Compression Options” on page 2-2 or refer to “Display Driver Options” on page 2-2 for a full explanation.

15.3

Folding Requirements There are several common problems in drawings which cause the panel identification to fail:• gaps in lines/joins • dangling nodes

15.3.1

Gaps in Lines / Joins The lines making up each panel must form a closed path. Gaps in the lines may not be visible when viewing the whole drawing, it may be necessary to zoom into the suspected area. Figure 1.1 shows a zoomed view of a crease not connected to the cut line. You should use the Intersect command (Draw->Build->Intersect) to intersect the two lines.

Release 9.5 Page 4-84

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE

Figure 1.1 15.3.2

.Dangling Nodes Dangling nodes (or dead ends) will also mean the panel does not form a closed path. Figure 1.2 shows a zoomed view of a dangling node that will cause the panel identification to fail. You should use the Intersect command (Draw->Build->Intersect) to intersect the cut lines correctly.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-85

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

Figure 1.2

15.4

3D View The 3D view is displayed in a similar way to the 2D view, but uses a different set of menus as it has commands applicable to 3D drawings. Toolbars will also vary. The drawing area of the 3D view displays the design in a blue 3D pane in full 3D. Unlike for a 2D design, there are five views for each scene displayed in the drawing area. They are overlayed in a tabbed format, simply click on a tab to display the corresponding view:• Perspective - this is the normal, 3D view used to print and view a scene • Front ) • Top )--- three orthogonal views which are useful for moving and aligning objects • Side ) • Folding - always shows the scene flat in order to make panel selection easier. Even where a box or point of sale has already been folded it will be displayed flat in this view.

Moving the scene is done with the right mouse button; object selection and object manipulation is done with the left mouse button. Any changes made to toolbars whilst using the 3D view, e.g. switching on all of the 3D toolbars, will be remembered when you return to the 2D view.

Release 9.5 Page 4-86

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE

15.4.1

Panes It is possible to have more than one pane or window for displaying / manipulating a scene. The Cameras menu provides alternative layouts for up to four concurrent panes. If you choose 'horizontal split - 5' for instance, you can have a perspective view in the large pane,then front, top, and side views in the other three panes. You can resize each pane individually to get the screen layout exactly how you want it. All of the panes update at the same time. If you select or move an object in any pane the view will update in all panes.

15.4.2

Moving About You can imagine each pane to be a seperate viewpoint or camera, which you can move to look at a particular detail of your drawing independently. You can move the viewpoint using a combination of the mouse and keyboard. All movement of the camera is done with the right mouse button. The way you manipulate a scene differs according to the view. Before trying any manipulation, make sure nothing is selected by clicking with the left mouse button in a blank area of the view to deselect any highlighted objects. Now place KASEMAKE in to 'examine' mode using Edit>Scene Mode->Examine from the Edit menu'.

15.4.2.1 Perspective View Rotating The View To rotate the current viewpoint, hold down the right mouse button, drag the cursor to rotate, then release. The cursor changes while you are rotating the view. The view is updated to reflect the camera movement.

Moving The View To move the current viewpoint, hold down the shift key and the right mouse button. The cursor changes to a move cursor and you can now move the view. Release the mouse button for the view to stay at its new position.

Zooming In/Out To zoom the current viewpoint, hold down the control key and the right mouse button. The cursor changes to a zoom cursor. Drag the cursor to zoom the view. Dragging up the screen zooms in, dragging down the screen zooms out.

15.4.2.2 Orthogonal Views (Front, Top, Side, Folding) Rotating The View By design, you cannot rotate orthogonal views.

Moving The View To move the current viewpoint, hold down the right mouse button. The cursor changes to a move cursor. Drag the cursor to move the view. Release the mouse button to permanently update the view.

Zooming In/Out To zoom the current viewpoint, hold the control key and the right mouse button simultaneously. The cursor changes to a zoom cursor. Move the cursor to zoom the view. Dragging up the screen zooms in, dragging down the screen zooms out. Release the mouse button to keep the zoomed view.

15.5

Cameras Cameras can be added to or removed from a scene. They can be looked through or moved around to change the current view. The camera mechanism is entirely general: you can look through the same camera in more than one pane; you can select the camera and manipulate it while looking through the camera in another pane.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-87

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE There are two ways to move any camera. While you are looking through the camera by moving, zooming, rotating etc. Alternatively, while you are not looking through the camera you can select the camera and move it as you would any other object. The real benefits of cameras will only become apparent when you start working with animation (more about animation later.) You will notice that scene movement operates slightly differently while looking through a camera. This is because the camera viewpoint is initially in 'fly' mode. For further details see next section.

15.6

Navigation Modes There are various navigation modes which reflect how the scene moves:• Examine • Fly • Walk • Static

Normally you will work in the default examine mode. However, when you create a new camera, looking through that camera puts you in to fly mode.

15.7

Selecting and Moving Objects The left mouse button is used for selection in two ways:• Click with the left mouse button to select the foremost object at that point • Press the left mouse button at a point drag out a selection rectangle, then release the button. Every object which overlaps the selection rectangle (regardless of whether it is obscured by other objects) is selected. It can be quite tricky to select objects which are end-on in orthogonal views and have no thickness. To make life easier, it is suggested that you ordinarily use thickness and use zooming to make thin, end-on objects bigger.) You can change the thickness of an object at any point by selecting the object then modifying the wall type and thickness properties. To view the properties of an object, make sure the properties window is displayed using View->Properties.

15.7.1

Multiple Selection If you hold down the shift key while selecting, subsequent objects will be added to the selection, so that you can choose more than one object at a time.

15.7.2

Movement Axes Notionally, there are always three axes, located at the origin which never move. X is to the right, Z is into the screen and Y is up. Upon selecting an object you will see a grid appear. The purpose of this grid (particularly in a perspective view) is to show the two (or one) axes through which an object will move when you drag it. There is no intuitive way to move an object through three axes simultaneously using one mouse, hence you are limited to at most two axes at any time. You can also use the arrow keys to move a selected object about the currently selected plane. Depending on your current viewpoint there are up to six options available to you to specify movement. Refer to the Edit->Plane / Axis sub-menu for full details.

15.8

Folding Folding an object is done entirely within the 3D window. Fold angles are absolute: it is very easy

Release 9.5 Page 4-88

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Folding KASEMAKE to say that a given panel should be folded to a given angle (indeed when you come to the section on animation, it is very easy to also say at which point in time.) Various mechanisms for folding exist: you can type in an absolute angle, press a button to fold to a given angle, or drag a slider to change a fold angle dynamically. If you select more than one panel at a time, each panel is folded at the same time. Before starting a discussion on the mechanics of performing folds, it is necessary for you to have some understanding of the way the system models folding: Each component of your drawing has a notional base panel (which will probably lie on the ground) - which is the panel you clicked on to select the component while entering the 3D. This panel has various panels attached to it, which the system deems to be 'children' of the base panel. It you select any of these 'child' panels and perform a fold then the crease you are actually folding is the crease between the 'child' panel and the base, 'parent', panel. Going further, the 'child' panel may have 'children' of its own. When you select any panel, folding is always between the 'panel' and the panels 'parent'. While the description is particularly abstruse, you will find this mechanism is quite straightforward when you try it. Folding commands are available through the 3D Folding toolbar or the Fold menu which are detailed in the Fold Commands section on page 18-1. It is also possible to specify one or more fold angles and corresponding start and end frames for completing each fold.. You can specify fold information in one of two ways. You can use the Draw->Change Folding... command. Please see “Change Folding...” on page 91. Alternatively, , you can enter fold information by typing directly in the properties window. First select a line or lines, then display the properties window View->Properties. Type one or more angles separated by commas into the Fold Angle field. Complete the corresponding Start Frame and End Frame values in the same way. Folding Slider There is also a slider which permits values in the range 0 to 359 degrees. Simply drag the slider to set the fold angle of any selected panels.

15.9

Object Properties Every object in a 3D scene has properties which you can examine by selecting the object then looking in the properties window. If this window is not open, open it by choosing View->Properties. To change a property simply edit the property in the properties window. In particular, you can modify the material and opacity of an object. If you select more than one object, the window will display all properties which are common between the objects. However, since the property window can only show one value, if the value is ambiguous (i.e. if the objects have different values for a particular property) then the property will be blank. If you modify a property with more than one object selected, then the property will be changed for all objects.

15.10

Notes You can annotate a scene by adding notes to it. The notes are saved along with your scene, so that you can discuss the scene with a colleague etc. at various stages of generating your finished presentation. The Notes window is displayed using the View->Notes command. The Notes window is available for both a 3D and a 2D drawing so that you can have threaded discussions. You can also

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-89

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE attach notes to objects within the scene which are visible within the scene.

15.11

Worked Example of Folding Fefco Style 0422 On your system you will have an 0422.CMF, or parameterised FEFCO 0422 tray. Select Parametrics->Run Select file Fefco\0422.Cmf On screen you will now have the generic 0422 complete with dimensions. You are now ready to begin the folding process. Select Fold Box... from the Draw menu and set the values in the dialog box to be as shown:-

We have set the colours to correspond with those in the original. Now select OK. Place the cursor in the middle of the tray base and press the left mouse button. The crease lines surrounding this panel will now highlight. All the remaining panels will also highlight to show that each panel has been identified. To begin the fold process, click the right mouse button within the drawing area and select Create 3D view from the resulting popup.

Release 9.5 Page 4-90

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Identify Base Panel KASEMAKE Now the screen changes to show the 3D menus and view. The perspective view of the box is displayed by default. The design can be folded and manipulated using the 3D View commands. Try rotating by different angles in different axes.

16

Identify Base Panel

Command

Identify Base Panel

Menu

Draw > Identify Base Panel

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Identify Base Panel command provides a means of identifying the base panel needed when a design is folded. This helps to automate the folding process. Activate the command. Identify the base panel by marking a point within the required panel, close to one of its crease lines, using any of the available drawing modes. The Identify Base Panel command can also be recorded to a parametric command file to help with subsequent folding. Note:

17

Base panel markers are only displayed when this command is activated.

Change Folding... Command

Change Folding...

Menu

Draw > Change Folding...

Shortcuts

Edit Toolbar

Toolbar Button

The Change Folding... command allows you to specify folding parameters which will be applied to a particular crease or set of creases when a design is folded and animated in 3D. The advantage of adding these folding parameters to the 2D design is that subsequent alterations can be made to the design without the need to redefine the folding information when the design is folded and the 3D design generated. The folding parameters can be viewed and changed through the element properties window by first selecting the crease line. See “Element Properties” on page 10-20. The Change Folding... command can also be included in parametric designs allowing variables to be used, especially useful for specifying a fold angle. Each time the parametric is run the current value of the variable associated with the fold angle will be used to determine the folding information. Before using the Change Folding... command, you must first select the crease lines that you wish the new fold parameters to apply to. Use one of the standard selection methods to identify the required crease line(s). Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details on selecting elements. Activating this command produces the folding parameters dialog...

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-91

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

Folding Angle This is the angle you wish the selected crease line(s) to fold to. Type the required angle directly or use the arrows to scroll to the correct value. Folding Start This determines which frame within the animation to start to apply the fold angle. Type a suitable value or use the arrows to scroll. Folding End This determines by which frame the given fold angle should be fully applied, within the animation. Type a suitable value or use the arrows to scroll. Settings... This option displays the Folding Animation dialog allowing you to change the default number of frames to leave between the start and end of the animation. Type a suitable value to use for the number of frames to skip, or use the arrows to scroll.

For either the Folding Parameters or Folding Animation dialog, set the parameters as required then click OK to save these changes. Click on Cancel to leave the folding parameters unchanged.

18

Extrude

Command

Extrude

Menu

Draw > Extrude

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Extruding is the process of transforming the cross section of an object into a solid 3D object, by performing a parallel projection and joining all of the sides. The resulting solid object can be displayed and manipulated in the 3D View and exported as an object for insertion into other 3D scenes. You can define single or multiple profiles to be extruded into solid 3D objects.

Release 9.5 Page 4-92

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Extrude KASEMAKE Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the object(s). Use the cut ground to draw the perimeter of each cross section. An example is given below.

To extrude a shape, activate this command. The Extrusion Options dialog now appears:Extrusion Distance This is the depth of the extruded shape. Scroll the existing value or type a new value directly. Colour Define the colour to use for the extruded shape. Click on the arrow to display the palette of predefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 83.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-93

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Click on OK to confirm the settings and continue. You will now be prompted to identify the first profile. Click near to an element which forms part of the profile. The profile will now be traced automatically. Each identified element is redrawn in the selection colour to illustrate the identified profile. You will now be prompted (EXTRUDE) RB options to proceed. There are now several alternative ways to proceed, some of which involve the commands available through the right hand mouse button. To access these commands, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the drawing area to display a pop up menu. Proceed in one of the following ways :•If you wish to identify further profiles using the current options, simply mark a point to identify the next profile. Repeat until all the required profiles have been identified. •If you wish to identify further profiles, with different settings, click the right hand mouse button to reveal the pop up menu and choose Options. The Extrusion Options dialog will now be displayed again. Set the alternative options and identify the next profile. Repeat until all the required profiles have been identified. •If a profile is identified incorrectly, you can use Reset from the right hand pop up menu to deselect the incorrect profile and allow you to identify a new one. Finally, choose Create 3D View from the right hand pop up menu, to display the resulting solid object(s). The 3D View window is now displayed, showing the extruded object(s).

Release 9.5 Page 4-94

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Extrude KASEMAKE For the given example, you should get a result like the image below.

Save the object so that you can re-import it later. Full 3D functionality is available for you to manipulate the extruded object as required.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-95

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

19

Extrude Multi

Command

Extrude Multi

Menu

Draw > Extrude Multi...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command follows the same principles as the Extrude command but allows you to define multiple cross sections to be incorporated into the final solid 3D object. The depth of each section of the extruded shape is determined by marking positions along a vertical line to determine where each cross section starts. Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the objects. Use the cut ground to draw the perimeter of each cross section. Also draw the vertical line from which to identify the positioning and extruded depth of each cross section. To extrude multiple shapes, activate this command. The Extrusion Options dialog now appears:Extrusion Distance This is the depth of the extruded shape and is determined by the combination of individually extruded cross sections so cannot be set here. Colour Define the colour to use for the extruded shape. Click on the arrow to display the palette of predefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 83. Click on OK to confirm the settings and continue. You will now be prompted to Mark Cross-section Position on line. This is the point from where the next cross section will be extruded. Mark the position using any of the available drawing modes. You are now asked to Identify Cross-section. Click near to an element which forms part of the cross section. The cross section will now be traced automatically. Each identified element is redrawn in the selection colour to illustrate the identified profile. Repeat the above steps of marking a position and marking a cross section until all the required cross sections have been identified. Next, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the drawing area to display a pop up menu of available options. If a profile has been identified incorrectly, you can use Reset to deselect the incorrect profile and allow you to identify a new one. If the profile is correct, choose Create 3D View to display the resulting solid object. The 3D View window is now displayed, showing the extruded object.

20

Lathe

Command

Lathe

Menu

Draw > Lathe

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Lathing is the process of transforming one half of a 2D cross section into a solid 3D object by turning (in the woodwork sense) around an axis.

Release 9.5 Page 4-96

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lathe KASEMAKE The resulting solid object can then be displayed and manipulated in the 3D View and exported as an object for insertion into other 3D scenes. Multiple cross sections can also be identified to be turned around an axis, resulting in solid 3D objects. Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the objects. For each cross section, first draw a crease line to indicate the axis of revolution of the lathed shape. The crease does not have to be vertical. Then draw the cross section of the object, using a cut ground to either side of the crease line. An example is now shown:-.

Activate this command. The Lathe Options dialog now appears with the following options :-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-97

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE Rotation Angle This is the angle through which to turn the 2D cross section around its crease line to produce the 3D object. Scroll the existing value or type a new value directly. Subdivisions Set the number of subdivisions. This determines how many copies of the profile are to be made within the given rotation angle and controls how smooth the result is. Scroll the existing value or type a new value directly. Rotation Axis Ground Set the ground that the crease line which is to be used as the rotation axis, is drawn in. Click on the ground combo and select the ground from the drop down list. Outside Colour Define the colour to use for the 3D object. Click on the arrow to display the palette of predefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 83. Once the options are correct, click on OK to confirm the settings and continue or choose Cancel to abort the command. You will now be prompted to identify the first cross section. Click near to an element which forms part of the cross section. The cross section profile will now be traced automatically. Each identified element is redrawn in the selection colour to illustrate the identified profile. You will now be prompted (LATHE) RB options to proceed. There are now several alternative ways to proceed, some of which involve the commands available through the right hand mouse button. To access these commands, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the drawing area to display a pop up menu. Proceed in one of the following ways :•If you wish to identify further cross sections using the current options, simply mark a point to identify the next cross section. Repeat until all the required cross sections have been identified. •If you wish to identify further cross sections, with different settings, click the right hand mouse button to reveal the pop up menu and choose Options. The Lathe Options dialog will now be displayed again. Set the alternative options and identify the next cross section. Repeat until all the required cross sections have been identified. •If a cross section is identified incorrectly, you can use Reset from the right hand pop up menu to deselect the incorrect cross section and allow you to identify a new one. Finally, choose Create 3D View from the right hand pop up menu, to display the resulting solid object(s). The 3D View window is now displayed, showing the lathed object(s). You can duplicate the object, put textures on it, and use it like any folded object. For the example object, the result would look like the image below.

Release 9.5 Page 4-98

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Lathe KASEMAKE .

Save the object so that you can re-import it into a scene later. Full 3D functionality is available for you to manipulate the resulting object as required.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 4-99

4 - Draw Commands KASEMAKE

21

Fill Element

Command

Fill Element

Menu

Draw > Fill Element

Toolbar

Not available

The Fill Element command will fill a closed path. The closed path can be made up of arcs or lines. Before activating this command you need to select the elements to fill using any of the available selection methods. Choose Fill Element from the Draw menu. The Color dialog will now be displayed. You need to pick the colour to use to fill the selected boundary. Simply click on one of the available colours. Alternatively, you can customise your own colour. Click on Define Custom Colours>> to open up the customise section of the dialog. By varying the values for colour and hue, you can determine your own colour. Finally click on OK to select the chosen colour. KASEMAKE will now automatically fill the given shape with this colour. The elements which define the fill boundary will also be placed into a group.

22

Remove Fill From Element Command

Remove Fill From Element

Menu

Draw > Remove Fill From Element

Toolbar

Not available

The Remove Fill From Element command will remove any fill applied to a selected group. Before activating this command you need to select the group of filled elements using any of the available selection methods. Choose Remove Fill From Element from the Draw menu. KASEMAKE will now remove any filled colour from the selected group of elements.

Release 9.5 Page 4-100

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE incorporates Drawing Modes to make the task of designing items faster and more accurate. The Drawing Modes enhance the way the cursor performs on screen. The Drawing Modes are accessed in the following ways:• Through the Mode Menu located in the Menu Bar at the head of the screen. • From the keyboard by typing the shortcut characters which activate commands in the drop down menus • By selecting from the Mode Tool Bar which is brought to the screen by pressing the Mode button in the Standard Tool Bar or by selecting it from the list of Toolbars displayed for the View->Customise->Toolbars command. By using different Modes the placing of items on screen becomes easier and the result totally predictable. The items being placed may be a drawing element, line or arc, or a previously stored component like a lock or hand hold. To remove the Mode Tool Bar from the screen either click on the Mode button in the Main Tool Bar to deactivate it or switch it off using the Views->Customise->Toolbars command and clear the Mode option. Henceforth when discussing selecting a mode, we will assume that the selection is made from either the Mode Tool Bar or from the Mode drop down menu, entirely at the discretion of you, the user.

1

Freehand Drawing Mode Command

Freehand Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Freehand (Alt M F)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Keys

F9

Freehand is the name we have given to the most basic drawing mode. Items are drawn or placed with visual accuracy only. When using Freehand, where you place the cursor on screen is where you draw to or from. Freehand is the default drawing mode when KASEMAKE is first started up. It is also invoked as a default by many of the system commands as they are activated. E.g. when Erase is selected the system always selects Freehand. Similarly, when a New command is given the system will always select Freehand.

2

Lock To End Point Drawing Mode Command

Lock To End Point

Menu

Mode->Lock To End Point (Alt M L)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Keys

F10

Lock mode finds existing endpoints, therefore it is only available when there are items in the drawing list to which other items can be locked.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-1

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE All drawing items have endpoints, lines, arcs etc. Frequently, when designing an item you will want to draw from the end of an item already on the screen. To do this with ease and complete accuracy Lock Mode should be engaged. Lock will lock to the nearest end point on the screen. When using it you should ensure that no other point is closer to the cursor on screen than the one to which you want to draw. To help you to locate the point correctly a snap cursor is displayed which moves to the nearest end point to the cursor as the cursor moves. As an example of the use of Lock mode we will create a flap for a box by drawing three cut lines. We now want to attach a crease line to the ends of two of the cut lines already drawn. In both of the following examples the outline of the flap is already drawn. In the first example, the cursor is placed at points A and B and a line is drawn in Freehand. In the second example the cursor is placed in exactly the same place but the line is now drawn with Lock engaged. In the first example the line is left suspended in mid air.

In the second, Lock has overridden the cursor position and found points P1 and P4 and adopted these as the start and end points of the line.

2.1

Lock Drawing Mode in a Command File If Lock is used for drawing when a Command File is set to Record then not only will the item adopt the same position as the item it is locked to it will also adopt the Parametric Point generated within the Command File. In the preceding examples, the last line would be defined Parametrically as being drawn between newly defined points P5 and P6. In the second example, because Lock was used the line would be defined as being drawn between existing points P1 and P4.

Release 9.5 Page 5-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode KASEMAKE As well as simply drawing with Lock, files can be loaded with Lock mode overriding for accuracy of positioning. Similarly, Command Files can be placed using Call and Entity with Lock mode. Lock in a Command File is only available when there are items in the drawing list to which other items can be Locked.

3

Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode Command

Snap To Midpoint

Menu

Mode->Snap To Midpoint (Alt M M)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Keys

F12

Snap To Midpoint is a drawing mode used to locate a point at the midpoint of an existing element. It is engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu or from the Snap To Midpoint button within the Modes Tool Bar. If you are drawing between two lines and use Snap To Midpoint the procedure is as follows: Select Line and engage Snap To Midpoint. A snap cursor appears to help you to locate the correct point. This moves to the nearest mid point to the cursor as the cursor moves. Move the cursor near to the first line from which you want to draw and mark a point by pressing the left mouse button. As you move the cursor away from the marked line the line that you are currently creating will have its start point adjusted to the midpoint of the chosen line and will be seen to grow. Now identify the endpoint of the new line by moving the cursor near to the line that you want to draw to and pressing the left mouse button. The new line will be drawn in the current ground colour with its end point adjusted to the midpoint of the chosen line. If you now Zoom In on either end point of the newly defined line, you will see that it lies exactly at the midpoint of the line which was “snapped to” and that there is no break between the lines. Snap To Midpoint should snap equally well to any drawing object on screen, be it line or arc etc.

4

Snap Along Drawing Mode Command

Snap Along

Menu

Mode->Snap Along (Alt M S)

Toolbar Button Mode Toolbar Keys

F11

Snap Along is a drawing mode used to locate a point anywhere along an existing element. It is engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu or from the Snap Along button incorporated in the Modes Tool Bar. To draw a line between two lines using Snap Along the procedure is as follows: Select Line and engage Snap Along. A snap cursor is displayed alongside the existing cursor . The snap cursor moves along the nearest element to the cursor, as the cursor is moved, to illustrate its snap points.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-3

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE Move the cursor to the point on the first line from which you want to draw and mark that point by pressing the left mouse button. The cursor position will be adjusted to the nearest point on the chosen line to provide the start point for the new line. As you move the cursor away from the marked line the line that you are currently creating will be seen to grow from the adjusted point. Move the cursor on screen to the second line to which you want to draw. Place the cursor close to the point on this line to which you want to draw and press the left mouse button. The new line will now appear on screen with its end point adjusted to the nearest point on the chosen line to the given cursor position. If you now Zoom In to either of the new lines end points, you will see that they join perfectly to the chosen lines, there is no break between them. Snap Along should snap equally well to any drawing object on screen, be it line or arc etc.

5

Snap To Grid Drawing Mode Command

Snap To Grid

Menu

Mode->Snap To Grid (Alt M G)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Within the KASEMAKE system, on screen construction can be assisted by the use of Grids, i.e. rectangular patterns of lines and dots. Snap to Grid can only be engaged when a grid is defined and on display. When Snap to Grid is invoked all other drawing modes are overridden and you can only draw to and from the on screen grid points or grid intersections. A snap cursor is displayed alongside the drawing cursor to illustrate the nearest grid point available to draw to.

6

Snap To Arc Centre Drawing Mode Command

Snap To Arc Centre

Menu

Mode->Snap To Grid (Alt M A)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Snap to Arc Centre mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest arc centre point. On the KASEMAKE system arc centres are invisible but do exist as reference points in the drawing. To find them when drawing a line or other drawing element simply select Snap to Arc Centre as your drawing mode. A snap cursor will now appear to illustrate the nearest arc centre to the cursor at any given cursor position. Move the cursor to the approximate position of the arc centre and press the left mouse button. The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the arc centre and the line will begin to rubber band from the adjusted point.

Release 9.5 Page 5-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode KASEMAKE

7

Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode Command

Snap To Intersection

Menu

Mode->Snap To Intersection (Alt M I)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Snap to Intersection mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest intersection point. This can be the intersection of two lines, a line and an arc, or two arcs. A snap cursor is provided to illustrate the nearest intersection point to the cursor, as the cursor moves. Move the cursor to the approximate position of the required intersection and press the left mouse button. The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the nearest intersection point and the line will begin to rubber band from the adjusted point.

8

Snap Quad Point Drawing Mode Command

Snap Quad Point

Menu

Mode->Snap Quad Point (Alt M Q)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Snap Quad Point mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest arc quadrant point. i.e. the points corresponding to the 0, 90, 180 and 270 degree positions of a circle. Upon activating this mode, a snap cursor will appear to illustrate the nearest quad point to the cursor for any given cursor position. Move the cursor to the approximate position of the quad point required and press the left mouse button. The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the quad point.

9

Snap To Point Intersect Mode Command

Snap To Point Intersect

Menu

Mode->Snap To Point Intersect

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Keys Snap To Point Intersect mode allows the user to identify points where an existing element would meet another existing element if the first element was extended. Select the Snap To Point Intersect mode. In addition to the standard drawing cursor, a snap cursor is displayed. This automatically identifies the nearest intersection snap point to the current cursor position. Choose an appropriate snap point by moving the cursor near to the required intersection point and clicking with the left mouse button to choose it. The cursor position is now automatically adjusted to the intersection point and the current drawing element, command, etc., adopts this intersection point.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-5

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE

10

Snap To Projection Mode Command

Snap To Projection Mode

Menu

Mode->Snap To Projection

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Keys Snap To Projection mode enables you to identify points which are horizontally or vertically aligned with existing end points within the current design. Engage Snap To Projection mode. Move the cursor and several items will appear to assist in locating the required point.

Firstly all end points which are approximately horizontally or vertically aligned with the cursor position have a small circle drawn around them to identify them. Secondly a snap cursor is drawn to show the projected position of the cursor. This is also linked to the identified end points by one or more chained line(s) to show the actual alignment. Simply move the cursor to display the guides as shown and click to identify the projected point.

Release 9.5 Page 5-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Auto Snap Mode KASEMAKE

11

Auto Snap Mode Command

Auto Snap Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Auto Snap Drawing Mode

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Auto Snap mode allows the user to engage a chosen combination of snap modes simultaneously. Before Auto Snap Mode can be activated, you need to ensure that at least one Auto Snap Mode has been selected. Refer to “Auto Snap Properties...” on page 15 for a full explanation of defining Auto Snap mode. Engage the Auto Snap mode. A snap cursor will now appear in conjunction with the standard cursor. The snap cursor illustrates which snap points are available as the cursor moves around the drawing. The snap points available are dependent upon the Auto Snap Modes selected with the “Auto Snap Properties...” command, details of which are on page 15. To select a point, move the cursor near to it and click with the left mouse button. The cursor position is automatically adjusted to the nearest snap point and the current drawing element, command, etc., adopts the adjusted point.

12

Coordinate Drawing Mode Command

Coordinate Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Coordinate Drawing Mode(Alt M C)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Coordinate is a drawing mode used to locate a drawing item by specifying the exact coordinate to draw to. It is engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu or from the Modes Tool bar. All items stored in the KASEMAKE drawing list are stored as coordinates. Each coordinate has an X and a Y component. The coordinates are stored to an accuracy of 3 decimal places. At the centre of the computer’s world is the coordinate 0,0 (X=0, Y=0). This is illustrated on screen by Red Cross Hairs.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-7

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE

Above is a diagram which shows the KASEMAKE screen set to be 100 units across with the Coordinate (0, 0) at the centre of the screen. You can achieve this by starting a New drawing, maximising it and then selecting the Window command from the Views drop down menu. There are 3 radio buttons which allow the centre of the window to be defined in different ways. Select Centre Point and set the size of the window to be 100. Now select OK. You will now be prompted for the window centre. At this stage you should select Coordinate Mode. The Coordinates Dialog Bar now appears. If you have selected Coordinates from the Mode tool bar you will notice that Freehand Mode has also remained highlighted. This indicates that Coordinates and Freehand are totally interchangeable. If the cursor is in the Drawing area and you press the mouse button the item will be placed or drawn on screen at the position marked. However, if you place the cursor in the co-ordinate dialog bar and type in first the X, then the Y coordinates followed by OK the point will be entered at the given coordinate. To illustrate this try the following. With the window set as above: • Select the Line command and Coordinate Mode. The system prompts you to start the line. • Place the cursor in the coordinate dialog bar and set the coordinate to 0 for both X and Y. Now select OK.

Release 9.5 Page 5-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Relative 1 Drawing Mode KASEMAKE • The system now prompts you to end the line. Move the cursor, on screen, to the approximate position A on the diagram and press the left mouse button. A line is drawn from (0, 0) to the Freehand point A. Now repeat this exercise to the points B, C and D. Transpose the start and end Mode. Now try the same exercise but begin and end lines in coordinate Mode, starting at (0,0) and ending at (10,10). Coordinate Mode is most often used for placing items held on file at known co-ordinates in the computer’s world. Coordinate Mode can be used to draw to and from points that are off screen and is interchangeable with other drawing modes. You can start an item in Coords and end it in Lock to End Point mode etc.

13

Relative 1 Drawing Mode Command

Relative To Another Point

Menu

Mode->Relative 1 (Alt M 1)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar KASEMAKE has three relative coordinate drawing modes. The first of these is Relative 1. Using this command you can place the beginning or end of an element at a screen position relative to any other point already contained in the drawing and displayed on screen. The command is called either from the Mode drop down menu or from the Relative 1 button in the Mode Tool Bar. On selecting this command, the on screen cursor changes. Instead of being a simple cross hair cursor, the cross hairs are still present but the characters REF 1 are also displayed as a reminder that you are drawing in a relative mode. RELATIVE 1 SCREEN CURSOR REF 1

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-9

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE As Relative mode means exactly what it says, that you are going to work relative to another point on the drawing, the system is waiting for you to identify the point relative to which you want to begin. Having moved the cursor next to the point and pressed the left mouse button the Relative 1 dialog box is presented, as shown below.

At the head of the dialog box are 9 buttons, arranged like a compass. On each button is an arrow which indicates the approximate direction from the existing point on screen that you want to move in to place the relative point. • If you want to define a point as being simply Above, Below, Left or Right of another point then select the appropriate arrow and one edit field will be displayed beneath the buttons. This is where you type the distance at which the point will be placed. Choose the Up arrow and the field headed ABOVE B BY will be shown. Select the right arrow and the field RIGHT OF B BY is shown etc. The letter B is shown in the dialog to differentiate between the point being placed and the point being used as the reference. A is the new point and B is the reference point, the point already on the screen. • Now, simply enter the Relative distance followed by OK and the point will be positioned. • In the case of drawing a line, the system will then ask you to mark the end of the line. Using the Relative 1 cursor identify the point Relative to which you want the end to be placed, put the cursor next to it and press the right mouse button. Again the dialog box appears. Select the direction, fill in the distance and follow up with OK. You will now have a line on the screen, the ends of which were defined Relative to other points on the drawing. Relative will only engage when there are points in the drawing that can be drawn Relative to. A more complex relationship is where you want to place a new point approximately North East or South West of a point on the screen. This is achieved by telling the point that it is both right of and above another point or left and below etc.. When defining a point relative to another using two directions the system always defines the horizontal relationship first, Left of or Right of, and the vertical relationship second, Above or Below. • By selecting the diagonal arrow that most closely resembles the direction of travel then the two fields beneath will be headed accordingly, RIGHT OF B BY and ABOVE B BY etc. • Fill in the offsets then press OK. The point will be positioned accordingly.

Release 9.5 Page 5-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Relative 2 Drawing Mode KASEMAKE The simplest relationship is the ABS definition. This is an abbreviation for ABSOLUTE and means that the new point will take the same definition or position as the point which you are working relative to. If you wish to define more than one point relative to the given reference point, you can set the chained option, the dialog box will then remain displayed between each point definition as the original reference point will automatically be chosen.

13.1 Relative 1 In A Command File When the Relative 1 command is used as a command file is recorded, the relative definitions are incorporated directly into the command file. Each point drawn using relative will be described in the command file as being above, below, left of or right of another point already defined in the file. Relative 1 can also accept the direct input of Variables from a Variable Table. When drawing, the point can be described as being left of another point by the distance L, or above another point by the distance W. To achieve this a variable table must be active at the time of drawing. When the command file which incorporates items drawn using Relative 1 with Variables is examined the point definitions can be seen to incorporate the Variable values:e.g. P4 is [left of P3 by L, above P3 by W]

14

Relative 2 Drawing Mode Command

Relative To 2 Other Points

Menu

Mode->Relative To 2 Other Points (Alt M 2)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar The Relative 2 mode is provided for drawing relative to two existing points. In other words, Relative 2 mode enables you to define point ‘A’, relative to two other points,’B’ and ‘C’. When drawing using Relative 2 mode you can position any drawing point, beginning or end of a line or arc etc., relative to two other points already in the drawing and currently displayed on the screen. The first relative point establishes the point’s horizontal position, or its X coordinate within the drawing area. The second relative point establishes the vertical position of the point, or its Y coordinate within the drawing area. In the following example we will use Relative 2 to draw the line from P3 to P4. • First we will assume that the first 3 points are correctly drawn and that we want to complete a rectangular flap by drawing a line to P4.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-11

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE We begin the line by selecting the Line command and engaging Lock To Endpoint mode. We use Lock To EndPoint to begin the line at P3. Now engage Relative 2 mode. The system will now allow you to mark the end point of the line in 2 steps. The first step is to identify reference point B which gives left to right positioning of the new point. The second step is to identify reference point C which gives up and down positioning of the new point. • First place the cursor near to the first reference point, P3 and press the left mouse button. Next place the cursor near to the second reference point P1 and press the left mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.

Within this dialog are 5 buttons each of which describe the positioning of point A relative to points B and C. In the chosen example, we want the new point P4 to be directly above P3 and directly right of P1. The first button on the dialog caters for this definition. Select it and the end of the line will appear in the required place. When designing, it is equally likely that you will wish to draw to a point that is relative to two others but not square to them. For example, if you want to work 5 mm above one point and 30 mm to the right of another, select the button from the dialog which most closely represents the intended direction. Once selected the corresponding edit fields will appear for you to enter the relative distances. • To define P4 in a different way, select point 3 and point 1 as the references but when the dialog appears, select the third direction button located on the top line. Both arrows point diag-

Release 9.5 Page 5-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Relative Endpoint KASEMAKE onally up and right. This means that you want point A to be right of B and above C. Apply the numbers in the example below and you will get the following result:-

As with Relative 1, Relative 2 will accept variables providing a variable file is open and a command file is currently recording. The relative definitions will be saved in the command file as part of the point definitions. e.g. P4 is [right of P3, above P1] P4 is [right of P3 by L, above P1 by W]

15

Relative Endpoint Command

Relative Endpoint Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Relative Endpoint

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Relative Endpoint is the third relative coordinate drawing mode. With this mode you identify an end point of a line to work relative to, then a distance along this line to move. Engage the Relative Endpoint drawing mode. The cursor changes to a reference cursor, labelled REFP. A snap cursor is also displayed to illustrate the nearest available endpoint to the cursor. First you need to identify the line whose end point you wish to work relative to. Ensure that the snap cursor is at the correct end of the required line before marking a point near to it. KASEMAKE will now draw the identified line in the selection colour to confirm your choice. The end point you are working relative to is also labelled, P. The Relative Point dialog is now displayed as shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-13

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE Set the distance to move along the line using the arrow keys to scroll the current value or typing a new value. A negative number can be specified to move the given distance away from the element. Click on OK to continue. The cursor will now move to the calculated point and this will be adopted as the current position.

16

Between 2 Points Command

Between 2 Points Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Between 2 Points Drawing Mode

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Between 2 Points mode allows the user to choose a point midway between any 2 points within the current design. Select the Between 2 Points mode. The standard cursor is displayed with the label BET2 to show this mode is engaged. In addition a snap cursor is displayed, as this mode automatically identifies the nearest End, Mid or Arc Centre snap point to the current cursor position. Choose the first snap point. Move the cursor near to the required point and click with the left mouse button. A marker is now drawn at the chosen snap point and it is labelled 1 to show that it is the first point. Now select a second snap point. Again, move the cursor near to the required snap point and click with the left mouse button to choose it. The cursor position is now automatically adjusted to the point midway between the two given snap points and the current drawing element, command, etc., adopts the calculated midpoint.

17

Snap To Construct Line Intersect Command

Snap To Construct Line Intersect Drawing Mode

Menu

Mode->Snap To Construct Line Intersect Drawing Mode

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar Snap To Construct Line Intersect mode allows the user to draw between intersections of construct lines. Select the Snap To Construct Line Intersect mode. In addition to the standard drawing cursor, a snap cursor is displayed. This automatically identifies the nearest construct line intersection snap point to the current cursor position. Choose an appropriate snap point by moving the cursor near to the required construct line intersection point and clicking with the left mouse button to choose it. The cursor position is now automatically adjusted to the construct line intersection point and the current drawing element, command, etc., adopts this intersection point.

Release 9.5 Page 5-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Orthogonal KASEMAKE

18

Orthogonal Command

Orthogonal

Menu

Mode->Orthogonal(Alt M O)

Toolbar Button:

Mode Toolbar

Orthogonal mode is used in conjunction with some of the drawing commands to produce orthogonal i.e. horizontal or vertical elements. If this mode is engaged, the cursor position will be adjusted as follows:• if the distance between the previous point and the cursor position is nearer to an horizontal line than a vertical line, the cursor position is adjusted to the same Y coordinate as the previous point resulting in an horizontal line • if the distance between the previous point and the cursor position is nearer to a vertical line than an horizontal line, the cursor position is adjusted to the same X coordinate as the previous point to give a vertical line Refer to individual command definitions to see if a command works in conjunction with Orthogonal mode. Examples are lines, polygons, angle arcs.

19

Joined Command

Joined

Menu

Mode->Joined(Alt M J)

Toolbar Button:

Mode Toolbar

Joined mode is used in conjunction with line commands. It enables you to build up a sequence of connected lines. When this mode is engaged, the system automatically adopts the end point of the previously defined line as the start point of the next line, so after defining the initial start point of the line sequence, only end points are required.

20

Auto Snap Properties... Command

Auto Snap Properties...

Menu

Mode->Auto Snap Properties...(Alt M O)

Toolbar Button:

Mode Toolbar

Auto Snap Properties... is used to define the modes which the Auto Snap mode utilises. See “Auto Snap Mode” on page 7. Activate this mode. The Auto Snap Modes dialog is now displayed as shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 5-15

5 - Drawing Modes KASEMAKE

The dialog contains two lists. On the left is a list of available modes which can be added to Auto Snap’s list of modes. On the right is a list of Selected modes, i.e. those modes which Auto Snap is currently using. To move between the lists, first click on the mode you wish to move. This will now be selected as confirmation. Now click on the appropriate button to move it. Choose the >> key to move from the Available list to the Selected list . Choose the Group

Toolbar Button: Edit Toolbar

The Group command as its name suggests, allows you to take a set of elements and make them into a group. The group will then be treated as a single element. Before activating this command, you should first identify the elements to group using one of the available selection methods. Activating this command converts any selected elements into a single group.

2

Ungroup

Command

Ungroup

Menu

Arrange > Ungroup

Toolbar Button: Edit Toolbar

The Ungroup command allows you to take a group and convert it back into individual elements. Before activating this command, you should first identify the group using one of the available selection methods. Activating this command converts the selected group into the individual elements which it is made up from.

3

Ungroup All

Command

Ungroup All

Menu

Arrange > UngroupAll

Toolbar Button: Not available

The ungroup all command allows you to ungroup all groups within the drawing, converting them back into individual elements. There is no need to use the Select command before you activate this command as the whole drawing is automatically converted.

4

Unclone

Command

Unclone

Menu

Arrange > Unclone

Toolbar Button: Edit Toolbar

The Unclone command allows you to take a clone and convert it back into a group.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 6-1

6 - Arrange Commands KASEMAKE Before activating this command, you should first identify the clone using one of the available selection methods. Activating this command converts the selected clone into the group which it was made up from.

5

Unclone All

Command

Unclone All

Menu

Arrange > Unclone All

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Unclone All command allows you to convert all clones within the drawing, back into the groups they were derived from. There is no need to use the Select command before you activate this command as the whole drawing is automatically converted.

6

Explode

Command

Explode

Menu

Arrange > Explode

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Arrange->Explode command allows you to take a complex element such as a bezier curve or truetype text and break it down into simpler elements i.e. individual lines or arcs. Where arcs are chosen, you can also control how smooth the resulting arcs are. For the majority of elements e.g. bezier curves, cubic splines, how they are exploded is determined by the options applied when they were created. Simply select the element, then activate this command. The chosen element will be exploded into lines or arcs as previously set. Please refer to “Curve Generation” on page 4-30 for details of how to set these options. Truetype Text Only For truetype text, you can determine whether to use lines or arcs through the Explode command. First select the truetype text element(s) using any of the select commands. Activate the Explode command. The following dialog is now displayed:-

Determine whether you want the selected element(s) to be exploded into lines or arcs by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

Release 9.5 Page 6-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Set Inside/Outside View KASEMAKE Where arcs are chosen, drag the slider to determine how smooth the resulting outline is. Finally click on OK. The selected truetype text elements will now be replaced by a representation of their outline.

7

Set Inside/Outside View Command

Inside / Outside View

Menu

Arrange->Inside / Outside View

Shortcuts

Status Bar

The Set Inside/Outside View command allows you to toggle the view of the design as you are looking at it. This command effectively resets the view setting of the current design. If the system is displaying the inside view of the current design i.e. Inside is displayed in the status bar, activating this command will toggle this value to Outside and the design will then be considered to be viewed from the outside. No change is made to the design itself. If the system is displaying the Outside view currently then activating this command will inform the system that you now wish to consider this view as the inside of the design. A shortcut to this command is now available through the appropriate indicator in the status bar. Simply double click on the indicator to confirm the change of view. See “Inside / Outside” on page 1-4.

8

Align Elements

Command

Align Elements

Menu

Arrange > Align Elements

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Align Elements command will attempt to align the selected elements at the requested edge(s) or centre coordinate. The edges of the last element selected are used to reposition the other selected elements, so it does not move. There is also an option for use with text only, to use the baseline of the text for alignment. Before activating this command, ensure that the elements are selected using any of the available selection methods. Ensure that the element you wish to align with is the final one selected.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 6-3

6 - Arrange Commands KASEMAKE Activate this command. The Align dialog is displayed as follows:-

This consists of a list of choices for alignment each with a corresponding check box to enable them to be switched on and off as required. In addition there is a preview area, labelled Effect which is used to illustrate the effect of enabling / disabling the individual alignment positions. The alignments affecting the horizontal positioning of the selected elements are displayed along the top of the effect area. Those corresponding to the vertical positioning of the selected elements are displayed down the left hand side of the effect area. Click in a check box to enable / disable the corresponding alignment. The effect area is updated each time you change one of the alignment settings to show the resulting effect. Once you have identified the alignments to apply, you can either click on Apply to accept the settings and reposition the elements accordingly, or close the dialog to abandon any changes made. Aligning Text To align text using its baseline, first set the Align to Bottom option by clicking in the corresponding check box. The Use Baseline of text option becomes accessible. Check its corresponding check box to choose this alignment method. To complete the alignment, proceed as above.

9

Align To Grid

Command

Align To Grid

Menu

Arrange > Align To Grid

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Align To Grid command will attempt to align any selected elements with the current grid. If no grid is set, this command will not be accessible. However, the grid does not have to be visible for this command to be used. Before activating this command you should ensure that you have selected the elements you wish to align enclosing them with a selection box using any of the available selection methods.

Release 9.5 Page 6-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Align To Angle KASEMAKE Activate this command. The bottom left corner of the selection box is adjusted to the nearest grid point. The selected elements are then adjusted relative to this corner point.

10

Align To Angle

Command

Align To Angle

Menu

Arrange > Align To Angle

Toolbar Button: Edit Toolbar

The Align To Angle command will attempt to align any selected elements at an angle specified by two points. Before activating this command you should ensure that you have selected the elements you wish to align enclosing them with a selection box using any of the available selection methods. Activate this command. You will be prompted for the first point on the selected elements. The drawing mode automatically changes to Snap to Endpoint to enable you to choose an endpoint of one of the selected elements. Click close to the endpoint you wish to use. This will be used to reposition the selected elements. Next you will be prompted to mark a second point on the selected elements. Again, you will be in Snap to Endpoint mode. Click close to the endpoint you wish to use. This point together with the first point will be used to align the selected elements. Now you are prompted to mark the first point on the target item. This point will identify the new position of the first point identified on the selected elements. The selected elements rubber band as you move the cursor to help you to determine the correct position. Again, Snap to Endpoint is automatically enabled. Choose the new position for the selected elements by clicking close to the required point. The selected elements will now move to this new position. The first point will now be fixed and the selected elements will be drawn rubber banded rotating about this point to enable you to determine the angle to align to. You are prompted to mark the second point on the target items. Mark a point which will be used to align the second point given on the selected items and will dictate the angle of the selected elements. Once the point is identified the elements are drawn in their original ground at the new position and angle.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 6-5

KASEMAKE

This page is intentionally blank

Release 9.5 Page 6-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

7 - Parametrics Commands 1

Run

Command

Run

Menu

Parametrics > Run

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar Keys

Ctrl + R

The Run command is used to open parametric command files or .CMF files. Activating this command displays the Run dialog box which is similar to the Open dialog box used for File->Open. • Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required command file directly into the filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box. • Next, set the parametric options as follows:• Show Points - Click on this check box if you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled • Auto Zoom - Click on this check box if you wish the parametric design to be zoomed to fit the drawing area once it has been run in • Interactive - Click on this check box if you wish to run the design interactively, allowing you to step through the command file one command at a time, making changes if required • Finally, click on Run to open the named parametric file and any associated variable file. One of two views will now be displayed:• The entire command file is shown, with its associated geometry generated using the current variable settings • One or more preview(s) of the chosen command file and a subset of variables associated with this command file is shown Where the preview and variables view is displayed, you can alter the given variables before running in the design. In addition to altering these variables, you are provided with commands to:• Save any changes to the variables • View the complete variable table with full set of associated commands • Cancel the command file by choosing Close. For full details of Save refer to Variables on page 7-10. To run in the command file from this preview screen, make any adjustments to the main variables as appropriate, then press Run to run the command file at the displayed settings. Any geometry associated with this command file will now be generated with the corresponding variable settings applied. In either case, a new window will automatically be opened to display the requested design, if this is the first time that this design has been run in.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-1

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE If you do not require this preview screen you should clear any prompts associated with the variables for this command files. Refer to Commands Available With The Variable Table - Show Prompts on page 7-12 for further details.

1.1

Running a Parametric Design Non-Interactively If you have left the interactive option in the Run dialog unset, the entire design will be run in automatically when you click on Run and no further user interaction is required. The variable table will be opened automatically, when the design is run in. You may now resize your design by altering variables within the variable table then choosing Run again to view the effect.

1.2

Running a Parametric Design Interactively If you have set the interactive option in the Run dialog, the design can be run in one command at a time under your control. Running in this mode allows you to edit the contents of the command file. After clicking on Run, a new window will be opened ready to display the design and the interactive dialog will appear. The interactive dialog consists of a scrollable viewing area, where the contents of the parametric command file are displayed and a row of buttons giving access to the interactive commands which can be applied to the command file. When the interactive dialog is opened the first command in the command file is processed and displayed at the top of the viewing area. This is the current command. The results of running this command are displayed in the selection colour where appropriate, indicating that this is the command currently being processed. If the option to show labels has been set, any labels relating to the current command are also displayed in the selection colour. The dialog can be moved and resized as per any window to allow more of the command file to be displayed. You can scroll forwards or backwards through the command file to view the command definitions. However, you cannot scroll backwards past the current command to view any commands which are defined earlier in the command file. The commands can be edited directly. Click on the row of text to be changed. A box will appear to show that this is now the active row. Click again to display the text cursor. You can now use the arrow keys to move about the text string retyping or deleting characters as required. Alternatively, you can click on the text string and holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor to select the text to be changed. On releasing the mouse button, the selected text can be replaced by typing the new text. You can also double click within the text string to display a scrolling list of variables available which can be entered into the text string directly or by double clicking on the name of the variable within the scrolling list. The interactive commands can be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button. Their function will now be described:-

Release 9.5 Page 7-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Run KASEMAKE 1.2.1

Redo The redo command will rerun the current command i.e. the first command displayed in the interactive window. This is useful when you have made an alteration to the current command as it allows you to view the effect of the change. Redo can be used as many times as required to get the desired result. The resulting elements and labels where appropriate, will always be shown in the selection colour, indicating that the command is still being worked on.

1.2.2

Prev Prev is used to reverse the effect of the last command removing any resulting elements and labels. The previous command in the file is displayed, if any, and any resulting elements and labels for this command are displayed in the selection colour to indicate that this is now the current command.

1.2.3

Next Next is used to finalise the current command by processing it for the last time and displaying the resulting elements and labels in their final colour to show that the command has been completed. Next will then run in the next command in the file, if any, displaying its resulting elements and labels in the selection colour to indicate that this is the new current command.

1.2.4

Last Last executes all the commands in the command file from the current position up to the last command., adding any resulting elements and labels as they are processed. The Last command then executes the last command, displaying its resulting elements and labels in the selection colour to indicate that this is the new current command.

1.2.5

Def Point Def Point allows you to remove a point definition where a new definition is required. The point definition comprises the string between square brackets. Def Point is only accessible when the active row of the command file contains a point definition. First, click on the row containing the incorrect point definition. A box will appear around the row to show that it is now the active row. Click on Def Point. The point definition will be removed from between the square brackets. Click between the brackets to get the text cursor. Now type the new point definition. Finally, use Redo to view the effect of the new definition. If you remove a point definition in error, use Next or Fast to skip over the current command. The point definition will be restored to its former value.

1.2.6

Fast The Fast command terminates interaction between the user and the command file. The remaining commands in the command file are processed non-interactively, starting with the current command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-3

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE 1.2.7

Delete The Delete command removes the current command from the command file. If the current command contains point definitions, these can not be removed completely since subsequent geometry may depend upon these points. Instead, one point definition command for each point definition contained in the deleted command, is inserted into the command file in its place.

1.2.8

Reverse The Reverse command applies to lines only and allows you to swap the start and end definitions for the line. It works as a toggle, so selecting Reverse twice reverts to the original definitions.

2

Run Insert...

Command

Run Insert...

Menu

Parametrics > Run Insert...

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Run Insert... command allows one or more parametric command files or .CMF files to be inserted into the current design. The geometry resulting from each inserted parametric file remains live and can be resized independently. Multiple versions of the same parametric file can be inserted. Activating this command displays the Run dialog box as used by the Parametrics->Run command but it does not have any options available. First set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required command file directly into the filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box. Finally, click on Run to close the dialog and accept the given name. You will now be prompted to identify an origin for the command file. This will be the first point in the command file from which all the geometry will be generated. Specify a suitable origin using any of the available drawing modes. The named parametric file will now be executed a command at a time and any associated variable file will be opened. The resulting geometry is generated using the current variable settings and placed into a single group. You may now resize your design by first selecting the group containing the resulting geometry then altering variables with the Variables command which will automatically display the variable table associated with the selected parametric group. Finally, choose Run again to view the effect of any changes on the selected group.

3

Record

Command

Record

Menu

Parametrics > Record

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Record command allows you to create parametric command files or .CMF files.

Release 9.5 Page 7-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Record To Copy KASEMAKE Activate this command to begin recording a parametric design. The Record dialog box which is similar to the Save As dialog box used for File->Save As, now appears. Set the drive and directory to save the new design in. A list of existing command files will appear. Enter a name for the new command file in the filename entry field. Any description required for this design should be entered into the command file description field. Refer to “File Save As Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying the command file name using this dialog. If you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled as they are entered, click on the show points check box. If you are recording to an existing file and wish the existing part of the design to be zoomed to fit the drawing area once it has been run in, click on the auto zoom check box. Finally, click on Record to open a new window ready to create the new design. The window title will indicate that you are recording to the newly named file. If the command file already exists you will now be prompted to this effect. If you wish to append to the existing file click on Yes. The contents of the command file will then be run in and displayed in the new window. Click on No if you have given the filename in error. The Record dialog will then appear for you to re-enter the parametric file name to use. You may now create your parametric design by drawing in the normal way. Any points will be labelled as you draw, if you have selected this option. Commands which reflect the drawing sequence you are using to build up the design, will automatically be added to the newly opened command file. These commands will be built up using absolute world values. Any parametric relationship can be defined after the design is completed using the Parametrics->Set Point and Parametrics->Set Element commands. These commands automatically update existing commands in the current command file to reflect any parametric relationship set whilst using them. If you wish to define the parametric relationship between elements as you draw them, you may need to define some variables first using the Parametrics->Variables command. Refer to “Variables” on page 7-8 for further details. The variables can then be used directly in commands such as angle line, parallel etc. as you build up the design. Alternatively, you can draw using one of the relative modes in conjunction with any variables to define the parametric relationship between points as you build up the design. Other command files can be loaded as parts into the new command file using the Parametrics->Call and Parametrics->Entity command. Refer to “Call” on page 7-20 and “Entity” on page 7-21 for further details. Once you have completed your design, you should use the Parametrics->Close command to stop recording to the command file and save its contents. See “Close” on page 7-6.

4

Record To Copy

Command

Record To Copy

Menu

Parametrics > Record To Copy

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Record To Copy command allows you to take a copy of a parametric command file and open the copy ready for recording. Activate this command. The Open dialog box will appear. Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on the name of the command file that you wish to take a copy of. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the command file to copy directly into the

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-5

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear. Refer to “File Save As Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box. Click on Open to accept the filename. The Record dialog box which is similar to the Save As dialog box used for File->Save As, now appears. Set the drive and directory to save the copy to. A list of existing command files will appear. Enter a name for the new command file in the filename entry field. Any description required for this design should be entered into the command file description field. Refer to “File Save As Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying the command file name using this dialog. If you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled as they are entered, click on the show points check box. If you wish the copied command file to be zoomed to fit the drawing area once it has been run in, click on the auto zoom check box. Finally, click on Record to open a new window and run in the command file which you are taking a copy of. The window title will indicate that you are recording to the newly named file. If the command file already exists you will be prompted for another filename. The Record dialog will reappear for you to enter an alternative file name to use. Once the command file being copied has been run in, it will automatically zoom to fill the drawing area if you have set this option. You may now add to the parametric design by drawing in the normal way without affecting the original. Refer to “Record” on page 7-4 for further details of adding to the command file. Any points will be labelled as you draw, if you have selected this option. Once you have completed your design, you should use the Parametrics->Close command to stop recording to the new command file and to save its contents. See “Close” which follows.

5

Close

Command

Close

Menu

Parametrics > Close

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Close command is only accessible when you are recording a parametric command file. It allows you to complete the recording of a parametric design. Activating this command causes the KASEMAKE system to finish recording the current parametric command file and save its contents. Henceforth, any drawn elements will appear in the drawing only. The window title will change to show that the system is no longer recording the drawing sequence.

6

Variables

Command

Variables

Menu

Parametrics > Variables

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The variables command is only accessible when either a command file has been run in, in which case the variable table is opened simultaneously, or when a new command file is being recorded, in which case a new blank variable table is opened.

Release 9.5 Page 7-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Variables KASEMAKE Activating this command opens a new window which displays one of two views:• a partial view - consisting of the main variables associated with the current design, together with any preview(s) of the current command file. If multiple previews are available they are overlaid and displayed as tabbed pages typically comprising a standard 2D view, a 3D view and a fully dimensioned detail view. Only a limited set of command buttons is available when the partial variable table is on display. • the entire variable table with a complete set of command buttons The view which appears depends upon whether a prompt has been associated with any of the variables for the current design. Where this is the case the partial view will be displayed. If no prompts are associated the entire table will be displayed. In either case, the variables window can be moved and resized in the normal way. Also, the title of the window displays the filename of the current variable table. The variables are divided into up to five parts, variable, expression, value, database field and prompt. Only the prompt and value fields are displayed for the partial view. To access the entire variable table toggle the Show all variables command button. The view will then change showing all the existing variables and their definitions as follows:• variable - the name by which the variable will be accessed. It can contain any of the standard characters • expression - the formula to use to evaluate the variable’s value. Refer to “Defining Variable Expressions” on page 7-7 for an explanation of how to derive a valid expression • value - the variable’s value which is automatically calculated from the expression • database field – which field in the database to retrieve the variables value from where the command file is run from the database. Also, which field in the database to update where a command file is saved as a completed design and a border is associated with it • prompt – the prompt to display for the variable when the partial view is displayed. The partial view will only be displayed where one or more prompts has been defined • choices - alternative values which the variable can take. They are available when the partial view is used as a drop down so are only applicable to variables which have prompts defined. The variable and expression fields are editable. Click in the cell to be edited. If you click within the current text string, the text cursor will appear ready for you to insert and delete characters as required. If you click beyond the text string or in an empty cell a box will appear around the cell to show that it is the active cell, you can now type and the current cell contents will be removed and replaced with the new characters. Pressing enter after altering an expression field will cause the variable’s value to be recalculated and redisplayed as appropriate. The value field displays the variables current value, the result of evaluating its associated expression. A value which is highlighted in red, normally indicates an invalid expression. The Tab key can be used to move between fields, as can the arrow keys.

6.1

Defining Variable Expressions A variable expression can be one of the following:• a numerical value • a variable - which is already defined or which will subsequently be defined • a mathematical formula - comprising a combination of numbers or variables with mathematical operators and functions • a condition statement - comprising a condition part and two expression parts

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-7

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE 6.1.1

Defining Mathematical Formulae The formulae acceptable for variable expressions follow basic mathematical rules. Expressions are evaluated from left to right. Any expressions contained within brackets are evaluated first. Integer and real numbers and variables can be used within the formula. Operators available are:• ( ) - brackets to simplify expressions and give their contents highest precedence within the calculation • +,-,*,/ - the basic mathematical operators, where * and / have higher precedence than + and • MOD - gives the integer remainder resulting from dividing any two expressions • DIV - forces an integer division, truncating the result where necessary to give an integer result Functions available are:SIN - gives the SINE of any angle given in degrees COS - gives the COSINE of any angle given in degrees TAN - gives the TANGENT of any angle given in degrees ABS - ignores the sign of the given expression SQR - calculates the SQUARE of the given expression SQRT - calculates the SQUARE ROOT of the given expression TRUNC - truncates the given expression ignoring any decimal part ROUND - rounds up the given expression to the nearest integer where the decimal part is 0.5 or greater. Rounds down the given expression to the nearest integer where the decimal part is less than 0.5 • ARCSIN - gives the ARCSINE of the given value in degrees • ARCCOS - gives the ARCCOSINE of the given value in degrees • ARCTAN - gives the ARCTANGENT of the given value in degrees. • • • • • • • •

After brackets these functions are given highest precedence.

6.1.2

Condition Statements Condition statements are complex expressions consisting of a condition part and two expressions. They take the form:IF (condition part) THEN (expression1) ELSE (expression2) Only one of the expressions will be used to determine the variables final value. If the condition part evaluates to TRUE the first expression following THEN will be used. If the condition part evaluates to FALSE the second expression following ELSE will be used. The condition part should make use of comparison operators to combine expressions giving a TRUE or FALSE result. Available comparison operators are:• • • • •

Release 9.5 Page 7-8

< > = =

less than greater than equal to less than or equal to greater than or equal to

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Variables KASEMAKE •

not equal to

Example conditional expressions are:• (L < 100) Evaluates to TRUE if L is less than 100, otherwise evaluates to FALSE • (W >= (L/2))Evaluates to TRUE if W is greater than or equal to L/2, otherwise evaluates to FALSE • (D 3) Evaluates to TRUE if D is not equal to 3, otherwise evaluates to FALSE Expressions are evaluated from left to right as before, highest precedence first. Brackets should be used to increase precedence and ensure the correct result. Logical operators can be used to combine conditional expressions, where multiple conditions are required. The logical operators available are:• AND - both conditional expressions must evaluate to TRUE for the combined condition to evaluate to TRUE. If either or both conditional expressions evaluate to FALSE, the overall result will be FALSE • OR - If either or both conditional expressions evaluate to TRUE, the overall result will evaluate to TRUE. If both conditional expressions evaluate to FALSE the combined condition will evaluate to FALSE. Expressions are evaluated from left to right as before. The AND operator has higher precedence than the OR operator. Brackets can be used to alter precedence. Examples of combined condition statements are:• (L < 100) AND (W >= L/2) Evaluates to TRUE if both expressions evaluate to TRUE, otherwise evaluates to FALSE • (L >= 90) AND ((A = 3) OR (A = 5)) The OR expression will be evaluated first because of the brackets. The result will then be used in the AND expression to give the final value. Example condition statements would be :IF (A > 2) THEN W1 ELSE W2 IF ((L >= 90) AND ((A = 3) OR (A = 5))) THEN (W-A)/2 ELSE W/2

6.2

Commands Available With The Variable Table A row of buttons above the variable table display area provide access to the set of commands available for manipulation of the variable table. Their function will now be described.

6.2.1

Append Append allows you to add the contents of another variable table to the end of the current variable table. This is useful when you are working with similar parametric designs. Click on Append. The Open dialog will appear. Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available variable files will appear. Click on the name of the required file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required file directly into the filename entry field. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying a filename with this dialog.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-9

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Click on Open. The contents of the file will now be merged with the current variable table. If the file contains variables which are already defined in the current variable table, these variables will be ignored, leaving the current table intact. Any previously undefined variables will be added at the end of the current variable table.

6.2.2

Save This function allows you to save any changes made to the current variable table. The changes will be saved to the file whose name is displayed in the window title. Variable tables normally take the name of the design to which they apply, but use a .VAR extension. Click on Save. The contents of the variable table will be saved using the filename displayed in the window title.

6.2.3

Save As

This function allows you to save the contents of the variable table to a named file. This command is useful for making a copy of a variable table for use with a similar design. Alternatively, this command can be used as a way of renaming the variable table. Click on Save As. The file Save As dialog will now appear. Set the drive and directory to save the new variable table in. A list of existing variable table files will appear. Enter a name for the new variable table in the filename entry field. See also “File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for details of specifying a filename with this dialog. Finally, click on Save As to save the variable table. The window title will change to indicate that you are working with the newly created variable table.

6.2.4

Clear The Clear command allows you to remove all the variables from the current variable table. Click on Clear. You will now be required to confirm that you wish to remove all the variables. Click on Yes. The variables will be removed leaving a blank table. Click on No to leave the variable table unchanged.

6.2.5

Delete Field Delete Field removes the contents of the current field, either variable field or expression field. Click in the field to be deleted, to make it the current field. A box will appear around the field to show that it is now current. Click on Delete Field to remove its contents.

Release 9.5 Page 7-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Variables KASEMAKE 6.2.6

Delete Variable Delete Variable is similar to Delete Field, but will remove the current variable entry from the variable table, shuffling up any following entries where necessary. This command will not be accessible if no variable is current. First ensure that the variable to be deleted is the current one. Click in either the variable field or the expression field of the required variable, to make it the current variable entry. A box will appear around the field, or the text cursor will appear to show that it is now current. Click on Delete Variable to remove the entire variable and shuffle up any following entries.

6.2.7

Insert Variable This command allows you to insert a new variable entry into the current variable table. It uses the current variable to determine the correct insertion position, so may not be accessible if no variable is current. Before you can choose this command you need to set the current variable to where you wish to make the insertion. Click on the row where you wish to insert your new variable entry. You can click in either the variable or the expression field. A box will appear around the field where you click, or the text cursor will appear, indicating it is now the current variable. Click on Insert Variable. The current variable entry and any entries which follow it, will now be shuffled down to make room for the new variable. The text cursor will automatically be positioned in the variable field ready for you to type the new variables details.

6.2.8

Cut Cut will copy the contents of the current field, or any selected text to the clipboard, removing them from the variable table. The clipboard contents can subsequently be pasted back into the variable table if required. Click in the required field to make it current. Alternatively, click on the entry number in the left most column to select an entire variable entry. Clicking on the column headings will select the entire column. Once you have selected the items to cut, activate this command. The selected items will be removed from the variable table and placed in the Windows clipboard.

6.2.9

Copy Copy will copy the contents of the current field, or any selected text to the clipboard, as per Cut. However, copy does not remove the selected items from the variable table. The clipboard contents can subsequently be pasted back into the variable table if a further copy is required. This is useful for copying complicated expressions such as condition statements which are similar. Select the items to copy as per Cut above. Activate the Copy command. The selected items will be copied to the Windows clipboard.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-11

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE 6.2.10

Paste Paste will copy the contents of the clipboard to the current field. Click in the field where you wish the clipboard items to be pasted. A box will appear to confirm that this is the current field. Activate this command. The clipboard items will be copied to the current field.

6.2.11

Recalc The Recalc command forces all the variables in the table to be recalculated. This ensures that the values displayed in the value field are correct. Where forward references have been used, or lots of changes have been made, the value displayed may not have been updated to the final value. Click on Recalc. The value fields will now be updated to show their correct value.

6.2.12

Run

This command is a shortcut to the Parametrics->Run command. Activating this command causes the current parametric design to be regenerated using the latest variable values. The variable window is closed automatically, when this command is issued.

6.2.13

Run Zoom This command is similar to the Run command. However, the resulting parametric design will be zoomed to fill the drawing area after the geometry is regenerated.

6.2.14

Show Associated Database Fields This command toggles display of the database field column of the variable table. The database field is used to show which field in the database corresponds to this variable if any. When this parametric is run from any database record the settings for any associated variables will be retrieved from the database.

6.2.15

Show Prompts This command toggles the display of the prompts column for the variable table. Prompts are used to determine which variables, if any, appear in the partial view of the variable table. Where a prompt exists, this variable will appear in the partial view together with the current value of the corresponding variable. If you always want to view the entire variable table, ensure the prompts field is clear.

6.2.16

Show All Variables This command toggles display of the partial view of a variable table with the entire table. If prompts are associated with the variables for the current command file, a partial view of the variable table will always be displayed both when the command file is run and when the Variable command is issued. The Show All Variables command allows you to access the entire table where prompts have been associated with one or more variables.

Release 9.5 Page 7-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Variables KASEMAKE 6.2.17

Close This command closes the current variable table. On activating this command, if you have made changes to the variable table, but have not saved them, you will be prompted to this effect. Click on Yes to save the changes. Click on No to abandon any changes. The window displaying the variable table will close upon your response, or upon activating this command if their are no changes to save.

6.2.18

Print This command allows you to print the contents of the current variable table. On activating this command, the Print dialog appears showing the current printer details. You can now change the printer details and optionally print to file or direct to the printer. Click on OK to print the variable details. See “Print dialog box” on page 2-18 for further details.

6.2.19

Print Preview

This command allows you to preview the contents of the variable table as it will appear if printed. See also, “Print Preview” on page 2-19.

6.2.20

Choices This command toggles the display of the choices column for the variable table. Choices are alternative values which a variable can take but are only applicable to variables which have prompts defined. If there are any choices defined for a variable they appear in the partial view of the variable table as a drop down list for that variable. Simply select from the drop down list to substitute an alternative value before running the parameteric to see the effect of the alternative setting.

6.2.21

Comments A comment can be added to help to identify the variable. The comment is displayed like a tooltip when the cursor is moved over the variable name field to help to clarify its use. Click in the comments field for a particular variable and type a suitable comment for it. Toggle the display of the comments column with this command.

6.2.22

Trigonometry Calculator The trigonometry calculator is provided to help simplify the defining of variables which require trigonometric expressions. First click in a variables expression field for the command to become available. Click on the Trigonometry Calculator command button. The Trigonometry dialog will now be displayed as shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-13

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE

You can either enter an expression for one angle and one length or two lengths. Click on a check box corresponding to the angle / length you wish to specify. The expression field now becomes accessible. Type in a suitable expression or value for this angle / length. Repeat for the second expression. Once two expressions have been defined, click on Calculate. The remaining expression fields and all the value fields will now be automatically completed. You can now choose any of the expressions to enter into your variable table. Click on the Select button corresponding to the expression you wish to use. A Choose Field dialog is now displayed containing the expression and value for the chosen angle / length..

Click on Use Expr. if you wish to use the expression associated with this angle / length. Choose Use Result if you wish to use the value associated with the angle / length. In both cases, the dialog will close and the expression / value will be copied to the current variables expression field in the variable table. The value field is updated to display the variables current value, the result of evaluating its associated expression.

Release 9.5 Page 7-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Variables KASEMAKE

6.3

Additional Commands for Working With Different Materials The remaining commands provided by the variable table relate to defining alternative sets of values to allow for different materials. This removes the need for lots of condition statements to determine the correct values to use with each material. There are four steps to enable working with alternative values :-

1

Use the Add New Values command to identify a material for which alternative values are to be defined. This adds a new column for the associated values.

2

Define the alternative values for each material added, by typing them in the new column for appropriate variables.

3

Set the link variable i.e. the variable whose value will determine which set of values to choose with the Specify Values Link command.

4

Activate the link, by blanking out any current definition for the variable(s) you wish to apply the linked values to. (Expression field).

The commands available are as follows:-

6.3.1

View Defined Values This command toggles the display of the additional values column(s) on and off. Simply click on it and the variable table will update to show / remove any additional column(s).

6.3.2

Add New Values This command adds an empty column for you to define values for the given material. Click on this command. The New Value dialog is now displayed. Type the name of the variable for which you want to define alternative values. The variable chosen must already be defined. If not it should be added. Click on OK to add an empty column, labelled with the given variable name. This command is self-repeating allowing you to add more columns if required. Click on Cancel if you do not wish to add any further columns.

6.3.3

Delete Value This command deletes a column of values. Click on this command. The Delete Value dialog is now displayed. Set the name of the material for which you wish to remove the alternative values, by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the list of materials defined. Click on OK to delete the associated column. Confirmation is required as this command will remove values permanently. Click on Cancel if you do not wish to delete any further columns.

6.3.4

Edit Value This command reassigns the material associated with a given column of values. Click on this command. The Change Value dialog is now displayed. Set the name of the material which you wish to change, by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the list of materials defined. Click on Change to display the New Value dialog. Type the name of the material you wish to associate with the former materials column of values. Click on OK to update the column, labelled with the newly assigned variable name.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-15

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Click on Cancel if you do not wish to reassign the column.

6.3.5

Link Variable This command identifies the variable which links the new values to the current variables. Click on this command. The Set New Link Variable dialog is now displayed. Type the name of the variable, the value of which will control the column of values to use. Click on OK to make the link. The chosen variable will be displayed in green to show that it is a link variable and the column corresponding to the current value of this variable will also be displayed in green to show that this is the active column of values.

6.3.6

Show Active Value This command toggles the display of columns of values for given materials if any. Simply click on it to toggle its effect. If selected, it will remove any columns apart from the active column where applicable. If deselected, all additional columns will be displayed.

6.3.7

Example of Working with Different Materials In the following example, alternative values for length L are defined at L1, L2, and L3 using condition statements. These will result in four different solutions depending upon the value of A the material used. Possible values for A are defined as E, B, C and BC:-

This can be simplified by following the four steps outlined above :Add values E, B, C and BC with the Add New Values command to produce the corresponding columns. Type the corresponding values of L3 to use for each material value.

Release 9.5 Page 7-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Set Point1 KASEMAKE Specify the link variable as A, the material currently used. In the example shown this has the value BC. The variable A and the column of values applicable to BC appears in green to show the link is made. Activate the link, by blanking out the current definition of L3 its value will automatically be updated to that defined for BC as this is the active link.

7

Set Point1

Command

Set Point1

Menu

Parametrics > Set Point1

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Set Point1 command allows you to define a point in terms of another point, in the same way as the relative 1 drawing mode. It is useful for establishing parametric relationships. It can be used to define relationships for new points or to edit relationships currently defined for existing points. Set Point1 automatically updates the current command file with any new point definition so it is not necessary to be recording a command file when you activate Set Point1. Activating the Parametrics->Set Point1 command causes the word SET to appear with the cross hair cursor. Click near to the point you wish to set. The identified point will be marked with an A and the Set Point definition dialog will appear displaying the definition of the chosen point, point A.

There are four buttons displayed with the Set Point definition dialog:• Reset Point - Click on this if the correct point has been identified and you wish to change its definition • Find Next - This button is accessible where one or more points coincide with the identified point. Click on this to retrieve the definition of the next coincident point • Cancel - Click on this if you have identified the wrong point and wish to restart the Set Point command • Edit - Choose Edit if you wish to change an existing definition by retyping the definition directly

7.1

Resetting the Chosen Point After choosing the Reset Point option from the Set Point definition dialog, the word REF1 will appear with the cross hair cursor indicating that you must identify the point you wish to work relative to. You can only work relative to points with a lower index than the point you are defining. This is because points are defined in numerical order in the command file, so you cannot define a point in terms of a point that has not yet been defined.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-17

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Click near to the point that you wish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point will be labelled as point B to show that you are working relative to it and the Set Point dialog will appear. If the point you identify is invalid because its index is higher than the point you are defining the KASEMAKE system will beep and you can identify a different point. The index of the point you are setting is displayed in the Set Point Dialog title bar as confirmation. The Set Point dialog contains nine direction buttons and two edit fields where the offset is entered. The direction button which best describes the current relationship between point A, the point being set and point B, the point you are working relative to, will be shown pressed in. According to which direction applies, one or both of the edit fields will appear with a text description of how point A relates to point B. The edit field(s) will contain the current offset if the point has been set before. Click on the required direction button. The text descriptions of the edit fields will change appropriately. Click in the edit field or fields and type the required offset. This can be numerical or a variable or a combination of both. Double clicking in the offset field will display a scrolling list of variables to help you to identify the offset in terms of given variables. Refer to “Relative 1 Drawing Mode” on page 5-9 for further details on setting the direction and offset. Finally, click on OK to set the new definition. The dialog will now close. The command file will be updated with the new definition and the point will be redisplayed at its new position. Click on Cancel to abandon any changes and leave the command file and point unchanged. The command can be restarted whilst you are identifying the reference point, point B, by clicking in the drawing area with the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu. Drag the cursor to Reset and click again to restart the Set Point1 command.

7.2

Edit Choose this option to make any changes to the current definition within the Set Point dialog. After choosing this option from the Set Point definition dialog, the blue highlight will be removed. You can now edit the definition by first clicking on the current definition and then retyping it as required. Once it is correct, press the enter key to update the current definition. The point will be adjusted on screen and the definition of the next point will now be displayed. If you wish to leave the definition unchanged simply click on Cancel to close the dialog and restart the Set Point command.

8

Set Point2

Command

Set Point2

Menu

Parametrics > Set Point2

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Set Point2 command is similar to Set Point1, but allows you to define a point in terms of two other points, in the same way as the relative 2 drawing mode. Activating the Set Point2 command causes the word SET to appear with the cross hair cursor. Click near to the point you wish to set. The identified point will be marked with an A and the Set Point definition dialog will appear displaying the definition of the chosen point, point A. As for Set Point 1, there are four buttons displayed with the Set Point definition dialog. Refer to “Set Point 1” on page 7-17 for an explanation of the commands associated with these buttons.

Release 9.5 Page 7-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Set Point2 KASEMAKE

8.1

Resetting the Chosen Point After choosing the Reset Point option from the Set Point definition dialog, the word REF1 will appear with the cross hair cursor indicating that you must identify the first point that you wish to work relative to. This point will be used to define the direction for the X value of point A. As before, you can only work relative to points with a lower index than the point you are defining. Click near to the point that you wish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point will be labelled as point B to show that you are working relative to it. If you identify an invalid point, because its index is higher than the point you are defining, the KASEMAKE system will beep and you can identify a different point. Next you must identify the second point that you wish to work relative to. This point will be used to define the direction for the Y value of point A. As before, you can only work relative to points with a lower index than the point you are defining. Click near to the point that you wish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point will be labelled as point C to show that you are working relative to it. If you have correctly defined points B and C, the Set Point dialog will now appear. The index of the point you are setting is displayed in the Set Point Dialog title bar as confirmation. The Set Point dialog contains five direction buttons and two edit fields where the offset is entered. The direction button which best describes the current relationship between point A, the point being set and points B and C, the points you are working relative to, will be shown pressed in. According to which direction applies, the edit fields will appear with a text description of how point A relates to points B and C. The edit field(s) will contain the current offset if the point has been set before. Click on the required direction button. The text descriptions of the edit fields will change appropriately. Click in the edit fields in turn and type the required offset. This can be numerical or a variable or a combination of both. Refer to “Relative 2 Drawing Mode” on page 5-11 for further details on setting the direction and offsets. Finally, click on OK to set the new definition. The dialog will now close. The command file will be updated with the new definition and the point will be redisplayed at its new position. Click on Cancel to abandon any changes and leave the command file and point unchanged. The command can be restarted whilst you are identifying the reference points, points B and C, by clicking in the drawing area with the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu. Drag the cursor to Reset and click again to restart the Set Point2 command.

8.2

Edit Choose this option to make any changes to the current definition within the Set Point dialog. After choosing this option from the Set Point definition dialog, the blue highlight will be removed. You can now edit the definition by first clicking on the current definition and then retyping it as required. Once it is correct, press the enter key to update the current definition. The point will be adjusted on screen and the definition of the next point will now be displayed. If you wish to leave the definition unchanged simply click on Cancel to close the dialog and restart the Set Point command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-19

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE

9

Set Element

Command

Set Element

Menu

Parametrics > Set Element

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Set Element command allows you to define a parametric relationship for an element rather than for a point. It is normally used for setting variables onto existing elements. Activate the Set Element command. Click near to the element you wish to set. The identified element will be displayed in the selection colour. Confirm that the selected element is the correct one, by clicking again within the drawing area. The interactive dialog will now appear displaying the command definition for the chosen element. The KASEMAKE system automatically switches to run interactive mode when an element is identified to be set. This results in the command file being opened and its contents being run in, up to and including the chosen elements command definition. You can now set the element by typing in the new values and use Redo to see the effect. The command file will be updated automatically. You have complete access to all the interactive commands as though you had activated Run in interactive mode. Step through the command file one command at a time using the Next command, making further changes if required. You can also rewind the command file a step at a time using the Prev command. Alternatively, use the Fast command to finish running in the design non-interactively, if their are no further changes to make. See “Running a Parametric Design Interactively” on page 7-2 for further details. Note:

10

Call

Where a command contains parametric point definitions, they will be given priority over parameters set with Set Element. Command

Call

Menu

Parametrics > Call

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Call command allows you to create a reference to another command file from within the current command file. This is useful for loading in predefined parts. Access to the part is restricted, only the reference point is live and can be redefined. The Call command is only available when you are recording a command file. Activate the Call command. The Call dialog box will be displayed. This is similar to the File Open dialog but has extra options. You need to select which part you want to use. Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will be displayed. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-6 for further details of specifying a filename with this dialog. Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now be displayed. Alternatively, type the name of the required design directly into the filename entry field. Next, set the parametric options as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 7-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Entity KASEMAKE • X Scale - the scale to apply to all x values within the part • Y Scale - the scale to apply to all y values within the part • Rotation - the rotation to apply to the part • File Suffix - the suffix to append to the part name. Refer to “File Suffixing” on page 722 for details of using file suffices Click on OK to set the options. The KASEMAKE system now requires you to identify the reference point to use to insert the named part. Identify the reference point using any of the available drawing modes. The named part will now be displayed using the x and y scales and rotation requested. A corresponding call command will be written to the current command file. Any variable table used by the named part will be merged with the current variable table as the part is loaded. Where a variable has already been defined for the current design, its value will remain unchanged. Any variables required by the part and not already defined for the current design, will be added at the end of the current variable table.

11

Entity

Command

Entity

Menu

Parametrics > Entity

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

The Entity command allows you to load an existing command file into the current command file. This is useful for loading in predefined parts. Unlike for Call, all the geometry for the part is live as the contents of the parts command file are copied into the current command file. The Entity command is only available when you are recording a command file. Activate the Entity command. The Entity dialog box will be displayed. This is similar to the File Open dialog but has extra options. You need to select which part you want to use. Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now be displayed. Alternatively, type the name of the required design directly into the filename entry field.Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-6 for further details of specifying a filename with this dialog. Next, set the parametric options as follows:• X Scale - the scale to apply to all x values within the part • Y Scale - the scale to apply to all y values within the part • File Suffix - the suffix to append to the part name. Refer to“File Suffixing” on page 722 for details of using file suffices. Click on OK to set the options. The KASEMAKE system now requires you to identify the reference point to use to insert the named part. Identify the reference point using any of the available drawing modes. The named part will now be displayed using the x any y scales requested. The corresponding command definitions will be written to the current command file. Any variable table used by the named part will be merged with the current variable table as the part is loaded. Where a variable has already been defined for the current design, its value will remain unchanged. Any variables required by the part and not already defined for the current design, will be added at the end of the current variable table.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-21

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE

11.1 File Suffixing File suffixing provides a means of choosing a specific part to be loaded from a family of similar parts. The family of parts should all share the same name but are differentiated between by appending a numerical suffix. The file suffix to use to identify which part to use is then determined at the time of loading the part. The number to use for the file suffix can be entered directly into the file suffix field. However, for a more flexible way to specify the file suffix you can use a variable. This variable can then be defined using a condition statement, allowing you a great deal of flexibility over which parts are to be used for any instance of the design.

11.1.1

Example A box is to be designed which uses locking tabs. The main design comprises the main panels of the box. Whilst the width of the box is less than 100 mm, the flap with a single locking tab should be used. Once the width is 100 mm or greater the flap with a double locking tab is required. Two parts have been defined as:• END1.CMF - which represents the end constructed with a single locking tab • END2.CMF - which represents the end constructed with a double locking tab To create a command file which is capable of determining which part to use dependent upon the width you will need to define a variable SUFFIX for the file suffix which is dependent upon the box width, W, as follows:W

100

SUFFIXIF (W < 100) THEN 1 ELSE 2 In the main design you should add a call to the part END.CMF and set the file suffix field to variable SUFFIX. Running the design with the above instance of variables will result in END2.CMF, the part with double locking tabs being used.

12

Create Preview

Command

Create Preview

Menu

Parametrics > Create Preview

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Create Preview command allows you to capture a preview of a parametric design. The preview will then be displayed when a filename is selected in the Run dialog, Call dialog or Entity dialog. Run the design in and display it on screen as you require. Then activate the Create Preview command. A preview file with the same name as the command file but using a .CFP extension will now be created.

Release 9.5 Page 7-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Set Units... KASEMAKE

13

Set Units...

Command

Set Units...

Menu

Parametrics > Set Units...

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Set Units... command is used to convert the units a parametric is defined in. It scales the parametric appropriately taking into account the current units you are working with. Activate this command. The Parametric Units dialog is now displayed. Select the units you wish to convert the parametrics to by clicking on the corresponding button. Choose OK to close the dialog and set the units. The $Units variable is automatically updated in the current variable table if applicable. However, in order to apply the change of units to a parametric which has already been loaded, you will need to run it again.

14

Top Lock Point

Command

Top Lock Point

Menu

Parametrics > Top Lock Point

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Top Lock Point command is used to identify locking points on panels for designs which are to be used by the Mix and Match command. The lock points identified with this command will be used to locate the various top panels when the final design is constructed. The top left hand point of each panel working from left to right, should be identified as a lock point. The first point given should be the top left hand point for the left most panel. The last point given should be the top right hand point of the right most panel. This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current command file in the same way as the Set Point command. Therefore, it is not available during a Record or Record To Copy command. Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark a point and the Set Point cursor will be displayed. Move near to the top left hand lock point of the left most panel and mark this point. KASEMAKE will automatically lock to the nearest point and label it ‘1’. Repeat for each panel finishing with the top right point of the right most panel. Each point will be labelled sequentially.

15

Bottom Lock Point

Command

Bottom Lock Point

Menu

Parametrics > Bottom Lock Point

Toolbar Button: Not available

The Bottom Lock Point command is similar to the Top Lock Point command but is used to identify locking points for bottom flaps to be located on panels used by the Mix and Match command when a final design is constructed. The bottom left hand point of each panel working from left to right, should be identified as a lock point. The first point given should be the bottom left hand point for the left most panel. The last point given should be the bottom right hand point of the right most panel.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-23

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current command file.

16

Mix And Match Sub-Menu Select the Mix and Match option from the Parametrics Menu to access the Mix and Match SubMenu giving access to the different catergories of Mix and Match. All Mix And Match commands follow a similar method of operation but incorporate panels and flaps specific to the type of design.

16.1 Folding Carton... Command

Folding Carton

Menu

Parametrics > Mix & Match > Folding Carton...

Toolbar Button: Not available Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametric design. The Folding Carton... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for a carton design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered as appropriate. Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish to be available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described as Mix and Match (Carton) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page 2-49. Guidelines for producing the panels and flaps can be found in the next section entitled “Defining Panels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match” on page 7-25. Activate this command. The Mix & Match Box Generator dialog is displayed which guides you step by step through selecting panels and flaps to construct a final parametric design. The information displayed for each step consists of a drawing of the currently selected panel or flap. A representation of the design so far, highlighting the panel or flap currently being worked on. A list of the variables available for the current flap or panel which can be adjusted accordingly. A scrolling list of available panel(s) or flap(s) with the currently selected one being highlighted to distinguish it. Clicking on an alternative panel or flap in the scrolling list of available panel(s) or flap(s) will cause this to be displayed as the current choice with its corresponding variables. According to the type of box and flaps being used the number of steps taken to produce the final design will vary. As a guide the steps will be as follows:•Select the middle panels to use. •Select the top style •Decide whether you wish to mirror the dust flaps or not •Decide whether you want a locking closure or not •Select each panel to make up this top style including slit and tongue tab styles if required •Select the bottom style •Decide whether you wish to mirror the dust flaps or not •Decide whether you want a locking closure or not

Release 9.5 Page 7-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mix And Match Sub-Menu KASEMAKE •Select each panel to make up this bottom style including slit and tongue tab styles if required Finally, set the Save Macro File check box if you wish to save the macro you have just assembled so that it can be replayed and altered. Clear it if you do not wish to save the macro. Click on Finish to close the Mix & Match Box Generator. If you have chosen to save the macro, a Save As dialog will be displayed allowing you to select a suitable name and location for your design. Click on Save to store the new macro .AGM file for at the chosen location for later use.

16.2 Corrugated... Command

Corrugated

Menu

Parametrics > Mix & Match > Corrugated...

Toolbar Button: Not available Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametric design. The Corrugated... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for a corrugated design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered as appropriate. The command works as per “Folding Carton...” on page 24but the number of steps taken to produce the final design will vary. Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish to be available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described as Mix and Match (Corrugated) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page 2-49.

16.3 Pallet... Command

Pallet

Menu

Parametrics > Mix & Match > Pallet...

Toolbar Button: Not available Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametric design. The Pallet... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for a corrugated design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered as appropriate. The command works as per “Folding Carton...” on page 24but the number of steps taken to produce the final design will vary. Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish to be available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described as Mix and Match (Pallet) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page 2-49.

16.4 Defining Panels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match The first step to be able to use Mix & Match is to define MAIN panels: • Create a new PARAMETRIC called MAINn (where n is a number) • Draw the appropriate cut and crease lines as normal.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-25

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE • Variables must be defined for each panel width in the design and must follow the same naming convention. i.e. the first panel width must be defined as PW1, second as PW2, and so on. • Any variables that are to be entered when choosing the panel style must be given PROMPTS with meaningful names. Once the design is complete, the PARAMETRIC command TOP LOCK POINT must be used. This should be used when the file is closed (i.e. not RECORDING) similar to the SET POINT tool. With this tool selected, the top lefthand point of each panel must be clicked in order, left to right. Also lastly, the rightmost panel must have its top right panel point clicked as well. This process adds a series of definitions in the CMF file: TOP-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 1, CENTRE = P1 } TOP-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 2, CENTRE = P3 } Similarly the PARAMETRIC command, BOTTOM LOCK POINT must be used to define the bottom left point on all of the panels and also the rightmost panel bottom right point. BOTTOM-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 1, CENTRE = P2 } BOTTOM-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 2, CENTRE = P4 } This is now a working PARAMETRIC that will form one of the centre panels for Mix & Match

Release 9.5 Page 7-26

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mix And Match Sub-Menu KASEMAKE To make a preview of this set of panels, a drawing file with the same name as the CMF file must be saved. Ideally this will have the main variables labelled as dimensions. e.g.:

These files (.CMF, .VAR and .AGD) must be stored in a directory called MAIN beneath the appropriate folder as specified in the file locations section of preferences. Please see “File Locations” on page 2-49.

16.4.1

File Locations The directory structure for Mix & Match is quite important. The folders used to access the files needed for each category of design should be as specified in File Locations under Preferences. For each category of design there should be a Main sub folder beneath which further folders containing information for flaps and panels are stored. For each main panel PARAMETRIC that is designed there must be an equivalent folder under the Main folder, e.g. Main1, Main2, etc. Within each of these folders there must be another two folders called TopStyle and BottomStyle. Within the TopStyle folder there must be at least 2 files: TopStyle#1.DSC and TopStyle#1.AGD. There can be additional files of the format TopStyle#n.DSC and TopStyle#n.AGD (where n can be any number). Similarly within the BottomStyle folder there must be at least 2 files: BottomStyle#n.DSC and BottomStyle#n.AGD. The purpose of these files is to identify the general style of the top or bottom flaps (e.g. A Tuckend Top) and also which flaps make up that style (e.g. A Tuck-end Top would be made up of 2 Dust Flaps and a Tuck Flap). The Dust Flaps, Tuck Tops, etc. that each style is made up of must also be defined and must be stored under the PARTS folder in folders with sensible names, e.g. FLAPS, TUCKEND, etc. It does not matter what these folder names are called as long as they are referenced correctly in the .DSC files.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-27

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE A typical example of the directory structure for Folding Carton designs might be:-

Release 9.5 Page 7-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mix And Match Sub-Menu KASEMAKE A typical example of the directory structure for Corrugated designs might be:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-29

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE A typical example of the directory structure for Pallet designs might be:-

16.4.2

Defining the .DSC Style Files Conditional ? [] then

else

end The optional is displayed in a message box, with a yes / no choice. If ‘no’ is selected then the first are used, otherwise the after ‘else’ are used. When no string is specified, the question defaults to “Mirror Flaps?” Note:

The ‘?’ can be nested as follows:-

? [] then

? [] then statements>

Release 9.5 Page 7-30

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mix And Match Sub-Menu KASEMAKE else

end else

end Statements [,1..9] [,X] [,Y] [,P] [,P,R] look for all files prefixed with Examples: flap - looks for flap1, flap2... etc. tucktop - looks for tucktop1, tucktop2... etc. Optional Parameters 1..9 - Panel number X - mirror in X Y - mirror in Y P - use previously selected part, with the same variables P,R - use previously selected part, but with different variables U - undefine global variables Example File:

16.4.3

?

Ask User “Mirror flaps?”

then

User replied yes to “Mirror flaps?”

Ttops

Choose a style from Ttops

Flaps

Choose a flap

Misc

Choose from Misc

Flaps, X

Mirror the chosen flap

else

User replied no to “Mirror flaps?”

Ttops

Choose from Ttops

Flaps

Choose a flap

Misc

Choose from Misc

Flaps,P,R

Use same flap as before, but with different variable table.

end

End of ? then else statements

Defining the Parts to be called The Parts are defined as per normal parametrics, but the first point defined in the part is critical. It is this point that will be attached to the appropriate Panel Point in the MAIN parametric. The first point defined in the part will normally be the left-hand point. (This point will be inserted on the next panel point to the right if the part is mirrored horizontally).

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-31

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Allowing mirroring of parts saves left and right-hand flaps (as well as top and bottom) being defined separately. Each part will have its own set of variables. As with the MAIN parametrics, any variables that are to be entered when choosing the part must be given PROMPTS with meaningful names, e.g.

For each part that will need to be sized to fit to the appropriate panel in the MAIN style, there must be a variable defined called PW. The actual variable used to control the horizontal size of the part must be set as PW. (e.g. in the above example, FL_PANELW is the controlling variable and is set equal to PW). It is important to give variables unique names within each part. Variables with the same name as variables defined in the MAIN parametric will take their value from the MAIN variable table.

16.4.4

Global Variables Global variables have an underscore (‘_’) as the first character of the variable name. E.g. _GLOBAL. Any part called which contains global variables will automaticallly have its global variables added to the MAIN panels variable table. The variables will then be available to all subsequently loaded parts.

17

Run Mix Match Macro Command

Run Mix & Match

Menu

Parametrics > Run Mix Match Macro

Toolbar Button: Not available This command allows you to run in a previously created mix & match design file. Altering variables as required. Activate the command. You will now be prompted for the .AGM filename. Click on a filename to preview the macro. Choose Open to select the current macro and display the Run Mix And Match Macro dialog. The main panels for the chosen macro will now be displayed together with the associated variables. You can now step through each stage of the macro altering variables as you go using OK to take you to the next stage. Alternatively, you can use the Run Thru command to load the macro with its current settings.

Release 9.5 Page 7-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

MixMatch Lock Point KASEMAKE

18

MixMatch Lock Point Command

MixMatch Lock Point

Menu

Parametrics > Mix Match Lock Point

Toolbar Button: Not available The Mix Match Lock Point command is used to identify locking points on panels for designs which are to be used by the Mix and Match command. The lock points identified with this command will be used to locate the various top panels when the final design is constructed. The top left hand point of each panel working from left to right, should be identified as a lock point. The first point given should be the top left hand point for the left most panel. The last point given should be the top right hand point of the right most panel. This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current command file in the same way as the Set Point command. Therefore, it is not available during a Record or Record To Copy command. Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark a point and the Set Point cursor will be displayed. Move near to the top left hand lock point of the left most panel and mark this point. KASEMAKE will automatically lock to the nearest point and label it ‘1’. Repeat for each panel finishing with the top right point of the right most panel. Each point will be labelled sequentially.

19

Symbol Lock Point Command

Symbol Lock Point

Menu

Parametrics > Symbol Lock Point

Toolbar Button: Not available The Symbol Lock Point command is similar to the Top Lock Point command but is used to identify locking points for parametrics intended to be used as smart symbols. See “Symbols...” on page 10-4 for information about creating and using smart symbols. Working from left to right, two lock points should be identified, these mark the extents of the design and are used to locate it when used as as a symbol. The first point given should be the left most point of the design. The second point given should be the right most point of the design. This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current command file.

20

Quick Parametrics - General The remaining Parametrics commands relate to the creation and manipulation of quick parametric (.agq) designs. These are designs which have parametric functionality controlled through associative dimensioning. Quick parametrics provides a simplified approach to converting an existing drawing, .agd file, into a parameterised design. Before creating a quick parametric design, you should ensure that any essential dimensions are placed within your design. It is also advisable to remove any overall dimensions as this makes the design overdimensioned and can cause problems when it is converted to a quick parametric.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-33

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE There are two stages involved in converting a drawing to a quick parametric design. First of all once the design is completely dimensioned, you should use the Generate Guide Lines command to generate the guide lines which are needed to relate the design elements to each other. Secondly you should edit the dimensions using the Edit Dimension and Copy Dim. Definition commands to apply parametric expressions to them. The remaining commands affect the display of quick parametric designs or provide file handling capabilities as detailed next.

20.1 Generate Guide Lines Command

Generate Guide Lines

Menu

Parametrics > Generate Guide Lines

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Generate Guide Lines command produces the guide lines needed to convert a drawing to a quick parametric design. Activate this command. The system will now automatically generate guide lines based on the dimensions provided. To view the guide lines, you should use the Parametrics->Show Guide Lines command which toggles the display of the guide lines.

20.2 Regenerate Drawing Command

Regenerate Drawing

Menu

Parametrics > Regenerate Drawing

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Regenerate Drawing command is similar to the Run command in that it is used to regenerate a drawing applying the latest amendments to variables or the parametric expression associated with a dimension. Activate this command. The design will now be resized applying the current variable values.

20.3 Edit Dimension Command

Edit Dimension

Menu

Parametrics > Edit Dimension

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Edit Dimension command allows you to define a parametric relationship between design elements by applying variable expressions to the dimensions associated with them. Then, by changing these variables or expressions the design can be resized. You need to select the dimension you wish to edit before activating this command. Upon activating this command, the Dimension dialog will be displayed. You can now enter a parametric expression to be assigned to the selected dimension. The given expression will be associated with the panel which the dimension is connected to. Any combination of variables or numbers can be used. Click on OK to associate the given expression and display it within the design. If you use any variables which aren’t already defined, you will be prompted and given the choice to add them to the current variable table. These variables can then be initialised or changed using the Variables command. Please see “Variables” on page 6.

Release 9.5 Page 7-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Quick Parametrics - General KASEMAKE For further information about defining valid parametric expressions please refer to “Defining Variable Expressions” on page 7. To display the dimensions as the parametric expression assigned to them, you should use the Parametrics->Show Dimensions command which toggles the display of the dimensions between parametric expressions and their current numerical values.

20.4 Copy Dim. Definition Command

Copy Dim. Definition

Menu

Parametrics > Copy Dim. Definition

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Copy Dim. Definition command is useful where you have two or more dimensions to which you wish to assign the same parametric expression. First assign the parametric expression to one of the dimensions using the Edit Dimension command. Activate this command. First you will be prompted Mark Reference Dimension. Identify the dimension which has the parametric expression you wish to copy already assigned to it. Click near to the dimension to select it. Next you are prompted Mark Target Dimension. Identify the dimension to which you wish to copy the parametric expression associated with the chosen dimension. Note:

You will need to use the Regenerate Drawing command to display the drawing using the newly defined dimension values.

20.5 Show Guide Lines Command

Show Guide Lines

Menu

Parametrics > Show Guide Lines

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Show Guide Lines command toggles the display of the parametric guide lines generated for the current design. Activate this command. The parametric guide lines will now be displayed as dashed white lines across the design. Alternatively, where they were already visible the guide lines will now be removed from the display.

20.6 Show Parametric Dims Command

Show Parametric Dims

Menu

Parametrics > Show Parametric Dims

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Show Parametric Dims command allows you to change the display of any dimensions in the design. The dimensions can either be displayed showing the parametric expression associated with the dimension or as the actual numerical value of any parametric expression. Activate this command. The parametric dimensions will now display the parametric expressions associated with the dimension.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-35

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Alternatively, where the parametric expressions were already visible the dimensions will now display their current numerical value.

20.7 Open Quick... Command

Open Quick...

Menu

Parametrics > Open Quick...

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Open Quick... command allows you to open a previously saved quick parametric design (.agq) type file. Activate this command. The Open dialog is displayed. Set the folder and select the filename of the required file. Alternatively type the filename of the required file directly into the File name: field. Click on Open to load the specified file and display the quick parametric on screen.

20.8 Save Quick Command

Save Quick

Menu

Parametrics > Save Quick

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Save Quick command allows you to save any changes to the current quick parametric design. Activating this command will cause one of the following responses:• If the quick parametric design has been generated using a previously saved .agd file, KASEMAKE will automatically save the file to a file of the same name and location but with the .agq extension to denote quick parametric. • If the quick parametric design has previously been saved as a .agq file, automatically update this file with any changes / amendments made.

KASEMAKE will

• If the quick parametric design has not previously been saved, the Save As dialog will appear allowing you to specify a file name and location for the design. Proceed as for the Save As Quick... command described next.

20.9 Save As Quick... Command

Save As Quick...

Menu

Parametrics > Save As Quick...

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar The Save As Quick... command allows you to save a quick parametric to a .agq file. Activate this command. The Save As dialog is displayed. Select the folder and type the filename of the required file into the File name: field. Click on Save to save the quick parametric design to the specified file.

Release 9.5 Page 7-36

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Fitment Builder KASEMAKE

21

Fitment Builder Command

Fitment Builder

Menu

Parametrics > Fitment Builder

Toolbar Button: Not available The Fitment Builder command allows a single cut out shape to be repeated to fill a parameterised platform. The platform and enclosure can be created separately or combined in a single design. Sample parameterised designs for use as fitments as well as designs with combined fitment and enclosure are supplied with KASEMAKE. They can be located in the Fitment Builder directory which is a sub folder of the Parametric Designs folder which in turn is located within the working folder for the current KASEMAKE installation, usually \Kasemake\Parametric Designs\Fitment Builder. The Fitment Builder\Corrugated\Fitments folder contains samples of fitment only designs. The Fitment Builder\Corrugated\Outers and Fitments folder contains sample designs for combined fitments and outers. First draw the shape which is to be fitted. Now activate the Fitment Builder command. The following dialog is displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-37

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE

21.1 Layout Method This determines how the one off shape is laid out within the chosen fitment. Choose from:-

21.1.1

To Fit Selecting this option allows you to specify the overall size of the required fitment.

Release 9.5 Page 7-38

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Fitment Builder KASEMAKE 21.1.1.1 X Set the horizontal distance or aperture length for the required fitment by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll.

21.1.1.2 Y Set the horizontal distance or aperture length for the required fitment by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll.

21.1.2

Number Selecting this option allows you to specify the number of objects you wish to place in the chosen fitment.

21.1.2.1 X Set the number of objects to place across each row of the chosen fitment

21.1.2.2 Y Set the number of rows of objects to required by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll.

21.2 Fitment Calculations This section relates to the way the overall size of the fitment, aperture length and aperture width are calculcated and allows you to specify gaps between objects, gutter values and gaps to leave from each edge of the fitment, trim values.

21.2.1

Shape Overall X This is the overall length of the shape and is calculated automatically. However it is possible to change it if slight tweaking is required.

21.2.2

Shape Overall Y This is the overall width of the shape and again is calculated automatically. It is possible to change it if slight tweaking is required.

21.2.3

Reset The Reset button can be used to reset the shapes overall x and y values to its actual calculated values provided when the fitment builder was launched.

21.2.4

Gutter X This value relates to the horizontal gap to leave between each object in the fitment. Type the required value or scroll to it by clicking on the arrows.

21.2.5

Gutter Y This value relates to the vertical gap to leave between each row of objects in the fitment. Type the required value or scroll to it using the arrows.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-39

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE 21.2.6

Trim X This value relates to the horizontal gap to leave between the left hand edge of the fitment and the left hand edge of the first object and the right hand edge of the fitment and the right hand edge of the last object in each row. Type the required value or scroll to it by clicking on the arrows.

21.2.7

Trim Y This value relates to the vertical gap to leave between the bottom edge of the fitment and the start of the first row and the top edge of the fitment and the top of the last row of objects. Type the required value or scroll to it by clicking on the arrows.

21.2.8

Aperture X This value refers to the final horizontal dimension of the fitment and is calculated for you. It takes into account the number of objects to place in each row or the specified horizontal distance depending on your choice of layout method. It also takes into account the horizontal dimension of the shape to be fitted and the gutter x and trim x values.

21.2.9

ApertureY This value refers to the final vertical dimension of the fitment and is calculated. It takes into account the number of rows of objects to place or the specified vertical distance depending on your choice of layout method. It also takes into account the vertical dimension of the shape to be fitted and the gutter y and trim y values.

21.2.10

Rounding Where the overall shape size used is not measured to the nearest whole unit the calculated aperture x and aperture y will not be whole numbers. It is therefore possible to round these values to their nearest whole unit. Choose from:• No Rounding - To keep the calculated aperture x and y values • Round Up - To round up the calculated values to the nearest unit • Round Down - To round down the calculated values to the nearest unit

21.3 Selecting a Fitment Style This section explains how to define a fitment or a combined fitment and enclosure to be used.

21.3.1

Add Fitment Style This is where you specify the name of the parametric which contains the design for the required fitment or combined fitment and enclosure. Click on the ..., ellipsis button, to display the parametric run dialog to enable you to select the correct filename and path. Once you have identified them simply click on the Run button to load the chosen design updating the Fitment Values section of the dialog with variables and displaying a preview of the chosen file.

Release 9.5 Page 7-40

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Fitment Builder KASEMAKE 21.3.2

Fitment Values This section displays the main variables for the chosen parametric design. They are initially set to the values stored for the parametric. It is possible to change them by typing new values.

21.3.3

Settings Settings enables you to define the relationship between the calculated fitment values and the variables used in the parametric design selected to use for the fitment. Access the Settings button to display the Fitment Settings dialog as shown:-

21.3.3.1 Parametric Variables This section is where you link the calculated values to the variables provided by the parametric design. Length Here you need to define the variable in the fitment design which is to take the calculated aperture x value. Either type the name of the variable or double click in the text box to display a drop down list of possible variables. Scroll to the required on the double click on it to set it as the variable to use. Width Here you need to define the variable in the fitment design which is to take the calculated aperture y value. Either type the name of the variable or double click in the text box to display a drop down list of possible variables. Scroll to the required on the double click on it to set it as the variable to use. Material Here you need to define the variable in the fitment design which should be used to determine material thickness when calculating the overall fitment sizes for the outer design. Either type the name of the variable or double click in the text box to display a drop down list of possible variables. Scroll to the required on the double click on it to set it as the variable to use.

21.3.4

Reset The Reset option is used to manually update the Fitment Values. This can be to use the Fitment calculation values already defined. It can also be after changing associations through the Settings option. It can also be used after an alternative fitment style is selected.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-41

7 - Parametrics Commands KASEMAKE Simply click on the Reset button to update the Fitment Values appropriately.

21.4 Selecting an Outer Style This final section of the dialog provides settings to define the outer style to use where separate fitment and outer styles are required.

21.4.1

Add Outer Style Set this option if you wish to use a separate style for the enclosure. Clear it if you are using a combined fitment and enclosure or no outer style is required. Click on the ..., ellipsis button to define the folder and filename of the parameteric style to use. The Run dialog will be displayed to help you to locate the required style. Once the style is located click on Run to close the dialog.

21.4.2

Outer Values The main variables for the chosen style are displayed in the outer values area of the dialog together with a preview of the chosen outer. As before, the variables can be altered manually.

21.4.3

Settings Access the Settings to define the relationship between the fitment values and the variables used by the parametric design which produces the outer. The Outer Settings dialog is now displayed as follows:-

21.4.3.1 Gap Here you need to set the Fitment to Parametric gap. This is used to determine the horizontal gap to leave between the right hand edge of the fitment and the outer design. Type a suitable value or use the arrow buttons to scroll to it.

Release 9.5 Page 7-42

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Fitment Builder KASEMAKE 21.4.3.2 Outer Parametric Variables This section is where you link the calculated values to the variables provided by the parametric design. Length Here you need to define the variable in the outer design which is to use the overall length of the fitment. Either type the name of the variable or double click in the text box to display a drop down list of possible variables. Scroll to the required on the double click on it to set it as the variable to use. Width Here you need to define the variable in the outer design which is to use the overall width of the fitment. Either type the name of the variable or double click in the text box to display a drop down list of possible variables. Scroll to the required on the double click on it to set it as the variable to use.

21.4.4

Apply to Outer The Apply to Outer option is used to manually update the Outer Values. This can be to use the Fitment calculation values already defined. It can also be after changing associations through the Settings option. It can also be used after an alternative outer style is selected. Simply click on the Apply to Outer button to update the Outer Values appropriately.

21.5 OK Choose OK to finalise the design and close the Fitment Builder dialog. The fitment with the selected shape laid out as per the calculated values, together with any finalised outer style will now be displayed.

21.6 Cancel Choose Cancel to abandon any changes and return to the original drawing.

21.7 Preview Choose Preview to display the fitment with the selected shape laid out as per the current calculated values, together with any outer style. The dialog remains open so that any adjustments can be made. Further previews can then be displayed before the design is finalised.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 7-43

KASEMAKE

This page is intentionally blank

Release 9.5 Page 7-44

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

8 - Tools Commands 1

Layout Menu The Layout commands are used to provide a layout of one or more designs. Activating Layout produces a sub-menu of commands as described in the following:-

1.1

Layout…

Command

Layout…

Menu

Tools->Layout…

Toolbar button:

Tools Toolbar

The Layout… command is used to produce a layout of the current design, by specifying the size of sheet on which the layout is to be produced. The KASEMAKE system will then calculate the number of designs that can be fitted horizontally and vertically. Activate the command. The Layout rollup will appear with the Layout page activated.

1.1.1

Layout Options 1.1.1.1

Horizontal

Set the extent of the sheet horizontally using the corresponding Extent field. Set the Gutter value, this is the gap to leave between horizontal copies.

1.1.1.2

Vertical

Set the extent of the sheet vertically using the corresponding Extent field. Set the Gutter value, this is the gap to leave between vertical copies.

1.1.1.3

Margins

You can also specify margins to be left at the edges of the sheet. Set the margins individually for top, bottom, left and right edges.

1.1.1.4

Interlocking

Decide whether you want the design copies to interlock. Choose from the following settings:•No Interlocking •Manual Interlocking •Automatic Interlocking Manual Interlocking If you choose manual interlocking you should then decide whether you wish to perform a straightforward interlock where one design is dropped into the other e.g. 0211 or to apply offset and or rotation settings. Use Offset Settings Some designs interlock with better sheet usage if they are offset so that you are lining up alternative panels. Set this option if you wish to apply an offset. The offset settings are defined in the section “Interlocking Options (1)” on page 3.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-1

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Rotation Decide whether you wish to apply a rotation. Some designs interlock with better sheet usage if the copy is rotated before it is interlocked. Set the rotation required fromthe drop down list as follows :•No Rotation - choose this option if no rotation is required •Use Rotation Settings - set this option if you wish to apply the rotation settings. See “Interlocking Options (1)” on page 3 for further details. •Try All Rotations - set this option if you wish KASEMAKE to try all possible rotations, displaying available solutions to allow you to choose which layout to use. Automatic Interlocking Before you can perform automatic interlocking, you need to set the following values:Check All Panel Points Set this option if you wish to consider all the panel points for the current design. Clear it if you only wish to consider the main panel points. Automatically Select Best Set this option if you want KASEMAKE to automatically display the best solution. Clear this option if you wish to be presented with all the possible solutions to choose for yourself which one to make use of.

Click on Apply. In most cases, the design will now be laid out according to the specified settings. For Manual Interlocking where Try All Rotations is set and Automatic Interlocking where Automatically Select Best is not chosen, you will be required to choose the layout to use before the design is laid out. Refer to “Choosing A Layout” on page 2 for futher details. For all cases, the resulting layout is built up of clones of the existing design which also becomes a clone. Any changes made to the master clone are then automatically reflected throughout the layout. Refer to “Clone Edit” on page 10-8. Interlocking options to fine tune the resulting layout are provided. These allow you to take into account a minimum knife distance as well as to specify a time limit to restrict the time used for calculating more complicated layouts. Refer to “Interlocking Options (2)” on page 5. Choosing A Layout If you have opted to choose the final layout either by performing Manual Interlocking with Try All Rotations set, or by performing Automatic Interlocking but not using Automatically Select Best, the Choose Layout... dialog will now be displayed. This consists of a scrolling window containing a sequence of layout solutions. The most efficient solution is displayed first. Use the right most vertical scroll bar to move between the different layout solutions.

Release 9.5 Page 8-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Layout Menu KASEMAKE

Each solution is displayed as in the diagram. The details of any rotation or offset applied are given at the head of the view. A scrolling list of properties for the corresponding layout are then given, including dimensions of the overall layout and offsets and rotations applied. The actual layout is displayed to the right of the property list. A Large Preview option is available for closer examination. If accessed, the layout will be placed in its own resizeable window. Choose OK to select the layout currently in view. This solution will then be displayed in the KASEMAKE drawing area. Choose Cancel to abandon the Layout command.

1.1.2

Interlocking Options (1) The interlocking options (1) page of the layout tabbed dialog contains the rotation and offset settings to apply where the use offset settings and use rotation settings options have been set from the main Layout or Array command page.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-3

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

The first two sections labelled Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset, define the offset settings to use. The final section labelled Rotation, defines the rotation settings to apply.

1.1.2.1

Horizontal Offset

Define any offset to apply horizontally in one of two ways :•Choose Offset by clicking on the corresponding button. Then set the offset field to the value to use. •Choose Align Panels by clicking on the corresponding button. Panels are numbered from the left across the main section of the box. They are determined from the crease lines. You can select two panels to align and the condition for alignment. In each case, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge.

1.1.2.2

Vertical Offset

Define any offset to apply vertically in one of two ways :•Choose Offset by clicking on the corresponding button. Then set the offset field to the value to use. •Choose Align Panels by clicking on the corresponding button. Define two panels to align and the condition for alignment. For each, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge.

1.1.2.3

Rotation

•Set the Rotate Alternate Rows option to rotate every other row of designs before interlocking them

Release 9.5 Page 8-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Layout Menu KASEMAKE •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second row than that specified on the Layout or Array page. Define the gutter to apply to the second row. •Set the Rotate Alternate Columns option to rotate every other column of designs before interlocking them •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second column than that specified on the Layout or Array page. Define the gutter to apply to the second row.

1.1.3

Interlocking Options (2) The interlocking options (2) page of the layout tabbed dialog contains the refinements which can be made to the resulting layout.

Time limits can be set for a layout to restrict the time taken to produce more complicated layouts. You can also set a minimum knife distance to be taken into account.

1.1.3.1

Minimum Knife Distance Constraint

Set the Check Minimum Knife Constraint option if you wish to define a minimum knife distance to take into account when laying out the design. Set the corresponding Minimum Knife Distance field to the distance to use. If any problems occur whilst trying to enforce the minimum distance and use the current gutter options, you will be prompted accordingly and possible solutions will be offered. You can then choose to apply these suggestions or make adjustments to the options and reapply them to generate an alternative layout.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-5

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

1.1.3.2

Time Limit Options

For more complicated layouts, you can set a time limit for a speedier solution. The best layout(s) calculated within the time limit will be used. Set the time limit to use in seconds.

1.1.3.3

Panel Selection

In order for the KASEMAKE system to identify panels for the Layout / Array command you need to identify the ground being used for creases within the design. •Crease Ground - set to the ground being used for creases

1.2

Array…

Command

Array…

Menu

Tools->Array…

Toolbar button:

Not available

The Array… command is used to produce a layout of the current design, by specifying the number across and number up. Activate the command. The Layout rollup will appear with the Array page activated.

1.2.1

Horizontal Set the number of copies required horizontally using the corresponding Number field. Set the Gutter value, this is the gap to leave between horizontal copies.

1.2.2

Vertical Set the number of copies required vertically using the corresponding Number field. Set the Gutter value, this is the gap to leave between vertical copies.

1.2.3

Interlocking For details of interlocking methods and settings please refer to the Layout command. See “Interlocking” on page 1 for further details. Click on Apply. The design will now be laid out according to the specified settings. The layout is built up of clones of the existing design which also becomes a clone. Any changes made to the master clone are then automatically reflected throughout the layout. Refer to “Clone Edit” on page 10-8. Interlocking options to fine tune the resulting layout are provided. These allow you to take into account a minimum knife distance as well as to restrict time spent calculating solutions for more complicated designs. Refer to “Interlocking Options (2)” on page 5.

Release 9.5 Page 8-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Layout Menu KASEMAKE

1.3

Layout Wizard... Command

Layout Wizard…

Menu

Tools->Layout Wizard…

Toolbar button:

Tools Toolbar

The Layout Wizard… command provides a step by step guide to producing layouts for any chosen design(s). They can be tailored to your specific requirements as the Wizard guides you through the different steps necessary to define particular layouts. Within the Wizard, you can define :• design or designs to use • job size and overrun •sheet size and trims •constraints for knife distance •gutters and offsets •interlocking •rotation •llayout algorithm to use Although the Layout Wizard... provides instructions as it guides you through the necessary steps to produce the required layout, we will now attempt to explain the various settings and what action to take at each stage. First, activate the Layout Wizard... This can be from an empty drawing as you can specify within the wizard which design(s) are to be laid out. You will now be shown an introductory page detailing what the Wizard allows you to do. Four buttons are also displayed:•Back - allows you to go back one or more steps if you wish to redefine one of the previous settings •Next - takes you to the next step accepting the current settings •Finish - is activated after the available layouts have been calculated. It closes the Wizard and displays the Choose Layout dialog to allow you to examine the results and select the layout to use. •Cancel - allows you to leave the Wizard at any stage.

1.3.1

Step 1 - Sheet Size The first step is to define the sheet size and any margins to be left at the edges of the sheet.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-7

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

1.3.1.1

Options

Sheet Size - Set the dimensions of the sheet to be used. Margins - Set the margins individually for grip, top, left and right edges.. Minimum knife constraint - At this stage, you can also define a minimum knife distance to take into account when laying out the design. Set the Check Minimum Knife Constraint option and the corresponding Distance field.

1.3.2

Step 2 - Designs Now you need to specify how many designs, the filename for each design you wish to layout and any overrun and an estimate of how many designs can be positioned on a sheet. The Layout Wizard command distinguishes between single designs and multiple designs. The number of designs to be used will determine the layout algorithms available which in turn determines the way the rest of the command is performed.

Release 9.5 Page 8-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Layout Menu KASEMAKE .

Number of designs - Specify how many different designs are to be used. A form for each different design will be displayed in a scrolling view.

1.3.2.1

Options

Drawing - For each design to be used, you need to specify the name of the design. This can be either a finished design, .agd file, or a parametric command file, .cmf file. Choose the ... button to display the File Open dialog to help you to select the required file, or type the name directly. A preview of the file is displayed, if one exists and where a parametric (.cmf) file is selected a list of the main variables used is also displayed. Number required - Define how many of this design you require in the final layout. Overrun factor - Define the overrun factor as a percentage. Estimate per sheet - Specify an estimated number of designs for each sheet Scroll to the next form and repeat the above to specify the details for each additional design in turn

Single Design Layout 1.3.3

Step 3 - Layout Algorithm Next you need to specify which layout algorithm to use. Choose from :Single Designs Only •Automatic Regular Layout - to layout a single design specifying gutters only, all alignment and orientation permutations are considered automatically.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-9

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE •Regular Layout - to layout a single design specifying gutters, orientation and alignment as per the Layout / Array Rollup. Multiple Designs Only •Multipart Layout - to layout more than one design •Multi Interlock layout - supports interlocking of more than one design in any combination allowing for horizontal and vertical gutters. All alignment and orientation permutations are considered automatically. Depending upon which algorithm you have selected, you will now be presented with a page of options.

1.3.3.1

Automatic Regular Layout Options

The options for automatic regular algorithm layouts are displayed as three overlaid pages click on a tab to display the corresponding page of options as follows :Gutters •Set the X Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between horizontal copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and every alternate row. •Define the value for the alternate x gutter. •Set the Y Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between vertical copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and every alternate column. •Define the value for the alternate y gutter. Alignment Set the Align option if you wish to choose which points to consider to determine possible alignment for the laid out designs. Set the points to consider from:•Panel Centres Only - only the centre point of each panel will be considered •All Panel Points - all points will be considered •Discrete Points - discrete points a given distance apart will be considered. Set the distance to leave between points in millimetres. Rotation Set the Rotate option if you wish to choose a specific method of rotation to use to determine possible layouts. Choose from:•Try Alternate Rows - to rotate alternate rows •Try Alternate Columns - to rotate alternate columns •Try Both - to rotate rows or columns

1.3.3.2

Regular Layout Options

The options for regular algorithm layouts are presented as four overlaid pages. Four tabs at the top of the page, Gutters, Horizontal Offset, Vertical Offset and Rotation are used to determine which page is displayed. Click on a tab to display its corresponding settings.

Release 9.5 Page 8-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Layout Menu KASEMAKE The settings behave in the same way as the Layout / Array Rollup and are described in the following:Gutters •Set the X Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between horizontal copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and every alternate row. •Define the value for the alternate x gutter. •Set the Y Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between vertical copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and every alternate column. •Define the value for the alternate y gutter. Horizontal / Vertical Offset There are two methods for defining both the horizontal and vertical offsets. Choose from :•By Absolute Value - choose the Offset button, then set the offset field to the value to use. •By Alignment - choose the Align Panels button. Panels are numbered from the left across the main section of the box. They are determined from the crease lines. You can select two panels to align and the condition for alignment. In each case, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge. Rotation •Set the Rotate Alternate Rows option to rotate every other row of designs by 180 degrees •Set the Rotate Alternate Columns option to rotate every other column of designs by 180 degrees

1.3.3.3

Multi Interlock Layout Options

The options for interlocking multiple designs are described in the following:Gutters •Set the X Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between horizontal copies •Set the Y Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between vertical copies

1.3.3.4

Multipart Layout Options

The options for multiple design layouts are described in the following:Trim •Set the trim. Trim Control Set the trim control option. Choose from:•No trim control •Cut trim •Remove trim

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-11

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Multi Interlock Only No further steps are required for multi interlock layout a solution will be chosen automatically. Click on Next to begin generating possible layouts. Once all layouts are generated, the wizard dialog will be closed and the best layout will be selected automatically and displayed in the drawing area. This is the final step and the command is complete.

1.3.4

Step 4 - Perform Layout (Not Multi Interlock) Now decide whether you wish KASEMAKE to automatically select the best solution or you wish to select a layout manually.

1.3.5

-

Set the automatically select best layout option, for a solution to be chosen automatically. Finally, click on Finish to begin generating possible layouts. Once all layouts are generated, the wizard dialog will be closed and the best layout will be selected automatically and displayed in the drawing area. This is the final step and the command is complete.

-

Alternatively, set the choose the best layout from a number of alternatives option to view the different layouts and allow you to select the one to use manually. Currently, the five best solutions are retained for you to choose from. Click on Next>> to begin generating the possible layouts. Once all layouts are generated, proceed to step 5.

Step 5 - Choosing A Layout The Choose Layout... dialog consists of a scrolling window containing a sequence of layout solutions. The most efficient solution is displayed first. Use the right most vertical scroll bar to move between the different layout solutions.

Each solution is displayed as in the diagram. The details of any rotation or offset applied are given at the head of the view. A scrolling list of properties for the corresponding layout are then given, including dimensions of the overall layout and offsets and rotations applied. The actual layout is displayed to the right of the property list. A Large Preview option is available for closer examination. If accessed, the layout will be placed in its own resizeable window.

Release 9.5 Page 8-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Optimise Menu KASEMAKE Choose Finish to select the layout currently in view. This solution will then be displayed in the KASEMAKE drawing area. Choose Cancel to throw away all the layouts and abandon the command.

2

Optimise Menu The Optimise commands are used to order elements prior to plotting/cutting to achieve an optimum path. This has the effect of radically reducing the time taken, for example, to cut and crease a sample as it minimises the number of wasted movements the cutting head makes moving between elements. Activating Optimise produces a sub-menu of commands as described in the following:-

2.1

Automatic

Command

Optimise Automatic

Menu

Tools->Optimise->Automatic (ALT T O A)

Toolbar button:

Tools Toolbar

Select this command with a drawing on screen. The system will pause and then the screen will redraw. The system has drawn the design in a new order giving an optimum path for the tool to follow. This is carried out ground by ground starting with ground 0. The reason for sorting items by ground/layer is that KASEMAKE drives plotters, sample tables etc. by allocating pens and tools to individual grounds. On a sample table the first two grounds drive the pen whilst the next ground drives the creasing wheel. By sorting the grounds we achieve optimal performance for each individual tool. For each ground in turn, the system sweeps the contents of the design and identifies all elements drawn in the ground being processed. Using this set of elements it takes a starting point, say a line, moves along the line until it finds its end and then looks for the nearest element to this end point, reversing the identified element if necessary so that its start point is the nearest point to the previous element’s end point. This process continues until all the items in that ground have been ordered. The system then considers the next ground until the entire drawing has been ordered. As soon as each ground is ordered, the ordered elements are stored so that at the end of the process the system has two versions of the design in memory, the original and the new sorted version. The original is now abandoned in favour of the new optimised version.

2.2

Manual

Command

Optimise Manual

Menu

Tools->Optimise->Manual (ALT T O M)

Toolbar button:

Not available

The manual command works in one of two ways, in conjunction with the Shift key where a start element is identified then a path is traced manually, or automatically. Each element being reversed automatically to form a continuous path. Alternatively this command can be used with the Ctrl key where each element is identified individually and the direction reversed manually by selecting an element again.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-13

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

2.2.1

Operation with the Shift Key This option allows you to trace a path manually or automatically and have the elements reverse direction automatically to form a continuous path. You are prompted to Mark an Element. Choose an element at the start of the path you wish to trace. Ensure that you hold down the Shift key whilst you pick a point near to the required element using the left mouse button. The chosen element will now be highlighted, direction arrows will be displayed for the entire design and you will be asked whether you wish to confirm each element in the path. Respond as follows:• Yes - If you wish the system to trace the path an element at a time, allowing you to confirm each element is the required one as the system identifies it • No - If you wish the system to trace the path automatically • Cancel - If you wish to restart the Optimise command If you choose Yes the system will identify an element at a time requesting confirmation for each element before it is added to the path. Choosing No causes the system to search for an alternative element. Elements are automatically reversed to form a continuous path.

2.2.2

Operation with the Ctrl Key This option allows you to trace a path one item at a time, reversing each element manually if required. You are prompted to Mark an Element. Choose an element at the start of the path you wish to trace. Ensure that you hold down the Ctrl key whilst you pick a point near to the required element using the left mouse button. The chosen element will now be highlighted, direction arrows will be displayed for the entire design and you will be prompted to mark the next element in the path. Continue to hold the Ctrl key and click on each element in turn to trace the desired path. The first Ctrl click identifies the element as it is stored. If you wish to reverse the direction of an element simply click near it a second time whilst holding down the Ctrl key. The element will reverse its direction with each subsequent click.

Release 9.5 Page 8-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Optimise Menu KASEMAKE

2.2.3

Completing Manual Optimisation Once you have identified a path click anywhere within the drawing area away from the selected elements. The Optimise dialog will now appear. In addition to reordering the selected elements as they have been identified, you are given the choice to move their position within the drawing list. Choose from:• Move to start of drawing - the ordered elements will be placed at the beginning of the drawing • Leave in place within drawing - the ordered elements will retain their original position within the drawing • Move to end of drawing - the ordered elements will be placed last in the drawing To close the dialog choose OK to reorder the elements and reposition them according to the above setting. Choose Cancel to stop the reordering. Choose Select More if you have brought up this dialog by mistake and wish to add to the current path. The command is self repeating you can identify further paths in the same way.

2.3

Slot Optimise Command

Slot Optimise

Menu

Tools->Optimise->Slot Optimise (ALT T O S)

Toolbar button:

Not available

The Slot Optimise command is provided to optimise slots within the design. The Optimise command will produce a path which cuts into one side of the slot and out of the other side of the slot. However, when the design is cut, the tool will cut into the slot as required but as it starts to cut the other side coming out of the slot, the material will drag and tear. To avoid this, we have provided the Slot Optimise command, which will override the main optimisation for slots in a specific ground within certain constraints. Activate the command. A table is displayed containing a list of visible grounds used by the current design and corresponding actions to take for each ground.

-

First set the parameters which determine if two lines form a slot or in fact are just part of an angled flap or some other part of the design.

• Maximum Slot Width – This is the maximum distance between two lines to consider. If the distance between the two lines exceeds this value, the lines will be assumed to be part of the design rather than a slot • Tolerance Angle – This is the maximum angle between two lines to consider. If the two lines are at an angle greater than this value, they will not be regarded as a slot

-

Alongside the ground name is a column labelled action. Each action field is actually a combo box containing the possible actions to take for the corresponding ground. Click in the field to activate the combo control. The available actions are displayed as follows:-

• None – No action is required for this ground • Optimise – optimise the ground in the normal way • Slot Optimise – search the ground for possible slots as per the given criteria and optimise as described above.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-15

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

-

Set the action fields appropriately.

Finally click on OK to carry out any optimisation as defined by the action fields. The result of this command can be seen by switching the indication arrows on. Refer to Tools->Direction>Indicate on page 8-20 for further details.

-

2.4

Click on Cancel to abandon this command.

Optimise and Order Command

Optimise and Order

Menu

Tools->Optimise->Optimise and Order (ALT T O O)

Toolbar button:

Not available

The Optimise And Order command is used to define different optimisation methods for individual grounds and to set the order in which one or more grounds are to be handled. Without optimisation all elements in the design are processed ground by ground in order. Specifying a method of optimisation allows grounds to be processed in any given order. Grounds can also be processed in a non-specific order. E.g. to optimise laser cutting, instead of burning all 2 pt first and then all 3 pt, both pointages can be burnt at the same time, swapping from one to the other, whichever line is closest. Activate the Optimise And Order command. The Optimise and Re-Order dialog is displayed:-

Release 9.5 Page 8-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Optimise Menu KASEMAKE Select the table of settings to be changed from the filename drop down. The Standard and None tables of settings cannot be changed, so you may need to choose the Add New... option to define a new table of settings. The use of this option is described on page 17. The optimised grounds can be put in to one of two lists:• grounds plotted by order - where you specify the order in which the grounds are plotted • grounds plotted in any order - where the plot order is not important. .In order to change the contents of the ground lists, you must first engage the Allow Edit command. Once this is engaged, the Add>>, All>>, , to move all grounds to the grounds plotted in any order list.. Choose Convert To Arcs

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

This command searches the entire design for a sequence of joined short line segments. It then attempts to combine them into a single arc using the options defined in File->Preferences. Before activating this command you should check the Settings page of the Preferences dialog to ensure they are correct. See “Settings” on page 2-46. Activate the Convert to Arcs command. The entire design will now be scanned for connected line segments. Where a conversion is possible using the current settings, an arc will be inserted into the design in place of the identified line sequence.

7

Direction Sub-Menu Within KASEMAKE we can control the direction of each drawn item. This can be of critical importance when sample making as there are certain cutting operations that require manual intervention to produce the best possible samples. An example of this would be when a case with long slots is cut. The slots themselves must be cut into the box, i.e. towards the main panels. To achieve this we have included two commands, the first to display the direction of the lines and the second to reverse them. In addtion, there is a command to indicate the side to be bevelled where appropriate.

7.1

Indicate

Command

Indicate

Menu

Tools >Direction->Indicate (Alt T T I)

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

On selecting the Indicate command an arrow head is placed at the mid point of each element in the design. The arrow head points from the start of the line / arc towards its end point, thus identifying the direction that it was drawn in. To remove the arrows from the screen simply select Indicate again. The screen will redraw but this time without the arrow heads.

Release 9.5 Page 8-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Direction Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

7.2

Indicate Bevels Command

Indicate Bevels

Menu

Tools >Direction->Indicate Bevels (Alt T T B)

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Indicate Bevels command is provided to give visual confirmation of where any bevelling will be positioned. On selecting the Indicate Bevels command small strokes appear along the edge of any elements in the design indicating which side of the element will be bevelled. To remove these strokes from the screen simply select Indicate Bevels again. The screen will redraw but this time without the strokes. The design should be optimised to give the best results for bevelling. Any conflicts can then be resolved using the Reverse command described in the next section. An example of the results of Indicate Bevels on an optimised design is shown. There are three areas of conflict labelled A, B and C.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-21

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

Each area of conflict A, B and C can now be resolved by selecting the elements which are wrong and using the Reverse command to correct them. The results are as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 8-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Direction Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

7.3

Reverse

Command

Reverse

Menu

Tools->Direction->Reverse (Alt T T R)

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

To use this command you should first have a drawing on screen with direction arrows switched on.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-23

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Before activating the command, select an item or items whose direction you wish to reverse, using the standard selection techniques. Activate the Reverse command. All selected lines and arcs will immediately reverse direction. For visual confirmation you will notice that all arrow heads now point in the opposite direction.

7.4

Simulate Order

Command

Simulate Order

Menu

Tools->Direction->Simulate Order

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Simulate Order command is included in the Direction Sub-Menu. This provides a visual confirmation of the plotting sequence to ensure that there are no problems with optimisation before the design is cut /plotted. The Simulate Order command is identical to the Plot Simulate function provided with the Plot dialog. Please refer to “Simulate...” on page 2-28 for a full explanation of how to use this command.

8

End Markers Sub Menu Activate the End Markers Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to End Markers:-

8.1

Show End Markers Command

Show / Hide End Markers

Menu

Tools >End Markers->Show/Hide End Markers

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

This command will display a small marker at the start and end of every element in your design. This enables you to establish whether a Line or Arc is a single element or made up of small elements. It can also be useful if you are unsure where one element ends and another element begins and can help you find lock points on an awkward shape. It also places a marker at the centre of any arcs in the design. Activate this command, the markers will now be illustrated as small circles. To switch off the end markers, simply select the command again.

8.2

Setup Display End Markers Command

Setup Display End Markers

Menu

Tools->End Markers->Setup Display End Markers

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command works in conjunction with the Show End Markers command. It allows you to control which end markers are identified when the Show End Markers command is used.

Release 9.5 Page 8-24

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Manipulate Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate the Setup Display End Markers command. The following dialog will now be displayed:-.

Determine whether you want to include line end points, arc end points and arc centre points by setting or clearing the corresponding check box. Finally click on OK to save the new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes.

9

Manipulate Sub-Menu Manipulate is a group of commands included to make certain basic movements of the design very easy. On selecting Manipulate the following 3 commands appear.

9.1

Flip

Command

Flip

Menu

Tools->Manipulate->Flip (Alt T P F)

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

It is common for someone who has just drawn a corrugated case to want to produce a diagram of the job with the print face up. This command has been included to provide the easiest way to effect such a change as it mirrors the current drawing about its vertical axis. To execute the command first have a drawing on screen. Now activate the command. With no further intervention the whole design is mirrored in the vertical plane. This command will also work with the current selection set.

9.2

Rotate 90

Command

Rotate 90

Menu

Tools->Manipulate->Rotate 90 (Alt T P R)

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

When selected this command rotates all elements on display through 90 degrees anti clockwise. All elements are rotated about the centre of the design. The command is intended for use in conjunction with sample making when the design on screen is not correctly orientated for the flute of the material on the table. Instead of turning the material it is simpler to turn the design. This command will work on the current selection set, if one exists.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-25

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

9.3

Rotate -90

Command

Rotate -90

Menu

Tools->Manipulate->Rotate -90 (Alt T P O)

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

Rotate -90 works exactly as Rotate 90 but rotates the elements 90 degrees clockwise.

9.4

Rotate 45

Command

Rotate 45

Menu

Tools->Manipulate->Rotate 45

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

Rotate 45 works exactly as Rotate 90 but rotates the elements 45 degrees anti-clockwise.

9.5

Rotate -45

Command

Rotate -45

Menu

Tools->Manipulate->Rotate -45

Toolbar Button:

Edit Toolbar

Rotate -45 works exactly as Rotate 45 but rotates the elements 45 degrees clockwise.

10

Tool Passes Sub-Menu On selecting this menu two commands are available. The first to set or Edit the number of tool passes and the second to show graphically how many times the tool is set to pass over each element in the design.

10.1

Edit (Tool Passes) Command

Edit Number of Tool Passes

Menu

Tools >Tool Passes->Edit... (Alt T S E)

Toolbar Button:

Not available

KASEMAKE allows you to control the number of times an individual item is cut by a knife or creased by a creasing wheel. Its most common use is in creasing heavier grade boards where a single pass would not be sufficient to create a good crease. The system is also able to distinguish between elements that are basically horizontal or vertical, as the creasing requirement of materials with the board grain or flute is radically different from that across the board grain or flute.

-

Release 9.5 Page 8-26

Before setting the number of passes, first have a design on screen. Now using any of the selection methods select part or all of the design. The most common method is to use the Pick Ground command, identify a single crease and thus select all of the creases.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Tool Passes Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

-

Now select Tool Passes Edit. The following dialog box is displayed.

From this dialog you can set the number of passes, whether to multipass only horizontal or vertical lines or both, and you can set the angle up to which the system decides whether the line is vertical or horizontal.

-

10.2

When you have set all the options click on OK and the multi passes will be imposed on the design. Their effect will only be seen when plotting or cutting, at which time the tools will pass over the chosen items the requested number of times.

Display (Tool Passes) Command

Display the Number of Tool Passes

Menu

Tools->Tool Passes->Display... (Alt T S D)

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Having set the system to pass several times over a range of items it will often be necessary to change the number of passes for some elements. To do this you must first be able to see how many passes are being made. Activate this command. The system draws an arrow head at the mid point of each element to indicate one pass. The number of arrow heads displayed for an element corresponds to how many times the tool will pass over it. If there is one arrow head then the tool passes once only, if three then the tool passes three times and so on. On selecting the command the following dialog box appears.

You must first tell the system which part of the design to illustrate with the pass arrow heads and then tell it how many passes to display. First set the scope option. Click on the required setting as follows:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-27

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE • All - display the tool passes which fit the specified criteria taking into account all elements in the design • Selection - display the tool passes which fit the specified criteria taking into account only the selected elements • None - remove any tool pass arrow heads which are currently displayed Now determine the number of passes to illustrate. Set the number of elements passed option to the required value either by typing directly, or by scrolling with the arrows. Finally determine the criteria for displaying tool passes. Choose from:• Exactly - only elements with exactly the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed • More - only elements with at least the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed • Less - only elements with less than the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed E.g. The system can show all lines with 2 passes, or all lines with less than 2 passes or all lines with more than 2. Having set the parameters select OK and the arrow heads will appear on those elements which satisfy the chosen criteria.

11

Mount Sub Menu The Mount Sub-Menu provides access to commands relating to bevelling. These include bevel definition formerly located through the Plotting Setup dialog and additional commands for generating offset paths where a vgroove effect is required and a command for reversing the path of the bevel tool.

11.1

Bevel

Command

Bevel

Menu

Tools->Mount->Bevel

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

This command allows you to define bevelling profiles and optimise the order of design elements ground by ground in preparation for bevelling. Elements in a given ground can also be reversed where necessary.

Release 9.5 Page 8-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mount Sub Menu KASEMAKE Activate the Bevel command. The following Bevel Definition Table dialog will now be displayed:-

Bevel Profile Determine which profile to use by choosing from the drop down list. To create a new profile first click on the Add button you will then be prompted for a name for the profile. Enter a suitable name then click on OK. Any changes you make will affect your newly created profile. To delete a profile, ensure it is the current profile by selecting from the drop down list if necessary. Click on Delete. You will be prompted for confirmation that you wish to delete this profile as once confirmed the profile will be permanently removed.

Front/Back Surface Plotting Determine whether you wish to plot on the front or back surface of the board by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-29

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

Tool Settings Access the tool settings if you wish to define the charactersitics / behaviour of the bevel tool:-

Bevel Knife Angle Set the angle of the knife blade by typing directly or scrolling with the arrows.

Max Angle before lifting Set the maximum angle to allow the blade to move through before it should be lifted. Again type the value directly or scroll with the arrows.

Overrun Angle on Circles For a smooth finish on circles / ellipses it is advisable to let the bevel tool overrun as sometimes a stepped effect can arise where the tool enters and leaves at the same position. It also ensures that the entire circle / ellipse is cut completely where a slow in pen is used. This setting controls the additional angle to rotate through for any overrun. Type a suitable angle directly or scroll to it with the arrows.

Bevel Overcut To compensate for mechanical wear and tear it is sometimes necessary to overcut to ensure all cuts on the top surface meet correctly. This setting controls the distance to overcut. Type a suitable value or scroll with the arrows.

Bevel Undercut It is sometimes necessary to undercut i.e. start to cut before the start of an element to ensure all cuts meet correctly. This setting controls the distance to undercut. Type a suitable value or scroll with the arrows.

Slow-In Pen A Slow In pen where available is one which gradually cuts into the material rather than starting to cut from maximum depth. This can be useful for getting a smoother cut particularly on circles. Use Slow-In Pen This setting determines whether the Slow In pen is to be used or not (where available). Set or clear the check box as appropriate.

Release 9.5 Page 8-30

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Mount Sub Menu KASEMAKE Use Slow-In Pen on VGrooves This setting determines whether the Slow In pen is to be used when cutting a vgroove path. Set or clear this option as required. Slow-In Pen This setting is used to determine which pen has slow in capability.

Bevel / Reverse / V Groove Click in the appropriate column to select either a Bevel or a V Groove cut for each individual ground. Each element in this ground will now be reordered and bevels will be placed on it according to its direction. Click in the Reverse column to reverse the direction of any lines drawn in the corresponding ground. Consequently, the side of the line where any bevelling is placed will change.

Finally click on OK to close the Bevel Definition Table dialog and keep the elements in the new order. Choose Cancel to abandon any changes made to the ordering of the elements.

11.2

VGroove

Command

V Groove

Menu

Tools->Mount->V Groove

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

This command allows you to generate one or more paths offset from a given path which are to be cut with a V Groove effect. It enables a v groove effect to be achieved for complicated outlines with intricate parts which the bevel tool cannot access. Activate this command. Set the options as appropriate. You will now be prompted to mark a boundary element. Identify an element in the boundary you wish to offset the new path(s) from by clicking near to it. The nearest element will now be drawn in the current selection colour to confirm that it has been identified. Next you will be prompted to confirm that the correct element has been identified. If the element is the correct one, click near to the element again to confirm that it is correct. KASEMAKE will now automatically identify a path starting from the given element and will create the new path(s) offset from this path using the current options. If the selected element is incorrect, simply choose Select Next from the right hand popup menu. Alternatively choose Reset from this popup menu or from the Edit menu to start the command again.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-31

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

11.2.1

Options The following options are available with the VGroove command:-

Number of V-Grooves First determine how many paths you wish to generate. Type in the number directly or use the arrows to scroll.

Offset Offset determines the distance to position the newly generated path from the chosen path if it is the first offset or from the previously generated path for all subsequent offsets. Type the offset directly or use the arrow keys to scroll. A negative value can be used if the generated path is required internal to the given path rather than external to it.

Ground This value determines which ground to place the generated path in. Choose from the drop down list by clicking on the arrow and dragging the cursor over the required ground.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

11.3

Reverse Bevel Path Command

Reverse Bevel Path

Menu

Tools->Mount->Reverse Bevel Path

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Reverse Bevel Path command allows you to reverse the direction of a path which is to be bevelled. It also swaps the bevelling from the outside to the inside or vice versa. Activate this command. You will now be prompted to mark a boundary element. Identify an element in the bevel path by clicking near to it. The nearest element will now be drawn in the current selection colour to confirm that it has been identified. Next you will be prompted to confirm that the correct element has been identified. If the element is the correct one, click near to the element again to confirm that it is correct. KASEMAKE will

Release 9.5 Page 8-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Cut & Crease Sub Menu KASEMAKE now automatically identify the complete bevel path starting from the given element and will reverse its direction. In addition the bevelling side will flip. If the selected element is incorrect, simply choose Select Next from the right hand popup menu. Alternatively choose Reset from this popup menu or from the Edit menu to start the command again.

12

Cut & Crease Sub Menu Cut & Crease is a combination of cuts and creases used to make cardboard easier to bend. It is especially difficult with thicker grades of board to create a clean, sharp crease without bursting through the material. This task is greatly eased by adding to the crease a partial cut or perforation. The Cut/Crease commands allow this to be done with ease. Activate the Cut & Crease Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to Cut & Crease:-

12.1

Specify

Command

Specify

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Specify

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

Before choosing this command, load the design that requires combined cuts and creases. Cut & Crease can be applied to either single elements or alternatively, in line with standard design philosophy that all creases are generally contained in a designated ground, it can be applied to a group of elements contained within a particular ground or layer, simultaneously. Thus, the starting point for both methods is a line or lines designated as being creases, which is normally Ground 2 on the KASEMAKE system. Decide whether you are working with individual lines and arcs or all elements within a specific ground and select these elements using an appropriate Select command. Activate the Specify command. The Cut & Crease / Perforate dialog is displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-33

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

Decide whether you require Cut/Crease where cuts are superimposed on to the crease or Perforate where the cuts replace the crease and click on the corresponding radio button to set it. Cut Ground Next select the Ground that will contain the generated Cuts from the drop down list. You should choose a ground normally associated with cutting. Do not choose the same ground that contains the cut which releases the design from the surrounding board. Select a ground that precedes the final cut, say Ground 4. Cut Offset The next decision to make is how long to make the Run In. When any creased item has cuts imposed on it, it is normal that the cut is not allowed to extend to the extremes of the line. To ensure that this does not happen both ends of the crease are left free of cuts. The free area is known as the Run In. The length of the Run In is the same at both ends of the crease. This distance may typically be set at 5 mm. In the case of thicker boards this value may be increased. Set the Run In or Cut Offset by typing the required offset directly or using the arrows to scroll to the required value. In addition the following settings are available for Cut/Crease only:Crease Ground Select the Ground that will contain the generated Creases from the drop down list. You should choose a ground normally associated with creases.

Release 9.5 Page 8-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Cut & Crease Sub Menu KASEMAKE Full Crease Determine whether you wish to have one crease line for the entire length of the line or individual lines representing each crease. Set or clear this option as appropriate. Tickmark Ground Tick marks can be placed on elements to help to distinguish the start and end of each cut more easily. A separate command to toggle the display of the tick marks is provided. Set the ground to use to display these tick marks. This will be a ground that can be switched off before the design is plotted as the tick marks are purely a visual aid. Choose a suitable ground for the tick marks from the drop down list. Tickmark Size This is the size to use for each tick mark. Set the size required by typing the value directly or using the arrows to scroll to it.

12.1.1

Cut Type Now choose the principle for defining the resulting Cut / Crease. Three methods are available:• Cut by Length - where you determine the resulting cuts by specifying the length of each cut taking into account any overcut adjustments • Cut by Number - where you determine the number of cuts for each element. • Even spacing - where you determine the number of cuts and whether you wish to have cuts or creases at either end. The cut and crease lengths will then be calculated to ensure that they are equally spaced throughout the selected line. Click on the corresponding radio button to set the required method.

12.1.1.1 Cut by Length If you elect to define the length of the cut you should now define the following values:Cut Specify the length of each cut by typing the appropriate values directly, or by using the arrows to scroll to the required value. Overcut Adjust Set the adjustment to apply to each cut to compensate for any overcut. Type the value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll. Uncut Specify the length to leave uncut between each cut i.e. the length of crease between cuts. Set these values by typing the appropriate values directly, or by using the arrows to scroll to the required value. Overcut Set the adjustment to apply to each uncut section to compensate for any adjustments made to the cut lengths. Type the value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

12.1.1.2

Cut by Number

If you elect to define the number of cuts you should define the following values:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-35

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE No of Cuts Specify the number of cuts to use. Set the required value by typing directly, or by using the arrows to scroll. Cut/Uncut Ratio You must also fix the ratio of cut to crease. The ratio determines how many times longer the cut is than the crease. Set these values by typing the appropriate values directly, or by using the arrows to scroll to the required value.

12.1.1.3

Even Spacing

If you choose even spacing, you should define the following values:No of Cuts Specify the number of cuts to use. Set the required value by typing directly, or by using the arrows to scroll. Cut At End You must also determine whether to start and end with a cut or a crease line. Set this option if you wish to start with a cut line, clear it if you wish to start with a crease line. Note:

12.1.2

The Cut Offset field mentioned above and Variable Parameter section outlined next, are not applicable to this method.

Variable Parameter Since Cut/Crease and Perforate are applied to elements of varying length it is not possible to apply the cut offset and cut and crease values exactly. It is necessary to adjust one of these values to apply the cut and crease correctly to an individual element. The variable parameter option allows you to determine which of the three values to adjust. Click on the corresponding radio button to choose whether you wish to automatically adjust :•Offset - the end sections will be adjusted •Cut - the cut lengths will be adjusted •Uncut - the crease lengths will be adjusted Click on OK to accept the settings and apply the Cut & Crease. The selected elements will have cuts superimposed or will be replaced by a sequence of cuts according to whether Cut/Crease or Perforate has been chosen.

12.1.3

Examples 12.1.3.1 Example 1 - Cut by Length Method This example illustrates the Cut by Length method where you define the length of each Cut and each Crease.

-

Draw a line on the screen 95 mm long. Now set the Cut Offset to 5 mm and the Cut to 10 mm and the Uncut to 5 mm. The system now knows that you want an offset at each end of the line of 5 mm, a cut length of 10 mm and a crease distance of 5 mm. It also knows that the length of the line to which you are applying Cut / Crease is 95 mm. From this information the system will calculate that six cuts are possible, with 5 creases between them, taking into account the offset of 5 mm at each end:

Release 9.5 Page 8-36

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Cut & Crease Sub Menu KASEMAKE (6 x 10 (cut)) + (5 x 5 (crease)) + (2 x 5 (offset)) = Total line length 60+25+10=95 mm On screen you will see the offset and creases shown in the Crease layer (Ground 2) and the cuts overlaid in the Counter layer (Ground 4). This example works on values that conveniently divide into the overall length. Let us now look at applying the values to a line not exactly divisible. We can achieve this by applying exactly the same parameters to a line 55 mm long.

-

Now the system knows that this line of 55 mm does not divide so easily. However, it carries out the following calculation:

Length of line = 55 mm Offset = 5 mm Less 2 x offset = 10 mm Line to be Cut / Creased 45 mm Cut Length = 10 mm Crease Length = 5 mm Max. no of cuts = 3 = 30 mm Max. no of creases = 2 = 10 mm Remainder 5 mm The remainder is then apportioned to either the offset, cut lines or crease length depending on what was identified as the variable parameter. The basis for variable cut is: ((SPECIFIED CUT LENGTH / TOTAL CUT/CREASE ACHIEVED)x REMAINDER) + SPECIFIED CUT LENGTH Therefore, (10/40 x 5) + 10 (1/4 x 5) + 10 1.25 + 10 Therefore, actual cut length = 11.25 mm. For variable crease it is: ((SPECIFIED CREASE LENGTH / TOTAL CUT/CREASE ACHIEVED) x REMAINDER) + SPECIFIED CREASE LENGTH Therefore, (5/40 x 5) + 5 (1/8 x 5) + 5 0.625+ 5 Therefore, actual crease length = 5.625 mm.

12.1.3.2 Example 2 - Cut by Number Method The second method of defining Cut / Crease is to specify the number of cuts to be imposed on the crease line, irrespective of the length of line involved and the resultant length of cut as a ratio to the crease length.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-37

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Using this method, you first set the Run In distance, as previously described. Then set the number of Cuts and finally the ratio of Cut length to Crease length. This ratio simply states that each cut is to be twice as long as each crease or each crease three times as long as each cut etc.

-

How many cuts do you want to place on the line? Type 8 in the appropriate field.

-

Next decide in what proportion you want the cuts to be to the creases? If the proportion is CUT = 2 x CREASE then type 2 in the appropriate field. If CUT = 3 x CREASE then type 3_ and so on. For this example Type 2. The system will now generate 8 cut lines which are each twice as long as the 7 crease lines, all running between the fixed 5 mm offset at each end. The calculation is: Line length = 95 mm Offset = 5 mm 2 x Offset = 10 mm Cut Crease Total 85 mm Total No. Cuts = 8 Total No. Creases = 7 Apply Ratio Of Cuts To Creases Cuts x 8 x 2 = 16 Creases x 7 x 1 = 7 Total Units 23 To establish unit length calculate Total Cut/Crease Length = 85 Total No. of Units

23

Therefore, Unit Value = 3.69565 mm Crease Length =3.69565 mm Cut Length = 7.39130 mm Offset = 5 mm Cut and Crease can be applied to arcs in exactly the same manner.

12.2

Display

Command

Display

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Display

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command toggles the display of cut/crease information for all the elements within the current design. Simply activate this command to switch the cut/crease information on and off. Note:

Release 9.5 Page 8-38

Cut & crease elements can be exploded into their constituent elements using the Arrange->Explode command. This will automatically place the constituent elements in a group to ease subsequent manipulation.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Cut & Crease Sub Menu KASEMAKE

12.3

Display Labels

Command

Display Labels

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Display Labels

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command toggles the display of any labels associated with cut/crease information for all the elements within the current design. Simply activate this command to switch the cut/crease labels on and off.

12.4

Label Options

Command

Label Options

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Label Options

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command allows you to define the way labels associated with cut/crease information are displayed. Simply activate this command to display the Cut & Crease label options dialog as follows:-

Cut & crease text Type the string to be used to label any Cut & Crease information within the design if labels are displayed. Perforation text Type the string to be used to label any Perforation information within the design if labels are displayed. Text Size Set the size of text to use for the cut/crease or perforation label. Type the value directly or use the arrows to scroll. Text Ground An additional setting is now available to determine which ground to display the label in.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-39

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Set the ground to use to display the cut/crease or perforation label. Choose an appropriate ground from the drop down list. Label Here you define the information to include in the label and any spacing or punctuation. Keywords must be enclosed in angled brackets and will have their calculated values substituted. e.g. will display the actual cut length applied.

12.5

Display Tickmarks Command

Display Tickmarks

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Display Tickmarks

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command toggles the display of tick marks which form part of the cut/crease information applied to designated elements within the current design. Simply activate this command to switch the tick marks on and off.

12.6

Remove

Command

Remove

Menu

Tools->Cut & Crease->Remove

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Remove command allows you to identify one or more elements which have had cut / crease rule applied to them and remove the cut / crease properties, thereby restoring the original element. Select the element(s) you wish to remove the cut / crease properties from using an appropriate Select command. Activate the Remove command. The cut & crease / perforate properties are now removed and the original element(s) restored.

13

Zipper Sub Menu The Zipper commands allow the application of a pattern defining zipper or tear edge rule.Activate the Zipper Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to zipper rule:-

13.1

Specify Zipper Rule Command

Specify Zipper Rule

Menu

Tools->Zipper->Specify Zipper Rule

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Zipper rule can be applied to one or more lines simultaneously. Decide whether you are working with individual lines or all lines within a specific ground and select these elements using an appropriate Select command prior to activating this command.

Release 9.5 Page 8-40

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Zipper Sub Menu KASEMAKE Activate the Specify Zipper Rule command. The Zipper Rule dialog is displayed:-

The Zipper Rule dialog is divided into three areas. The left side of the dialog is subdivided into a preview area at the top displaying the currently selected zipper style. Beneath the preview area is a command area. The right hand section is a style selection area.

13.1.1

Zipper Style First identify the zipper style you wish to use. This can be done in one of two ways:• Zipper Style Combo - Select the style by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the drop down list of available styles. • Style Selection Area - Scroll through the list of available styles then clicking on it to select it. Whichever method is used, the chosen style will be displayed in the preview area and the variable section will be updated to display any variables applicable to the chosen style. In addition the zipper style combo or style selection area will be updated to reflect the chosen style depending which method was used.

13.1.2

Variables Scroll through the variable list and make any adjustments to the variables as necessary. Simply click on a value to change it and type the new value directly. Finally click on OK to close the dialog and accept the new style.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-41

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE You will now be prompted to identify the origin for the zipper rule. This is a start point for the zipper rule to be generated from. Mark a point close to where you would like the rule to be generated from. KASEMAKE will now apply the chosen zipper style to any selected line(s).

13.1.3

Alterations to Zipper Rule Line(s) which have already had zipper rule applied can be adjusted by first selecting the applicable line(s) then activating this command again. Fine adjustments can then be made to the variables. On completion of the command as described above, the zipper rule will be regenerated taking into account any adjustments made.

13.2

Display Zipper Rule Command

Display Zipper Rule

Menu

Tools->Zipper->Display Zipper Rule

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command toggles the display of zipper rule for all the lines within the current design. Simply activate this command to switch the zipper rule on and off. Note:

A tick is displayed next to the command name in the menu to confirm that zipper rule is currently set to be displayed. If zipper rule display is switched off, the tick is removed from the command name in the menu.

Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish to be available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described as Mix and Match (Pallet) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page 2-49.

13.3 Defining Zipper Rule The first step to be able to specify Zipper Rule is to define the zipper pattern. The zipper pattern is based on a standard parametric design, but the first point defined for the pattern is critical. It is this point that will be used to determine the position of each repeat for the zipper style. The first point defined for the pattern will normally be the left-hand point. The parameterised design needs to include two points. The first will be used as the origin point or starting point from where the pattern will be generated. The second point determines the extent of the pattern. Each pattern will have a set of variables. Any major variables which will require adjustment to redefine the zipper style should be given prompts with meaningful names, e.g. Vertical spacing. For each pattern there must be a variable defined called PW. This is the pattern width and should be set to the horizontal size of the pattern. e.g. in the above example, FULLZIPPERLENGTH is the controlling variable for the horizontal width. Steps involved in creating a Zipper Pattern File can be summarised as:• Create a new PARAMETRIC file which contains the elements which make up the pattern.

Release 9.5 Page 8-42

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Zipper Sub Menu KASEMAKE • Define variables. Any variables used when defining the pattern should be given prompts with meaningful names. A variable must be included for pattern width, named PW, it should be the overall width of the pattern. • Define the parametric relationship between elements. • Define two control points. The first will be used as the origin point or starting point from where the pattern will be generated. The second point determines the extent of the pattern. Once the design is complete, the PARAMETRIC command TOP LOCK POINT must be used. This should be used when the file is closed (i.e. not RECORDING) similar to the SET POINT tool. With this tool selected, the origin point of the pattern must be identified. Similarly, the right most point defining the extent of the pattern must also be identified. This process adds a series of definitions in the CMF file: TOP-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 1, CENTRE = P7 } TOP-LOCK-POINT{ TYPE = 2, CENTRE = P8 } This is now a working PARAMETRIC that will form the basis of the zipper rule. To make a preview of the zipper pattern, a drawing file with the same name as the CMF file must be saved. Ideally this will have the main variables labelled as dimensions. e.g.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-43

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE :

These files (.CMF, .VAR and .AGD) should be stored in an appropriate folder as specified in the file locations section of preferences. Please see “File Locations” on page 2-49.

Release 9.5 Page 8-44

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Counters Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

14

Counters Sub-Menu The counters sub menu gives access to commands which assist in the production of counter dies. The commands available are as follows:-

14.1

Sample Counter

Command

Sample Counter

Menu

Tools->Counters->Sample Counter

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Sample Counter... command generates counter channels for any crease lines in the design. Separate channel widths can be used for horizontal and vertical creases in recognition that a larger channel width is required when working against the grain of the board than with the grain. The channels can then be cut out to produce a sample counter which can be positioned between the table cutting bed and the board being used to make the sample. This ensures that when the sample is manufactured, the counters enable quality creases to be produced. Activate the command. The Counter dialog is displayed. This contains all the options which govern the production of the counter creasing cutouts.:-

14.1.1

Crease Ground Set the ground that contains the creases which require counter cutouts. Normally ground 2 or Crease, select from the drop down list.

14.1.2

Counter Ground Set the ground to contain the generated cut outs this should be a cut ground i.e. one assigned to the cutting tool.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-45

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

14.1.3

Horizontal Width This determines how wide to make any horizontal channel. The value to use should take account of the width of the creasing tool being used, the width of the material and whether you are creasing with or against the grain of the board. Set the horizontal width by typing the value directly or scrolling with the arrows to the required value.

14.1.4

Vertical Width This determines how wide to make any vertical channel. Again, the value to use should take account of the width of the creasing tool being used, the width of the material and whether you are creasing with or against the grain of the board. Set the vertical width by typing the value directly or scrolling with the arrows to the required value.

14.1.5

Channel Offset How far to offset the cut out from either end of the crease line to avoid overlap. Click on OK and the counter channels or cut outs will be displayed according to the settings.

14.2

Chamfer Guide

Command

Chamfer Guide

Menu

Tools->Counters->Chamfer Guide

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Use this command to produce an outline for the chamfer tool to follow when producing a matrix or counter die. Activate the Chamfer Guide command. Check or set the options. The chamfer guide should be positioned using the creases and ensure that the matrix when produced is within the external profile of the design so does not interfere with the cutting tool. The system will automatically select the Snap to Endpoint mode and you will be prompted for the end of the first crease line. A snap cursor will also appear which will follow the cursor indication the nearest endpoint to any given cursor position. Mark the end of a crease line around which you wish to generate a chamfer guide by clicking with the mouse close to the desired end. The system will automatically adjust the given point. You will now be prompted for the second point. This can either be the other end of the crease line previously identified, or the end of a different crease line. Mark the point as before. Again, the Snap to Endpoint mode will be automatically set and the point adjusted accordingly. Finally you will be prompted for a point to determine which side of the crease line to generate the chamfer guide. Mark a point away from the crease line. The chamfer guide will now appear in Ground 8 as per the options.

14.2.1

Chamfer Guide Options The options determining the appearance of the chamfer guide can be set as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 8-46

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Counters Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

14.2.1.1 Radius This is the radius of the filleted corners of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

14.2.1.2 Distance This is the height of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

14.2.1.3 Angle This is the angle of the chamfer sides. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

14.3

Die board/counter locating holes Command

Die board/counter locating holes

Menu

Tools->Counters->Die board/counter locating holes

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command provides a way of placing locating holes for the counter and die board manually on the design. The locating hole is stored as a system symbol the design of which can be changed via the tool options. Activate the Die board/counter locating holes command. You will now be prompted for the origin of the locating hole. The symbol currently being used to define a locating hole will be displayed as part of the cursor. Identify the origin point using any of the available drawing modes. The symbol currently representing locating holes will now be drawn at the given point.

14.3.1

Die board/counter locating holes Options Choose options to define the symbol to use for the locating hole. A picture of the symbol currently selected is displayed and the name of the part file containing the symbol. Choose a new symbol by clicking on the combo box and scrolling through the list of available parts. As you move through the list the corresponding symbol will be displayed to help you to select the correct one. Click on the name of the required symbol to select it. Choose OK to close the options dialog and select the new symbol. Cancel will abandon any changes.

14.4

Auto Counter Plate Command

Auto Counter Plate

Menu

Tools->Counters->Auto Counter Plate

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

A counter is attached to the lower plate of a die press and is used to improve creasing when working with folding carton board. It is made from a simple plastic sheet and has channels grooved into it which correspond with where the carton will be creased. When the carton is pressed, the carton material is pushed by the crease rule into the channels on the counter and

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-47

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE creates a more pronounced crease. The counter is always generated short of any cut outline to avoid conflict with the cut rule and ensure the carton board is cut through completely. To avoid marking of the carton board, the outline is milled with a bevel tool. The bevel path is offset to avoid encroaching into creasing channels. The Auto Counter Plate command generates the tool paths needed to make up the counter die or matrix to be used to manufacture the current design. Activate this command and the Matrix Options dialog is displayed. This contains the options which control the production of the counter die or matrix as follows:-

14.4.1

Chamfers A chamfer path will automatically be generated. The options determining the appearance of the chamfer guide can be set as follows:-

14.4.1.1 Offset This is the height of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

Release 9.5 Page 8-48

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Counters Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

14.4.1.2 Radius This is the radius of the filleted corners of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

14.4.1.3 Angle from creases This setting is used to determine the angle of the chamfer sides as far as possible. It is always applied where the chamfer is positioned between the ends of two creases and is measured from the crease. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

14.4.1.4 Angle from cuts This setting defines a minimum angle that the chamfer must be away from a cut. It is used where a chamfer is required along a crease. An attempt is made to place the chamfer at the angle specified by the angle from creases setting. If however the resulting angled chamfer is less than the angle from cuts value away from a cut line, the angle of the chamfer side is determined by the bisecting angle instead. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

Example: Angle from cuts and Angle from creases settings in practice

In scenario 2 where the chamfer is positioned from the ends of 2 creases the angle from crease value of 55 degrees is applied. In scenario 1 where the chamfer is positioned along a crease, the total angle is only 63.4 degrees so using an angle of 55 degrees would take the chamfer to within 8.4 degrees of a cut and as the angle from cuts value restricts this to within 30 degrees of a cut, the bisecting angle is used instead.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-49

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

14.4.2

Material Set the material being used for the board, to new or recycled material from the drop down list. The channel widths and matrix thickness will automatically be set as these depend upon the strength of the material.

14.4.3

Crease Rule Pointage Set the thickness of crease rule to be used for this job from the drop down list of available values.

14.4.4

Board Thickness Set the thickness of board to be used for this job from the drop down list.

14.4.5

Matrix Thickness mm This value is determined automatically as it depends on the type of material, board thickness and thickness of rule.

14.4.6

Grain Direction Set this to with the grain or against the grain by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Depending which value you choose, the channel widths will be adjusted since the vertical channel should be deeper when working with the grain of the board and the horizontal channel should be deeper when working against the grain of the board.

14.4.7

Horizontal Crease • Current Ground - Select the ground which is used for crease lines in the current design. This is normally ground 2 or Crease. • Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the creasing information to generate the horizontal creasing channels within the matrix. • Tool Diameter - Set this to the diameter of the creasing tool being used to produce the job. • Channel Width - The channel width will be set automatically taking into account material, board thickness, rule thickness and whether you are working with the grain of the board or against.

14.4.8

Vertical Crease • Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the creasing information to generate the vertical creasing channels within the matrix. • Tool Diameter - Set this to the diameter of the creasing tool being used to produce the job. • Channel Width - The channel width will be set automatically taking into account material, board thickness, rule thickness and whether you are working with the grain of the board or against it.

14.4.9

Extended Chamfer

• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path generated for the chamfer outline of the matrix. • Tool Diameter - The diameter used for the extended chamfer needs to make allowance for the maximum diameter of the chamfer tool and the angle of the tool, together with

Release 9.5 Page 8-50

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Counters Sub-Menu KASEMAKE the depth of the chamfer. It is used to determine the offset to leave to ensure the chamfer tool does not interfere with the creasing channels. Type in a suitable value. Alternatively, there is a calculation option to assist you with determining the correct value to choose. Click on the button if you wish KASEMAKE to assist you in calculating the diameter value. For further details, please refer to the Calculate Diameter section that follows. • Clearance - The minimum distance between the crease channel and the chamfer outline.

14.4.9.1 Calculate Diameter Option Accessing the Calculate button adjacent to the extended chamfer’s tool diameter field displays the Calculate Diameter dialog shown:-

Max tool diameter This is the maximum diameter of the chamfer tool. Type the appropriate value or use the arrow keys to scroll to it. Chamfer depth This is the depth of chamfer being produced. Type the appropriate value or use the arrow keys to scroll to it. Tool Angle This is the angle of the chamfer tool. Type the appropriate value or use the arrow keys to scroll to it. Calculated diameter This is the calculated value to use for the given tool parameters.

Click on OK to accept the calculated value and automatically enter it into the Extended Chamfer’s tool diameter field of the Matrix Options dialog.

14.4.10

Extended Profile • Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path for the generated profile of the matrix. This should be a cut ground and should be done after the

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-51

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE extended chamfer path has been processed. Since the KASEMAKE system processes information a ground at a time starting with ground 0, using a higher ground than that used for the extended chamfer path will ensure correct results.

14.4.11

Internal Chamfer

• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the chamfer path for internal cutouts to generate the horizontal creasing channels within the matrix. • Cut Angle • Cut Offset -

14.4.12

Internal Profile Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path to generate the profile for any internal cutouts for the matrix. This should be a cut ground and should be done after the internal chamfer path has been processed. As before, using a higher ground than that used for the internal chamfer path will ensure correct results. •Internal Offset - Set the distance between the internal cut and the profile path.

14.4.13

Simulation 14.4.13.1 Generate Simulation Set the Generate Simulation option, if you wish to simulate the production of the matrix on screen so that you can check clearances. This means you can avoid problems such as overlapping, making corrections before manufacturing the matrix. Clear this setting if you do not wish to simulate production of the matrix.

14.4.13.2 Simulation Ground Select the ground to place the simulated paths in from the drop down list.

Click on Apply... to generate the paths required to make the matrix which will enable the production of the design according to the given settings.

14.5

Simulate Matrix Crease... Command

Simulate Matrix Crease...

Menu

Tools->Counters->Simulate Matrix Crease...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Simulate Matrix Crease... command is useful where a twin V crease is required when making a sample. It allows you to identify a channel for each crease. This command assumes a single tipped tool is to be used and generates parallel tool paths to simulate the twin V channel. By allowing the channel width to be specified, twin V creases of varying widths can be catered for with a single tool tip. Activate this command. The Counter Matrix dialog is displayed:-

Release 9.5 Page 8-52

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Counters Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

The settings are defined as follows:-

14.5.1

Crease Ground Set this to correspond to the ground used in your design to represent crease lines. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available grounds. Scroll through the list to the required ground. Finally, click on it to select it.

14.5.2

Counter Ground Set this to correspond to the ground in which to place the tool path for the resulting crease channels. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available grounds. Scroll through the list to the required ground. Finally, click on it to select it.

14.5.3

Horizontal Width This is the width of channel to use for any horizontal crease lines. Type the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to the required value.

14.5.4

Vertical Width This is the width of channel to use for any vertical crease lines. Type the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to the required value.

Finally, click on OK to display the resulting tool path or Cancel to abandon the command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-53

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

14.6

Chamfer Edit

Command

Chamfer Edit

Menu

Tools->Counters->Chamfer Edit

Toolbar Button

Tools Toolbar

This command enbles the user to manually adjust the chamfer profile of the current design. Adjustments can be made either from the given end of an element or by moving an entire element. Activate this command. You will be prompted, Mark end of element to move (press SHIFT to select whole element). Identify an element within the chamfer profile by clicking near to the end of the element where you wish to make the adjustment. The nearest endpoint will be highlighted together with adjoining elements which make up that section of chamfer profile. Hold the SHIFT key down while you do this if you wish to adjust the entire element and both endpoints will be highlighted. Next you will be prompted, Identify Origin. This is the point to use to relocate the chamfer guide as everything will be repositioned with respect to the chosen point. Identify a suitable origin point using any of the available drawing modes. Now as you start to move the cursor the elements forming the chamfer guide will rubber band to reflect their new position. You are now prompted, Identify New Position. Identify a suitable position using any of the available drawing modes. The chamfer guide will now be adjusted to its new position and drawn in its original colour.

14.6.1

Right Hand Menu Options Two commands are available for use with this command and accessed by clicking with the right mouse button to display a pop up menu:-

Reset The reset command allows you to restart the chamfer edit command at any stage. Simply select this command from the pop up menu and the command will automatically restart ignoring any changes.

Generate Profile Once adjustments have been made to the chamfer profile, it is necessary to update the extended chamfer profile to reflect these changes. Access this command from the pop up menu to regenerate the extended chamfer profile.

14.7

Generate Chamfer Profile Command

Generate Chamfer Profile

Menu

Tools->Counters->Generate Chamfer Profile

Toolbar Button

Tools Toolbar

This command regenerates the extended chamfer profile taking into account any manual adjustments which have been made to the chamfer profile with the Chamfer Edit command.

Release 9.5 Page 8-54

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Compression KASEMAKE Simply activate the command. The profile will now be automatically regenerated taking into account the alterations made to the chamfer profile. This command is equivalent to Generate Profile accessed through the right hand pop up menu available with the Chamfer Edit command.

15

Compression

Command

Compression

Menu

Tools->Compression

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The compression command is used to calculate certain properties and strengths of a basic corrugated case. It produces estimated values, using theoretical calculations which assume ideal conditions for storage of paper used. In order to perform its calculations the compression command requires a .VLS file containing the weights in grams of the different paper used for making corrugated board. The file MATERIAL.VLS is supplied as a default file. Alternative files can be built up since the weights of paper will vary with the supplier. Activate this command. The Compression Options dialog will now appear. This is a tabbed dialog containing two pages of settings as follows:-

15.1

Compression Information The following set of options is available:• Safety Factor - this is related to the storage conditions the box will encounter. Choose from good, average and poor, clicking on the corresponding radio button to select it. • Case Length - the length of the case for which the information is to be calculated. Enter the value by typing directly or scroll with the arrows to the required value. • Case Width - the width of the case for which the information is to be calculated. Enter the value as before. • Select Required Material - Tables of values can be built up and saved for specific materials. A default material is supplied. Choose the required material from the drop down list of available materials.

15.1.1

Load CMP File The calculated compression values can be saved to a suitably named CMP file. These can then be viewed using this command. Click on the command button and the standard File Open dialog will appear requesting the name of the file to load. Enter the filename in the usual way. Then click OK. The previously saved table of compression values will now be displayed.

15.1.2

Load VLS File Use this command to load a different set of board weights for an alternative supplier.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-55

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Activate the command button. The standard File Open dialog will appear requesting the name of the file to load. Enter the filename in the usual way. Then click OK. The previously saved weights will now be loaded ready to use to define the material requirements of the job. Note:

15.2

You can create alternative.VLS files for different suppliers using a text editor and following the format of the default MATERIAL.VLS file.

Material Settings Click on the Material Settings tab to define the weights and type of paper to be used to make the corrugated board. The following options will appear:-

15.2.1

Board Type Are you using Single Wall, Double Wall or Triple Wall board? Click on the corresponding radio button to select the required board type. According to the board type some combination of the following settings will now become accessible.

15.2.2

Liner Type for Double Backer Set the liner paper to use for the double backer from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values. Alternative grammages can be loaded from the Compression Information page using the Load VLS option.

15.2.3

Liner Type for Single Facer Set the liner paper to use for the single facer from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values.

15.2.4

Flute Media Grammage Only CAA media is available for the flute currently. Set the grammage for this media from the drop down list of values.

15.2.5

Liner Type for Centre Liner Where double or triple wall board is to be used, a centre liner is required. Set the liner paper to use for the centre liner from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values.

15.2.6

Liner Type for Second Centre Where triple wall board is to be used, a second centre liner is required. Set the liner paper to use for the second centre liner from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values.

15.2.7

Save Material Details The newly defined material settings can be saved for future use with this type of material.

Release 9.5 Page 8-56

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Compression KASEMAKE Click on this command button. The name to use to identify this material is now requested. Type an appropriate name and click OK. This material will now be added to the list of materials available and can be accessed for use in future calculations using this material type via the Compression Information tab.

15.2.8

Delete Current Material This command removes the current material from the list of available materials. It should be used with care as no confirmation is required before the material and its definition are removed. However, you are not allowed to remove the DefaultTestMaterial which is the default material definition. Once you have defined the case to be used and the corrugated board composition and grammages, click on OK. The compression calculations will now be carried out based on the given values. The compression details will then be displayed.

15.2.9

Compression Details Dimensions of the case and details of the board type and composition with corresponding grammages are displayed. These are visual confirmation of the compression options previously set. A set of calculated values relating to the strength of the specified case are then displayed. A further explanation of some of these values now follows :• Maximum Case Compression Load - This is the maximum weight in Kg that the case will support on top of it. • Safe Case Load - This is the maximum weight in Kg that each box should safely hold. • Minimum Burst and Minimum E.C.T. (Edge Crush Test) - industry standard terms relating to the strength of a given box to withstand damage Once you have examined the values you have four commands available as follows:-

15.3

Save... Use this option to save the current set of values to a CMP file for future use. Activate the command. The File Save As dialog will now appear. Enter a filename for the CMP file in the usual way.

15.4

Print... The values can be printed using this command. Activate the command. The standard Print dialog is now displayed. Set up the printer in the usual way. You can also opt to print the values to file.

15.5

End Activate this command when you have finished examining the compression values and wish to terminate the Compression command.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-57

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

15.6

Proceed... This command returns you to the Compression Options dialog ready to define another set of details for a different case or material and carry out the corresponding compression calculations.

16

Stora Compression Command

Stora Compression

Menu

Tools->Stora Compression

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Stora compression command is used to calculate certain properties and strengths of a basic corrugated case. It produces estimated values, using theoretical calculations which assume ideal conditions for storage of paper used.

17

Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu

17.1

Add Frames...

Command

Add Frames...

Menu

Tools->Conveyor Plot->Add Frames...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Add Frames... command enables the current design to be divided up into a series of manageable frames in preparation for plotting to a KM Series conveyor plotter. Registration marks are optionally positioned with this command to enable each section of the design to be located relative to the previous one for a continuous plot. Activate this command. The Conveyor Registration dialog is now displayed:-

Release 9.5 Page 8-58

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

17.1.1

Include Registration Marks Check this box if you wish to place registration marks within the frames to help to locate each frame when the design is plotted. Clear this setting if you don’t require registration marks. The group of settings labelled Registration Marks will then be made inaccessible as they will no longer apply.

17.1.2

Registration Marks 17.1.2.1 Style The style to use to represent the registration marks is defined here. To change the style first click on the button representing the current style. The Registration Mark Type dialog now appears. Set the type of registration mark required from :Disabled Choose this option if you do not require a registration mark. This is represented by a cross in the Converyor Registration dialog.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-59

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Diameter Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle. You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value. Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting from the drop down list. A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Conveyor Registration dialog to show that this type of registration mark is to be used. Symbol Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol. Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayed to help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in the Conveyor Registration dialog. Click on OK to return to the Conveyor Registration dialog. The newly chosen registration mark style will be shown.

17.1.2.2 Number Determine the number of registration marks you wish to position for each frame. Choose from:•2 - to display registration marks at the bottom left and bottom right of each frame •3 - as 2 but display an additional registration mark at the top left of each frame •4 - as 2 but display additional registration marks at the top left and top right of each frame Click on the corresponding radio button to set a value.

17.1.3

Add to first frame only Set this option if you wish to only include registration marks in the first frame. Clear this option if you wish to include registration marks in all the frames.

17.1.4

Offset The cut offset determines the distance between the extents of the design and the centre of the registration marks. •Front edge - determines the horizontal placement of the first registration mark in the inital (left most) frame. It is the offset from the left hand edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark. •Base edge - determines the vertical placement of the bottom row of registration marks. It is the offset from the bottom edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark. •Rear edge - determines the horizontal placement of the registration marks in the final frame. It is the offset from the right hand edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark. •Top edge - determines the vertical placement of the top row of registration marks. It is the offset from the top edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark.

Release 9.5 Page 8-60

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu KASEMAKE For each offset type a value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

17.1.5

Offset from frame divider The offset from frame divider determines the horizontal position of all but the first and final registration marks with respect to each frame division. •.Left - is the distance between the left hand edge of the frame and the left hand registration mark. •Right - is the distance between the right hand edge of the frame and the right hand registration mark. For each offset type a value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

17.1.6

Frame Size The frame size is used to determine how to divide up the current design. Set the length to use. This represents the distance that the plotter advances for each plot. Enter a suitable value directly or scroll with the arrows. The height field is automatically calculated taking into account the height of the design and any margins and offsets which are to be applied.

17.1.7

Frame Offset Margins determine the distance between the extents of the frame and the centre of the registration marks. •Left- determines the horizontal distance between the left hand extent of the first frame and the centre of the first registration mark. •Bottom - determines the vertical distance between the bottom extent of each frame and the bottom row of registration marks. •Top - determines the vertical distance between the top extent of each frame and the top row of registration marks. For each offset type a value directly or use the arrows to scroll. Finally click on OK to save the settings and add the frames and registration marks as per the new settings. If frames and registration marks have previously been positioned on the design you will be asked for confirmation to apply the new settings as the previous frames and registration marks will be removed. Click on Cancel to abandon any changes.

17.2

Adjust Frames

Command

Adjust Frames

Menu

Tools->Conveyor Plot->Adjust Frames

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Adjust Frames command enables any frames which have already been positioned to be resized. Registration marks are also repositioned as the frames are resized to maintain any given offsets and margins as far as possible. If necessary additional frames will also be added.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-61

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Activate this command. You will be prompted to mark a line. Identify one of the vertical frame divisions by clicking with the left hand mouse button near to it. The chosen frame division will now be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. Move the cursor over the selected frame division and the cursor will change to a double ended arrow indicating that it can be dragged. Resize the frame by clicking and holding the left mouse button over the selected frame division then move the cursor to drag it. All attached frames and registration marks will also move with the selected frame division and if necessary an additional frame and registration marks will appear. Release the left hand mouse button to reposition the frames.

18

Generate Template

Command

Generate Template

Menu

Tools->Generate Template

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Generate Template command takes a pattern for a template trims it according to given values and places it into a given fitment. Fitments for top only, bottom only or both can be made as required. The template should first be designed and saved to a KASEMAKE drawing file (.agd). The fitment should be created as a parametric (.cmf) file. The underlying settings used by this command should be accessed initially to nominate variables and to define the template files and parametric fitments to use. These settings can be accessed via the Settings... option of the Generate Template dialog. Once these underlying settings are correct simply defining the values within the Generate Template dialog will be sufficient to produce the fitment(s) with corresponding template trimmed to fit. Activate the command. The Generate Template dialog is displayed. :-

Height This is the height to use for the fitment and will be applied to the nominated height variable when the fitment parametric is loaded. Type a suitable value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

Release 9.5 Page 8-62

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Generate Template KASEMAKE Width This is the width to use for the fitment and will be applied to the nominated width variable when the fitment parametric is loaded. Type a suitable value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it. Depth This is the depth to use for the fitment and will be applied to the nominated depth variable when the fitment parametric is loaded. Type a suitable value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it. Top Set this if you wish to make a top fitment. Clear it if a top fitment is not required. Bottom Set this if you wish to make a bottom fitment. Clear it if a bottom fitment is not required. Gap This is the gap to leave between fitments where both a top and bottom fitment is required. Type a suitable value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it. Finally click on OK to generate the fitment(s) at the given sizes complete with template trimmed to fit as per the current settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-63

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

18.1

Settings...

The Settings... option provides access to the default values used by the Generate Template command. Outer Parametric Variables This is where the variables used by the fitment parametric are associated with the values specified for the fitment through the Generate Template dialog. Specify the variable to take the given value for length, for width and for depth. These variables will assume the corresponding values specified through the Generate Template dialog each time the command is executed . Top This is where the parametric file to use for the top fitment is defined. Click on the ... button to access the Parametrics Run dialog which will assist in locating the required parametric file. Bottom This is where the parametric file to use for the bottom fitment is defined. Again, click on the ... button to access the Run dialog which will assist in locating the required parametric file.

Release 9.5 Page 8-64

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Border Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Area Up to three different template files can be used depending upon the area of the fitment that the template is to be trimmed to fit. For each template:Upto - Set the maximum area up to which the template is to be used. Either type the value directly or scroll with the arrows. Margin - Set the margin to leave around the template. Either type the value directly or scroll with the arrows. Template - Define the template to use by clicking on the ... button to bring up the Open dialog to help you to locate the agd file containing the template. Radius Where each pattern within the template is trimmed to fit a fillet will be placed between the edge of the fitment and the trimmed template element. Radius - Set the radius for the fillet by either typing a value directly or scrolingl with the arrows. Remove small areas < This value applies to the area of any pattern within the template which has been trimmed to fit. It is effectively a minimum size of area to keep. Any trimmed patterns with an area smaller than the given value will be removed. Remove small areas < - Set the minimum size for the area of an individual pattern by either typing a value directly or scrolingl with the arrows. Finally click on OK to save the new settings and return to the Generate Template dialog.

19

Border Sub-Menu A border is positioned around a design and is normally specific to a particular Company. It contains text items which are normally details about the enclosed design. In addition it can contain drawn information e.g. Company Logo. Some of the text items can be input as masks and changed as applicable to the current design. In addition, some or all of the masks can be linked to the database. Masks can also be linked to a variable table. Border files can also provide a 3D placeholder for a 3D annotation. The 3D placeholder is represented by a bitmap when the border is loaded into a 2D design in KASEMAKE. The design can later be exported to a PDF file complete with the 3D annotation for viewing and manipulation. See “PDF Format” on page 2-39. The border menu gives access to the Load Border, Edit Border and Border Create commands which are described in the following section.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-65

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

19.1

Load

Command

Load

Menu

Tools->Border->Load

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Load Border command allows you to load a border and position it around the current design. The border can optionally contain a placeholder for a 3D annotation. Activate the command. The File Open dialog will now appear requesting a filename for the border to be loaded. Both borders created with KASEMAKE, .AGB files by default and designs created with previous versions, .BRD files by default, can be loaded.

-

Set the filename in the usual way.

-

Set the Database option if you want to substitute any masks linked to a database field with the information from the current database record. The database will open automatically if you set this option and you have not previously opened it. Clear the Database option if you do not wish to update the border with database information.

-

Finally, click OK.

Where provision for a 3D annotation is included in the chosen border file, a second File Open dialog will now be displayed, requesting a filename for the (.u3d) file containing the 3D annotation to be used.

-

Set the filename as before and click on OK.

The requested border will now be loaded and positioned around your current design. The 3D area, (where applicable), is represented by a bitmap. The whole design inclusive of border will now automatically zoom to fill the screen. Initially the mask fields will contain *’s, unless the Database option has been set, in which case any masks linked to a database field will be updated to the corresponding values in the current database record. Use the Border Edit command to set the masks to their appropriate values.

19.2

Edit

Command

Edit

Menu

Tools->Border->Edit

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Border Edit command is used to modify the contents of the mask fields for the currently loaded border. This command is therefore only available if a border is present.

Release 9.5 Page 8-66

-

Activate this command. The Border Edit Window is now displayed. This comprises a row of command buttons and a scrollable list of prompts and their corresponding masks for the current border.

-

Click in the mask field to edit its contents. This will select the current text ready for you to type in its place. Alternatively, use the arrow keys and backspace and delete to move about

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Border Sub-Menu KASEMAKE the mask fields, then retype. There is a limit on the number of characters that can be entered for each individual mask. This is normally illustrated by the number of *’s in the mask field when the border is first loaded.

19.2.1

Use the tab key and arrow keys to move between mask fields. Any auto number fields need not be edited as they are generated automatically.

Command Buttons 19.2.1.1 Delete Mask The Delete Mask command removes the contents of the mask where the cursor is. It is particularly useful for clearing a field which contains its maximum number of characters as no changes can be made to full fields.

19.2.1.2 Close This command closes the Edit Border window and returns you to the drawing screen. Any changes are saved and the corresponding masks updated in the border.

19.3

Create

Command

Create

Menu

Tools->Border->Create

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Create Border command allows you to produce border files or drawing surrounds. These can be borders with links to the database or simple borders to annotate your designs e.g. job sheets. Borders are made up of three different categories of element:• Drawn items - including the lines that make up the border sheet and text which is purely for annotation • Prompts - the text that labels a field or set of fields • Masks - responses associated with each prompt, the contents of which will vary with each design. At least one mask is associated with each prompt. Multiple masks per prompt are permitted. Before creating your border you need to design a border template. A sample border template borderTemplate.AGD can be found in the Samples directory. To design your own template you need to produce a standard design for the border with the following considerations:• Leave an area blank for the design to occupy when the border is loaded • The prompt and masks should be represented by ordinary text. It is normal to type *’s for the mask field, the number of *’s determining the maximum length of the mask. If a mask is to be linked to the database it should be represented by the name of the database field enclosed by square brackets, then padded out with *’s to the maximum length of that database field. e.g. [Customer]********** would link the mask to the customer field of the database with a maximum of 20 characters. • If you wish to take advantage of the KASEMAKE’s autoscale function for plotting, you should try to design the outline of your border in the same ratio as that of the plottable

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-67

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE area of your output device. This ensures maximum paper usage in both dimensions when the drawing is adjusted to fill the paper in its largest dimension. Once you have designed your border template you should save it as a standard .AGD file. You are now ready to convert it to a border or .AGB file. Before activating the Create Border command, clear the drawing area. Activate the Create Border command. This will guide you through several steps which will convert your border template into a border as follows:-

19.3.1

Loading the border template The first stage of the conversion is to load the border template. The File Open dialog appears. Enter the name of the border template in the usual way. The border template will now be loaded into the empty drawing area and zoomed to fill the screen.

19.3.2

Identifying the Drawing Area The next stage is to identify the area of the border that the design will occupy when a border is loaded. This is referred to as the screen area and defined as a rectangle. The system prompts for the first corner of the screen area. Identify a point on the diagonal of the box which is to be used for the screen area using any of the drawing modes. As you move the cursor a rubber band box will appear defining the proposed screen area. Identify the opposite end of the diagonal which defines the required screen area. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used.

19.3.3

Identifying the Prompt and Mask Fields Now you need to identify each prompt and associated mask or masks. First identify the prompt by clicking near to the text string which represents it. The identified prompt will be selected and you will be prompted to identify a mask. Identify the mask in the same way. You will then be prompted for the next prompt. If however, you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key whilst you identify the second and subsequent text strings to convert to masks. The KASEMAKE system will continue to select them increasing the selection box to show that they are linked. Releasing the Shift key returns the system to identifying a prompt field. Mark the next prompt field and its corresponding mask(s) as before. Repeat until all the prompts and corresponding masks have been identified. As a prompt or set of masks is identified, it is removed from the screen this is to make it easier to ascertain which prompts and masks are still to be defined. If you make a mistake during the prompt and mask identification click with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. If two prompts / masks are close together and you simply want to retrieve the next nearest text element choose Next. If you want to start the identification process again, choose Reset. Any removed prompt and mask fields will be redisplayed and you can start the identification process again.

19.3.4

Saving the Border File When you have finished identifying the prompts and masks click with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. Choose Save. The Create

Release 9.5 Page 8-68

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Border Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Border dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined border. Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the border file. The border is now ready to use. Try it out using the Load Border and Edit Border commands.

19.4

Enchanced Create... Command

Enhance Create...

Menu

Tools->Border->Enhanced Create...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Enhanced Create... command provides a simplified method of producing border files or drawing surrounds. As before, these can be borders with links to the database or simple borders to annotate your designs e.g. job sheets. A 3D placeholder can also be included to hold a 3D annotation where required. Borders are made up of three different categories of element, drawn items, prompts and masks. Before creating your border you need to design a border template. Once you have designed your border template you should save it as a standard .AGD file. You are now ready to convert it to a border or .AGB file. A sample border template BorderTemplate.AGD can be found in the Samples directory. Before activating the Enhanced Create command, clear the drawing area. Now activate the Enhanced Create command. This will guide you through several steps which will convert your border template into a border as follows:-

19.4.1

Loading the border template The first stage of the conversion is to load the border template. The File Open dialog appears. Enter the name of the border template in the usual way.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-69

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE The border template will now be loaded into the empty drawing area and zoomed to fill the screen.

The Prompts and Masks dialog is also displayed as shown above. You are prompted, (Create Border) Select Operation. It is possible to define the component parts of the border in any order either prompts or masks or screen area or 3D area. There is also an Autofill option which will attempt to complete the prompt and mask fields automatically from the loaded template. Select an operation from one of the following:-

19.4.1.1 Identifying Prompts and Masks Click in a prompt or mask field. The prompt will now change to Mark prompt (or Mark mask) as applicable. Identify the prompt (or mask) by clicking near to the text string which represents it in the border template. The identified prompt (or mask) will be removed from the border template and copied to the corresponding prompt (or mask) field in the dialog. KASEMAKE will assume you wish to alternate identifying first a prompt then a mask (or vice versa) so will automatically prompt you for a corresponding mask (or the next prompt). Identify the mask (or prompt) in the same way. Again, the identified string will be removed from the border template and copied to the corresponding field in the dialog. This process will then repeat automatically filling each row of the dialog in turn. Note:

Release 9.5 Page 8-70

For each mask identified the length field will be automatically completed based on the strings current length.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Border Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Multiple masks If you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key to identify the second and subsequent text strings to use as masks. The KASEMAKE system will continue to remove them from the border template and copy them to the next available mask field. Releasing the Shift key reverts back to identifying the next prompt field. Alternatively, you can click in each mask field in turn before identifying the text string to use as the mask. Editing masks If you make a mistake during prompt (or mask) identification click in the incorrect field in the Prompts and Masks dialog to highlight it then identify the correct text string. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to remove the current text string from the grid. If you choose Yes, the current value will be removed from the grid and restored to the border template and the newly identified value will be removed from the border template and copied to the dialog. If you choose No the current value will remain unchanged.

19.4.1.2 Identifying the Drawing Area Click on the Screen Area button to identify the area of the border that the design will occupy when a border is loaded. You will now be prompted Mark screen area first corner. Identify a point corresponding to the bottom left of the required screen area using any of the drawing modes. As you move the cursor a rubber band box will appear defining the proposed screen area. Identify the top right position of the region which defines the required screen area. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used. A box representing the screen area and labelled Border Screen Area will now be drawn as visual confirmation of the given area.

19.4.1.3 Identifying the 3D Area Click on the 3D Area button to define an area of the border to use as a placeholder for a 3D annotation when the border is loaded into a 2D design. You will now be prompted Mark 3D area first corner. Identify a point corresponding to the bottom left of the area to use as a 3D placeholder using any of the drawing modes. As you move the cursor a rubber band box will appear defining the proposed 3D area and the prompt changes to Mark 3D area second corner. Identify the top right corner of the area to be used as a placeholder. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used. A box representing the 3D placeholder and labelled 3D area will now be displayed and labelled 3D Area. The box is shown highlighted and with handles to allow it to be resized or moved in the usual way. Amending a 3D Placeholder Once a 3D placeholder is defined, you can amend it in one of the following ways:• Click on one of the edges of the highlighted box labelled 3D area • Choose the 3D Area command again and select the edit option. In both cases the 3D area will now have handles for you to resize it by clicking and holding down the left mouse button on an appropriate handle and dragging it to a new position. The 3D area

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-71

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE wil resize as you move to assist you with this. Alternatively, you can move the cursor into the highlighted box and click and hold with the left mouse button to enable you to drag the 3D area to a new position. Removing a 3D Placeholder Once a 3D placeholder is defined, you can remove it by choosing the 3D Area command again and selecting the remove option. Kasemake is now ready for you to define a new area to use as a 3D placeholder. Alternatively you can choose a new command.

19.4.1.4 Saving the Border File Choose the Save button when you have finished identifying the prompts and masks and screen area. The Save Border dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined border. Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the border file.

19.4.1.5 Suspend The Suspend option allows you to pause the border identification process and return to the drawing area, perhaps to make alterations to the border template. To complete the identification process simply activate the Resume Create command which will return to the same point in the identification process reached when Suspend was requested.

19.4.1.6 Autofill The Autofill command will search through all the text strings in the border template and attempt to identify all the prompts and masks loading them into the Prompts and Masks dialog and removing them from the drawing area as they are found.

19.4.1.7 Discard The Discard option enables you to abandon the identification process and return to the drawing with the border template fully restored. Confirmation is required as the Discard command cannot be reversed.

19.5

Modify Existing Command

Modify Existing

Menu

Tools->Border->Modify Existing

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Modify Existing command allows you to load a predefined border and make additions / alterations to it. Activate this command. The Open Border dialog will now be displayed. Set the folder and filename for the border you wish to change in the usual way. Click on Open and KASEMAKE will load the selected border template into a new blank drawing. The border’s screen area will be labelled and surrounded by a box to visually confirm its location. The Prompts and Masks dialog will also be displayed listing all the current prompts and corresponding masks. You can now make any alterations and additions necessary using the available commands. Please refer to “Enchanced Create...” on page 8-69 for a full explanation of the border identification process.

Release 9.5 Page 8-72

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Registration KASEMAKE

20

Registration

Command

Registration

Menu

Tools->Registration

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Registration command as the name suggests places registration marks on the design. This enables the design to be located relative to printed artwork. The Registration command works on the visible part of the design only. Activate the command. The Registration dialog now appears. This shows a thumbnail sketch of the current design. Registration marks can be placed at any of nine pre-defined positions. These positions are shown with respect to the thumbnail sketch.

20.1

Profiles It is possible to define profiles detailing specific characteristics for the nine registration marks. These profiles can then be stored and used again. Currently loaded profile The name of the profile currently being used is displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of available profiles. Scroll to the required profile and click on it to select it.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-73

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Any changes made to date will be saved with the previous profile. The newly selected profile will then be loaded. The registration marks and the margins displayed in the dialog will be updated to reflect any newly loaded characteristics. Add New... The Add New... command allows you to define a new profile. Activate this command to display the Add New Registration Profile dialog. Type the name of the new profile then click on OK to close the dialog. Any changes you now make to the registration mark settings will be saved as the newly named profile. Delete Profile The Delete Profile command allows you to delete a profile which is no longer needed. Activate this command to delete the profile displayed as the current profile. You will first be prompted for confirmation. Upon choosing Yes the profile will be deleted. Choose No to leave the profile unchanged.

20.2 20.2.1

Settings Allow Edit This option must be set before any changes can be made to the current registration settings and margins. Click on Allow Edit to set the option, the button will appear pressed in if it is set. The registration marks may now be accessed to make changes. In addition, the Remove Existing Registration Marks option, the Apply to Selected Items option (where there are items selected) and the Marks NOT Plotted option will be accessible.

20.2.2

Changing a Registration Mark Click on a registration mark button to change its settings, including whether you require a registration mark at the corresponding position or not. The following dialog will be displayed:-

Set the type of registration mark required at this position. Choose from :Disabled Choose this option if you do not require a registration mark at this position. This is represented by a cross in the Registration dialog.

Release 9.5 Page 8-74

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Registration KASEMAKE Diameter Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle. You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value. Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting from the drop down list. A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Registration dialog to show that this type of registration mark is selected for this position. Symbol Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol. Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayed to help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in the Registration dialog. Click on OK to return to the Registration dialog. Any amendments to the chosen button will be shown.

20.2.3

Remove Existing Registration Marks You can determine whether you wish to remove any existing registration marks from your design. Set or clear this option as required.

20.2.4

Apply to Selected Items Where you have selected items within your drawing this option will be displayed within the Registration Dialog. Determine whether you wish to apply registration marks only to the selection set, or whether you wish to apply registration marks to the entire design. Set or clear this option as required.

20.2.5

Marks not Plotted You can determine whether you wish to plot any registration marks or whether they are just there for visual alignment. Set or clear this option as required.

20.2.6

Margins Specify any margins to be left between the edge of the design and the centre of the registration mark. Set the left, right, top and bottom margins required by clicking on the value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

Finally, click on OK to close the Registration dialog and position the registration marks on to your design as per the given settings.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-75

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

21

Single Registration Mark Command

Single Registration Mark

Menu

Tools->Single Registration Mark

Toolbar Button:

None

The Single Registration Mark command as the name suggests provides a way of placing individual registration marks on a design to assist in locating the design relative to printed artwork. Activate the command. You are now prompted Mark Point. Identify a centre point for the registration mark using any of the available drawing modes. The registration mark will now be displayed centred on the given point as per the current options.

21.1

Options

Set the type of registration mark required. Choose from :Diameter Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle. You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the current value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value. Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting from the drop down list. Symbol Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol. Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayed to help you to identify the appropriate one.

Release 9.5 Page 8-76

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Double Registration Mark... KASEMAKE

22

Double Registration Mark... Command

Double Registration Mark...

Menu

Tools->Double Registration Mark...

Toolbar Button:

None

The Double Registration Mark.. command as the name suggests provides a way of placing two registration marks on a design to assist in locating the design relative to printed artwork or This command works on the visible part of the design only. Activate the command. The Registration dialog now appears. This shows a preview of the current design and various dimensions which are used to locate the required registration marks.

22.1

Use Horizontal / Vertical Reg Marks Determine whether you wish to place horizontal or vertical registration marks by clicking the corresponding button in the preview area. The dimensions will now be updated to reflect the current choice.

22.1.1

Distance from bottom left of design A and B correspond to the horizontal and vertical distance between the centre of the first registration mark and the bottom left point of the design. Type suitable values into the A and B boxes or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-77

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

22.1.2

Distance between registration marks X1 and Y1 define the horizontal and vertical distances between the centres of the registration marks. Type suitable values for X1 and Y1 or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

22.1.3

Include Outer Sheet Tick this option if you wish to add a sheet to your design. Clear it if you do not require a sheet to be added. If you choose to add a sheet the following options are now made available:-

22.1.3.1 Bottom left corner of sheet Values C and D define the horizontal and vertical distance from the bottom left corner of the required sheet to the centre of the first registration mark. Type suitable values into the C and D boxes or use the arrows to scroll to the required value

22.1.3.2 Dimensions of the sheet Type suitable values for the width and height of the sheet, either directly or use the arrows to scroll the current value.

22.1.4

Current Registration Mark This displays the type of registration mark currently selected. To change the registration mark click on the button to display the registration mark type dialog. Choose from :Diameter Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle. You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the current value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value. Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting from the drop down list. Symbol Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol. Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayed to help you to identify the appropriate one.

Finally click on OK to display the registration marks and sheet as per the new settings.

Release 9.5 Page 8-78

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Image KASEMAKE

23

Image The Image sub-menu gives access to the following four commands for manipulating images.

23.1

Convert

Command

Convert

Menu

Tools->Image->Convert

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Convert command takes an image and produces a vector representation of the image. The image is processed a row at a time and each continuous set of pixels is replaced by a single line.

23.2

-

Activate the command. A Converted Image Ground dialog will now appear. Set the ground to place the vectors in from the drop down list.

-

Click on OK. The vectorised version of the Image will now be displayed in the chosen ground overlaying the scanned image. The vectors are placed in a group.

Invert

Command

Invert

Menu

Tools->Image->Invert

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Invert command takes an image and reverses its background and foreground pixels. Activate the command. The Image will now be redisplayed inverted. i.e. all the foreground will be drawn in the background colour and vice versa.

23.3

Outline

Command

Outline

Menu

Tools->Image->Outline

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Outline command produces a vector representation of the outline of the loaded image, including outlining any islands. Activate the command. The Tracing Options dialog appears containing the following settings:-

23.3.1

Tolerance This determines how many rows of pixels to connect for each line of the outline to create a smoother outline. A value of 1 is least smooth but follows the original most closely. A value of 10 produces the smoothest result but follows the original image least closely. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll it.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-79

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

23.3.2

Min Line Length This determines how long a line must be to be considered when generating the outline. Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll it.

23.3.3

Ground Set the ground for the outline to be placed in from the drop down list. Choose OK to accept the options. The Use Defaults button allows you to reset the current settings to their default values.

23.4

Centre Line

Command

Centre Line

Menu

Tools->Image->Centre Line

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Centre Line command is similar to the Outline command in that it produces a vector representation of the outline of the loaded image, including outlining any islands. Unlike the Outline Command it will replace two separate outlines with a centre line where they are within a given distance of each other. Activate the command. The Tracing Options dialog appears containing the same settings as the Outline command. Refer to “Outline” on page 79 for further details.

24

Reduction

Command

Reduction

Menu

Tools->Reduction

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Reduction command is used on designs to be used for the manufacture of rotary dies. It compresses the design along one axis to compensate for the distortion created by its cylindrical presentation. This command works on any design parameterised or non-parameterised but without text. Activate the command. The Move / Copy rollup will appear with the reduction page activated. Set the axis in which you require the reduction to take place by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Next set the shrinkage factor this is the percentage of the overall size to reduce the design by. Type the new value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value. Click on Apply. The design will now be shrunk accordingly. Any circular arcs will now be replaced by elliptical arcs.

Release 9.5 Page 8-80

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Check Integrity KASEMAKE

25

Check Integrity

Command

Check Integrity

Menu

Tools->Check Integrity

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Check Integrity command will search through all the elements in the current design and check for any potential problem areas which might prevent some commands from being able to execute successfully. An example would be a break in a line which would prevent the Nett Area command from working accurately. Any problem areas are visually highlighted and listed in a dialog using a tree structure. Each problem in the tree can then be examined by double clicking on it which will cause KASEMAKE to zoom to the corresponding area of the design for any corrections to be made. The zoom factor together with a tolerance to apply when identifying potential problems can be set as appropriate. Activate the command. A search will now be made of the current design. Any dangling nodes will be indicated by a square marker and any overlapping elements will be highlighted. In addition, the following dialog will be displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-81

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

25.1

Zoom Extent This is the approximate window size to zoom to when examining one of the problem areas identified in the given list. Set the value by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll to it.

25.2

Tolerance The tolerance is used to determine whether the overlap or dangling node is a problem or not. Any error less than the given tolerance is ignored. Set the value by typing directly or use the arrows to scroll.

25.3

Problem Tree This area lists any problems in a tree structure. Any dangling nodes are listed in a treee under the heading Free Ends. This is followed by a seccond tree labelled Overlap which lists any potential overlapping items. Double click on any node or overlap item in the list to zoom to the corresponding area within the design. Dangling nodes are identified by a square marker as before. Overlapping elements are highlighted in the current selection colour. Any adjustments can now be made to resolve each potential problem as appropriate.

25.4

Refresh The Refresh option will update the list of problems. This is useful where some have been resolved and you want a more up to date list. Simply select this option and the tree list will be recreated as applicable.

25.5

Done Choose this option to close the Check Integrity dialog and finalise any changes made.

26

Indicate Overlaps

Command

Indicate Overlaps

Menu

Tools->Indicate Overlaps

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Indicate Overlaps command will search through all the elements in the design and check for any areas where one or more design elements overlap. Activate the command. A search will now be made of the current design. Any overlapping elements will be indicated by a square marker.

Release 9.5 Page 8-82

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Remove Markers KASEMAKE

27

Remove Markers

Command

Remove Markers

Menu

Tools->Remove Markers

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Remove Markers command as its name suggest will remove any markers currently on display e.g. markers produced to indicate overlaps. Activate the command. The markers will now be removed from the display.

28 28.1

Symbols Sub-Menu Create DB Symbol Command

Create DB Symbol

Menu

Tools->Symbols->Create DB Symbol

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Create DB Symbol command allows you to create a symbol which consists of a prompt and mask as you would find in a border. As is the case with a border, the mask can be linked to a field in the database and its value substituted for the value in the current database record. The symbol can be used repeatedly always substituting a linked mask with the corresponding value from the current database record. Before you can create a DB symbol you need to draw it. As for borders the symbol can consist of any of the following elements :• Drawn items - any design elements including text which is purely for annotation • Prompts - the text that labels a field or set of fields • Masks - responses associated with each prompt, the contents of which will vary. At least one mask is associated with each prompt. Multiple masks per prompt are permitted. The prompt and masks should be represented by ordinary text. E.g. A prompt "My Customer" could be followed by the mask "[Customer]" to link the mask to the customer field of the database. The text would be entered as contained in inverted commas using the text command. To create a DB Symbol activate this command. You will be prompted to identify a prompt. Identify the prompt by clicking near to the text string which represents it. The identified prompt will be selected and you will be prompted to identify a mask. Identify the mask in the same way. You will then be prompted for the next prompt. If however, you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key whilst you identify the second and subsequent text strings to convert to masks. KASEMAKE will continue to select them increasing the selection box to show that they are linked. Releasing the Shift key returns the system to identifying a prompt field. Mark the next prompt field and its corresponding mask(s) as before. Repeat until all the prompts and corresponding masks have been identified. As a prompt or set

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-83

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE of masks is identified, it is removed from the screen this is to make it easier to ascertain which prompts and masks are still to be defined.

When you have finished identifying the prompts and masks click with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. Choose Save. The Create DB Symbol dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined DB Symbol. The DB symbol should be saved in the symbols folder or in a sub-directory of the symbols folder specified in the File->Preferences command. The default directory is Kasemake\Parts\.See “File Locations” on page 2-49. Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the file. The Symbol is now ready for use by the View->Symbols command. See “Symbols...” on page 10-4.

28.2

Create Centred DB Symbol Command

Create Centred DB Symbol

Menu

Tools->Symbols->Create Centred DB Symbol

Toolbar Button:

None

The Create Centred DB Symbol command allows you to create a symbol which displays information from a given field in the database. You supply a prompt and mask as you would in a border. As for a border, the mask is linked to a field in the database and when displayed is substiuted with the actual value of that field in the current database record. The symbol is automatically centred. The prompt itself is not displayed with this command. The symbol can be used repeatedly always substituting the mask with the corresponding value from the current database record. Before you can create a DB symbol you need to draw it. As for borders the symbol consists of any of the following elements :• Prompt - the text that locates the symbol when centring it • Mask - associated with each prompt, normally containing information about the database field enclosed in square brackets. The contents will vary • Drawn Items - any remaining items will be saved as part of the symbol The prompt and mask should be represented by ordinary text. E.g. A prompt "My Customer" could be followed by the mask "[Customer]" to link the mask to the customer field of the database. The text would be entered exactly as contained in inverted commas using the text command. Multi Line Masks Where multi line strings are required, the lines of text should be entered in to the database in the appropriate field as a single line of text separated by the caret symbol i.e. “^” to denote a separate line. E.g. In the reference field you might type “Author: Jim Jones^Title: The Joys of CAD”. Using a mask “[Reference]” will result in:Author: Jim Jones Title: The Joys of CAD

Release 9.5 Page 8-84

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Symbols Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

28.2.1

Creating a Centred DB Symbol To create a DB Symbol activate this command. You will be prompted to identify a prompt. Identify the prompt by clicking near to the text string which represents it. The identified prompt will be selected and you will be prompted to identify a mask. Identify the mask in the same way. You will then be asked for the next prompt. If however, you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key whilst you identify the second and subsequent text strings to convert to masks. KASEMAKE will continue to select them increasing the selection box to show that they are linked. Releasing the Shift key returns the system to identifying a prompt field. Mark the next prompt field and its corresponding mask(s) as before. Repeat until all the prompts and corresponding masks have been identified. As a prompt or set of masks is identified, it is removed from the screen this is to make it easier to ascertain which prompts and masks are still to be defined. When you have finished identifying the prompts and masks click with the right hand mouse button within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. Choose Save. The Save As... dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined DB Symbol. The DB symbol should be saved in the symbols folder or in a sub-directory of the symbols folder specified in the File->Preferences command. The default directory is Kasemake\Parts\.See “File Locations” on page 2-49. Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the file. The drawing containing the text strings used to define the DB symbol will now close. The Symbol is now ready for use by the View->Symbols command. See “Symbols...” on page 104.

28.3

Modify DB Symbol

Command

Modify DB Symbol

Menu

Tools->Symbols->Modify DB Symb

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Modify Symbol command is used to modify the contents of the mask fields for the currently selected DB symbol. You must therefore select a DB symbol before activating this command. Activate the command. An edit dialog now appears which comprises a row of command buttons and a scrollable list of prompts and their corresponding masks for the current DB Symbol. Click in the mask field to edit its contents. This will select the current text ready for you to type in its place. Alternatively, use the arrow keys and backspace and delete to move about the mask fields, then retype. There is a limit on the number of characters that can be entered for an individual mask determined by the length of the text string used to create it. Delete Mask The Delete Mask command removes the contents of the mask where the cursor is. It is particularly useful for clearing a field which contains its maximum number of characters as no changes can be made to full fields. Close This command closes the edit dialog and returns you to the drawing screen. Any changes are saved and the corresponding masks updated in the DB Symbol.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-85

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

29

Calculator...

Command

Calculator...

Menu

Tools->Calculator...

Toolbar Button:

Main Toolbar

The Calculator... command when activated displays a simple calculator providing basic function. These are add, subtract, multiply, divide, percent and shift left where the number displayed is divided by 10 and any fractional part lost.

30

Fractional Keypad... Command

Fractional Keypad...

Menu

Tools->Fractional Keypad...

Toolbar Button:

Main Toolbar

The Fractional Keypad... command when activated displays an adapted calculator enabling you to input fractional values. Only a limited set of pre defined fractions can be used. Display the calculator. Then enter the fractional value using the following 3 steps:• Enter any integer part by clicking on the numbers in the usual way • Choose the base fraction or denominator by clicking on the appropriate predefined fraction key. One unit of the fraction is automatically entered in the numerical display area. • Finally determine the numerator or how many of these base fractions you require. Copy the value to the current dialog field by clicking on Enter. The BS key can be used to revert back to the previous step. You can step right back to the beginning ready to input the integer part again if you wish. The effect depends upon the stage of entry you were at as follows:• Clicking on BS when you have just entered the numerator resets the numerator to 1 corresponding to the base fraction. • Clicking on BS when you are about to define the numerator removes the base fraction for you to reenter it. • Clicking on BS when you are about to define the base fraction removes the integer part for you to reenter it. The Fractional Keypad can be rolled up using the arrow button. Conversely, the arrow button will expand it when it is in its rolled up state.Choose the cross to close the Fractional Keypad.

31

Task Lists - General A task list is a list of commands which are assembled in a specific order to be executed as a batch. The current task list is displayed in a combo box in the Tools toolbar. A new list can be selected by accessing the combo box and choosing from the list of available task lists. A task list is executed one command at a time using the Run Current Task command.

Release 9.5 Page 8-86

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Task Lists - General KASEMAKE A task list is assembled and manipulated using the task list editor accessed through the Edit Task List... command.

31.1

Run Current Task

Command

Run Current Task

Menu

Tools->Run Current Task

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Run Current Task command executes each command in the current task list in turn. Before you can activate this command you need to set the current task list using the drop down located in the Tools toolbar. To change the task list, first click on the arrow next to the current task list to display the available task lists. Scroll to the required task list and click on it to set it as the current task list. Activate the Run Current Task command and each command in the current task list will be executed in turn.

31.2

Edit Task List...

Command

Edit Task List...

Menu

Tools->Edit Task List...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Edit Task List... command provides access to the task list editor so that task lists can be created and manipulated. Commands are available to delete a task list, save different sets of task lists, load a previously saved task list and execute the task list. To prevent accidental changes being made to task lists, an additional command button, labelled Allow Edit is also provided.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-87

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Activate this command. The Task List Editor dialog will now be displayed:-

Name The name associated with the current set of tasks is displayed. A scrolling list of commands is displayed in the list labelled Available. A second list labelled Selected displays the tasks currently chosen for the named task list. To view a different task list simply click on the arrow and scroll to the name of the required task list. Allow Edit Before making changes to an existing task list, you need to choose Allow Edit. This enables the other command buttons making them accessible and allows you to move commands between the Selected list, and the Available list. It protects against accidental changes Add To move commands into the Selected list, simply scroll through the Available list to the required command, click on the name of the command and choose Add>>. The selected command will now be appended to the current task list. Remove To remove commands from the task list, click on the name of the command you wish to remove to select it, then choose Sheet Settings...

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Sheet Settings... command enables a list of stock sheets to be defined. It also enables a specific stock sheet to be placed around the current layout. Activate this command and the Layout Sheet dialog is displayed:-

32.1.1

Adding A Stock Sheet Definition Click on Add New... to define a new stock sheet. You will be prompted for a name. Type a name then click on OK to close the dialog. The currently loaded profile field will now be updated to show the newly entered name. You can now define the new stock sheet as follows:-

Max Size The maximum dimensions for the sheet. Enter the width and height by typing each value directly or using the arrow keys to scroll.

Margins Define a margin to be left between each edge of the layout and the actual sheet. For each margin enter the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Release 9.5 Page 8-90

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Sheets Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

Ground This is the ground to use to display the sheet when positioned around a layout. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available grounds. Move to the required ground then click to select it.

External Cut Ground This is the ground that contains the external cut elements of the design. It is needed to determine the extents for positioning the design within the given sheet. Again, select from the drop down list of grounds.

Alignment The alignment determines how the current layout is positioned within the given sheet. Click on the appropriate radio button to select it. Choose from:• Freehand - to specify a position for the sheet with respect to the current layout. Once the dialog is closed, you will be prompted to mark a position for the layout sheet. This point locates the bottom left corner of the given sheet. • Bottom/Left - to position the current layout at the bottom left corner of the sheet. • Centre X - to position the current layout at the bottom of the sheet but centred horizontally. • Centre X and Y - to position the current layout centred horizontally and vertically within the sheet.

32.1.2

Deleting a Stock Sheet Definition To remove a stock sheet definition, first ensure that it is the currently selected stock sheet by changing the currently loaded profile field if necessary. Now click on the Delete button. You will now be prompted for confirmation that you wish to remove this stock sheet definition. Click on OK to permanently remove the stock sheet definition or click on Cancel to leave the definition unchanged.

32.1.3

Changing a Stock Sheet Definition Before you can change a stock sheet definition, ensure that it is the currently selected stock sheet by changing the currently loaded profile field if necessary. Now click on the Allow Edit button. All the fields will now be accessible, allowing you to make any changes to the current stock sheet definition. Please refer to “Adding A Stock Sheet Definition” on page 90 for a full explanation of these settings. Finally click on the Allow Edit button again, to complete the editing process and accept any amendments.

Once changes have been made to the stock sheet definitions, cllick on OK to accept any changes and position the currently selected stock sheet within your design layout. Click on Cancel to remove the dialog and abandon any changes made.

32.1.4

Adjusting a Stock Sheet once placed The Sheet Settings... command as well as assisting with the definition of new stock sheets is used to place a specific stock sheet around the current layout or to adjust the position of a stock sheet.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-91

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE • Once the Layout Sheet dialog is displayed, select a new stock sheet by changing the currently loaded profile field. Clicking OK will remove the existing stock sheet and load the newly selected one. • To change the extents of the layout within the stock sheet you can change the external cut ground to take into account further design elements. Again click on OK to adjust the design within the stock sheet. • To change the alignment of the stock sheet with respect to the current layout, simply select an alternative alignment option. Again click on OK to realign the stock sheet.

32.2

Trim...

Command

Trim...

Menu

Tools->Sheets->Trim...

Toolbar Button:

Tools Toolbar

The Trim... command allows the current stock sheet to be trimmed to fit the current layout. Activate this command and the Trim Layout Sheet dialog is displayed:-

Margins The margins are automatically completed using the values specified for the current stock sheet using the Sheet Settings... command. You can now, if required define an alternative margin to be left between each edge of the layout and the area representing the maximum plottable area within the sheet. For each margin enter the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll. Alternatively, leave the values unchanged to accept the default margins.

External Cut Ground The External Cut Ground setting specifies the ground which contains the external cut elements of the design. It is needed to determine the extents of the design. Click on the arrow and select from the drop down list of grounds. Finally click on OK to trim the sheet to contain the current design layout leaving the given margins or click on Cancel to abandon this command.

Release 9.5 Page 8-92

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Sheets Sub-Menu KASEMAKE

32.3

Hide/Show

Command

Hide/Show

Menu

Tools->Sheets->Hide/Show

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Hide/Show command enables the display of the current stock sheet to be switched on and off. Activate the command to toggle the display of the stock sheet on/off.

32.4

Fill Sheet...

Command

Fill Sheet...

Menu

Tools->Sheets->Fill Sheet...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Fill Sheet... command assists you with positioning a selection of designs within the current stock sheet. The designs used with this command can be completed designs, .AGD files, placed in a specific folder. Alternatively, the designs can be loaded from parametric files with the filename and dimensions to apply being retrieved from specific fields within the current selection of database records. First position an empty stock sheet within your design using the Sheet Settings... comand. The Fill Sheet... command will now become accessible. Activate it to display the following dialog:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-93

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

32.4.1

Horizontal Gutter This is the minimum horizontal distance to leave between the extents of each design. Type a suitable value directly or click on the arrows to scroll.

32.4.2

Vertical Gutter This is the minimum vertical distance to leave between the extents of each design. Again, type a suitable value directly or click on the arrows to scroll.

32.4.3

Label Text Size This is the size to use for the descriptive text which is used to label each design if displayed. Type a suitable size directly or use the arrow buttons to scroll to a suitable value.

32.4.4

Rotation Increment Whilst a design is being positioned within the sheet it is possible to rotate it to achieve a better fit. This is achieved using the TAB key. The Rotation Increment setting determines how much the design is rotated for each press of the TAB key. Set the required value by clicking in the corresponding check box.

32.4.5

Design Source 32.4.5.1 Folder Option Click on Folder if you wish to load completed designs from a specific folder. No further settings are required just click on OK to close the Fill Sheet dialog and continue with the command. An Open dialog will now be displayed for you to identify the designs to use. Locate the folder containing the designs you wish to load. Now select the designs to use by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on each design name in turn. Finally click on Open to close the dialog and begin placing the chosen designs.

32.4.5.2 Database Option Click on Database if you wish to load parametric designs using information defined in the database. This includes the name of the parametric design and the dimensions to load it with. The remaining settings should now be completed:-

Parametrics Folder The Parametrics Folder should be set to the folder which contains the parametrics designs referenced in the database. Type the appropriate path directly or use the ... button to load the Browse for Folder dialog to assist you with locating the correct path.

Database Fields The remaining settings specify which fields in the database contain information relating to the parametric designs to use:Parametric Name - Set this to the field in the database which refers to the name of the parametric design to be loaded. Constructed - Set this to the fied in the database to use to determine whether a parametric design is to be considered for placement within the sheet or not.

Release 9.5 Page 8-94

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Sheets Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Display Text - Set this to the field within the database containing the text to use to label the parametric design when it is placed within the sheet. Click on OK to close the Fill Sheet dialog and begin placing the chosen designs.

32.4.6

Placing the Designs One of the nominated designs will now be placed at the bottom left of the sheet and displayed in the current highlight colour. Use the right arrow key to move through the designs displaying each one in turn. The left arrow key can be used to step back through the designs. To place a design permanently, hit the Enter key. The design will be redrawn in its original colours to show that it has been placed and a label will be drawn across the centre of it.

32.4.6.1 Identifying Additional Areas Move the cursor and a rubber band box will be drawn identifying the nearest region available for positioning further designs. Move the cursor again and an alternative region will be outlined. Once you have found the region where you wish to place the next design, click in it to select it. The first of the remaining designs will now be positioned within this chosen region. Again, use the arrow keys to move through the available designs, pressing the Enter key to finalise the design. Note:

Only those designs which will fit within the chosen region will be drawn.

It is also possible to identify an area to place the nominated designs in, using a rubber band box. Simply click with the mouse whilst holding down the left button to identify the bottom left corner of the required region. While still holding down the left button, move the mouse and a box will begin to rubber band following the cursor. Release the left button to identify the top right of the box and thus the required region.

32.4.6.2 Rotation of Designs It is possible to rotate each design to assist with optimum positioning. While moving through the available designs with the arrow keys before positioning them. Press the TAB key to rotate the current design by the Rotation Increment as defined in the Fill Sheet settings dialog. Press the TAB key again to rotate the design an additional increment. Again pressing the Enter key finalises a design’s rotation as well as its position.

Continue to place the remaining designs as above, identifying the next region to use and then moving through the available designs to select one.

32.5

Display Sheet Text

Command

Display Sheet Text

Menu

Tools->Sheets->Display Sheet Text

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Display Sheet Text command allows you to toggle the display of a descriptive label for each design. This can be determined from the database where the Fill Sheet command is used with the Database option or from the filename where the Folder option is used. Activate this command to toggle the display of sheet text on and off.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-95

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

32.6

Print Jobs...

Command

Print Jobs...

Menu

Tools->Sheets->Print Jobs...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Print Jobs... command will print details from the database for each job which has been placed in the current sheet by the fill sheet command. The exact details printed are determined by the template file (.agr file) selected.. A sample .agr file, report.agr is supplied with KASEMAKE. For details of how to change this file or make a new file please refer to “Create reports using Kasemake drawings” on page 13-9. Activate this command.The file open dialog is now displayed prompting for the name of the template file to use. Select a suitable template and click on open to close the dialog and load the template file. A print preview screen will now be displayed showing the selected template with details of all the jobs currently placed in the sheet. All the normal print preview commands are available.

33

Digitiser Sub-Menu KASEMAKE now supports digitiser input. A suite of commands to assist with digitiser use are available through the Digitiser Sub-Menu. The digitiser can be used purely for digitising in drawings on a 1:1 basis. It can have specific commands tailored to its buttons. It is also possible to define a menu of commands accessible from the digitiser.

33.1

Enable / Disable

Command

Enable / Disable

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Enable / Disable

Toolbar Button:

Mode Toolbar

The Enable / Disable command toggles digitiser input on and off. Activate the command to toggle its enabled / disabled state. When enabled all input for the drawing area will be from the digitiser. The mouse will still be available for selecting commands from menus and toolbars and for interacting with dialogs. When digitiser mode is disabled input for the drawing area will revert back to the mouse.

33.2

Setup...

Command

Setup...

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Setup...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Setup... command allows you to define a specific area of the digitiser as a working area rather than the entire digitiser. This is useful when you want to work only within a small part of the digitiser or where a menu is being used. Once the area is defined, this is the area that will be utilised by the Zoom->Digitiser command.

Release 9.5 Page 8-96

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Digitiser Sub-Menu KASEMAKE Activate the Setup... command. The Digitiser Setup dialog is displayed:-

There are three ways to specify the section of the digitiser you wish to be the working area. • You can enter values directly by typing in each box or with the aid of the arrows to scroll. • You can choose Use Default where the bottom and left settings will be assumed to be zero and the given default values will be assigned to the right and top settings. • You can define the area using the digitiser. Click on Mark using digitiser and the prompt Mark bottom left of area will be displayed as shown. Move the digitiser puck and the left and bottom settings will update to reflect the current digitiser position. Click with the puck to define the required position. You will now be prompted Mark top right of area. Repeat to define the right and top settings. Port... The port that the digitiser is connected to can be selected by choosing this option. Click on the Port... button to display the Digitiser Port dialog:-

Set the correct port for the digitiser by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the drop down list of available ports. Finally click on OK to save the settings and close the dialog or cancel to abandon any changes. OK Choose OK to save the new digitiser settings and close the Digitiser Setup dialog. Cancel Choose Cancel to abandon any changes and close the Digitiser Setup dialog.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-97

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE Note:

33.3

The effects of the Digitiser Setup command are really only seen when the Zoom>Digitiser command is activated.

Shortcuts...

Command

Shortcuts...

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Shortcuts...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Shortcuts... command allows you to assign commands to the buttons on the digitiser puck. Button 1 is the entry button by default so cannot be reassigned. Activate this command to display the Digitiser Shortcuts dialog:-

All the available commands are listed menu by menu. Click on a plus symbol to expand a menu. Click on the required command to select it. Finally click on the appropriate button to assign the chosen command to that button on the digitiser puck. An appropriate description will be displayed. Click on OK to confirm any assignments. Now whenever one of the buttons is pressed on the digitiser puck the corresponding command will be automatically activated.

33.4

Adjust Alignment.

Command

Adjust Alignment

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Adjust Alignment

Toolbar Button:

Not available

Digitisers provide a useful way of inputting existing designs by placing the drawing onto the digitiser and inputting 1:1 directly from the drawing. However, it is unlikely that a design will be exactly straight when positioned on the digitiser. The Adjust Alignment command allows you to define a horizontal or vertical line from the design you wish to digitise to enable KASEMAKE to

Release 9.5 Page 8-98

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Digitiser Sub-Menu KASEMAKE determine an adjustment to apply to points to compensate for any misplacement and ensure vertical and horizontal lines are digitised as such. Activate the Adjust Alignment command. You will now be prompted Mark First Reference Point. Move the digitiser puck so that the cross hair is at the beginning of a suitable horizontal or vertical line and click with button 1 to define that point. Now you will be prompted Mark Second Reference Point. Mark the other end of the line using the digitiser puck. KASEMAKE will now calculate a suitable adjustment to apply to all subsequent points based on the given line being horizontal / vertical.

33.5

Reset Alignment.

Command

Reset Alignment

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Reset Alignment

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Reset Alignment command cancels any adjustment adopted by KASEMAKE following the Adjust Alignment command. Simply activate this command and any alignment will be removed so all future points will be input as is.

33.6

Menu Setup...

Command

Menu Setup...

Menu

Tools->Digitiser->Menu Setup...

Toolbar Button:

Not available

The Menu Setup... command allows you to define a menu of commands which can be accessed through the digitiser. The menu is defined as one or more rows of menu cells. Each menu cell is of a given size and can have a specific command assigned to it. First ensure the digitiser is connected and switched on. Activate the Menu Setup... command. The Digitiser Menu Setup... command will now be displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 8-99

8 - Tools Commands KASEMAKE

33.6.1

Menu Cell Size This setting determines the dimensions of each menu cell. Specify a suitable size in millimetres by typing a value directly or using the arrows to scroll.

33.6.2

Menu Row Count This setting determines how many rows of menu cells are to be used for the menu. Again, type a value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

33.6.3

Menu Offset Menu offset determines the distance from the bottom of the digitiser to the start of the first row of menu cells. Each row of menu cells is assumed to start at 0 mms in the X. Specify a suitable offset if required.

33.6.4

Assigning a Command to a Menu Cell Available commands are listed menu by menu in a tree structure in the Commands section of the dialog. Find the command you wish to use by expanding menus and clicking on the command name to select it. To assign the command to a menu cell, move the digitiser puck. The Menu Row and Cell values will update as you move through the row. When you have the digitiser puck over the cell you wish to assign the command to, simply press button 1 on the digitiser puck. The command will now be asssigned to the chosen menu cell and a suitable description will be displayed beneath the Menu Row # Cell # values to confirm the allocated command. Repeat until all menu cells have commands allocated. Finally click on OK to update any menu changes.

Release 9.5 Page 8-100

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

KASEMAKE

9 - Diemaking Commands 1

Stripping Knives Menu Stripping knives are added to the design to make the wastage produced when the design is die pressed from a larger sheet of board, more manageable. They have the effect of breaking up the waste material that is left into small pieces capable of automatic disposal. Accessing Stripping Knives produces a drop down menu of commands available for placing stripping knives within the current design. To use any of these commands you must first have on screen a design, minus dimensions, with the outer cutter path contained in a single ground. There are tool settings common to all the stripping knife tools. These are presented in the options dialog for each of the tools and described in the Options section for each tool.

1.1

Manual Stripping Knives Command

Manual Stripping Knives

Menu

Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Manual

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Tool Bar

This tool is used for placing stripping knives by hand. There are two modes of operation for this tool:Normal This method is for positioning knives horizontally or vertically. If you have opted for normal placement of stripping knives, you will be prompted to position the knife. Move the cursor close to the position on the outside edge that you wish to place the knife. Identify the position and the knife will be drawn. Holding down the shift key whilst moving the cursor will result in the directly opposite knife being created as well. You may then be prompted to mark the end of the knife depending upon the options you have set. The knife will rubber band to help you to determine the correct end point. You can also move within an island or cutout to place a horizontal stripping knife. Use the shift key whilst moving the cursor over a cutout or island and an internal vertical knife will be drawn instead. Orthogonal This method is for placing angled knives that run at right angles to a cut edge then horizontally or vertically to the edge of the sheet. If you have selected orthogonal placement of knives, you will be asked to mark a start point for the knife. You need to identify a line to draw orthogonally to. Move close to the line and mark a point. The nearest line will now be selected and an angled rule piece is drawn from the given point. By moving the cursor you can adjust the angled rule piece, until it has the desired shape. Mark a point to define the end and give it its final position. If drawing from an intersection point of two lines, there are two possibilities for the line to draw orthogonal to. Should the incorrect line be highlighted when you perform the selection, you can choose the other line by using ‘Select Next’ in the context menu (right mouse button).

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-1

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

1.1.1

Stripping Knives Options

You need to specify the ground or colour in which the outer cutter path of the design is drawn, usually ground 5, and the ground / colour into which the stripping knives should be drawn. Set the corresponding combo boxes. You need to specify the minimum length for the stripping knives i.e. how far they should extend. This can be determined by the sheet size where the knives will be sized to extend across the entire length of the sheet, leaving a given margin. Alternatively, you can opt to specify the minimum length of a stripping knife, setting the value field accordingly. Set the width of the stripping knife i.e. the width of the rule to accomodate the knife. Determine whether your want to leave a fixed distance from the front edge rule before placing the first knife or not. If so, check the Specify Min Dist from Front Cut Rule check box and set the value field as required. If not ensure this option is cleared. Next, you need to set the knife end type. Set the desired type by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Where L shaped or T shaped knife ends are chosen, the end dimension should also be set. This is the length of the L or T. If angled knives are required, set the Orthogonal Knives option.You must then determine the length of the angled part. This can be either variable length, where the length is determined by specifying an end point, or a fixed length can be specified by setting the corresponding field.

Release 9.5 Page 9-2

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripping Knives Menu KASEMAKE

1.2

Automatic Stripping Knives Command

Automatic Stripping Knives

Menu

Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Automatic

Toolbar button

Diemaking Tool Bar

This tool will place stripping knives throughout the drawing without any user intervention. Activate this command. The Stripping Knives options dialog will now be displayed. This is a two page tabbed dialog. The first page labelled Settings, is identical to the manual stripping knives options. Please refer to “Stripping Knives Options” on page 9-2 for further details. The second page of options labelled Auto Options, should be set up as follows:-

First define the Separation. In KASEMAKE, stripping knives are defined in a rectangular grid pattern and the separation value is the required distance between adjacent knives. The distance between horizontal and vertical knives can be defined independently. Set each value as required. Determine whether you wish to place knives near to junctions of elements, or at a given distance away from the junction. Decide whether you only want to place knives on horizontal and vertical cut line, or all cut lines. Decide whether you wish to place stripping knives along the grip edge. Please note that the grip edge is always at the foot of the screen. If you choose not to place stripping knives along the grip edge, you will need to set the offset from the sheet edge to begin placing the stripping knives.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-3

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Choose whether you require internal knives to be positioned. These will be used for cutouts and islands within the design. If you have chosen to include internal knives, you should set the minimum length for the internal stripping knife. Finally determine whether you wish to position the stripping knives about the centre line of the design or from the front edge rule. Set or clear this option as required. Having specified the settings to use, simply select OK. The system will now produce a grid pattern of knives which do not encroach onto the design as illustrated below.

1.3

Grip Edge Stripping Knives Command

Grip Edge Stripping Knives

Menu

Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Grip Edge

Toolbar button:

Not available

This command allows knife patterns to be placed along the grip edge of the die. A file can be used where a machine has its own predefined grip edge pattern. Alternatively, the knife patterns can be generated automatically as per the current settings. Activating this command produces the Stripping Knives options dialog. This is identical to that described for Manual Stripping Knives but also asks for the method to use to define the grip edge knife pattern.

Release 9.5 Page 9-4

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripping Knives Menu KASEMAKE • Choose Automatic to place the stripping knives automatically according to the remaining settings. • Choose Use file and specify a filename if you have a predefined knife pattern you wish to load. This will be inserted centred on the current design. If you choose automatic, you need to set the Auto Options, or second page of settings. First define the Separation, that is the distance between adjacent knives. The distance between horizontal and vertical knives can be defined independently. Set each value as required. Determine whether you wish to place knives near to junctions of elements, or at a given distance away from the junction. Decide whether you only want to place knives on horizontal and vertical cut line, or all cut lines. Finally determine whether you want the knives to be positioned about the centre line of the design or measured from the front edge rule. Grip Edge Data File The grip edge knife pattern file is an .AGD drawing saved with the origin at 0,0 (Absolute). The y-axis corresponds with the centre line of the drawing, so the first knife should be drawn as a vertical line along this axis Vertical lines are drawn either side of this axis to mark the grip edge knife pattern. The knives are inserted centred on the current design / layout.

1.4

Single Knife

Command

Single Knife

Menu

Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Single Knife

Toolbar button:

Diemaking Toolbar

Single knife gives complete control over positioning of knives and is particularly useful for accessing awkward areas. Activate the command. You will first be prompted Mark Start. Identify where you wish the knife to start using the most suitable drawing mode. Next you will be prompted Mark End. Move the cursor and a knife will begin to rubber band following the path of the cursor. Mark the end to determine its final length using the most appropriate drawing mode. The knife will now be drawn in the chosen ground. Knife Ground The ground used to place the knife in is determined through the options available with this command. Select the options in the usual way. Select the ground from the drop down list.

1.5

L-Shaped Knives Command

L-Shaped Knives

Menu

Diemaking->Stripping Knives->L-Shaped Knives

Toolbar button:

Diemaking Toolbar

L-shaped knives are used to enclose awkward areas which will cause problems when waste is stripped. The knives are represented by two lines at 90 degrees to each other, giving the L shape.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-5

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE To use this tool, you must identify two elements to use to position the start and end of the lshaped knife respectively. The knife will automatically snap on to the given elements. The orientation of the knife is determined by the options available to this command.

1.5.1

L-Shaped Knives Options

• Orthogonal Knives - this option when set, forces the lines produced to be always vertical or horizontal. If this option is cleared, the first line of the knife will be drawn at ninety degrees to the first element selected. • Single Knife - this option specifies the ground to place the L-shape knives into. • Knife Ground - this option specifies the ground to place the L-shape knives into.

2

Stripper Menu The Stripper tool suite provides facilities for producing the male and female stripping units and front edge stripping unit required to strip away any waste once the design has been die pressed. Struts can be added to the back board and raised section. Pins and stripping rule can be placed on the Inside Male Stripper. There are a variety of tools provided for stripping.

2.1

Perimeter

Command

Perimeter Stripper

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Perimeter

Toolbar button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command allows you to identify any male or female stripper to remove waste from the outside of the design after it is die pressed. Before you can identify the male and female strippers, you need to position stripping knives for dividing up the waste. In particular, you need to position stripping knives at the bottom left and bottom right of the design to determine the cut off point for the male stripper. An example with stripping knives in place is as shown:-

Release 9.5 Page 9-6

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

Activate the command. You will now be prompted to identify the start of the perimeter around which you wish to trace the male and female stripper. First set the options by clicking on the Options button in the Standard Toolbar. The Stripper Options dialog will now be displayed. Check and set the options for the male stripper, male raised section and female strippers as required, before proceeding with the perimeter command. Identify the start of the perimeter to begin tracing from by marking the bottom left cutting knife slightly to one side of the line to determine which side to place the male stripper. Identify the end of the perimeter to trace to by marking the bottom right cutting knife slightly to one side of the line to determine which side to place the male stripper. The male and or female strippers will now be generated and displayed as determined by the options.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-7

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE The result of applying the Stripper command to our 2 Up example is shown:-

2.1.1

Stripper Options The Perimeter Stripper Options dialog is a tabbed dialog containing three pages of settings to specify the appearance of the male, the male raised section and the female stripper paths. There is one tabbed page of options for each of these three categories as follows:-

Release 9.5 Page 9-8

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

2.1.1.1

Male

An example of the finalised male stripper with dimensions to illustrate the options required for the male board is shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-9

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

•Enabled - check box to determine whether the male stripper is to be generated or not. Set or clear as required. •Ground to place the board outline in. Select from the drop down list of available grounds. •Side extension - set the distance to position the side edges of the male stripper path, measured from the horizontal extents of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. •Back extension - set the distance to position the back edge of the male stripper path, measured from the vertical extent of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. •Grip edge offset from external cut - the distance to leave between the bottom extent of the design and the grip edge of the perimeter path •External cut ground - ground used for the outer cut path. Select from the drop down list of available grounds. •Handhold - Check this option if you wish a hand hold to be placed automatically. The hand hold will be placed centred along the top edge of the board outline, slightly below the top edge. Select the type of handhold to use from the drop down list. Clear this setting if a handhold is not required.

Release 9.5 Page 9-10

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE •Offset from back - This is the distance from the top edge of the board to place the handhold •Centreline Notch - Click on this option to set it if a centre line notch is required, otherwise clear it.

If you set the Centreline Notch setting, the remaining settings become available. Choose the type of notch from:•Standard - where you can specify the size of a cutout to make. Now define a value for both the width and the height of the required notch by typing directly or using the arrows. •Symbol - where you can use a predefined symbol to define the notch. Choose a suitable symbol from the drop down list of available symbol. Each symbol is previewed as you use the arrow key to move over its name, to help with selection of the right symbol.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-11

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.1.1.2

Male Raised Section

An example of the finalised male raised section with dimensions to illustrate the options required for the male raised section is shown.

Release 9.5 Page 9-12

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

• Ground - the ground to place the male raised section in. This is usually the same as the female path. • Offset distance from cut rule - the distance from the external cut path to offset the raised section path. • Single Router Path - Set this option if you wish to generate a single path where the male raised section and female stripper paths overlap.Clear this option if you require both paths. Note:

This option is shared between the male raised section settings page and the female settings page so can be set / cleared from either page.

• Offset from Front stripper - the distance from the front stripping knife to position the male raised section path (or first section if multiple sections are used). • Outer sections - this can be set using the dieboard sheet size or by specifying a width and height offset from the bounding rectangle of the external cut path. • Multiple sections - Check this option if you are using several stripping knives and wish the waste to be handled in multiple sections. The male raised section will be split wherever it meets an external stripping knife. Clear it if this is not required. The following offsets can be applied where there are multiple sections of waste:•Offset - set the distance from the stripping knife to position the raised section path. •Offset from Rear stripper - set the distance from the rear stripping knife to position the last section of the male raised section path • Use Supporting struts - set this option if the raised section needs struts. Otherwise clear it. • Strut Setup - If you have opted to use supporting struts you can now access the strut setup button enabling you to to define settings for the struts.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-13

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Supporting Struts All settings relating to struts are defined through the Supporting Struts dialog:-

• Wood Block path only - set this option if waste is forced out using wooden blocks, otherwise clear it. There are additional settings if you require support struts: • Place struts at junctions - Set this option to place struts near corners. • Space edge to edge - set this option to measure the spacing between struts as from the edge of one strut to the edge of another Clear this option to set the spacing from the centre of one strut to the centre of the next. • Offset - offset of strut path from external cut path. • Spacing - gap required between struts. • Length of strut guide to ignore - this value determines the minimum length of strut path required before a strut is placed. It is used to prevent overuse of struts where several junctions are close together.

Release 9.5 Page 9-14

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE • Circle - set this option for each strut to be represented as a circle. Also set the radius to use for the circle. • Ground - Specify the ground for the struts placed on the male raised section. Simply click on the arrow and move to the required ground, clicking on it to select it. • Symbol - set this option for each strut to be represented by a given symbol. Choose the symbol from the drop down list. It will be displayed adjacent to the list to confirm that it is correct. The symbol to use for struts placed on the back board can also be either a circle or a symbol and have its ground defined in the same way.

2.1.1.3

Female

An example of the finalised female stripper with dimensions to illustrate the options required for the female board is shown:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-15

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

• Enabled - check box to determine whether the female stripper is to be generated or not. Set or clear as required. • Ground - the ground to place the resulting strip path in. Select from the drop down list of available grounds. • Offset distance from cut rule - the offset from the external cut lines to position the female stripper. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. • Single Router Path - This option is shared between the male raised section settings page and the female settings page. Please refer to “Male Raised Section” on page 9-12.

Release 9.5 Page 9-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE • Offset from Front Knife - the offset from the front stripping knife to position the female stripper. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. • Fillet corners - the corners of the female path where it follows the outline of the design can be optionally filleted. If you choose this option you should also define the radius to use. • Side extension - this is the distance to extend the female stripper path sideways, measured from the horizontal extents of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. • Grip edge offset from external cut - this is the distance to extend the female stripper path towards the grip edge of the die, measured from the vertical extent of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value. • External cut ground - the ground that the outline of the design is drawn in. This is common to the Male page of options. • Centreline Notch - As for the male board a notch can be defined for the female board to help to align it with the male. Please refer to “Male” on page 9-9 for details of how to define these settings.

2.2

Inside Stripper

Command

Inside Stripper

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Inside

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command allows you to create any internal male and female stripper paths, e.g for internal cutouts. Conversely to the Perimeter command, the Inside command generates the male stripper on the inside of the cutout and the female stripper on the outside. Check or set the male raised section and female stripping options before identifying the cutout. Identify the cutout by marking a point inside it. The system will now trace the male and or female paths as per the options. Repeat for all the internal cutouts as required.

2.2.1

Inside Stripper Options The Inside Stripper Options are presented as a four page tabbed dialog. The first three pages relate to options for the male raised section. The final page of options relates to the female stripper.

2.2.1.1

Male Raised Section 1

Set or clear the raised wood sections option as appropriate. Where raised wood sections are to be used, the remaining settings become available. These settings are the same as the perimeter stripper male raised section. Refer to “Male Raised Section” on page 9-12 for further details.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-17

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.2.1.2

Male Raised Section 2

This page of options defines the constraints for pin positioning, where pins are to be used rather than struts.

• Pins - set this option if pins are to be used • Ground - the ground for the pin • Head Ground - the ground for the pin head • Offset - offset from the external cut path for positioning of pins • Pin To Pin Spacing - gap between pins, with a given tolerance. • Path To Path Spacing - spacing between pin contour paths, with a given tolerance. • Minimum Rule Length - the minimum length for a rule piece to be inserted • Rule Length Cutback - the length of rule pieces • Hatch Gap - grid spacing for calculating rule: the finer the spacing the more accurate the placement of rule, but the slower the calculation will be. • Pin to Pin Tolerance - for merging pins between pin paths. If two pins on different paths fall within this tolerance, they will be replaced with a single pin.

Release 9.5 Page 9-18

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

2.2.1.3

Male Raised Section Pin Settings

There are three possible kinds of pin. The highest priority pins will be placed in favour to those with lower priority. This makes it possible to use many high priority large pins and fewer smaller pins, thus maximising utilisation of resources. The options are repeated for each pin to be used as follows:•Available - Set this option if this level of pin is to be used. •Circle - set this option for each pin to be represented as a circle. Also set the radius to use for the circle. •Symbol- set this option for each pin to be represented by a given symbol. Choose the symbol from the drop down list. It will be displayed adjacent to the list to confirm that it is correct. The symbol to use for pins placed on the back board can also be either a circle or a symbol in the same way.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-19

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.2.1.4

Female Settings

The female settings are a subset of the perimeter stripper female settings. Refer to “Female” on page 9-15 for further details.

2.3

Front Edge Stripper Command

Front Edge Stripper

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Front Edge

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

The Front Edge command produces the stripper required to remove the wastage produced when the grip edge is die pressed. Activate this commmand and check the current options. Identify the start of the perimeter for the front edge, by selecting the bottom left stripping knife slightly to one side to identify which side the front edge is. Identify the end of the perimeter where the front edge stripper should be generated to. The front edge stripper will now be generated tracing the profile of the front edge of the design.

2.3.1

Front Edge Stripper Options The options available for the front edge stripper are divided into two sections:•Front Edge - settings for the actual stripper •Magic Eye - settings for magic eye cutouts These options are now explained.

Release 9.5 Page 9-20

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

2.3.1.1

Front Edge

• Ground - the ground to place the resulting strip path in. • Offset distance - the offset from the external cut lines to use to position the front edge stripper. • Side extension - this is the distance to extend the front edge stripper path sideways, measured from the horizontal extents of the design. • Depth - this is the distance to extend the front edge stripper path, measured from the most vertical point towards the grip edge of the design. • Mounting hole pattern - if selected, this allows a file to be brought in containing a template of the locating holes for the gripper. • Tolerance - holes will not be placed if they interfere with drawing elements within the tolerance radius. • Ground - the ground the holes willbe placed in

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-21

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.3.1.2

Magic Eyes Options

Magic Eye cutouts are used by the press to see if the sheet is still attached to the grip edge. Two different cutouts are possible, referred to as magic eye 1 and magic eye 2. The settings for each are identical as follows:Alignment or positioning of a cutout can be one of the following •Left - from the left edge of the gripper •Right from the right edge of the gripper •Left of Centre •Right of Centre The Offset is the distance from the alignment position to the edge of the magic eye cutout. Width and Height determine the size of the cutout.

2.4

Air Holes Command

Air Holes

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Air Holes

Toolbar button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This tool allows air holes to be placed on stripping units to allow air to flow freely and prevent vacuum. The air holes can be represented as circles, rectangles, or rounded rectangles which are set to a fixed size or drawn freehand. They can be placed in both the male back board and the male raised sections as required.

Release 9.5 Page 9-22

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE Activate the command. Check or set the options as required. Depending upon the current options you will be prompted to mark the centre of a circular air hole or the bottom left hand corner of a rectangular air hole. Where fixed size air holes are being used the air hole will now be drawn into the male board ground and or male raised ground as per the settings. Where fixed size air holes are not being used, you will be prompted for the extent of a circular air hole or the top right corner of a rectangular air hole. The air holes will then be drawn into the chosen ground(s).

2.4.1

Stripper Air Holes Options

The options for air holes should be set as follows:• Male board ground - Check this option if you wish to place air holes on the male board. Ensure the correct ground is set in the corresponding combo box. • Male raised ground - Check this option if you wish to place air holes on the male raised section. Ensure the correct ground is set in the corresponding combo box. • Circle - Set this option for circular air holes. Enable the fixed radius option and set the corresponding radius field if a predetermined radius is to be used. • Rectangle - Set this option for rectangular air holes. Set the fixed size option if a predetermined size is required, then set the corresponding width and height fields. Set the fillet corners option if rounded rectangles are required, then set the corresponding radius field. Set the group lines option if you wish the rectangular air hole to be treated as a single drawing element.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-23

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.5

Carrot Holes Command

Carrot Holes

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Carrot Holes

Toolbar button

Diemaking Toolbar

Carrots are fasteners placed in the Male and Females stripping boards to align the two boards when they are placed on a press. It is possible to specify carrot holes as circles or to define a symbol to use to represent them. Activate this command. Check or set the options as required. Depending upon the current options you will be prompted to mark the centre where circular holes are to be used or the origin for the chosen symbol, where a symbol is to be used. Where symbols or fixed size circular holes are being used the carrot holes will now be drawn into both the male and female ground as a grouped pair. Where circular holes of variable size are used, you will be prompted for the extent of the circular hole. The carrot holes will then be drawn into the male and female grounds as a grouped pair.

2.5.1

Stripper Carrot Holes Options

The options for carrot holes should be set as follows:• Male ground - Set the ground that the male stripper is drawn in. • Female ground - Set the ground that the female stripper is drawn in. • Circle - Set this option for circular carrot holes. Enable the fixed radius option and set the corresponding radius field if a predetermined radius is to be used. • Symbol - Set this option to use a symbol to represent carrot holes. Choose from the drop down list of available symbols. Each symbol is previewed adjacent to the list to help you to identify the correct one to use. Note:

Release 9.5 Page 9-24

Symbols are stored as .agd files in the PARTS sub directory.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Stripper Menu KASEMAKE

2.6

Repeat Copy Command

Repeat Copy

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Repeat Copy

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

A layout drawing consisting of clones will contain multiple copies of internal areas. This tool makes it possible to copy stripping areas within a layout and repeat them throughout the whole layout Before using this tool, identify an area that requires repeating, using the Select Tool. Having made a selection and activated the repeat copy tool, drag the selection box to surround the areas to be filled and the selected area will be repeated into the surrounded areas.

2.6.1

Repeat Copy Options

The symmetry of clones can be used to find additional areas which will produce mirrored or rotated copies of the original selection inside them. There are two ways to specify how the area will be repeated • Partially inside - if the dragged rectangle partially contains a repeated area then the selection will be repeated. • Completely inside - the selection will be repeated only if the repeated area is totally within the dragged rectangle’s area. The options also enable the creation of clones of the selection instead of copies. This makes it possible to use clone edit to alter all the internal areas simultaneously, should further changes be required.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-25

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

2.7

Auto Repeat Copy Command

Auto Repeat Copy

Menu

Diemaking->Stripper->Auto Repeat Copy

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This tool will find all the internal areas which are repeated and add any stripping information automatically. Activate the tool. The Repeat Copy Options dialog is now displayed for you to define the settings to use. These options are the same as the Repeat Copy tool. See “Repeat Copy Options” on page 9-25 for further details. Once the options are set click on OK to automatically generate the stripping areas.

3

Pins And Struts Menu Supporting struts can be added to the perimeter stripping information on both the back board and the raised section of the male stripper. Pins or struts can be added to the inside stripping information for the male raised section. The following commands are available to manipulate struts and pins placed using the stripper tools.

3.1

Move Strut Command

Move Strut

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Move Struts

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This tool lets you position struts created by the perimeter or inside stripper tools. Simply select a strut, then move the cursor to the new position. If the Ctrl key is held down whilst moving a strut, the strut is constrained to its original path and can only be moved along it.

3.2

Add Strut

Command

Add Strut

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Add Strut

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This tool allows you to add additional struts after an area has had its stripping parts added. Set the options to determine how the strut is displayed. You will now be prompted to place the strut within the current design. Identify an appropriate point and the strut will be drawn in both the back board and the raised section grounds.

3.2.1

Options Define the symbol to be used for the strut. Choose from :•Circle - Choose this to represent the strut as a circle. You need to specify the radius to use

Release 9.5 Page 9-26

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Pins And Struts Menu KASEMAKE •Symbol - Choose this to represent the strut as a symbol. You need to select the symbol to use from the available drop down list. Each symbol is previewed to help you to identify it. These options are repeated for the back board.

3.3

Change Strut Command

Change Strut

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Change Strut

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This allows the properties of an individual strut to be changed. Activate the command. You will now be prompted to select a strut. Click near to the required strut. The nearest strut will now be drawn in the selection colour. Once the strut has been identifed, the Properties dialog will pop up, allowing the settings for the given strut to be changed. For an explanation of the properties please see Options in the previous section.

3.4

Remove Strut

Command

Remove Strut

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Remove S

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

If the stripping commands have produced too many struts, they can be removed manually with this tool. Simply click near to the strut you wish to remove. The identified strut will now be removed without further interaction.

3.5

Move Pin

Command

Move Pin

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Move Pin

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command is used for moving pins created by the inside stripper. Simply select a pin, then move the cursor to the new position. Holding Ctrl down whilst moving a pin will constrain the pin to the internal area originally stripped.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-27

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

3.6

Add Pin

Command

Add Pin

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Add Pin

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command is used to place additional pins to those created with the Inside Stripper Command. Activate the command. Set the options to determine how the pin is displayed. You will now be prompted to place the pin within the current design. Identify an appropriate point and the pin will be drawn in both the male and female grounds.

3.6.1

Options Define the symbol to be used for the pin. Choose from :•Circle - Choose this to represent the pin as a circle. You need to specify the radius to use •Symbol - Choose this to represent the pin as a circle. You need to select the symbol to use from the available drop down list. Each symbol is previewed to help you to identify it. These options are repeated for the back board.

3.7

Change Pin

Command

Change Pin

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Change Pin

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command allows the user to adjust the properties of an individual pin. Activate the command. You will now be prompted to identify the pin to change, Click near to the required pin. The chosen pin will now be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. The properties dialog will then be displayed, allowing you to define an alternative symbol and or size for the pin. For an explanation of the properties please see ”Options” in the previous section.

3.8

Remove Pin

Command

Remove Pin

Menu

Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Remove Pin

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

The manual removal of unneeded pins from the drawing is achieved using this command. Activate this command. Click near to the pin to identify it. The pin will now be removed from the design without further interaction.

Release 9.5 Page 9-28

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Die Board KASEMAKE

4

Die Board

Command

Die Board

Menu

Diemaking->Die Board

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

(Alt i D)

In the case of all die cut designs created on KASEMAKE the finished design must ultimately be placed on a die board. It may be plotted onto wood, sawn by a die saw or burned by a laser. The Die Board command allows you to specify the size of the board and position the job within it or to specify the size of the board and its position relative to the design. Before activating this command you should display your completed design. Activate the Die Board command. The following dialog box is displayed:-

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-29

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

Release 9.5 Page 9-30

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Die Board KASEMAKE

4.1

Profile An individual selection of die board settings can be saved to a profile allowing them to be tailored to specific customers or machines as required.

4.1.1

Use Profile If you wish to use a previously saved selection of settings, first click on Use Profile to set it. The remaining profile settings will now become available. If you wish to use the default options, clear the Use Profile setting and complete the two pages of settings as detailed in the next sections. See “Outline” on page 31 and “Options” on page 33.

4.1.2

Profile The name of the profile currently selected is displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of available profiles. Scroll to the required profile and click on it to select it. Any changes made to data will automatically be saved with the previous profile. The newly selected profile will then be loaded. The new settings will be displayed in the Die Board dialog.

4.1.3

Add New... The Add New... command allows you to define a new profile. Activate this command to display the Add New Die Board Profile dialog. Type the name of the new profile then click on OK to close the dialog. Any changes you now make to the die board settings will be saved to the newly named profile.

4.1.4

Allow Edit Click on Allow Edit to allow changes to be made to an existing profile. Click on it again when you finish making changes to disable editting.

4.1.5

Delete Profile The Delete Profile command allows you to delete a profile which is no longer needed. Activate this command to delete the current profile. You will first be prompted for confirmation. Upon choosing Yes the profile will be deleted. Choose No to leave the profile unchanged.

4.2

Outline The first page of die board settings is entitled Outline. First decide whether you wish to specify the size of the board and position the job within it or to specify the size of the board and its position relative to the design. Die Board Relative to Current Job If you wish to define the die board relative to the job on screen, clear the Fixed Size and Fixed Height check boxes. The fields provided for laser beam width and also to input the distance from the left, right, back and grip (front) edge of the design to the edge of the die board will now be displayed as shown above. Set the laser beam width using the arrow keys to scroll or type it directly. The distances will be measured taking into account the external cut rule and any stripping knives and the given laser beam width. The grip edge is always assumed to be at the bottom of the screen. Set the offsets using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-31

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Fixed Size Die Board If you wish to work with a fixed die board size and fit the job within it, set the Fixed Size check box. Both the width and height fields will now be displayed . Set the dimensions for the die board using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly. Finally, decide whether you wish to centre the design within the specified die board, or offset it from the grip edge. Set or clear the Offset from Grip Edge check box accordingly. If you have chosen to offset the design, the Grip Edge field will be displayed. Enter the required offset as before. Fixed Height Die Board If you wish to work with a fixed height die board and fit the job within it, set the Fixed Height check box. The height field will now be displayed. Set the height of the die board using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly. Also set the left and right trim fields in the same way. Finally, decide whether you wish to centre the design within the specified die board, or offset it from the grip edge. Set or clear the Offset from Grip Edge check box accordingly. If you have chosen to offset the design, the Grip Edge field will be displayed. Enter the required offset as before Filleted Corners Set the fillet corners check box if you require the four corners of the die board to be rounded. Set the radius to use for the fillets using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly. Clear the fillet corners check box if rounded corners are not required. Tie Bridges Next determine whether the die board requires tie bridges or not. Tie bridges temporarily retain the die board within the wood from which it is cut. Set or clear the tie bridges check box as appropriate. If you have chosen to produce tie bridges, you will need to set the characteristics to use for them. There are two methods for defining tie bridges • Specify the number of tie bridges. The number of tie bridges required horizontally and vertically can be set independently. • Specify the spacing between each bridge If you wish to specify the number of tie bridges, set the Fixed Number check box. The horizontal and vertical fields will now be displayed. Enter the number of tie bridges required both horizontally and vertically using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly. If you wish to specify the tie bridges required by defining the spacing between each bridge, clear the Fixed Number check box. Enter the spacing to use between bridges using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new value directly. In both cases, define each tie bridge by setting the depth and width required. Again, use the arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value to highlight it and enter the required value directly. Centreline Notch Determine whether you wish to position a centre line notch on the die board and click on this option to set it if a notch is required, otherwise clear it. If you set the Centreline Notch setting, the remaining settings become available. Now choose the type of notch from:-

Release 9.5 Page 9-32

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Die Board KASEMAKE •Standard - where you can specify the size of cutout to make. Now define a value for both the width and the height of the required notch by typing directly or using the arrows. •Symbol - where you can use a predefined symbol to define the notch. Choose a suitable symbol from the drop down list of available symbols. Each symbol is previewed as you use the arrow key to move over its name, to help with selection of the right symbol. Grounds Specify the colour / ground in which the die board will be stored and displayed. Finally, set the External cut ground, that is the ground that the design outline is drawn in.

4.3

Options A second page of settings headed Options is also available. This provides further settings as explained next.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-33

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

4.3.1

Mounting and Grip Edge Decide whether you wish to use a mounting and grip edge pattern. The patterns are stored as .AGD drawing files that contain the positions of all mounting holes for a specific die press, e.g. Bobst. The drawing file can also contain grip edge patterns such as the locating notches for Bobst presses. The drawing file must be saved with the drawing origin in the front centre. The front edge patterns must be stored in a ground number higher than the rest of the board. Use the tolerance to prevent mounting holes from overlapping external cut elements. If you only want to consider a specific ground when placing the mounting and grip edge pattern you should first check the Check only ground option, then select the ground to use from the drop down list.

4.3.2

Dowel Holes Dowel holes can be optionally added to the wood to allow registration of the die board when a router is used. They are represented by markers and placed at predefined positions within the die board. Profiles can also be stored to be reused, detailing dowel hole positions and characteristics. They are defined through the Dowel Positions dialog accessed through the Configure button. First set the Add Dowel Holes check box to enable the Configure button. Now, click on Configure. The Dowel Positions dialog now appears. This shows a thumbnail sketch of the current design. Dowel holes can be placed at any of nine pre-defined positions. These positions are shown with respect to the thumbnail sketch. Margins can also be determined.

Release 9.5 Page 9-34

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Die Board KASEMAKE Currently loaded profile The name of the profile currently being used is displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of available profiles. Scroll to the required profile and click on it to select it. Any changes made to date will be saved with the previous profile. The newly selected profile will then be loaded. The dowel hole positions and the margins displayed in the dialog will be updated to reflect any newly loaded characteristics. Add New... The Add New... command allows you to define a new profile. Activate this command to display the Add New Registration Profile dialog. Type the name of the new profile then click on OK to close the dialog. Any changes you now make to the dowel hole settings will be saved as the newly named profile. Allow Edit Click on Allow Edit to allow changes to be made to an existing profile or to allow access to the Delete Profile command. Click on it again when you finish making changes to disable editting. Delete Profile The Delete Profile command allows you to delete a profile which is no longer needed. Activate this command to delete the profile displayed as the current profile. You will first be prompted for confirmation. Upon choosing Yes the profile will be deleted. Choose No to leave the profile unchanged. Dowel Hole Representations Click on a dowel position button to change its settings, including whether you require a dowel hole at the corresponding position or not. The following dialog will be displayed:-

Set the type of dowel hole representation required at this position. Choose from :Disabled Choose this option if you do not require a dowel hole at this position. This is represented by a cross in the Dowel Positions dialog. Diameter Choose this option to display the dowel hole as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-35

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE You will need to set the diameter to use to define the dowel hole by clicking on the value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value. Finally you need to determine the ground to place the dowel holes in by selecting from the drop down list. A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Dowel Positions dialog to show that this type of dowel hole is selected for this position. Symbol Choose this option to display the dowel hole as a predefined symbol. Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayed to help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in the Dowel Positions dialog. Click on OK to return to the Dowel Positions dialog. Any amendments to the chosen button will be shown. Margins Next specify any margins to be left between the edge of the design and the centre of the dowel hole. Set the left, right, top and bottom margins required by clicking on the value and typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

4.3.3

Handholds Decide whether you wish to include a handhold on the die board. Choose the type of handhold fromthe drop down list. The handhold name is retrieved from the database. The handhold will be centred along the top edge of the die board positioned below the top edge by the Offset from back setting, so set this appropriately.

4.3.4

Balance Knives If the dieboard size is fixed, it may be necessary to add balance knives to distribute wear and tear equally throughout the cut knives. They will be placed starting from a given distance, back margin, from the back of the dieboard. You can also define how close to the external cut path the balance knives can be placed, using the fixed offset from rear rule setting. Choosing auto calculate will work out the optimum number of balance knives, or you can specify how many by giving a fixed number or the spacing between them. The length of each knife can also be specified.

When all these settings are correct select OK. The die board will be drawn around the design and the design, including die board will be zoomed to fill the screen. Please note that the Die Board command is not ground specific. It will recognise any ground used and will position the die board around text, dimensions etc.

Release 9.5 Page 9-36

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

CITO Clip Stripper KASEMAKE If you have selected a fixed die board size the most likely problem you will encounter is the size of board specified is too small to contain the job. If this happens the following message is displayed.

Here the message tells you that the board is too small and also tells you the minimum size board onto which the job will fit, taking into consideration the Grip Edge defined. Your options are to increase the size of the board or if the board size requested is the largest board size your machine can handle you will need to change the design or layout in order for the job fit. Selecting OK takes you out of the Die Board command and applies the command to the drawing.

5

CITO Clip Stripper Command

CITO Clip Stripper

Menu

Diemaking->CITO Clip Stripper

Toolbar Button:

Not available

This command allows you to position strip clips or strip clips and strip forks to help with removing waste. Strip clips are placed in the female stripping board and strip forks are placed in the male board. Set the options to determine the type of clip you wish to use. You will now be prompted for a point to position the clip. The symbol representing the clip will now appear and you will be prompted for confirmation. As you move the cursor, the symbol will flip over changing its orientation. Move the cursor until the symbol is orientated correctly then click again to identify its final position.

5.1

Options Choose whether you require a clip only or a clip and fork pair and whether a single prong or three prong fork is required. The symbols currently used to represent the clips and prongs are simply .agd files. They are located in the PARTS subdirectory below your main working directory. The filenames are currently hard coded as CLIPSTRIP0.AGD, CLIPSTRIP1.AGD, CLIPSTRIP2.AGD and CLIPSTRIP3.AGD.

6

Support Bars

Command

Support Bars

Menu

Diemaking->Support Bars

Toolbar button

Not available

The Support Bars command allows you to place a pattern of holes to be used to locate a support bar for the female section of the die.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-37

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE You should first design the pattern to use. Patterns are stored as .AGD drawing files and contain the positions of all locating holes for a specific die press e.g. Bobst. The holes should be positioned taking into account the maximum size die which can be handled by the chosen die press. The file should be saved with the origin at (0,0) which must be the centre of the first locating hole. Activate the Support Bars command. Check or set the options. You are now prompted for the origin point to locate the holes for the support bar. Simply identify the position using one of the available drawing modes. The locating hole pattern you specified will now appear with the first hole located at the given origin point.

6.1

Options

Drawing filename: The name of the file containing the pattern of locating holes. Click on the ... button to display an Open dialog to help you to identify the correct path and filename for your file. Alternatively type the file location and name directly. External Cut Ground Set the ground which is used for external cuts within your design. Click on the arrow to scroll through the list of grounds. Holes Set the ground you wish the holes to be drawn in from the ground combo box. Offset from Bottom Cut This is the minimum distance to leave above the lowest external cut before placing the first hole. Margin from Top Cut This is the minimum distance to leave between the last hole and the highest external cut.

Release 9.5 Page 9-38

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Nicks KASEMAKE Cut Overlap Tolerance This value controls how close to an external cut a hole or column of holes is placed to avoid overlap.

7

Nicks

Command

Nicks

Menu

Diemaking->Nicks

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Toolbar

This command is used to mark nicks in external cut elements, to prevent the drawing and waste separating from each other after the die is pressed. To use the tool simply click on a line where a nick is required. A snap cursor is drawn to help you to position it correctly; the cursor point being automatically adjusted to lie on the line. Once a snap point is identified, the nick(s) is / are drawn as per the current options, without further interaction. Note:

7.1

When placing a double nick, the two nicks are positioned centred about the given snap point.

Nicks Options

• Ground - Specify the ground to place the nick(s) in to. • Nick Length - Set the length of the nick. • Decide whether a Single or Double nick is required. • Separation - set the distance between the nicks where a double nick is required.

8

Bridging Menu KASEMAKE will place on a design all relevant bridges for Flat and Rotary Dies. This can be done automatically or with user intervention. Accessing Bridging produces a drop down menu of commands available to produce any necessary bridging for the current design.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-39

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE

8.1

Roll-up

Command

Roll-up…

Menu

Diemaking->Bridging->Roll-up

Toolbar Button:

Diemaking Tool Bar

(Alt i g o)

The Bridging Rollup to define bridges, can be selected by typing the shortcut given above, or by selecting from the Diemaking->Bridging drop down menu. Starting with a design on screen select the Roll-up… command. The bridging roll up dialog now appears. This comprises four tabbed pages each containing a set of options. The first, Flat, contains the settings which define bridges for flat dies. The second, Rotary, contains the definitions of bridges for rotary dies. The third category, Settings, contains the basic bridge definitions. The final category, Adjustments, provides a set of commands that can be used to make manual adjustments to a die.

8.1.1

Settings From the indexing system at the head of the Bridging roll up select the tab marked Settings. The following page of information is displayed. Within this section we set the widths of bridges and drills and how they are displayed on the design.

Release 9.5 Page 9-40

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Bridging Menu KASEMAKE You should set the fields to your individual requirements. This will provide the system with the basic bridge characteristics that it requires. Minimum Length to Bridge Certain lines on a design are too short to carry a bridge. This field specifies the length of line at which the system will begin to place bridges. Any line of less length will be ignored. Drill Diameter When a die is being automatically prepared for a die saw, drill holes must be provided as entry points for the saw. In order to accommodate drill holes, the bridge widths must be adjusted. If a size greater than zero is specified for the drill diameter, drill holes will be displayed and all bridges will be adjusted automatically. Drill holes are displayed as circles with diagonal crosses at their centres If you do not require drill holes because the design is being sent to a laser cutter then set the drill diameter to zero. If the design is pen plotted the drill holes are drawn as on screen. If the design is sent to a die saw then the drill holes are physically drilled out. Standard Width You can set a standard bridge width to be used for all bridges in the design. Set the Standard Width option by clicking on the corresponding radio button, the standard width field will now become accessible. Type the standard default value you want to set for bridge width, 4mm, 5mm or some other value, or use the arrows to scroll to the required value. Variable Width Variable width bridges, where the width of bridge used depends upon the length of the element being bridged, can also be specified. Click on the Variable Width radio button to choose this method of defining bridge widths. The length and bridge width value fields now become accessible. Enter the length of line up to which the bridge width should be applied in the up to field and the width to use in the use field. E.g. short lines, up to 100mm might require only a 4mm bridge. Lines up to 500mm might require a 5mm bridge and all lines above this in length a 6mm bridge. Enter these values. The system will place the appropriate width of bridge on all bridged elements according to their length. Rotary Tooth Pitch This is the pitch between teeth on the rotary rule. Set the value by typing directly or scroll to the required value. Show as Gaps When a line is bridged its presence is indicated on screen in one of two ways. Normally it is represented by a short line of the same length as the value given for the width of the bridge and overlays the line with which it is associated. An alternative is to illustrate the bridge simply as a gap in the line. If this option is set, by clicking in the Show as Gaps check box, all bridges will appear as gaps in the line. Bridge Arcs As a default KASEMAKE will ignore arcs and bridge only lines in the design. By setting this field the system will also place bridges on arcs. Activate Bridges This option makes any bridges active. Once active, bridges can be referenced e.g. you can lock to the end of an active bridge. If bridges are not activated, all commands ignore them.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-41

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Hide Bridges Setting this option will cause all bridges to be removed from the design, all lines etc. being returned to their original appearance. Clearing it will cause the bridges to once again be displayed. Split prior to Auto Bridge This option allows you to split continuous lines at intersections with other lines to ensure bridges are positioned correctly. Set or clear it appropriately. Show Ticks Show ticks displays short lines at each end of a bridge (ina a similar way to drill holes). The ticks can then be used to help a manual diemaker to drill pilot holes for sawing later. The length of the tick is also defined here. Apply Spanish bridges to creases Check this option if you wish to place bridges at the start and end of a creased element. This will help to strengthen any areas where the are close together cut and crease line e.g. at a slot. The bridge will typically be half the length of a standard bridge. Set the length of bridge to use at the ends by typing the value directly or scrolling with the arrows. Close Selecting Close takes you out of bridging.

Release 9.5 Page 9-42

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Bridging Menu KASEMAKE

8.1.2

Flat Bridging Click on the Flat tab of the bridging rollup to activate the flat bridge parameters. Before you can use this command you must first have a design on screen. Bridging can be carried out automatically, where the entire design is bridged automatically as per the bridge parameters. Alternatively, the design can be bridged manually where the number of bridges is specified by the user rather than calculated from the bridge settings.

An explanation of the flat bridge parameters now follows:8.1.2.1 Automatic To bridge a design automatically, choose the Automatic option. The rules provided in the Bridge Interval section can now be defined. The width of the bridge is determined in the settings section of the Bridging roll up, as previously discussed. Now we will set the intervals at which bridges should be placed on lines and arcs.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-43

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Ratio The most common way to position bridges on a line is to fix a relationship between the distance in from the beginning of the line at which point the first bridge will appear to the distance between subsequent bridges. The most common relationship is that the distance between bridges shall be twice the distance at the beginning and end of the line to the first and from the last bridge. Normally this is in the ratio of 1:2:1, run in equals one unit, interval equals two units and run out equals one unit. All you need type in is the central digit, the 2 or an alternative value. Run In In this field you set the minimum distance from the beginning of the line that must occur before the first bridge appears. This also sets the run out at the end of the line. This can be any realistic value you require. Separation In this field you set the minimum distance that will exist between bridges. Alongside each of the above three fields is a radio button. When selected this gives priority to the chosen feature when bridging is being carried out automatically. If the Ratio button is selected the system bridges a line having regard to each of the minimum values that follow but the bridge interval may never equal the minimum value and the run in may never equal its minimum. The system calculates the values in the defined ratio. If the Separation button is selected the system will fix the width of the bridge to the value set and the run in value will be the only flexible value. Its length will vary to centre the bridges on the line. However this value will never be less than the minimum run in value set. If it became necessary to create a run in of lower value than the minimum value set, the system will automatically remove a bridge from the line and readjust. The third way to bridge automatically is to fix the Run In value to the minimum value shown. To choose this method, select the Run In button. The system will bridge with the run in always at the value shown. The bridge interval will be flexible but never less than the minimum value set. 8.1.2.2 Manual Bridging We have just discussed the features of automatic bridging. The main difference in manual bridging is that you, not the system, decide how many bridges are placed on a line. When they are placed on the line they ignore the bridging intervals used by auto bridging and place the number you require at the specified interval on the line. By choosing Manual at the top of the roll up the automatic options are greyed out and the manual options highlighted as in the following diagram. The manual settings are divided into three choices, each discussed individually below.

Release 9.5 Page 9-44

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Bridging Menu KASEMAKE .

Number By typing a number into this field and pressing the ApplyNow button at the foot of the roll up the whole design will be bridged and each item will have the number of bridges on it equal to the number set in this field. So, set the number to 3 and select apply now and the bridging solution will be 3 bridges per item, irrespective of the length of the item Add Pressing the radio button alongside the Add field greys out the other 2 manual options and gives you access to the Add field. If a design has been bridged manually with 2 bridges per item and you want to add a third set this field to 1 and select apply now. The system rebridges the design and each item now has 3 bridges. You can add 1 bridge or 20 bridges, as many as you want. Remove This function is exactly the opposite of add. If the items have six bridges and you want only 4 then set this field to 2 and select apply now.

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010

Release 9.5 Page 9-45

9 - Diemaking Commands KASEMAKE Items to Bridge Common to both Automatic and Manual bridging is the facility to select the items to be bridged. This is very useful when the bridging characteristics of different rules on the design may differ. Larger bridges may be required for creasing rule than for cutting rule etc. All on View Select this radio button and bridges will be placed on all items on display. This does not mean only items that are currently on view because you have zoomed in on an area of the drawing. It does mean all items that are turned on via the Ground Definition Table. Ground Select this radio button and only items drawn in the particular ground shown in the adjacent Ground selection field will be bridged. To select an alternative ground place the cursor on the down arrow and press the left mouse button. A list of grounds will appear through which you can scroll before making your selection. The name and number of the selected ground will then appear in this field. Selected Press the Selected radio button and only items identified by standard Windows selection techniques will be bridged. Having set all parameters bridges are produced by pressing the ApplyNow button. To abort bridging select Close.

8.1.3

Rotary Bridges Clicking on the rotary tab of the bridging roll up gives you access to the Rotary bridge parameters. The rotary settings are as shown:-

Release 9.5 Page 9-46

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide © AG/CAD Limited 2010